Rules for Classification and Construction

I Ship Technology

1 Seagoing Ships

8 Fishing Vessels
Edition 2007
The following Rules come into force on October 1
st
, 2007

Germanischer Lloyd Aktiengesellschaft
Head Office
Vorsetzen 35, 20459 Hamburg
Phone: +49 40 36149-0
Fax: +49 40 36149-200
headoffice@gl-group.com
www.gl-group.com
"General Terms and Conditions" of the respective latest edition will be applicable
(see Rules for Classification and Construction, I - Ship Technology, Part 0 - Classification and Surveys).
Reproduction by printing or photostatic means is only permissible with the consent of
Germanischer Lloyd Aktiengesellschaft.
Published by: Germanischer Lloyd Aktiengesellschaft, Hamburg
Printed by: Gebrder Braasch GmbH, Hamburg

Table of Contents
Section 1 General
A. Application ................................................................................................................................. 1- 1
B. Class Notations ........................................................................................................................... 1- 1
C. Ambient Conditions ................................................................................................................... 1- 2
D. Definitions .................................................................................................................................. 1- 2
E. Documents for Approval ............................................................................................................ 1- 4
Section 2 Closure Conditions, Buoyancy and Stability
A. General ....................................................................................................................................... 2- 1
B. Openings and Closures in Hull, Deck and Superstructures ........................................................ 2- 2
C. Draught Marking ........................................................................................................................ 2- 7
D. Intact Buoyancy .......................................................................................................................... 2- 7
E. Intact Stability ............................................................................................................................ 2- 7
F. Subdivision and Damage Stability ............................................................................................. 2- 13
G. Inclining Test ............................................................................................................................. 2- 15
H. Stability Information .................................................................................................................. 2- 15
Section 3 Special Requirements for Hull Structures
A. General ....................................................................................................................................... 3- 1
B. Special Measures for the Hull Structure ..................................................................................... 3- 1
C. Fish Holds .................................................................................................................................. 3- 6
D. Fish Tanks .................................................................................................................................. 3- 8
E. Fish Processing Holds ................................................................................................................ 3- 8
F. Membrane Type Tanks for Brines .............................................................................................. 3- 8
G. Side Doors .................................................................................................................................. 3- 9
Section 4 Hull Outfit
A. Sheathings and Ceilings ............................................................................................................. 4- 1
B. Air Pipes, Overflow Pipes, Sounding Pipes ............................................................................... 4- 1
C. Ventilators .................................................................................................................................. 4- 2
D. Waste and Water Discharge in Fish Holds ................................................................................. 4- 2
E. Protective Measures ................................................................................................................... 4- 3
F. Signal and Radar Masts .............................................................................................................. 4- 4
G. Life-Saving Appliances .............................................................................................................. 4- 5
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Table of Contents Chapter 8
Page 3

Section 5 Anchoring and Mooring Equipment
A. General ........................................................................................................................................ 5- 1
B. Equipment Numeral .................................................................................................................... 5- 1
C. Anchors ....................................................................................................................................... 5- 2
D. Chain Cables ............................................................................................................................... 5- 3
E. Ropes instead of Chain Cables .................................................................................................... 5- 4
F. Chain Locker .............................................................................................................................. 5- 5
G. Windlasses .................................................................................................................................. 5- 5
H. Mooring Equipment .................................................................................................................... 5- 6
Section 6 Fishing Gear and Lifting Appliances
A. General ........................................................................................................................................ 6- 1
B. Plan Approval ............................................................................................................................. 6- 2
C. Dimensioning .............................................................................................................................. 6- 3
D. Construction ................................................................................................................................ 6- 4
E. Accident Prevention .................................................................................................................... 6- 6
F. Tests, Examinations, Certification and Class Notation ............................................................... 6- 6
Section 7 Structural Fire Protection
A. General ........................................................................................................................................ 7- 1
B. Requirements for Fire Protection for Fishing Vessels with 12 m L < 45 m ............................. 7- 1
C. Requirements for Fire Protection for Fishing Vessels with L 45 m ......................................... 7- 2
Section 8 Fire Protection and Fire Fighting
A. General ........................................................................................................................................ 8- 1
B. Fire Protection in Machinery Spaces .......................................................................................... 8- 2
C. Fire Detection ............................................................................................................................. 8- 3
D. Water Fire Extinguishing System (Fire and Deckwash System) ................................................. 8- 3
E. Portable Fire Extinguishers in Accommodations and Service Spaces ........................................ 8- 4
F. Fire Extinguishing Arrangements in Machinery Spaces ............................................................. 8- 5
G. Fire Extinguishers ....................................................................................................................... 8- 5
H. Fire Extinguishing Arrangements in Spaces other than Machinery Spaces ................................ 8- 6
Section 9a General Rules for Machinery Installations
A. General ........................................................................................................................................ 9a- 1
B. Documents for Approval ............................................................................................................. 9a- 1
C. Ambient Conditions .................................................................................................................... 9a- 1
D. Design and Construction of the Machinery Installations ............................................................ 9a- 1
E. Engine and Boiler Room Equipment .......................................................................................... 9a- 3
F. Safety Equipment and Protective Measures ................................................................................ 9a- 4
G. Communication and Signalling Equipment ................................................................................. 9a- 5
H. Essential Equipment .................................................................................................................... 9a- 5
Chapter 8
Page 4
Table of Contents I - Part 1
GL 2007

Section 9b Internal Combustion Engines and Air Compressors
A. General ....................................................................................................................................... 9b- 1
B. Documents for Approval ............................................................................................................ 9b- 2
C. Crankshaft Calculation ............................................................................................................... 9b- 4
D. Materials .................................................................................................................................... 9b- 4
E. Tests and Trials .......................................................................................................................... 9b- 6
F. Safety Devices ............................................................................................................................ 9b- 11
G. Auxiliary Systems ...................................................................................................................... 9b- 14
H. Starting Equipment ..................................................................................................................... 9b- 16
I. Control Equipment ..................................................................................................................... 9b- 18
J. Alarms ........................................................................................................................................ 9b- 19
K. Engine Alignment/Seating .......................................................................................................... 9b- 19
L. Approximate Calculation of the Starting Air Supply ................................................................. 9b- 19
M. Air Compressors ......................................................................................................................... 9b- 19
Section 9c Propulsion System
A. Main Shafting ............................................................................................................................. 9c- 1
B. Gears, Couplings ........................................................................................................................ 9c- 6
C. Propellers and Special Propulsion Devices ................................................................................ 9c- 9
D. Steering Gear .............................................................................................................................. 9c- 15
E. Machinery for Fishing Vessels with Ice Classes ........................................................................ 9c- 18
F. Torsional Vibrations .................................................................................................................. 9c- 18
Section 9d Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps
A. General ....................................................................................................................................... 9d- 1
B. Materials and Testing ................................................................................................................. 9d- 1
C. Wall Thickness of Pipe Lines ..................................................................................................... 9d- 6
D. Principles for the Construction of Pipes, Valves, Fittings and Pumps ....................................... 9d- 8
E. Oil Fuel Systems ........................................................................................................................ 9d- 13
F. Lubricating Oil System ............................................................................................................... 9d- 15
G. Seawater Cooling Systems ......................................................................................................... 9d- 17
H. Fresh Water Cooling Systems .................................................................................................... 9d- 18
I. Compressed Air Lines ................................................................................................................ 9d- 19
J. Exhaust Gas Lines ...................................................................................................................... 9d- 20
K. Bilge Systems ............................................................................................................................. 9d- 20
L. Equipment for the Treatment and Storage of Bilge Water, Fuel/Oil Residues .......................... 9d- 22
M. Air, Overflow and Sounding Pipes ............................................................................................. 9d- 23
N. Drinking Water System 5 ........................................................................................................... 9d- 25
O. Sewage Systems ......................................................................................................................... 9d- 26
P. Hose Assemblies and Compensators .......................................................................................... 9d- 27
Q. Storage of Liquid Fuels, Lubricating and Hydraulic Oils as well as Oil Residues ..................... 9d- 27
Section 9e Boilers and Pressure Vessels
A. Steam Boilers and Thermal Oil Heaters ..................................................................................... 9e- 1
B. Pressure Vessels ......................................................................................................................... 9e- 2
C. Oil Firing Equipment ................................................................................................................. 9e- 2
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Table of Contents Chapter 8
Page 5

Section 10 Refrigeration Installations
A. General ........................................................................................................................................ 10- 1
B. Installation, Design and Rating ................................................................................................... 10- 2
C. Refrigerants ................................................................................................................................. 10- 4
D. Refrigerating Machinery Spaces ................................................................................................. 10- 5
E. Refrigerant Compressors ............................................................................................................ 10- 6
F. Pressure Vessels and Apparatus .................................................................................................. 10- 7
G. Pipes, Valves and Fittings ........................................................................................................... 10- 8
H. Fans and Pumps .......................................................................................................................... 10- 9
I. Cooling Water Supply ................................................................................................................ 10- 9
J. Safety and Monitoring Equipment .............................................................................................. 10- 9
K. Pressure and Tightness Tests ...................................................................................................... 10- 10
L. Insulation of Pressure Vessels, Apparatus, Pipes, Valves and Fittings ....................................... 10- 10
M. Equipment and Insulation of Refrigerated Spaces ...................................................................... 10- 11
N. Temperature Monitoring Equipment for Refrigerated Spaces .................................................... 10- 12
O. Quick Freezing Installations ....................................................................................................... 10- 13
P. Spare Parts and Protective Equipment ........................................................................................ 10- 13
Q. Shipboard Testing ....................................................................................................................... 10- 13
Section 11a General Requirements and Instructions for Electrical Installations
A. General ........................................................................................................................................ 11a- 1
B. Definitions .................................................................................................................................. 11a- 1
C. Documents for Approval ............................................................................................................. 11a- 3
D. Fishing Vessel's Documentation ................................................................................................. 11a- 3
E. Ambient Conditions .................................................................................................................... 11a- 4
F. Operating Conditions .................................................................................................................. 11a- 5
G. Power Supply Systems ................................................................................................................ 11a- 5
H. Voltages and Frequencies ........................................................................................................... 11a- 6
I. Materials and Insulation .............................................................................................................. 11a- 6
J. Protection and Protective Measures ............................................................................................ 11a- 6
K. Explosion Protection ................................................................................................................... 11a- 8
L. Spare Parts .................................................................................................................................. 11a- 8
Section 11b Installation of Electrical Equipment
A. General ........................................................................................................................................ 11b- 1
B. Generators, Electrical Sources .................................................................................................... 11b- 1
C. Storage Batteries ......................................................................................................................... 11b- 1
D. Power Transformers .................................................................................................................... 11b- 3
E. Electronics .................................................................................................................................. 11b- 4
F. Switchboard ................................................................................................................................ 11b- 4
Section 11c Power Supply Installations
A. Electrical Power Demand ........................................................................................................... 11c- 1
B. Main Electrical Power Supply .................................................................................................... 11c- 1
C. Emergency Electrical Power Supply ........................................................................................... 11c- 2
D. Operation of Emergency Generator in Port ................................................................................ 11c- 3
Chapter 8
Page 6
Table of Contents I - Part 1
GL 2007

Section 11d Installation Protection and Power Distribution
A. General ....................................................................................................................................... 11d- 1
B. Emergency Three-Phase Generators .......................................................................................... 11d- 2
C. Direct Current Generators .......................................................................................................... 11d- 2
D. Transformers .............................................................................................................................. 11d- 2
E. Storage Batteries ........................................................................................................................ 11d- 2
F. Power Electronics ....................................................................................................................... 11d- 2
G. Shore Connection ....................................................................................................................... 11d- 2
H. Consumer Protective Equipment ................................................................................................ 11d- 3
I. Power Distribution ..................................................................................................................... 11d- 3
Section 11e Switchgear Assemblies
A. General ....................................................................................................................................... 11e- 1
B. Construction ............................................................................................................................... 11e- 1
C. Selection of Switchgear .............................................................................................................. 11e- 2
D. Choice of Electrical Protection Equipment ................................................................................ 11e- 2
E. Conductors, Bus Bars, Wiring .................................................................................................... 11e- 3
F. Measuring Instrument's Characteristics ...................................................................................... 11e- 4
G. Testing of Switchboards and Switchgear ................................................................................... 11e- 5
Section 11f Power Electronics
A. General ....................................................................................................................................... 11f- 1
B. Construction ............................................................................................................................... 11f- 1
C. Rating and Design ...................................................................................................................... 11f- 1
D. Cooling ....................................................................................................................................... 11f- 2
E. Control and Monitoring .............................................................................................................. 11f- 2
F. Protection Equipment ................................................................................................................. 11f- 2
G. Tests ........................................................................................................................................... 11f- 2
Section 11g Power Equipment
A. Steering Gear .............................................................................................................................. 11g- 1
B. Lateral Thrust Propellers ............................................................................................................ 11g- 2
C. Variable Pitch Propeller Systems for Main Propulsion System ................................................ 11g- 2
D. Auxiliary Machinery and Systems .............................................................................................. 11g- 2
E. Deck Machinery, Winches ......................................................................................................... 11g- 3
F. Electrical Heating Equipment and Heaters ................................................................................. 11g- 3
G. Plug and Socket Connections for Movable Power Consumers ................................................... 11g- 3
H. Refrigeration Installations for Preservation of the Catch ........................................................... 11g- 3
Section 11h Control, Monitoring and Vessel's Safety Systems
A. General ....................................................................................................................................... 11h- 1
B. Machinery Control and Monitoring Installation ........................................................................ 11h- 1
C. Vessel Control Systems .............................................................................................................. 11h- 2
D. Vessel's Safety Systems .............................................................................................................. 11h- 3
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Table of Contents Chapter 8
Page 7

Section 11i Lighting and Socket-Outlets
A. Construction and Extent .............................................................................................................. 11i- 1
B. Lighting Installations .................................................................................................................. 11i- 1
C. Socket-Outlets ............................................................................................................................. 11i- 1
Section 11j Cable Network
A. Choice of Cables and Wires ........................................................................................................ 11j- 1
B. Determination of Conductor Cross-Sections ............................................................................... 11j- 1
C. Protection and Installation of Circuits ........................................................................................ 11j- 2
D. Installation .................................................................................................................................. 11j- 3
Section 11k Electrical Equipment
A. Electrical Machinery ................................................................................................................... 11k- 1
B. Transformers and Reactance Coils ............................................................................................. 11k- 5
C. Storage Batteries and Chargers ................................................................................................... 11k- 6
D. Switchgear and Protection Device .............................................................................................. 11k- 6
E. Cables and Insulated Wires ......................................................................................................... 11k- 7
F. Installation Material .................................................................................................................... 11k- 8
G. Lighting Fittings .......................................................................................................................... 11k- 8
H. Electrical Heating Equipment ..................................................................................................... 11k- 9
Section 11l Tests
A. General ........................................................................................................................................ 11l- 1
B. Examinations of Technical Documentation ................................................................................ 11l- 1
C. Tests in the Manufacturer's Works .............................................................................................. 11l- 1
D. Tests on Board ............................................................................................................................ 11l- 2
E. Type Approvals .......................................................................................................................... 11l- 3
Section 12 Special Requirements for Automation
A. General ........................................................................................................................................ 12- 1
B. Documents for Approval ............................................................................................................. 12- 1
C. Extent, Design and Construction of the Equipment .................................................................... 12- 1
D. Monitoring Equipment ................................................................................................................ 12- 2
E. Remote Control from the Navigating Bridge .............................................................................. 12- 3
F. Fire Protection / Fire Extinguishing ............................................................................................ 12- 4
G. Prevention against Engine Room Flooding ................................................................................. 12- 4
H. Miscellaneous ............................................................................................................................. 12- 4
I. Alarm and Recording Points ....................................................................................................... 12- 4
Section 13 Spare Parts
A. General ........................................................................................................................................ 13- 1
B. Volume of Spare Parts ................................................................................................................ 13- 1
Chapter 8
Page 8
Table of Contents I - Part 1
GL 2007

Index
A
Accessibility ................................................................................................................................................ 9a-4, 9b-1
Accessories ............................................................................................................................................................ 6-1
Accident prevention ............................................................................................................................................... 6-6
Air coolers ........................................................................................................................................................... 10-7
Air pipes .......................................................................................................................................................... 2-5, 4-1
Air, overflow and sounding pipes ...................................................................................................................... 9d-23
Alarm systems .............................................................................................................................. 8-1, 8-3, 10-3, 12-2
Alarms .......................................................................................................................................... 9b-19, 11g-2, 11h-3
Allowable working pressures ............................................................................................................................... 10-4
Aluminium ........................................................................................................................................................... 9d-3
Ambient conditions ....................................................................................................................................... 1-2, 9a-1
Ammonia .............................................................................................................................................................. 10-4
Anchor equipment .................................................................................................................................................. 5-1
Anchors .................................................................................................................................................................. 5-2
Anti-heeling devices .............................................................................................................................................. 2-1
Automation .......................................................................................................................................................... 12-1
Availability ............................................................................................................................................... 9a-2, 11c-2
B
Balancing ............................................................................................................................................................. 9c-8
Bathing ................................................................................................................................................................ 11i-2
Batteries .................................................................................................................................................. 11b-1, 11c-2
Bearings ............................................................................................................................................................. 11k-1
Bilge lines .......................................................................................................................................................... 9d-20
Bilge suctions ..................................................................................................................................................... 9d-20
Bilge wells ............................................................................................................................................................. 4-3
Blade geometry .................................................................................................................................................. 9c-13
Blade thickness .................................................................................................................................................. 9c-11
Boilers .................................................................................................................................................. 8-2, 9e-1, 12-4
Bollards .................................................................................................................................................................. 5-7
Bottom ceiling ........................................................................................................................................................ 4-1
Bow height ........................................................................................................................................................... 2-11
Bridge ................................................................................................................................ 9b-19, 9c-17, 11h-2, 12-3
Brine tanks ........................................................................................................................................................... 10-7
Brines ..................................................................................................................................................................... 3-8
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Index Chapter 8
Page 9

Bulkheads ..................................................................................................................................................... 2-13, 7-3
Bulwarks ................................................................................................................................................................ 4-3
Bus bars .............................................................................................................................................................. 11e-3
C
Cables ............................................................................................................................................ 11j-1, 11k-7, 11l-2
Call systems ......................................................................................................................................................... 12-3
Calorifiers .......................................................................................................................................................... 11k-9
Carbon dioxide .................................................................................................................................................... 10-4
Cargo fish tween decks .......................................................................................................................................... 4-2
Cargo spaces ................................................................................................................................................... 7-9, 8-6
Catch handling gear ............................................................................................................................................... 6-3
Ceiling at tank bulkheads ....................................................................................................................................... 4-1
Certification ........................................................................................................................................................... 6-1
Chain cables .......................................................................................................................................................... 5-3
Chain locker .......................................................................................................................................................... 5-5
Chargers ............................................................................................................................................................. 11k-6
Chlorodifluormethane .......................................................................................................................................... 10-4
Circuit breakers .................................................................................................................................................. 11e-2
Circuits ............................................................................................................................................................... 11j-2
Clamp-type couplings ........................................................................................................................................... 9c-9
Class Notations ......................................................................................................................... 1-1, 10-1, 11h-2, 12-1
Classification ......................................................................................................................................................... 1-2
Cleats ..................................................................................................................................................................... 5-7
Closure conditions ................................................................................................................................................. 2-1
Closures ................................................................................................................................................................. 2-2
Collision bulkhead ............................................................................................................................................... 2-13
Combustible materials .................................................................................................................................... 7-1, 7-7
Communication ........................................................................................................................................ 9a-5, 11h-2
Compass zone ..................................................................................................................................................... 11j-4
Compensators .................................................................................................................................................... 9d-27
Compressed air lines .......................................................................................................................................... 9d-19
Compressors ...................................................................................................................................................... 9b-19
Computers ......................................................................................................................................................... 11h-1
Conductors ............................................................................................................................................... 11e-3, 11j-1
Control .................................................................................................................... 11f-2, 11g-1, 11h-1, 11h-2, 11l-3
Control station .......................................................................................................................................... 9b-2, 9b-18
Coolers .............................................................................................................................................................. 9d-18
Cooling .................................................................................................................................................... 11f-2, 11k-1
Chapter 8
Page 10
Index I - Part 1
GL 2007

Cooling water ............................................................................................................................................ 9b-15, 10-9
Corrosion protection ............................................................................................................................................ 9a-2
Couplings ............................................................................................................................................................. 9c-3
Crankcase ........................................................................................................................................................... 9b-13
Crankshafts .......................................................................................................................................................... 9b-4
Cross-sections ..................................................................................................................................................... 11j-1
Currents ............................................................................................................................................................... 11j-3
D
Damage control plan ............................................................................................................................................ 2-16
Damage stability .................................................................................................................................................. 2-13
Dead ship condition ................................................................................................................................ 11a-3, 11c-1
Deck machinery ................................................................................................................................................. 11g-3
Deck openings ........................................................................................................................................................ 4-3
Deck sheathing ....................................................................................................................................................... 4-1
Deep-fat cooking equipment .................................................................................................................................. 8-6
Definition of fishing vessels ................................................................................................................................... 1-1
Definitions ................................................................................................................................................ 10-1, 11a-1
Defrosting .......................................................................................................................................................... 10-11
Diesel engines ...................................................................................................................................................... 9b-1
Dock trials ........................................................................................................................................................... 11l-2
Documents .......................................... 1-4, 2-1, 6-2, 7-1, 8-1, 9a-1, 9b-2, 9c-1, 9d-1, 9e-1, 10-1, 11a-3, 11l-1, 12-1
Door sills ................................................................................................................................................................ 2-2
Double bottom ..................................................................................................................................................... 2-13
Draught marking .................................................................................................................................................... 2-7
Drinking water systems ...................................................................................................................................... 9d-26
E
Earthing ......................................................................................................................................... 9b-11, 11a-5, 11j-4
Electrical equipment .................................................................................................................... 11b-1, 11f-1, 11k-1
Electrical installations ........................................................................................................................................ 11a-1
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) ............................................................................................................... 11a-8
Electronic equipment ......................................................................................................... 11b-4, 11d-2, 11f-2, 11l-3
Emergency fire-extinguisher set ......................................................................................................................... 9b-18
Emergency generating set ....................................................................................................................... 9b-17, 11c-3
Emergency shut down ........................................................................................................................................ 11d-4
Emergency switchboards ............................................................................................................. 11b-4, 11d-2, 11e-2
Engine alignment/seating ................................................................................................................................... 9b-19
Environmental conditions ........................................................................................................................... 1-2, 11a-4
Equipment numeral ................................................................................................................................................ 5-1
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Index Chapter 8
Page 11

Equivalence .................................................................................................................................................... 1-1, 7-1
Escape ............................................................................................................................................................. 7-2, 7-8
Essential equipment ................................................................................................................................... 9a-5, 11a-1
European regulations ............................................................................................................................................. 1-1
Exhaust gas pipes .............................................................................................................................................. 9d-20
Exhaust gas turbochargers ................................................................................................................................. 9b-16
Explosion protection ........................................................................................................................................... 11a-8
F
Fairleads ................................................................................................................................................................ 6-5
Fans 10-9
Fasting of cables and wires ................................................................................................................................. 11j-3
Filters ........................................................................................................................................... 9b-15, 9c-18, 9d-15
Fire detection systems ................................................................................................................. 7-8, 8-3, 11h-3, 12-2
Fire extinguishers ........................................................................................................................................... 8-4, 8-5
Fire extinguishing ................................................................................................................................................ 12-4
Fire fighting ........................................................................................................................................................... 8-1
Fire hydrants .......................................................................................................................................................... 8-4
Fire integrity .......................................................................................................................................................... 7-3
Fire piping ............................................................................................................................................................. 8-4
Fire protection .............................................................................................................................................. 8-1, 12-4
Fire pumps ............................................................................................................................................................. 8-3
Fire resisting divisions ........................................................................................................................................... 7-5
Fish flaps ............................................................................................................................................................... 3-6
Fish holds ....................................................................................................................................................... 3-6, 4-2
Fish pounds ............................................................................................................................................................ 4-3
Fish processing areas ...................................................................................................................................... 3-8, 4-3
Fish tanks ........................................................................................................................................................ 3-8, 4-3
Fishing gear .................................................................................................................................................... 6-1, 6-6
Fixed fire extinguishing systems ............................................................................................................................ 8-5
Fixed local application fire fighting system (FWBLAFFS) ................................................................................... 8-5
Flammable liquid lockers ...................................................................................................................................... 8-6
Flange connections .............................................................................................................................................. 9d-8
Flange type couplings ........................................................................................................................................... 9c-4
Flange types ....................................................................................................................................................... 9d-12
Flexible couplings ................................................................................................................................................ 9c-9
Free liquid surfaces ................................................................................................................................................ 2-8
Freeing ports .......................................................................................................................................................... 2-6
Frequencies ......................................................................................................................................................... 11a-6
Chapter 8
Page 12
Index I - Part 1
GL 2007

Fresh water cooling system ................................................................................................................................ 9d-18
Fuel oil system ................................................................................................................................................... 9b-14
Fuel tanks ........................................................................................................................................................... 9d-27
Fuel transfer ....................................................................................................................................................... 9d-15
Fuels ..................................................................................................................................................................... 9a-3
Fuses .................................................................................................................................................................. 11e-2
G
Galley ..................................................................................................................................................................... 8-6
Gas bottles ......................................................................................................................................................... 9d-29
Gears .................................................................................................................................................................... 9c-6
Generators .............................................................................................................. 11b-1, 11c-2, 11d-1, 11e-1, 11l-2
Governors .......................................................................................................................................................... 9b-12
Guard rails ............................................................................................................................................................. 4-3
Guidelines .............................................................................................................................................................. 1-1
H
Hawses ................................................................................................................................................................... 5-7
Heating .................................................................................................................................................... 11g-3, 11k-9
Heavy fuel oils ................................................................................................................................................... 9d-15
High holding power anchors .................................................................................................................................. 5-2
Hose assemblies ................................................................................................................................................. 9d-27
Hull structures ........................................................................................................................................................ 3-1
Hydraulic oil tanks ............................................................................................................................................. 9d-28
Hydraulic systems ................................................................................................................................................ 12-1
I
Ice accretion ......................................................................................................................................................... 2-13
Ice class .............................................................................................................................................................. 9c-18
Inclinations ............................................................................................................................................................. 1-2
Inlets ...................................................................................................................................................................... 2-5
Installation protection ........................................................................................................................................ 11d-1
Insulation .................................................................................................................................................... 8-2, 10-10
Insulation resistance ..................................................................................................................... 11e-3, 11f-3, 11k-3
Intact buoyancy ...................................................................................................................................................... 2-7
Intact stability ........................................................................................................................................................ 2-7
Internal combustion engines ................................................................................................................................ 9b-1
J
Jumper stays ........................................................................................................................................................... 6-5
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Index Chapter 8
Page 13

L
Lateral thrust units .................................................................................................................................. 9c-15, 11g-2
Life-saving appliances ........................................................................................................................................... 4-5
Lifting appliances ........................................................................................................................................... 6-1, 6-4
Lighting ........................................................................................................................................ 11d-3, 11i-1, 11k-8
Loads ..................................................................................................................................................................... 6-1
Lubricating oil systems ........................................................................................................................... 9b-15, 9d-15
Lubricating oil tanks .......................................................................................................................................... 9d-24
M
Main shafting ........................................................................................................................................................ 9c-1
Mains quality ...................................................................................................................................................... 11a-5
Manual operation ........................................................................................................................................ 9a-2, 12-1
Masts ..................................................................................................................................................................... 4-4
Materials .............................................................................................. 5-1, 7-2, 9b-4, 9c-1, 9c-6, 9c-10, 9d-1, 11a-6
Measuring instruments ........................................................................................................................................ 11e-2
Mechanical joints ................................................................................................................................................. 9d-9
Membrane type tanks for brines ............................................................................................................................ 3-8
Mobility .............................................................................................................................................................. 11j-1
Monitoring ......................................................................................................................... 11e-3, 11f-2, 11h-1, 11k-7
Mooring at sea ....................................................................................................................................................... 3-1
Mooring equipment ............................................................................................................................................... 5-6
Mooring winches ................................................................................................................................................... 5-7
Motor protection ................................................................................................................................................. 11e-3
Motors ............................................................................................................................................................... 11g-1
Mounting ................................................................................................................................................. 9c-14, 11i-1
Movements ............................................................................................................................................................ 1-2
N
Navigation in ice ................................................................................................................................................. 9c-18
Noise ..................................................................................................................................................................... 9a-4
O
Oil burners ............................................................................................................................................................ 9e-2
Oil firing equipment ............................................................................................................................................. 9e-2
Oil fuel systems ................................................................................................................................................. 9d-13
Oil residues ............................................................................................................................................. 9d-22, 9d-27
Oily water separating equipment ....................................................................................................................... 9d-22
Openings ................................................................................................................................................................ 2-2
Operating and maintenance instructions ............................................................................................................... 9a-3
Chapter 8
Page 14
Index I - Part 1
GL 2007

Overflow pipes ....................................................................................................................................................... 4-1
Overflow systems ............................................................................................................................................... 9d-23
P
Paint store .............................................................................................................................................................. 8-6
Pelagic trawl .......................................................................................................................................................... 6-3
Penetrations ......................................................................................................................................................... 11j-4
Permeability .................................................................................................................................................. 2-1, 2-14
Pipe classes .......................................................................................................................................................... 9d-1
Pipe connections .................................................................................................................................................. 9d-8
Piping systems ..................................................................................................................................................... 9d-1
Plan approval ......................................................................................................................................................... 6-2
Plastic pipes ......................................................................................................................................................... 9d-2
Plug .............................................................................................................................................. 11g-3, 11i-1, 11k-8
Portable fish hold divisions .................................................................................................................................... 3-6
Power demand .................................................................................................................................................... 11c-1
Power distribution .............................................................................................................................................. 11d-3
Power supply systems .................................................................................................................. 11a-5, 11c-1, 11g-1
Pressure testing .................................................................................................................................................... 9d-5
Pressure vessels ........................................................................................................................................... 9e-2, 10-7
Propellers ....................................................................................................................................... 9c-9, 11g-2, 11h-2
Propulsion system ................................................................................................................................................ 9c-1
Protection against direct contact ........................................................................................................................ 11a-6
Protection against foreign bodies and water ...................................................................................................... 11a-6
Protection against indirect contact ..................................................................................................................... 11a-6
Protective devices ........................................................................................................................ 11e-1, 11f-2, 11k-6
Protective measures ............................................................................................................................................... 4-3
Pumps ............................................................................................................................................ 9d-13, 10-9, 11g-2
Purifiers .............................................................................................................................................................. 9d-15
Q
Quick freezing installations ................................................................................................................................ 10-13
R
Radar masts ............................................................................................................................................................ 4-4
Recording points .................................................................................................................................................. 12-4
Refrigerated seawater tanks (RSW) ..................................................................................................................... 10-7
Refrigerating machinery spaces ........................................................................................................................... 10-5
Refrigerating units ................................................................................................................................................ 10-2
Refrigeration installations .................................................................................................................................... 10-1
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Index Chapter 8
Page 15

Register book ......................................................................................................................................................... 6-7
Regulations ............................................................................................................................................................ 1-1
Remote control .................................................................................................................................................... 12-3
Rollers ................................................................................................................................................................... 6-5
Room flooding ..................................................................................................................................................... 12-4
Ropes .............................................................................................................................................................. 5-4, 6-7
Routing of cables ................................................................................................................................................ 11j-3
Rudder angle indication .......................................................................................................................... 9c-17, 11h-2
Rudder angle limitation ...................................................................................................................................... 9c-17
Rules ...................................................................................................................................................................... 1-1
S
Safety equipment ........................................................................................................................................ 9a-4, 10-9
Safety systems .............................................................................................. 9b-10, 11d-4, 11h-1, 11h-3, 11l-3, 12-2
Saunas .................................................................................................................................................................... 7-9
Scavenge trunks ..................................................................................................................................................... 8-6
Sea chests .......................................................................................................................................................... 9d-17
Sea trials ............................................................................................................................................................. 11l-3
Sealing .................................................................................................................................................................. 9c-2
Seawater cooling systems .................................................................................................................................. 9d-17
Sewage systems ................................................................................................................................................. 9d-26
Shaft alignment ..................................................................................................................................................... 9c-6
Shaft bearings ....................................................................................................................................................... 9c-4
Shaft diameter ....................................................................................................................................................... 9c-1
Shaft liners ............................................................................................................................................................ 9c-3
Shielding ............................................................................................................................................................ 9b-14
Shore connection ............................................................................................................................................... 11d-2
Short-circuit ............................................................................................................................................ 11e-2, 11g-1
Shower ................................................................................................................................................................ 11i-2
Side doors .............................................................................................................................................................. 3-9
Side gallows ........................................................................................................................................................... 6-5
Side trawlers .......................................................................................................................................................... 3-1
Sidescuttles ............................................................................................................................................................ 2-6
Signal masts ........................................................................................................................................................... 4-4
Skylights ................................................................................................................................................................ 2-6
Sliding doors .......................................................................................................................................................... 2-2
Small vessels ......................................................................................................................................................... 1-1
Smoke spread ........................................................................................................................................................ 7-7
Socket ........................................................................................................................................... 11g-3, 11i-1, 11k-8
Chapter 8
Page 16
Index I - Part 1
GL 2007

Sounding devices ................................................................................................................................................... 2-5
Sounding pipes ............................................................................................................................................ 4-1, 9d-23
Spare parts ..................................................................................................................................... 10-13, 11a-8, 13-1
Stability .................................................................................................................................................................. 2-1
Stability information ............................................................................................................................................ 2-15
Starting equipment ............................................................................................................................................. 9b-16
Steam boilers ........................................................................................................................................................ 9e-1
Steering gear ........................................................................................................................................... 9c-15, 11g-1
Stern ....................................................................................................................................................................... 3-4
Stern gantries ......................................................................................................................................................... 6-4
Stern ramp .............................................................................................................................................................. 3-5
Storage batteries ................................................................................................................ 11b-1, 11d-2, 11k-6, 11l-2
Storage of liquids ............................................................................................................................................... 9d-27
Strengthening at the side shell ................................................................................................................................ 3-1
Structural fire protection ........................................................................................................................................ 7-1
Subdivision .......................................................................................................................................................... 2-13
Supply cables ..................................................................................................................................................... 11d-3
Supply circuits ................................................................................................................................................... 11d-3
Switchboards ..................................................................................................................... 11b-4, 11d-2, 11e-1, 11l-1
Switchgear ............................................................................................................. 11d-1, 11e-2, 11g-1, 11k-6, 11l-2
T
Temperature monitoring .................................................................................................................................... 10-12
Tests ............................ 6-7, 9a-2, 9b-4, 9c-6, 9c-15, 9d-5, 9e-2, 10-2, 10-9, 11e-5, 11f-2, 11g-2, 11k-1, 11l-1, 12-4
Tetrafluorethane ................................................................................................................................................... 10-4
Thermal oil heaters .............................................................................................................................................. 9e-1
Thermal oil plants ................................................................................................................................................ 12-4
Thermometers .................................................................................................................................................... 10-10
Tooth couplings ................................................................................................................................................... 9c-9
Torremolinos Convention ........................................................................................................................... 1-1, 11a-1
Torsional vibrations ........................................................................................................................................... 9c-18
Transformers ..................................................................................................................... 11b-3, 11d-2, 11k-5, 11l-1
Trawl booms .......................................................................................................................................................... 6-5
Trawling gear ......................................................................................................................................................... 6-3
Type tests ......................................................................................................................................... 9b-6, 9b-7, 11l-3
V
Valves ......................................................................................................................................................... 9d-8, 10-8
Ventilation ...................................................................................................................... 7-2, 7-6, 9a-4, 11b-2, 11k-1
Ventilation ducts ................................................................................................................................................ 11b-2
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Index Chapter 8
Page 17

Ventilators ............................................................................................................................................................. 2-5
Vibrations .................................................................................................................................................. 9a-1, 11a-4
Voltages .................................................................................................................. 11a-6, 11e-5, 11f-2, 11j-2, 11k-4
W
Wall thickness ..................................................................................................................................................... 9d-6
Wall thickness groups ............................................................................................................................... 9d-6, 9d-25
Warm water generators ......................................................................................................................................... 9e-1
Water on deck ...................................................................................................................................................... 2-11
Watertight doors .................................................................................................................................................... 2-2
Weather deck ......................................................................................................................................................... 3-6
Weathertight doors ................................................................................................................................................ 2-2
Winches ................................................................................................................................................................. 6-5
Windings ........................................................................................................................................................... 11k-1
Windlasses .................................................................................................................................................. 5-5, 11g-3
Windows ................................................................................................................................................................ 2-6
Wires ....................................................................................................................................................... 11j-1, 11k-7


Chapter 8
Page 18
Index I - Part 1
GL 2007

Section 1

General
A. Application
1. Definition of fishing vessels
Fishing vessels under the terms of these Rules are
seagoing ships used for commercially catching fish,
whales, seals, walrus or other living resources of the
sea with a length L of 12,0 m and above.
2. Approach
These Rules are based on the GL Rules defined in 3.1,
summarizing in the following Sections additional
aspects of fishing vessels for hull structures, machin-
ery and electrical installations as well as automation.
International requirements are included as far as they
are relevant for Classification by GL.
3. Rules, guidelines and regulations
3.1 Basic GL Rules and guidelines
The following GL Rules are relevant for fishing vessels:
Part 0 Classification and Surveys
Part 1 Seagoing Ships, Chapter 1 Hull Struc-
tures, Chapter 2 Machinery Installations,
Chapter 3 Electrical Installations, Chapter 4
Automation
II Materials and Welding, Part 1 to 3
3.2 National regulations
Legal national regulations of the flag state have to be
considered in addition by the designer and operator of
fishing vessels, e.g.
for vessels under German flag, e.g. "Unfallver-
htungsvorschriften fr Unternehmen der See-
fahrt (UVV See)", as amended for fishing ves-
sels with L < 24 m
3.3 International regulations
The following international regulations may apply:
Torremolinos International Convention for the
Safety of Fishing Vessels, 1977 amended by
Protocol of 1993 as applied by the relevant Flag
State Administration for fishing vessels with a
length L 45 m (did not enter into force on an
international basis)
European Communities, Commission Directive
1997/70/EC of 11 December 1997 as amended by
Commission Directive 2002/35/EC of 25 April
2002 for fishing vessels with a length L 24 m
Code on Intact Stability for All Types of Ships
Covered by IMO Instruments, Resolution
A.749(18), as amended
Code for Safety of Fishermen and Fishing Ves-
sels, IMO 2005
Voluntary Guidelines for the Design, Construc-
tion and Equipment of Small Fishing Vessels,
FAO/ILO/IMO 2005
4. Equivalence
Vessels deviating from the GL Rules in their types,
equipment or some of their parts may be classed, pro-
vided that their structures or equipment are found to
be equivalent to the GL requirements for the respec-
tive Class.
B. Class Notations
1. Type of Vessel
Fishing vessels will get the descriptive Class Notation
FISHING VESSEL, possibly with supplementary
Notations for specification of type, if they fulfil the
requirements of these Rules.
Supplementary Notations for different types of fishing
vessels may be:
SIDE TRAWLER
STERN TRAWLER
TUNA SEINER, etc.
2. Special equipment
Special Class Notations for fishing vessels, such as
RC (Remote control of the main propulsion
plant from the bridge)
RIC (Cargo refrigeration installation)
CFG (Certified fishing gear)
may be assigned. The detailed requirements for these
Notations are defined in the relevant Sections of these
Rules.
3. Range of service
In general the requirements in these Rules are valid for
unrestricted service of the fishing vessels. If only a
restricted service is planned the Notations M (Re-
stricted International Service), K (Coastal Service) or
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 1 General Chapter 8
Page 11

B
W (Sheltered Water Service) will be fixed to the Char-
acter of Classification and the special requirements for
these ranges of service will be applied.
4. Further details
The Character of Classification and further Notations
are defined in the GL Rules Part 0 Classification and
Surveys, Section 2.
C. Ambient Conditions
1. General operating conditions
The selection, layout and arrangement of the vessel's
structure and all shipboard machinery shall be such as
to ensure faultless continuous operation under defined
standard requirements for ambient conditions.
Variable requirements for unusual types and/or tasks
of fishing vessels can be discussed case by case, but
shall not be less than the standard design condition.
2. Inclinations and movements of the vessel
The standard design conditions for static and dynamic
inclinations of fishing vessels are defined in Table 1.1.
Table 1.1 Design conditions for vessel inclina-
tions and movements
Type of
movement
Type of
inclination
Standard
requirements for
design conditions
Inclination
athwartships:
1


Main and auxiliary
machinery
15
Other installations
2
22,5
No uncontrolled
switches or
functional changes
45
Inclinations fore
and aft:
1


Main and auxiliary
machinery
5
Static
condition
Other installations
2
10
Rolling:
Main and auxiliary
machinery
30
Other installations
2
30
Pitching:
Main and auxiliary
machinery
7,5
Dynamic
Movement
Other installations
2
10
1
Athwartships and fore and aft inclinations may occur
simultaneously.
2
vessel's safety equipment, e.g. emergency power installations,
emergency fire pumps, etc. and switch gear and electric/elec-
tronic equipment

3. Environmental conditions
The design environmental conditions for fishing ves-
sels are contained in Table 1.2.
Table 1.2 Design environmental conditions
Environmental
area
Parameters
Standard
requirements for
design conditions
Outside the
vessel/air
Temperature
at atmospheric pressure
at relative humidity of
25 C to +45 C
1
1000 mbar
60 %
Temperature up to +32 C
2
Outside the
vessel/seawater
Density acc. to salt
content
1,025 t/m
3

Outside the
vessel/icing of
surface
Icing on ship's surfaces
up to 20 m above
waterline
See Section 2,
E.3.7
Outside the
vessel/navigation
in ice
Ice class E, E1, E2, E3,
E4
see Section 3,
see Section 9c, E.
Inside the vessel/
all spaces
Air temperature
at atmospheric pressure
at relative humidity of
0 C to +45 C
1

1000 mbar
up to 100% (+45 C)
Air temperature up to +45 C
Inside the vessel/
specially protect-
ed control rooms
Max. relative humidity 80%
Air temperature 0 C to +55 C
Inside the vessel/
in electrical de-
vices with higher
degree of heat
dissipation
Maximum relative
humidity
100%
Air temperature +5 C
Structural
members/ unre-
stricted service
Seawater temperature 0 C
1
Higher temperatures due to radiation and absorption heat
have to be considered. GL may approve lower air tempera-
tures for vessels designed only for service in particular geo-
graphical areas.
2
GL may approve lower limit water temperatures for vessels
operating only in special geographic areas.

D. Definitions
1. Administration
Administration is the responsible authority of the flag
state of the fishing vessel.
2. Co-ordinate system
For the use of these Rules the fixed, right-handed co-
ordinate system 0, x, y, z as defined in Fig. 1.1 is intro-
duced. The origin of the system is situated at the aft end
of the length L, at centreline and on the moulded base-
line at the vessel's keel. The x-axis points in longitudi-
nal direction of the vessel positive forward, the y-axis
positive to port and the z- axis positive upwards. Angu-
lar motions are considered positive in a clockwise di-
rection about the three axes.
Chapter 8
Page 12
Section 1 General I - Part 1
GL 2007

D
Q
Y
j
y
z
x
F P
L
/
2
Angles of motion:
j = roll angle
Q = pitch angle
Y = yaw angle
T
H
B
0
L
/
2

Fig. 1.1 Co-ordinate system and angles of motion

3. Principal dimensions
3.1 Length L
The length L [m] on the summer load waterline from
the fore side of the stem to the after side of the rudder
post, or the centre of the rudder stock, if there is no
rudder post. L is not to be less than 96 % and need not
be greater than 97 % of the extreme length of the
summer load waterline. In vessels with unusual stern
and bow arrangement, the length L will be specially
considered.
3.2 Forward perpendicular FP
The forward perpendicular coincides with the
moulded side of the plate stem on the waterline on
which the length L is measured.
3.3 Breadth B
The breadth B [m] is the maximum breadth of the
vessel, measured to the moulded line of the frame in a
vessel with a metal shell and to the outer surface of the
hull in a vessel with a shell of fibre reinforced plastic
or wood.
3.4 Depth H
The moulded depth H [m] is the vertical distance, at
the middle of the length L, from the base line to top of
the deck beam at side on the uppermost continuous
deck of a vessel with a metal shell and to the top edge
of the deck for vessels with a shell of other materials.
In way of effective superstructures the depth is to be
measured up to the superstructure deck for determina-
tion of the vessels scantlings.
3.5 Draught T
The draught T [m] is the vertical distance, at the mid-
dle of the length L, from base line to a waterline
which results from stability calculations according to
Section 2.
4. Frame spacing a
The frame spacing a [m] will be measured from
moulding edge to moulding edge of frame.
5. Displacement
The displacement represents the mass of the vessel
in metric tons at the draught T.
6. Block coefficient C
B
Moulded block coefficient at design draught T, based
on the length L.
3
B
moulded volume of displacement m at
C =

[ ] T
B T L

I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 1 General Chapter 8
Page 13

D
7. Vessel speeds
7.1 Speed v
0

Expected maximum ahead speed of the vessel in calm
water [kn], at the summer load waterline, when the
total available continuous propulsion power is acting
exclusively on the propeller.
7.2 Speed v
Tow
Expected continuous ahead speed of the vessel [kn] at
fishing operations with nets.
8. Definition of decks
8.1 Bulkhead deck
Bulkhead deck is the deck up to which the watertight
bulkheads are carried.
8.2 Freeboard deck
Freeboard deck is the deck upon which the freeboard
calculation is based.
8.3 Strength deck
Strength deck is the deck or the parts of a deck which
form the upper flange of the longitudinal structure.
8.4 Weather deck
All free decks and parts of decks exposed to the sea
are defined as weather deck.
8.5 Lower decks
Starting from the first deck below the uppermost con-
tinuous deck, the decks are defined as 2
nd
, 3
rd
, deck,
etc.
8.6 Superstructure decks
The superstructure decks situated immediately above
the uppermost continuous deck are termed forecastle
deck, bridge deck and poop deck. Superstructure
decks above the bridge deck are termed 2
nd
, 3
rd
super-
structure deck, etc.
E. Documents for Approval
1. The documents to obtain Class defined in the
following have to be submitted to GL in German or
English language.
2. The survey of the vessel's construction will
be carried out on the basis of approved documents.
The drawings must contain all data necessary for as-
sessment and approval. Where deemed necessary,
calculations and descriptions of the vessel's elements
are to be submitted. Any non-standard symbols used
are to be explained in a key list. All documents must
show the number of the project and the name of the
owner and/or shipyard.
The drawings and documents have to give sufficient
evidence to ensure conformity with the Rules.
3. The supporting calculations shall contain all
necessary information concerning reference docu-
ments (parts of the specification, drawings, superior
computations, computations for elements or neigh-
bouring elements, following calculations). Literature
used for the calculations has to be cited, important but
not commonly known sources shall be added as copy.
The choice of computer programs according to the
"State of the Art" is free. The programs may be
checked by GL through comparative calculations with
predefined test examples. A generally valid approval
for a computer program is, however, not given by GL.
Direct calculations may be used in the following
fields:
global strength
longitudinal strength
beams and grillages
detailed strength
For such calculations the computer model, the bound-
ary condition and load cases are to be agreed upon
with GL.
The calculation documents are to be submitted includ-
ing input and output. During the examination it may
prove necessary that GL perform independent com-
parative calculations.
4. The detailed requirements for the documenta-
tion are defined in the different Sections. Reference is
also made to the GL software for documents to be
submitted (SCOL).
5. GL reserve the right to demand additional
documentation if that submitted is insufficient for an
assessment of the ship or essential parts thereof. This
may especially be the case for plants and equipment
related to new developments and/or which are not
tested on board to a sufficient extent.
6. The drawings are to be submitted in triplicate,
all calculations and supporting documentation in one
copy for examination at a sufficiently early date to
ensure that they are approved and available to the
Surveyor at the beginning of the manufacture or in-
stallation of the ship or of important components.
7. Once the documents submitted have been
approved by GL they are binding on the execution of
the work. Subsequent modifications and extensions
require the approval of GL before becoming effective.
Chapter 8
Page 14
Section 1 General I - Part 1
GL 2007

E
Section 2

Closure Conditions, Buoyancy and Stability
A. General
1. Classification
Fishing vessels with a length L 12 m will be as-
signed Class only after it has been demonstrated that
the closure conditions, buoyancy, subdivision and
their stability are adequate for the service intended.
2. Basic regulations
The regulations to be applied besides the International
Convention on Load Lines, 1966, as amended (ICLL)
are summarized in Section 1, A.3. The requirements
and measures contained in these regulations are inte-
grated in this Section.
3. Closure conditions
A closure plan report in accordance with GL Form F
434 or F 430 for fishing vessels, showing all openings,
cut-outs, passages, etc. in deck and shell as built,
will be established by the GL Surveyor and sent for
approval to the GL Head Office.
4. Stability
4.1 Adequate intact stability means compliance
with standards laid down by the relevant Administra-
tion. GL reserve the right to deviate therefrom, if re-
quired for special reasons, taking into account the
fishing vessel's size and type.
4.2 Evidence of approval by the competent Ad-
ministration of the flag state concerned may be ac-
cepted for the purpose of Classification.
4.3 Fishing vessels with proven damage stability
will be assigned the symbol , see GL Rules Part 0
Classification and Surveys, Section 2, C.2.4.
4.4 The compliance with the requirements of this
Section is to be checked by calculation and tests ac-
cording to G. with the prototype, if any, or with the
actual fishing vessel itself in the fully loaded, ready
for use condition. Trials are to be carried out under the
supervision of a GL Surveyor.
Details regarding the execution of the trials are laid
down by GL Head Office, see also G.
5. Documents to be submitted for approval
For the condition of drawings and documents which
are necessary for approval see Section 1, E.
6. Definitions
6.1 Watertight
Watertight in relation to a structural element means
capable of preventing the passage of water through the
structure in any direction under the head of water for
which the surrounding structure is designed.
6.2 Weathertight
Weathertight means that in any sea condition water
will not penetrate into the fishing vessel.
6.3 Angle of heel
= angle of heel relative to the y-axis [], see also
Section 1, Fig. 1.1
6.4 Angle of flooding
Angle of flooding
f
means the angle of heel at which
openings in the hull, superstructures or deckhouses,
which cannot be closed watertight, immerse.
6.5 Permeability
The permeability of a space is the proportion of the
immersed volume of that space which can be occupied
by water.
6.6 Further definitions are given in Section 1, D.
7. Anti-heeling devices
7.1 If tanks are used as heeling devices, effects of
maximum possible tank moments on intact stability
are to be checked. A respective proof has to be carried
out for several draughts and taking maximum allow-
able centres of gravity resulting from the stability limit
curve as a basis.
7.2 If a fishing vessel is equipped with anti-
heeling arrangements which may produce heeling
angles of more than 10, the GL Rules Chapter 2
Machinery Installations, Section 11, P.1.4 have to be
observed.
7.3 All devices have to comply with GL Rules
Chapter 3 Electrical Installations, Section 7, G.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 2 Closure Conditions, Buoyancy and Stability Chapter 8
Page 21

A
B. Openings and Closures in Hull, Deck and
Superstructures
1. General
1.1 Coaming heights for openings leading below
the working deck, to enclosed superstructures or to
spaces considered buoyant in the stability calculation
are in general to be in accordance with the require-
ments of this Section as far as reasonable and practi-
cable.
1.2 Where applicable, sill or coaming heights
should comply with National Administration require-
ments.
1.3 Doors, hatches and ventilation ducts includ-
ing their covers, lock tumblers and securing arrange-
ments must be adequately dimensioned. Details are to
be submitted for approval.
1.4 All doors and escape hatches must be oper-
able from both sides.
1.5 For ships other than fishing vessels, e.g. ves-
sels processing their catch, with L 24 m the re-
quirements of the International Convention on Load
Lines (ICLL) have to be observed.
2. Doors
2.1 Watertight doors
2.1.1 The number of openings in watertight bulk-
heads, as required by F.1., shall be reduced to the
minimum compatible with the general requirements
and operational needs of the fishing vessel. The open-
ings shall be fitted with watertight closing appliances
to the satisfaction of the Administration, see Table 2.1.
Watertight doors shall be of equivalent strength to the
adjacent unpierced structure.
2.1.2 Fishing vessels with L < 45 m
Doors may be of the hinged type, which shall be capa-
ble of being operated locally from each side of the
door and shall normally be kept close at sea. A notice
shall be attached to the door on each side to state that
the door shall be kept closed at sea.
2.1.3 Fishing vessels with L 45 m
Doors shall be of the sliding type in:
spaces where it is intended to open them at sea
and if located with their sills below the deepest
operating waterline, unless GL considers it to be
impracticable or unnecessary taking into ac-
count the type and operation of the fishing ves-
sel
the lower part of a machinery space where there
is access from it to a shaft tunnel
Otherwise the doors shall be of the hinged type.
2.1.4 Sliding doors
2.1.4.1 Sliding doors shall be capable of being oper-
ated when the fishing vessel is listed up to 15 either
way.
2.1.4.2 Sliding doors, whether manually operated or
otherwise, shall be capable of being operated locally
from each side of the door. In fishing vessels with L
45 m these doors shall also be capable of being oper-
ated by remote control from an accessible position
above the working deck, except when the doors are
fitted in crew accommodation spaces.
2.1.4.3 Means shall be provided at remote operating
positions to indicate when a sliding door is open or
closed.
2.2 Weathertight doors
2.2.1 All access openings in bulkheads of enclosed
superstructures and other outer structures through
which water could enter and endanger the fishing
vessel, shall be fitted with doors permanently attached
to the bulkhead, framed and stiffened so that the
whole structure is of equivalent strength to the un-
pierced structure, and weathertight when closed, see
Table 2.1.
2.2.2 The means of securing the doors weathertight
shall consist of gaskets and clamping devices or other
equivalent means and shall be permanently attached to
the bulkhead or to the doors themselves, and shall be
so arranged that they can be operated from each side
of the bulkhead. The Administration may, without
prejudice to the safety of the crew, permit the doors to
be opened from one side only for freezer rooms, pro-
vided that a suitable alarm device is fitted to prevent
persons being trapped in those rooms.
2.2.3 Height of door sills
2.2.3.1 The height above deck of sills in those door-
ways, in companionways, erections and machinery
casings which give direct access to parts of the deck
exposed to the weather and sea shall be at least ac-
cording to Table 2.2, first column.
The heights of sills on superstructure decks shall be at
least according to Table 2.2, second column.
2.2.3.2 Where operating experience has shown justi-
fication and on approval of the Administration, the
heights on the working deck, except in the doorways
giving direct access to machinery spaces, may be
reduced according to Table 2.2, third column.
Where operating experience has shown justification
and on approval of the Administration, the height of
sills on superstructure decks may be reduced to values
not less than defined in Table 2.2, forth column.
Chapter 8
Page 22
Section 2 Closure Conditions, Buoyancy and Stability I - Part 1
GL 2007

B
Table 2.1 Requirements for openings and closures
Closure requirements
Closure components
Working deck
Superstructure
deck
Working deck
for special
conditions
Superstructure
deck for special
conditions
Doors in watertight bulkheads watertight
Doors in enclosed superstructures weathertight
Hatchways weathertight
Openings for fishing operations weathertight watertight
1

Ventilator coamings weathertight open
1

Air pipes weathertight weathertight
Sidescuttles to spaces below
working deck, to spaces within
closed structures
watertight
Windows watertight
1
for coaming heights see Table 2.2


Table 2.2 Minimum coaming heights
Height requirements [mm]
Closure components
Working deck
Superstructure
deck
Working deck
for special
conditions
Superstructure
deck for special
conditions
Door sills
L = 12 m
L 24 m
12 m < L < 24 m

300
600
linear interpolation

300
300
linear interpolation

150
380
1
linear interpolation

150
150
1
linear interpolation
Hatchways
L = 12 m
L 24 m
12 m < L < 24 m

300
600
linear interpolation

300
300
linear interpolation

reduced
2

reduced
2
linear interpolation

reduced
2

reduced
2
linear interpolation
Openings for fish operations acc. to hatchways flush possible
3

Ventilator coamings
12 m L < 24 m
24 m L < 45 m
L 45 m

760
760
900

450
450
760

2500
4

3400
4

4500
4


1000
4

1700
4

2300
4

Air pipes 760 450 reduced
5
reduced
5

Sidescuttles,
windows
500
above deepest waterline
< 1000
fixed type sidescuttles
1
for doorways not giving access to machinery spaces, if operation experience justifies and with approval by the Administration
2
for covers other than wood, if operation experience has shown justification and with approval by the Administration
3
where essential for fishing operations, manhole cover, etc. may be fitted
4
closing appliances need not be fitted
5
reduction may be accepted by the Administration to avoid interference with fishing operations

I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 2 Closure Conditions, Buoyancy and Stability Chapter 8
Page 23

B
3. Openings for fishing operations
3.1 Deck openings which may be open during
fishing operations shall normally be arranged near the
vessels centreline. However, the Administration may
approve different arrangements if satisfied that the
safety of the vessel will not be impaired.
3.2 Fish flaps on stern trawlers shall be power
operated and capable of being controlled from any
position which provides an unobstructed view of the
operation of the flaps.
3.3 Where it is essential for fishing operations,
flush deck scuttles of the screw, bayonet or equiva-
lent type and manholes may be fitted, provided these
are capable of being closed watertight and such de-
vices shall be permanently attached to the adjacent
structure. Having regard to the size and disposition of
the openings and the design of the closing devices,
metal-to-metal closures may be fitted if the Admini-
stration is satisfied that they are effectively water-
tight.
3.4 Openings other than hatchways, like man-
holes and flush scuttles in the working or superstruc-
ture deck shall be protected by enclosed structures
fitted with weathertight doors or their equivalent.
Companionways shall be situated as close as practi-
cable to the centreline of the vessel.
4. Hatchway openings and hatch covers
4.1 General
4.1.1 All hatchways shall be provided with covers.
For vessels with 12 m L < 24 m hatchways which
may be opened during fishing operation shall nor-
mally be arranged near the vessel's centreline.
4.1.2 The height above deck of the hatchway
coamings shall be as defined in 2.2.3.1.
4.2 Wooden hatchway covers
4.2.1 The use of wooden hatchway covers is gen-
erally not recommended in view of the difficulty of
rapidly securing their weathertightness. However,
where fitted they shall be capable of being secured
weathertight.
4.2.2 The finished thickness of wood hatchway
covers shall include an allowance for abrasion due to
rough handling. In any case, the finished thickness of
these covers shall be at least 4 mm for each 100 mm
of unsupported span subject to a minimum of 40 mm
and the width of their bearing surface shall be at least
65 mm.
4.2.3 Arrangements for securing wood hatchway
covers weathertight shall be provided to the satisfac-
tion of the Administration.
4.3 Hatchway covers other than wood
4.3.1 Where operating experience has shown
justification, and on the approval by the Administra-
tion, the height of coamings according to 2.2.3.1 may
be reduced, or the coamings omitted entirely, pro-
vided that the safety of vessels is not thereby im-
paired. In this case, the hatchway openings shall be
kept as small as practicable and covers be perma-
nently attached by hinges or equivalent means and be
capable of being rapidly closed and battened down,
or by equally effective arrangements to the satisfac-
tion of the Administration.
4.3.2 For the purpose of strength calculations, it
shall be assumed that hatchway covers are subjected
to the weight of cargo intended to be carried on them
or to the following static loads, whichever is the
greater:
10,0 kN/m
2
for vessels with L < 24 m
17,0 kN/m
2
for vessels with L 100 m
linear interpolation for values of L in between
The Administration may reduce the loads to not less
than 75 % of the above values for covers to hatch-
ways situated on the superstructure deck in a position
abaft a point located 0,25 L from the forward perpen-
dicular.
4.3.3 Where the covers are made of normal hull
structural steel, the maximum stress calculated ac-
cording to 4.3.2 multiplied by 4,25 shall not exceed
the minimum ultimate strength of the material. Under
these loads the deflections shall not be more than
0,0028 times the span.
4.3.4 Covers made of materials other than normal
hull structural steel shall be at least of equivalent
strength to those of normal hull structural steel and
their construction shall be of sufficient stiffness en-
suring weathertightness under the loads specified in
4.3.2.
4.3.5 Hatch covers shall be fitted with clamping
devices and gaskets sufficient to ensure weathertight-
ness or other equivalent arrangements to the satisfac-
tion of the Administration.
5. Machinery space openings
5.1 Machinery space openings shall be framed
and enclosed by casings of a strength equivalent to
the adjacent superstructure. External access openings
therein shall be fitted with doors complying with the
requirements of Table 2.2 or with hatch covers other
than wood complying with the provisions of 4.3.
5.2 Openings other than access openings shall
be fitted with covers of equivalent strength to the
unpierced structure, permanently attached thereto and
capable of being closed weathertight.
Chapter 8
Page 24
Section 2 Closure Conditions, Buoyancy and Stability I - Part 1
GL 2007

B
6. Ventilators
6.1 General
Ventilators shall have coamings of equivalent strength
to the adjacent structure and shall be capable of being
closed weathertight by closing appliances permanently
attached to the ventilators or adjacent structure. Where
the coaming of any ventilator exceeds 900 mm in
height it shall be specially supported.
6.2 Fishing vessels with 12 m L < 24 m
6.2.1 Ventilators shall be arranged as close to the
vessels centreline as possible and, where practicable,
shall extend through the top of a deck erection or
companion way.
6.2.2 On the working deck the height above deck
of coamings of ventilators other than machinery space
ventilators shall not be less than 760 mm and on su-
perstructure decks not less than 450 mm. When the
height of such ventilators may interfere with the work-
ing of the vessel their coaming heights may be re-
duced to the satisfaction of the competent Authority,
see Table 2.2.
6.2.3 The height above deck of machinery space
ventilator openings shall be to the satisfaction of the
competent Authority.
6.2.4 Closing appliances need not be fitted to venti-
lators the coamings of which extend more than 2,5 m
above the working deck or more than 1,0 m above a
deckhouse top or superstructure deck.
6.3 Fishing vessels with 24 m L < 45 m
6.3.1 The height above deck of ventilator coam-
ings, other than machinery space ventilator coamings,
shall be at least 760 mm on the working deck and at
least 450 mm on superstructure decks, see Table 2.2.
6.3.2 Closing appliances need not be fitted to venti-
lators the coamings of which extend to more than 3,4
m above the working deck or more than 1,7 m above
the superstructure deck.
6.4 Fishing vessels with L 45 m
6.4.1 The height above deck of ventilator coam-
ings, other than machinery space ventilator coamings,
shall be at least 900 mm on the working deck and at
least 760 mm on the superstructure deck, see Table
2.2.
6.4.2 Closing appliances need not be fitted to venti-
lators the coamings of which extend to more than
4,5 m above the working deck or more than 2,3 m
above the superstructure deck.
6.5 Machinery space ventilators
If the Administration is satisfied that it is unlikely that
water will enter the vessel through machinery space
ventilators, closing appliances to such ventilators may
be omitted.
7. Air pipes
7.1 The height of air pipes above deck to the
point where the water may have access below shall be
at least 760 mm on the working deck and at least 450
mm on the superstructure deck. The Administration
may accept reduction of the height of an air pipe to
avoid interference with the fishing operations, see
Table 2.2.
7.2 Where air pipes to tanks and void spaces
below deck extend above the working or the super-
structure decks, the exposed parts of the pipes shall be
of strength equivalent to the adjacent structures and
fitted with appropriate protection. Openings of air
pipes shall be provided with means of closing, perma-
nently attached to the pipe or the adjacent structure.
8. Sounding devices for fishing vessels with
L 24 m
8.1 Sounding devices shall be fitted for:
all tanks and cofferdams
bilges of those compartments which are not
readily accessible at all times during the voyage
8.2 Where sounding pipes are fitted, their upper
ends shall be extended to a readily accessible position
and, where practicable, above the working deck. Their
openings shall be provided with permanently attached
means of closing. Sounding pipes which are not ex-
tended above the working deck shall be fitted with
automatic self-closing devices.
9. Inlets and discharges
9.1 Discharges led through the shell either from
spaces below the working deck or from enclosed su-
perstructures or deckhouses on the working deck fitted
with doors complying with the requirements of 2.2
shall be fitted with efficient and accessible means for
preventing water from passing inboard. Normally each
separate discharge shall have an automatic non-return
valve with a positive means of closing from a readily
accessible position. Such a valve is not required if the
Administration considers that the entry of water into
the vessel through the opening is not likely to lead to
dangerous flooding and that the thickness of the pip-
ing is sufficient. The means for operating the positive
action valve shall be provided with an indicator show-
ing whether the valve is open or closed.
For fishing vessels with 12 m L < 24 m the open
inboard end of any discharge system shall be above
the deepest operating waterline at an angle of heel
satisfactory to the Administration.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 2 Closure Conditions, Buoyancy and Stability Chapter 8
Page 25

B
9.2 In (manned) machinery spaces main and
auxiliary sea inlets and discharges essential for the
operation of machinery may be controlled locally. The
controls shall be accessible and shall be provided with
indicators showing whether the valves are open or
closed.
For fishing vessels with 12 m L < 24 m suitable
warning devices shall be incorporated to indicate leak-
age of water into the space.
9.3 Fittings attached to the shell and the valves
required by these Rules shall be of steel, bronze or
other approved ductile material. All pipes between the
shell and the valves shall be of steel, except that in
vessels constructed of material other than steel, other
suitable materials may be approved by the Administra-
tion.
9.4 Scuppers sufficient in number and size to
provide effective drainage of water are to be fitted in
the weather deck and in the working deck within
weathertight closed superstructures and deckhouses.
Decks within closed superstructures are to be drained
to the bilge. Scuppers from superstructures and deck-
houses which are not closed weathertight are to be led
outside.
10. Sidescuttles, windows, skylights
10.1 In general all windows have to be built in
accordance with ISO standards 1751 (side scuttles)
and/or 3903 (rectangular windows) respectively and
are to be tested accordingly in the presence of a GL
Surveyor.
10.2 For all fishing vessels sidescuttles to spaces
below the working deck and to spaces within the en-
closed structure on that deck shall be fitted with
hinged deadlights capable of being closed watertight.
10.2.1 For fishing vessels with L < 24 m deadlights
or a suitable number of storm shutters shall be pro-
vided where there is no method of preventing water
from entering the hull through a broken window or
sidescuttle.
10.3 No sidescuttles shall be fitted in such a posi-
tion that its sill is less than 500 mm above the deepest
operating waterline.
10.4 For fishing vessels with L 24 m sidescuttles
fitted less than 1000 mm above the deepest operating
waterline shall be of the fixed type.
10.5 Sidescuttles, together with their glasses and
deadlights shall be of an approved construction (to the
satisfaction of the Administration for fishing vessels
with L < 24 m). Those prone to be damaged by fishing
gear shall be suitably protected.
10.6 Toughened safety glass or its equivalent shall
be used for the wheelhouse windows.
11. Freeing ports
11.1 Where bulwarks on weather parts of the
working deck form wells, the minimum freeing port
area A on each side of the vessel for each well on the
working deck shall be determined in relation to the
length and the bulwark height in the well as follows:
A = K l [m
2
]
l = length of well [m]
= not to be taken as greater than 70 % of L
K = 0,035 for vessels with L = 12 m
= 0,07 for vessels with L 24 m
= to be defined by linear interpolation for
lengths in between
Where the bulwark is more than 1,2 m in average
height, the required area A shall be increased by
0,004 m
2
per metre length of the well and for each 100
mm difference in height.
Where the bulwark is less than 0,9 m in average
height, the required area A shall be decreased by
0,004 m
2
per metre length of the well and for each
100 mm difference in height.
11.2 The freeing port area calculated according to
11.1 shall be increased where the Administration con-
siders that the vessel's sheer is not sufficient to ensure
that the deck is rapidly and effectively freed of water.
11.3 Subject to the approval of the Administration
the minimum freeing port area for each well on the
superstructure deck shall not be less than one half the
area A given in 11.1.
On vessels with L < 24 m, where the superstructure
deck forms a working deck for fishing operations the
minimum area on each side shall not be less than 75
per cent of the area A.
11.4 Freeing ports shall be so arranged along the
length of bulwarks as to ensure that the deck is freed
from water most rapidly and effectively. Lower edges
of freeing ports shall be as near the deck as practica-
ble.
11.5 Poundboards and means for stowage of the
fishing gear shall be arranged so that the effectiveness
of freeing ports will not be impaired. Poundboards
shall be constructed that they can be locked in position
when in use and shall not hamper the discharge of
shipped water.
11.6 Freeing ports over 300 mm in depth shall be
fitted with bars spaced not more than 230 mm and not
less than 150 mm apart or provided with other suitable
protective arrangements. Freeing port covers, if fitted,
shall be of approved construction. If devices are con-
sidered necessary for locking freeing port covers dur-
ing fishing operations they shall be to the satisfaction
Chapter 8
Page 26
Section 2 Closure Conditions, Buoyancy and Stability I - Part 1
GL 2007

B
of the Administration and easily operable from a read-
ily accessible position.
11.7 In vessels intended to operate in areas subject
to icing, covers and protective arrangements for free-
ing ports shall be capable of being easily removed to
restrict ice accretion. The size of openings and means
provided for removal of these protective arrangements
shall be to the satisfaction of the Administration.
11.8 On vessels with L < 24 m where wells or
cockpits are fitted in the working deck or superstruc-
ture deck with their bottom above the deepest operat-
ing waterline, effective non-return means of drainage
overboard shall be provided. Where bottoms of such
wells or cockpits are below the deepest operating
waterline, drainage to the bilge will have to be pro-
vided.
C. Draught Marking
1. A maximum permissible operating draught
shall be approved by GL and shall be such that, in the
associated operating condition, the stability criteria
according to E. and F. are satisfied.
2. Datum draught marks shall be provided at the
bow and stern, port and starboard and be adequate in
number for assessing the condition and trim of the
vessel. The marks shall be permanent and easily to be
read.
The draught to which marks relate shall be indicated
above the mark on the hull.
D. Intact Buoyancy
1. All fishing vessels shall have a sufficient
reserve of buoyancy at the design waterline to meet
the intact stability requirements of this Section. This
reserve of buoyancy shall be calculated by including
only those compartments which are:
watertight
accepted as having scantlings and arrangements
adequate to maintain their watertight integrity
situated in locations below a boundary, which
may be a watertight deck or an equivalent struc-
ture of a non-watertight deck covered by a
weathertight structure as defined in 3.
2. Arrangements shall be provided for checking
the watertight integrity of those compartments taken
into account in 1.
3. Where entry of water into structures above
the boundary as defined in 1., third item, would sig-
nificantly influence the stability and buoyancy of the
vessel, such structure shall be:
of adequate strength to maintain the weather-
tight integrity and be fitted with weathertight
closing appliances; or
provided with adequate drainage arrangements;
or
an equivalent combination of both above meas-
ures
4. The means for closing openings in the
boundaries of weathertight structures shall be such as
to maintain weathertight integrity in all operational
conditions.
E. Intact Stability
1. General
Adequate stability of the fishing vessel shall be
proven. Insofar as fishing gear, vessel type and pro-
pulsion plant installation do not demonstrate any un-
usual characteristics, the criteria listed below are used
for determining stability for the operating conditions
defined in 3.1.
Note
Compliance with the stability criteria does not ensure
immunity against capsizing. Good seamanship is
therefore an essential prerequisite for a stability-safe
fishing vessel.
2. Stability Criteria
2.1 Minimum stability criteria
The following minimum stability criteria have to be
fulfilled unless GL is satisfied that operating experi-
ence justifies alterations therefrom:
the area under the righting lever curve (GZ
curve) shall not be less than 0,055 metre-radian
up to = 30
the area under the righting lever curve shall not
be less than 0,09 metre-radian up to = 40 or
the angle of flooding
f
(angle of heel at which
non-weathertight openings immerse; small
openings through which progressive flooding
cannot take place need not to be considered as
open )
the area under the righting lever curve (GZ
curve) between the angles of heel 30 and 40 or
between 30 and the angle of flooding
f
, if this
angle is less than 40, shall not be less than 0,03
metre-radians
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 2 Closure Conditions, Buoyancy and Stability Chapter 8
Page 27

E
the righting lever GZ shall be at least 0,20 m at
an angle of heel 30
the maximum righting arm shall occur at an
angle of heel preferably exceeding 30, but not
less than 25
the initial metacentric height GM
0
shall be not
less than 0,35 m for single deck vessels
the initial metacentric height GM
0
may be re-
duced for vessels with complete superstructures
and with L 70 m, but shall in no case be less
than 0,15 m
2.2 If any of these criteria are not complied with,
the corresponding condition may be accepted by GL if
proof of equivalent safety is provided.
2.3 Simplified stability criterion for L < 30 m
2.3.1 For decked fishing vessels with a length L <
30 m, the following approximate formula for the
minimum metacentric height GM
min
can be used as a
criterion for all operating conditions, but it is not a
replacement of the criteria according to 2.1.:
min wl
wl wl
wl
wl
2
s
f f
GM 0, 53 2 B 0, 075 0, 37 0,82
B B
l B
0, 014 0, 032
L

= + +

H

B
wl
= extreme breadth of the vessel in the waterline
in maximum load condition [m]
L
wl
= length of the vessel in the waterline in maxi-
mum load condition [m]
l
s
= actual length of the enclosed superstructure
extending from side to side of the vessel [m]
f = smallest freeboard measured vertically from
the top of freeboard deck at side to the actual
waterline
2.3.2 The above formula is applicable for vessels
with the following parameters:
0,02 < f /B
wl
< 0,20
l
s
/L
wl
< 0,60
1,75 < B
wl
/ H < 2,15
sheer fore and aft standard sheer according to
ICLL, Reg. 38(8)
superstructures with a height 1,8 m are to be
included
For vessels with parameters outside of the above lim-
its the formula should be applied with special care.
3. Conditions for stability
The proof of adequate stability shall be provided for at
least the following conditions.
3.1 Operating conditions
3.1.1 The number and type of operating conditions
to be considered shall be to the satisfaction of GL and
shall include the following as appropriate:
departure for the fishing grounds with full fuel,
stores, ice, fishing gear, etc.
departure from the fishing grounds with full
catch
arrival at home port with full catch and 10 %
stores, fuel, etc.
arrival at home port with 10 % stores, fuel, etc.
and a minimum catch of 20 % of full catch
Under all other operating conditions, including those
which produce the lowest values of the stability pa-
rameters, the minimum stability criteria according to
2. have to be met.
3.1.2 For the operating conditions defined in 3.1.1
the calculations shall include the following:
allowance for the weight of the wet fishing nets
and tackle, etc. on deck
allowance for the ice accretion according to 3.7
homogeneous distribution of the catch, unless
this is inconsistent with practice
catch on deck, if anticipated, in operating condi-
tions for departure of the fishing grounds with
full catch and arrival at home port with 10 %
stores, etc.
water ballast if carried in tanks which are espe-
cially provided for this purpose or in other tanks
also equipped for carrying water ballast
allowance for free surface effect of liquids
3.2 GL reserve the right to deviate from the a.m.
regulations when particular circumstances warrant
this. This will especially be the case for a change in
the vessels mode or area of operation which effect the
stability considerations of this Section.
3.3 Free liquid surfaces
3.3.1 Tanks
The contribution of free liquid surfaces to the heeling
moment has to be considered.
Note
If no other information is available, the following
densities of liquids may be used:
freshwater 1,000 t/m
3

Chapter 8
Page 28
Section 2 Closure Conditions, Buoyancy and Stability I - Part 1
GL 2007

E
bilge water 1,005 t/m
3

waste water 1,050 t/m
3

fuel 0,830 t/m
3

lubricants 0,900 t/m
3

fire extinguishing foams 1,150 t/m
3

3.3.2 Flooding of fish holds
The angle of heel at which progressive flooding of fish
holds could occur through hatches which remain open
during fishing operations and which cannot be rapidly
closed shall be at least 20 unless the stability criteria
of 2. can be satisfied with the respective fish holds
partially or completely flooded.
The catch shall be properly secured against shifting by
portable fish-hold divisions or other adequate means
to avoid dangerous trim or heel of the vessel.
3.4 Particular fishing methods
Fishing vessels engaged in particular fishing methods
where additional external forces are imposed on the
vessel during fishing operations, shall meet the stabil-
ity criteria of 2. also under such conditions.
Particular care should be taken when the pull from the
fishing gear results in dangerous heel angles. This may
occur when fishing gear fastens onto an underwater
obstacle or when handling fish gear, particularly on
purse seiners, or when one of the trawl wires tears off.
The heel angles caused by the fishing gear in these
situations shall be eliminated by employing devices
which can relieve or remove excessive forces applied
through the fishing gear. Such devices shall not im-
pose a danger to the vessel through operating in cir-
cumstances other than those for which they were in-
tended.
3.5 Severe wind and rolling (weather crite-
rion)
3.5.1 Fishing vessels with L 45 m
3.5.1.1 Scope
Fishing vessels shall be able to withstand, to the satis-
faction of GL, the effect of severe wind and rolling in
associated sea conditions taking account of the sea-
sonal weather conditions, the sea states in which the
vessel will operate, type of vessel and its mode of
operation.
The criterion supplements the stability criteria given in
2. The more stringent criteria of 2. and the weather
criterion shall govern the minimum requirements for
fishing vessels of L 45 m having large windage area.
3.5.1.2 Weather criterion
3.5.1.2.1 The ability of the vessel to withstand the
combined effects of beam wind and rolling shall be
demonstrated for each standard condition of loading
with reference to Fig. 2.1 as follows:
the vessel is subjected to a steady wind pressure
acting perpendicular to the vessels centreline
which results in a steady wind heeling lever l
w1

from the resultant angle of equilibrium
0
, the
vessel is assumed to roll owing to wave action
to an angle of roll
1
to windward. Attention
shall be paid to the effect of steady wind so that
excessive resultant angles of heel are avoided
Note
The angle of heel under action of steady wind
0

should be limited to a certain angle to the satisfaction
of GL. As a guide 16 or 80 % of the angle of deck
edge immersion, whichever is less, is suggested.
a
b
L
e
v
e
r
Q
2
Q
c
Q
0
Q
1
GZ
Angle of heel
l
w2
l
w1

Fig. 2.1 Severe wind and rolling
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 2 Closure Conditions, Buoyancy and Stability Chapter 8
Page 29

E
the vessel is then subjected to a gust of wind
pressure which results in a gust wind heeling
lever l
w2

under the circumstances area b shall be equal to
or greater than area a
free surface effects, see 3.3 shall be accounted
for in the standard conditions of loading as de-
fined in 3.1
The angles in Fig. 2.1 are defined as follows:

0
= angle of heel under action of steady wind

1
= angle of roll to windward due to wave action

2
= angle of down flooding
f
or 50 or
c
,
whichever is less, where

f
= angle of heel at which openings in the hull,
superstructures or deckhouses which cannot
be closed weathertight, immerse. In applying
this criterion, small openings through which
progressive flooding cannot take place need
not be considered as open

c
= angle of second intercept between wind heel-
ing lever and GZ curve
3.5.1.2.2 The wind heeling levers l
w1
and l
w2
referred
to in 3.5.1.2.1 are constant values at all angles of in-
clination and shall be calculated as follows:

w1 w
Z
l p A [m]
1000 g
=


l
w2
= 1,5 l
w1
[m]
p
w
= wind pressure [N/m
2
]
= 504 N/m
2

= the value may be reduced for vessels in re-
stricted service, subject to approval by GL
A = projected lateral area of the portion of the
vessel and deck cargo, if applicable, above
the waterline [m
2
]
Z = vertical distance from the centre of A to the
centre of the underwater lateral area or ap-
proximately to a point at one half of the
draught [m]
g = 9,81 m/s
2

= displacement according to Section 1, D.
3.5.1.2.3 The angle of roll
1
referred to in 3.5.1.2.1
shall be calculated as follows. For vessels with anti-
rolling devices the angle of roll shall be determined
without taking into account the effect of such systems.

1 1 2
109 k X X r s [ ] =
k = factor as follows:
= 1,0 for a round-bilged vessel having no bilge
or bar keels
= 0,7 for a vessel having sharp bilges
= as shown in Table 2.5 for a vessel having
bilge keels, a bar keel or both
X
1
= factor as shown in Table 2.3
X
2
= factor as shown in Table 2.4
r =
d
OG
0, 73
T

OG = distance between the centre of gravity and the
waterline [m]
the sign + is to be used for the centre of grav-
ity above the waterline
the sign is to be used for the centre of grav-
ity below the waterline
T
d
= mean moulded draught of the vessel [m]
s = factor as shown in Table 2.6
Intermediate values in the Tables 2.3 to 2.6 shall be
obtained by linear interpolation.
Table 2.3 Values for factor X
1

B/T
d
X
1

2,4 1,00
2,5 0,98
2,6 0,96
2,7 0,95
2,8 0,93
2,9 0,91
3,0 0,90
3,1 0,88
3,2 0,86
3,3 0,84
3,4 0,82
3,5 0,80

Table 2.4 Values for factor X
2

C
B
X
2

0,45 0,75
0,50 0,82
0,55 0,89
0,60 0,95
0,65 0,97
0,70 1,00

Chapter 8
Page 210
Section 2 Closure Conditions, Buoyancy and Stability I - Part 1
GL 2007

E
Table 2.5 Values for factor k
(A
k
100) / (L B) k
0 1,00
1,0 0,98
1,5 0,95
2,0 0,88
2,5 0,79
3,0 0,74
3,5 0,72
4,0 0,70


Table 2.6 Values for factor s
T s
6 0,100
7 0,098
8 0,093
12 0,065
14 0,053
16 0,044
18 0,038
20 0,035


The parameters in the Tables are defined as follows:
T = rolling period [s]
=
2 C
GM
B

C =
wl
m
0, 043 L 0, 023
0, 373
T 100

+
B

L
wl
= waterline length [m]
T
m
= mean moulded draught of the vessel [m]
A
k
= total overall area of the bilge keels or area of
the lateral projection of the bar keel, or sum
of these areas [m
2
]
GM = metacentric height corrected for free surface
effect [m]
3.5.2 Fishing vessels with 24 m L < 45 m
For fishing vessels with a length 24 m L < 45 m the
value of the wind pressure p
w
can be taken from Table
2.7.
Table 2.7 Wind pressure
h [m]
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 and over
p
w
[N/m
2
] 316 386 429 460 485 504
1
h is the vertical distance from the centre of the projected
vertical area of the vessel to the waterline


3.6 Water on deck
3.6.1 Fishing vessels shall be able to withstand, to
the satisfaction of GL, the effect of water on deck. The
seasonal weather conditions and the sea states in
which the vessel will operate, the type of vessel and
the mode of operation have to be taken into account.
3.6.2 Bow height
3.6.2.1 The bow height H
B
is defined as the mini-
mum vertical distance from the deepest waterline to
the top of the highest exposed deck measured at FP.
3.6.2.2 The bow height shall be sufficient, to the
satisfaction of GL, to prevent excessive shipping of
water and shall be determined taking account of the
seasonal weather conditions, the sea states in which
the vessel will operate, the type of the vessel and its
mode of operation.
3.6.2.3 Guidance for calculating bow height
The determination of the required bow height H
B
may
be based upon the following formula:

B 1
2
H k 1 [m]
k

= +


L
L
k
1
, k
2
= coefficients depending upon areas of opera-
tion according to Table 2.8.
3.6.2.4 Where the bow height required is obtained by
sheer, this shall extend from the stem for a length of at
least 0,15 L abaft FP. Where it is obtained by a fore-
castle, such forecastle shall extend from the stem at
least 0,07 L abaft FP.
Table 2.8 Definition of coefficients k
1
and k
2

Area of operation L k
1
k
2

24 m L < 110 m 0,09 - 270
Extreme conditions with sig-
nificant wave height 8 m
L 110 m 4,959 / L 600
24 m L < 110 m 0,117 - 220
Extreme conditions with sig-
nificant wave height > 8 m
L 110 m 5,990 / L 1484

I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 2 Closure Conditions, Buoyancy and Stability Chapter 8
Page 211

E
If the length of the forecastle exceeds 0,15 L due con-
sideration should be given to the fitting of a bulkhead
with adequate closing appliances. If no such bulkhead
is fitted adequate arrangements should be provided for
removing water from the open forecastle.
3.6.2.5 Where a bulwark is fitted this may be taken
into account for a height of 1 m, provided that the
bulwark extends from the stem to a point at least 0,15
L abaft FP.
3.6.2.6 When a vessel is always trimmed by the stern
in service conditions, the minimum trim may be al-
lowed in the calculation of bow height.
Note
3.6.3 Guidance for the calculation of the effect of
water on deck
3.6.3.1 The ability of the vessel to withstand the
heeling effect due to the presence of water on deck
should be demonstrated by a quasi-static method.
According to Fig. 2.2 the following condition shall be
satisfied with the vessel in the worst operating condi-
tion:
C
wod
= A
a
/ A
b
1
A
a
= area between heeling lever curve due to wa-
ter on deck and righting lever GZ curve, see
Fig. 2.2
A
b
= area below righting lever GZ curve and be-
tween heeling lever curve due to water on
deck and an angle of inclination = 40 or
the angle of flooding
f
,whichever is less
3.6.3.2 For the calculation of the static heeling mo-
ment due to water on deck M
w
the following assump-
tions should be made:
at the beginning the vessel is in the upright po-
sition
during heeling, trim and displacement are con-
stant and equal to the values for the vessel with-
out water on deck
the effect of freeing ports should be ignored
the deck well is filled to the top of the bulwark at
its lowest point and the vessel heeled up to an
angle at which this point is immersed
3.6.3.3 For the determination of the dynamic heeling
moment the following formula should be used:
M
wod
= K M
w

K = coefficient for dynamic effects taking in ac-
count for rolling period, dynamic effects of
water flow, disposition and configuration of
deck wells and deckhouses, area of opera-
tion, etc.
= 1,0 for static approach
> 1,0 for angle of deck immersion
D
< 10 -
15, or
for angle of bulwark top immersion
B
<
20 - 25
< 1,0 for
D
> 20 , or
for
B
> 30
3.6.3.4 Other methods for the calculation of the ef-
fect of water on deck using the dynamic approach
have to be approved by GL.
L
e
v
e
r
Angle of inclination
A
a
Q
B
Q
f
or 40
GZ =
M
D
GZ
wod
=
M
wod
D
A
b

Fig. 2.2 Heeling and righting levers for water on deck
Chapter 8
Page 212
Section 2 Closure Conditions, Buoyancy and Stability I - Part 1
GL 2007

E
3.7 Ice accretion
3.7.1 Fishing vessels intended for operation in
areas where ice accretion is known to occur shall be:
designed to minimize the accretion of ice
equipped with such means of removing ice as
GL may require
3.7.2 Standard assumptions
For fishing vessels operating in areas defined in 3.7.3
the following ice loads shall be assumed:
0,30 kN/m
2
on exposed weatherdecks and
gangways
0,075 kN/m
2
for the projected lateral area of
each side of the vessel above the
waterline
The projected lateral area of discontinuous surfaces of
rail, spars (except masts) and rigging of vessels having
no sails and the projected lateral area of other small
objects shall be computed by increasing the total pro-
jected area of continuous surfaces by 5 % and the
static moments of this area by 10 %.
3.7.3 Special icing areas
3.7.3.1 Loads in excess of twice the standard loads
defined in 3.7.2 may be expected in following area:
the area north of latitude 43 N bounded in the
west by the North American coast and east by
the rhumb line running from latitude 43 N lon-
gitude 48 W to latitude 63 N longitude 28 W
and then along longitude 28 W
3.7.3.2 One half to twice the standard loads defined
in 3.7.2 may be expected in the following areas:
the area north of latitude 6530 N, between
longitude 28 W and the west coast of Iceland;
north of the north coast of Iceland; north of the
rhumb line running from latitude 66 N, longi-
tude 15 W to latitude 7330 N, longitude 15 E,
north of latitude 7330 N between longitude
15 E and 35 E, and east of longitude 35 E
north of latitude 56 N in the Baltic Sea
all sea areas north of the North American conti-
nent, west of the areas defined above and in
3.7.3.1
the Bering and Okhotsk Seas and the Tartary
Street during the icing season
south of latitude 60 S
F. Subdivision and Damage Stability
1. Bulkheads
1.1 At least the following watertight bulkheads
are to be fitted in all fishing vessels:
one collision bulkhead
one afterpeak bulkhead
one bulkhead at each end of the machinery
space
1.2 Collision bulkhead
1.2.1 The collision bulkhead is a watertight bulk-
head up to the working deck in the forepart of the
vessel located at the following distance x [m] aft from
FP:
for vessels with L 45 m: 0,05 L x 0,08
L
for vessels with L < 45 m: 0,05 L x 0,05
L + 1,35 m
in any case: 2,0 m x
Where any part of the underwater body extends for-
ward of FP, e.g. a bulbous bow, the distance x defined
above shall be measured from a point at mid-length of
the extension forward of FP or from a point 0,015 L
forward of FP, whichever is less.
1.2.2 The bulkhead may have steps or recesses
provided they are within the limits defined in 1.2.1.
1.2.3 Where a long forward superstructure is fitted,
the collision bulkhead shall be extended weathertight
to the deck next above the working deck. The exten-
sion need not be fitted directly above the bulkhead
below provided it is located at a distance x defined in
1.2.1 and the part of the deck which forms the step is
made effectively weathertight.
1.2.4 Pipes piercing the collision bulkhead shall be
fitted with suitable valves operable from above the
working deck and the valve chest shall be secured at
the collision bulkhead inside the forepiek. No door,
manhole, ventilation duct or any other opening shall
be fitted in the collision bulkhead below the working
deck.
The number of openings in the collision bulkhead
above the working deck shall be reduced to the mini-
mum compatible with the design and normal operation
of the vessel. Such openings shall be capable of being
closed weathertight.
2. Double Bottom
2.1 At least for fishing vessels with a length L
75 m a double bottom shall be fitted extending from
the collision bulkhead to the afterpeak bulkhead.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 2 Closure Conditions, Buoyancy and Stability Chapter 8
Page 213

F
2.2 The double bottom has to protect the vessel's
bottom up to the turn of the bilge. For this purpose, the
intersecting line of the outer edge of the margin plate
with the shell plating is not to be lower at any part
than a horizontal plane, passing through the point of
intersection with the frame line amidships of a trans-
verse diagonal line inclined 25 degrees to the base line
and cutting the base line at B/2 from the centreline of
the vessel, see Fig. 2.3.
2.3 The double bottom need not be fitted in way
of deep tanks, provided that the efficiency of the wa-
tertight subdivision is not impaired by such an ar-
rangement.
2.4 The bottoms of drain sumps are to be situated
at a distance of at least 460 mm from the base line.
Only above the horizontal plane determined from 2.2,
the bottoms of drain wells may be led to the shell
plating. Exemptions for the depth of drain wells may
also be granted in shaft tunnels and pipe tunnels.
inner bottom
baseline
25
B/2
CL
S
well
minimum height of inner bottom (measured from
baseline)
460 mm (measured from baseline)

Fig. 2.3 Double bottom with drain sumps location
3. Damage stability
3.1 General
For fishing vessels with a length L 100 m where the
total number of persons carried on board is 100 or
more, a damage stability investigation with flooding
of any one compartment between adjacent transverse
bulkheads is required. The vessel shall be capable of
remaining afloat with positive stability.
3.2 Assumptions
3.2.1 Damage extensions
The assumed extent of damage shall be as follows:
the vertical extent of damage in all cases is as-
sumed to be from the base line upwards without
limits
the transverse extent of damage is equal to B
wl
/5
measured inboard from the side of the vessel in
y-direction at the level of the deepest operating
waterline
if a damage of a lesser extent than in the two
first conditions results in a more severe condi-
tion, such lesser extent shall be assumed
if there are steps or recesses in a transverse
bulkhead of no more than 3,05 m in length
within the transverse extent of assumed damage,
such transverse bulkhead shall be considered in-
tact and the adjacent compartments may be
flooded singly
if the steps or recesses in a transverse bulkhead
exceed 3,05 m, the two compartments adjacent
to this bulkhead shall be considered as flooded
the step form at the junction of the afterpeak
bulkhead and the afterpeak tank top shall not be
regarded as a step in the bulkhead
where a main transverse bulkhead is situated
within the transverse extent of assumed damage
and is stepped in way of a double bottom or side
tank by more than 3,05 m, the double bottom or
side tanks adjacent to the stepped portion of the
main transverse bulkhead shall be considered as
flooded simultaneously
where bulkheads are spaced at a distance less
than L
2/3
, one or more of these bulkheads
shall be assumed as non-existent in order to
achieve the minimum spacing between bulk-
heads
if pipes, ducts or tunnels are situated within the
assumed transverse extent of damage, arrange-
ments are to be made so that progressive flood-
ing cannot thereby extend to compartments
other than those assumed to be floodable in the
calculation for each case of damage
where operating experience has shown that other
values are more appropriate, those values may
be agreed with GL
3.2.2 Permeability
For damage stability calculations, the permeability for
each space or part of a space shall be used as set out in
Table 2.9.
Direct calculation of permeability shall be used where
a more onerous condition results, and may be used
where a less onerous condition results compared with
Table 2.9.
Chapter 8
Page 214
Section 2 Closure Conditions, Buoyancy and Stability I - Part 1
GL 2007

F
Table 2.9 Values of permeability
Definition of spaces Permeability [%]
Control stations, accommoda-
tion rooms, kitchens, pantries,
workshops
95
Machinery and ventilation
rooms
85
Storage rooms, refrigerating
rooms
60
Tanks, bunkers, cells 0 or 95
1

Void spaces 95
1
whichever results in more severe requirements

3.3 Conditions of equilibrium
The final waterline after damage to anyone compart-
ment shall be either:
the line of openings at which progressive flood-
ing to spaces below would occur or according to
requirements defined by GL
the line to the after end of the top of the poop
superstructure deck at the centreline, subject to
the first four conditions of 3.4.
Unsymmetrical flooding shall be kept to a minimum
consistent with effective arrangements. Where it is
necessary to correct large angles of heel, the means
adopted shall, where practicable, be self-acting.
3.4 Stability criteria
The fishing vessel is considered to survive the condi-
tions of damage specified in 3.2.1 provided the vessel
remains afloat in a condition of stable equilibrium
according to 3.3 and satisfies the following criteria for
residual stability:
the positive residual righting lever curve shall
have a minimum range of 20 beyond the angle
of equilibrium
a residual righting lever is to be obtained within
the range of the positive stability of at least
0,1 m
the area under the righting lever curve shall be at
least 0,0175 metre-radians, measured from the
angle of equilibrium to the angle at which pro-
gressive flooding occurs
the angle of heel in the final condition of flood-
ing shall not exceed 20
the initial metacentric height of the damaged
vessel in the final condition of flooding for the
upright position shall be positive and not less
than 50 mm
Relaxation from these damage stability requirements
will be permitted by GL only if the proportions, ar-
rangements and other characteristics of the vessel are
more favourable to stability after damage.
G. Inclining Test
1. Every vessel shall undergo an inclining test
upon its completion and the actual displacement and
position of the centre of gravity shall be determined
for the light ship condition.
2. Where alterations are made to the vessel
affecting its light ship condition and the position of the
centre of gravity, the vessel shall, if GL considers this
necessary, be re-inclined and the stability information
revised.
3. GL may allow the inclining test of an indi-
vidual vessel to be dispensed with provided basic
stability data are available from the inclining test of a
sister vessel and it is shown to the satisfaction of GL
that reliable stability information of the exempted
vessel can be obtained from such basic data.
4. A report of each inclination test carried out in
accordance with this Section or of each calculation of
the lightship condition particulars shall be submitted
to GL for approval. The approved report shall be
placed on board of the vessel in the custody of the
skipper and should incorporate such additions and
amendments as GL may require in any particular case.
H. Stability Information
1. General
1.1 Suitable stability information shall be sup-
plied to enable the skipper to assess with ease and
certainty the stability of the vessel under various oper-
ating conditions. Such information shall include spe-
cific instructions to the skipper warning him of those
operating conditions which could adversely affect
either the stability or the trim of the vessel. A copy of
the stability information shall be submitted to GL for
approval.
1.2 The approved stability information shall be
kept on board, readily accessible at all times and in-
spected at the periodical surveys of the vessel to en-
sure that it has been approved for the actual operating
conditions.
1.3 Where alterations are made to a vessel affect-
ing its stability, revised stability calculations shall be
prepared and submitted to GL for approval. If GL
decides that the stability information has to be revised,
the new information shall be supplied to the skipper
and the superseded information removed.
2. Scope for intact stability
The following information has to be provided.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 2 Closure Conditions, Buoyancy and Stability Chapter 8
Page 215

H
2.1 Basic information
stability calculations including GZ curves of the
operating conditions defined in E.3.1
instructions warning of conditions critical from
stability standpoint, e.g. instructions to keep the
ballast tanks full when necessary for adequate
stability
maximum permissible operating draught associ-
ated with each operating condition
when appropriate, minimum required operating
draught
2.2 Information having regard to the type of
vessel, service, etc.
2.2.1 If GZ calculations are intended:
information for determination of weights, posi-
tions of centres of gravity, free surface effects of
tanks, fish holds and pounds
information relating to form stability and hydro-
static parameters
displacement and disposition of centres of grav-
ity of light ship condition with regard to perma-
nent ballast
2.2.2 When rolling tests are used:
information for the determination of metacentric
height GM
0
by means of a rolling test
information giving required minimum metacen-
tric height GM
0
for the practical range of
draughts
2.2.3 In form of simplified information supplemen-
tary or alternative information which permits safe
operation without recourse to calculations or rolling
tests.
2.3 Operational requirements
instructions for filling and emptying tanks with
free liquid surfaces
information on the proper use and control of any
anti-rolling devices
information on the weight and arrangement of
permanent ballast
3. Scope for damage stability
For vessels which require investigation of damage
stability according to F.3.1 the following additional
information has to be provided.
3.1 General
information on the use of ballast and other liquid
systems to correct heel and trim
forms for recording daily tank statements
instructions for loading in order to maintain the
vessel afloat after flooding
3.2 Damage control plan
3.2.1 There shall be permanently exhibited or read-
ily available on the navigating bridge, for the guidance
of the skipper and the officers in charge of the fishing
vessel, a plan showing clearly:
for each deck and compartment the boundaries
of the watertight compartments, the openings
therein with the means of closure and position of
any controls thereof
for doors, a description of degree of tightness,
operating mode, normal position, operating cir-
cumstances (opened while at sea, not normally
used while at sea, not used while at sea)
arrangements for the correction of any list due to
flooding
3.2.2 General precautions shall consist of a listing
of equipment, conditions and operational procedures,
considered to be necessary to maintain watertight in-
tegrity under normal vessel operations.
3.2.3 Specific precautions shall consist of a listing
of elements (i.e. closures, securing of equipment/
loads, sounding of alarm, etc.) considered to be vital
to the survival of the vessel and its crew.
Chapter 8
Page 216
Section 2 Closure Conditions, Buoyancy and Stability I - Part 1
GL 2007

H
Section 3

Special Requirements for Hull Structures
A. General
1. Application
The provisions of this Section shall apply to all types
of fishing vessels.
2. Basic Rules
2.1 For metal hulls of decked fishing vessels the
design and construction shall be based on the GL
Rules Chapter 1 Hull Structures. But these Rules
shall only be valid, where they are not superseded by
the special requirements defined in this Section.
2.2 For glass fibre reinforced plastic hulls the
design and construction shall be based on the GL
Rules Part 3 Special Craft, Chapter 2 Yachts
24 m and Chapter 3 Yachts and Boats up to 24 m.
The factors defined there for fishing vessels/work-
boats have to be considered and the adequate increase
of the scantlings to be agreed with GL. These Rules
have to be completed by the reinforcements defined in
this Section.
2.3 For hulls made of solid wood the design shall
be based on the GL Rules Chapter 13 Vorschriften
fr Klassifikation und Bau von hlzernen Seeschif-
fen
1
. An adequate increase of the scantlings has to be
agreed with GL. For cold moulded wood see 2.2.
2.4 The design and construction of other types of
hull structures shall be agreed case by case with GL.
3. Definitions
The definition of the main parameters of the hull
structure is given in Section 1, D.
B. Special Measures for the Hull Structure
1. Strengthening at the shell side for side
trawlers
The following additional strengthening is required for
side trawlers:

1
"Rules for Classification and Construction of Wooden Seago-
ing Ships" (not available in English)
1.1 The thickness of the sheerstrake is to be in-
creased by at least 3 mm in way of the trawl gallows.
It is recommended to also increase the thickness of the
sheerstrake between the forward and aft gallows
throughout by 2 mm.
1.2 In way of the path of the bobbins at the aft
gallows during hauling operations, the side plating
above the middle of the bilge turn is to be 50 per cent
greater in thickness than required.
1.3 At the forward gallows, the side plating
above the upper turn of the bilge is to be strengthened
correspondingly.
1.4 The seams at the lower edge of the sheer-
strake and the upper turn of the bilge are to be pro-
tected by half round bars running from the fore to the
aft gallows, and by further half round bars arranged
between them or diagonally in such a way that the
welds cannot be worn by the trawl wire ropes.
1.5 In way of the strengthened shell plating under
the aft gallows, intermediate frames are to be arranged,
which are to be connected to the deck and the plate
floors, or to be supported by a stringer at the lower edge
of the strengthened plates. The section modulus of
intermediate frames is not to be less than 75 per cent of
that of the frames they are fitted between.
1.6 The bulwarks at the operating side are to be 2
mm thicker, and under the gallows 3 mm thicker than
required by the GL Rules Chapter 1 Hull Structures,
Section 6, K. In way of the slip hook, the thickness of
bulwarks is not to be less than 10 mm.
2. Strengthening at the shell side for vessels
mooring at sea
2.1 Basic assumptions
The requirements for vessels of a fishing fleet moor-
ing together at sea provide for a damping protection of
the hull for which purpose pneumatic fenders or other
equivalent damping arrangements may be used. These
requirements are based on assumptions that the vessels
will be moored at a sea state not above 6
2
.
2.2 Regions for side strengthening
The following regions have to be distinguished, com-
pare Fig. 3.1.

2
Sea states relating to wind and sea conditions according to inter-
national agreement ranging from sea state 0 (best) to 9 (worst).
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 3 Special Requirements for Hull Structures Chapter 8
Page 31

B
Summer loadline
Ballast waterline
> 0,36 L > 0,36 L
weather
deck
h
h
0
,
1

B
0
,
5

B
C
B
A
C C
0
,
1

B

Fig. 3.1 Regions for strengthening at the shell side for vessels mooring at sea
2.2.1 Depth dimension
region A locating between the line drawn lower
than the ballast waterline by the value of h and
the line drawn higher than the summer loadline
by the value of h
h = 0,8 m for sea state 4
= 1,2 m for sea state 5
= 2,0 m for sea state 6
region B located between the upper boundary of
region A and the weather/strength deck.
region C located between the strength deck and
the first tier superstructure deck including fore-
castle and poop.
2.2.2 Length dimension
regions A, B and C are situated between sections
of the vessel where the breadth of the vessel is
equal to 0,8 B
for special purpose ships, like transport ships or
ships with centralized fish processing plants, the
regions are to extend at least 0,36 L forward
and aft from the midship section
2.2.3 Additional fender areas
For big special purpose ships, one or more fender
areas are to be additionally established. The bounda-
ries shall be formed by sections lying within 0,05 L
forward and aft of the edges of the fender. Extreme
positions of fenders and all specific variations of
planned mooring have to be considered.
2.2.4 Exceptions
Where superstructure sides are inclined to the centre
line of the vessel at not less than 0,1 of superstructure
height or are fitted inboard at not less than the same
distance no additional strengthening is required.
Where the inclination or the distance between the
vessel side and the superstructure is less than this
value, the strengthening of their frames and side plat-
ing shall be determined by linear interpolation pro-
ceeding from the requirements in 2.4.
2.3 Design pressure
The design pressure on the sides and superstructure
sides of vessels moored at sea is to be obtained from
the following formulae:
For region A:
3 2
A 1 2
p 190 51 z 10 0, 464 [kN/ m ]

= +



For regions B and C:
3 2
BC 1 2
p 129 59 z 10 0, 464 [kN/ m ]

= +

1
= factor for ship displacement and sea condi-
tions according to Table 3.1

2
= factor for region of strengthening according
to Table 3.2
= design ship displacement [t]
= for fishing vessels: to the summer load line
= for special purpose ship: of the largest ship
mooring alongside
464 t 7500 t
n = number of moorings, alongside the ship
whose displacement has been adopted as the
design value in formulae for p
Chapter 8
Page 32
Section 3 Special Requirements for Hull Structures I - Part 1
GL 2007

B
z = distance [m] from the mid-span of member
calculated to the summer loadline
= where a special purpose ship has the free-
board depth h
S
greater than the freeboard
depth h
F
for the largest fishing vessel, the
value of z is to be reduced by the difference
(h
S
h
F
)
= in region A z = 1,0
= in any case z 0
Table 3.1 Factor
1
for ship displacement and
sea conditions
Sea state no. Ship
displacement
[t]
4 5 6
2000 1,00 1,15 1,60
> 2000 0,82 1,00 1,16


Table 3.2 Factor
2
for region of strengthening
Region of strengthening Fishing vessel
Region A 1,00
Region A
within fender area

Region B
1

1
0, 22 z 0, 6 +

Region C
1

1
0,12 z 1, 28 +

1
Note:
In the regions B and C,
2
is assumed between 1,1 and 1,4


2.4 Scantlings
2.4.1 Plating
In strengthened areas the thickness of side plating and
sheer strake is not to be less than:

S K
eH
p
t 21, 7 0, 242 t [mm]
1,1 R
= +

a
p = p
A
or p
BC
for regions A or for regions B and
C according to 2.3
R
eH
= minimum nominal upper yield strength
[N/mm
2
]
t
K
= 4,0 mm for region A in case trawling is ef-
fected from the side of the fishing vessel
= 1,2 for regions B and C
= 3,0 mm elsewhere
2.4.2 Framing
2.4.2.1 The section modulus W of the frames is not
to be less than:

2 3
k
W 4,1 p [cm ]
m
= a
p = p
A
for region A or p
BC
for regions B and C
according to 2.3
= span of frame [m] measured along the chord
between upper edge of inner bottom plating
and lower edge of deck at side, see Fig. 3.2
k = material factor
= 1,0 for normal strength hull structural steel
= 235 / R
eH
for steels with yield properties less
than 235 N/mm
2

= 295 / (R
eH
+ 60) for other steels
R
eH
= minimum nominal upper yield stress
[N/mm
2
]
m =
2
1 2 3
6, 8 k k k
0, 75

k
1
, k
2
, k
3
= see Table 3.3
h
h
f
9
0

Fig. 3.2 Parameters for determination of framing
2.4.2.2 If a longitudinal framing system is applied for
tween deck spaces, the section modulus of the side
longitudinals is not to be less than:
W = 0,11 p a
2
k [cm
3
]
= spacing of web frames [m]
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 3 Special Requirements for Hull Structures Chapter 8
Page 33

B
Table 3.3 Definition of factors k
1
to k
3

Number of load distributing side stringers
Factor
0 1 2 and more
k
1
1,0
hv = 0,75:
1,0 + 0,017
a

hv = 1,0:
1,0 + 0,034
a

hv = 0,75:
1,1 + 0,017
a

hv = 1,0:
1,1 + 0,034
a

k
2
1,0 1,12 1,15
k
3

f f f
h h h
1, 0 6,8 0, 28 12, 5

+ +



f
h h
1, 0 7, 0 8, 0 +


hv = ratio of height of load distributing side stringer to height of frame
h
f
= distance [m] between a section at the lower support of frame and a tangent to the frame contour in way of the section at the upper
support, as measured normal to the tangent, see Fig. 3.2
h = maximum deflection of frame according to Fig. 3.2 [m]


2.5 Arrangement of strengthening
2.5.1 In strengthened regions transverse framing is
to be adopted to the vessel's sides. In single deck
ships, the deck and bottom in these regions are also to
be framed transversely. In multi-deck ships, transverse
framing is to be adopted for the deck located on the
fender level. Longitudinal framing of sides is permis-
sible in the upper tween deck space only. In this case,
the spacing of web frames is not to exceed three frame
spacings or 2,4 m, whichever is less.
2.5.2 In the region A, intermediate frames are rec-
ommended through the region length in fishing vessels
and within fender areas in special purpose ships.
2.5.3 In any case, it is recommended that symmet-
rical sections be used and the minimum possible web
depth be ensured for the particular section modulus.
2.5.4 Between the ships side and vertical stiffener
nearest to it, transverse bulkheads are to have horizon-
tal stiffeners with a section height not less than 75 %
of the vertical stiffener height. In ships with L 80 m,
horizontal stiffeners are to be spaced not more than
600 mm apart and with L 150 m, not more than 800
mm apart. For ships with intermediate lengths, linear
interpolation may be used to determine this distance.
The ends of horizontal stiffeners are to be welded to
vertical stiffeners and sniped at the ship's sides.
2.5.5 Bilge keels of ships with L 80 m are to be,
as far as practicable, so arranged that a tangent drawn
to the frame and passing through the outer free edge of
the bilge keel would form an angle of not less than 15
with the vertical axis. For ships with L 150 m, this an-
gle may be zero. For ships of intermediate lengths, the
above angle is to be obtained by linear interpolation.
2.5.6 In tween decks the frame lower ends are to be
welded to the deck plating. The upper ends of frames
are to be carried to the deck plating and welded
thereto. Beams are to be carried to the inner edges of
frames with a minimal gap. Beam knees are to have a
face plate or flange.
The ends of intermediate frames are to be attached to
longitudinal intercostals, decks or platforms.
2.5.7 Side longitudinals are to be attached to trans-
verse bulkheads with knees. Height and width of the
knees are to comply with the basic Rules.
2.5.8 The bulwark is to be inclined towards the
centre line of the ship - or be fitted inboard of the
ship's side - at not less than 0,1 of its height.
Bulwark stays welded to sheerstrake are to be so con-
structed as to prevent deck plating damage in case of
bumping.
3. Provisions at the stern
3.1 In stern trawlers the thickness of the bottom
plating in way of the "overhanging" part of the stern
shall not be less than:

2
t 2, 6 k f t [mm] = + a L
k = material factor according to 2.4.2.1
f
2
=
2
1 a
1,1
2 b

f
2max
= 1,0
a = smaller breadth of plate panel
b = larger breadth of plate panel
Chapter 8
Page 34
Section 3 Special Requirements for Hull Structures I - Part 1
GL 2007

B
t = thickness increase for vessel speed v
0
greater
than 1,2 L [kn] or 10 kn
= 0,5 mm for each knot exceeding the above
values
t
min
= 0,5 mm
t
max
= 2,0 mm
The stern ramp is to be so constructed as to avoid flat
of bottom in way of stern counter.
3.2 In stern trawlers the shell strake in way of the
construction waterline from stern to the aft perpen-
dicular is recommended to have a thickness as re-
quired for the stern ramp in 4. for protection against
local damage. Where the longitudinal framing system
is adopted, the side girders are to be fitted not more
than two longitudinal frame spacings apart.
4. Provisions at the stern ramp
4.1 The ramp should be preferably stiffened in its
longitudinal direction. The transition radius between
deck and ramp should be as large as possible, but
should not be less than 300 mm.
The connection of stern ramp sides to transom plating
and of ramp deck to bottom plating are to have a ra-
dius of rounding not less than 200 mm. This connec-
tion may be made by using a bar not less than 70 mm
in diameter.
Stern ramp sides are, in general, to be carried down-
wards to the shell plating and forward to the after peak
bulkhead and are to be smoothly tapered into deck
girders and transverses.
Where the catch is dragged onto the weather deck, it is
recommended that the stern ramp be longitudinally
framed with transverses fitted at intervals not exceed-
ing four frame spacings. The stern ramp longitudinals
are to be spaced not more than 600 mm apart.
4.2 The plate thickness of the aft ramp of stern
trawlers is not to be less than:
t = (8 0,1 ) k + L [mm]
t
min
= 12 k [mm]
4.3 The thickness of inner plating of the ramp
forming the ramp sides is not to be less than.
t
min
= (5, 5 0, 02 ) k 2 + + L [mm]
In the lower part adjacent to the ramp, a strengthened
strake is to be provided having a thickness of not less
than the thickness required under 5.2. See Fig.3.3.
4.4 Protection from excessive wear, especially by
wire ropes when dragging the catch, should be pro-
vided by the following measures:
protection of transom plating with half-round
bars of at least 70 mm in diameter, which are to
be fitted inclined and secured by welding
protection of junction line of rounding and flat
side with half-round steel bars welded along the
line, but not farther than 200 mm from the tran-
som
greater as diameter
of bobbin of trawl,
but not less than
700 mm
abt. half bobbin diameter
bobbin
of trawl
Section A - A
ramp
inner planning
of ramp
strengthened
strake
~

1
0
0
0
A
A

Fig. 3.3 Strengthening arrangement at the stern ramp
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 3 Special Requirements for Hull Structures Chapter 8
Page 35

B
for vessels engaged in pelagic fishing, protection
and stiffening of the stern ramp sides with longi-
tudinal half-round steel bars of at least 70 mm in
diameter, welded to the sides and spaced not
more than 200 mm apart; the edge of the upper
bar is not to be less than 650 mm above the
ramp deck plating
alternatively protection by doubling plates at the
top and bottom roundings over the full breadth
of the ramp and doubling strips at least 400 mm
wide at the sides over the ramp length
5. Strengthening of the weather deck
Under trawl winches, trawl gallows, windlasses and
centre fairleads, beams and substructures of adequate
strength are to be fitted. The thickness of the deck
plating is to be suitably increased, even if wood
sheathing will be fitted.
C. Fish Holds
1. General
1.1 Basic requirements
The following basic requirements shall be met during
operation of the fish holds:
during loading of fish holds with a longitudinal
bulkhead, the level of cargo shall be at any time
approximately the same on both sides of the
bulkhead
cargo not carried in tanks, is drained before
loading
fish holds fully loaded with fish treated with
preserving agent have to be checked concerning
uncontrolled swelling
1.2 No sharp corners or projections shall be al-
lowed in fish holds or fish tanks, compare D., to facili-
tate cleaning and reduce inherent dangers to workers
in these holds or tanks.
1.3 Pipes and chains or conduits passing through
the fish hold shall, if practicable, be installed flush
with ceilings or boxed in and adequately insulated in a
manner facilitating access for inspection and mainte-
nance.
1.4 In fish holds, and also fish processing spaces,
in which non-packed salted catch or salt is stored or
which are exposed to the detrimental effect of catch
wastes and seawater, the plating thickness is to be
increased by 1 mm as compared to that required by the
relevant Sections of the basic Rules. Where the struc-
ture is so influenced from both sides, relevant thick-
ness is to be increased by 2 mm.
2. Fish flaps
Fish flaps of stern trawlers shall be power operated
and capable of being controlled from any position
which provides an unobstructed view of the operation
of the flaps.
3. Portable fish hold divisions
3.1 General
3.1.1 Task of the portable fish hold divisions is to
properly secure the catch against shifting which could
cause dangerous trim or heel of the vessel.
3.1.2 Every portable fish hold division is to extend
from the bottom of the hold to the deck.
3.1.3 One longitudinal division is to be fitted where
the greatest internal cargo hold breadth is 6 m. If the
breadth exceeds 6 m, at least 2 longitudinal divisions
are to be fitted so that the distance between longitudi-
nal divisions or between these and the vessels side
does not extend 3 m. Longitudinal divisions are to be
positioned symmetrically to the vessels centre line.
3.1.4 It is assumed that in vessels having one longi-
tudinal division, the level of cargo is at any time dur-
ing loading approximately the same on both sides of
the division.
3.1.5 The requirements of 3.1.2 to 3.1.4 are based
on the assumption that the portable fish hold divisions
consist of vertical uprights with horizontal wooden
boards, see Fig. 3.4.
3.1.6 The longitudinal distance l between uprights
or between permanent transverse bulkheads and up-
rights should normally not exceed 2,0 m.
3.1.7 Arrangements and details of the fish hold
divisions are to be submitted for approval.
h
h
b
b

Fig. 3.4 Arrangement of uprights and horizontal
boards
Chapter 8
Page 36
Section 3 Special Requirements for Hull Structures I - Part 1
GL 2007

C
3.2 Uprights
3.2.1 The section modulus of steel or aluminium
uprights is not to be less than:
W = c h
3
(b + ) k [cm
3
]
The minimum section modulus is 40 k [cm
3
]
c = 1,6 where one longitudinal division is fitted
= 2,0 where two or more longitudinal divisions
are fitted
h = free span of upright [m]
b = distance between the uprights in the vessel's
transverse direction [m]
= distance between uprights in the vessel's
longitudinal direction [m]
k = material factor see B.2.4.2.1
3.2.2 The uprights are to be secured at top and
bottom as to allow transmission of reaction forces in
adjacent structures.
3.2.3 If openings are cut in the uprights for fitting
of the upper boards, the boards in the opening are to
be locked in position to prevent their slipping out of
the guide.
3.3 Portable boards
3.3.1 The section modulus of the portable shifting
boards is to be determined by the following formula:
W = k 0,8 e p '
2
[cm
3
]
e = vertical width of board [m]
' = span of board [m] according to Fig. 3.4
= b in vessel's transverse direction
= l in vessel's longitudinal direction
The design pressure p at the lowest board is the greater
of the following values:
p
1
= 10 h
1
(1 + a
V
) [kN/m
2
]
or
p
2
=
1
b'
10 h cos 20 y sin 20
2

+ +


[kN/m
2
]
h
1
= h + 0,5 m [m]
h = height from bottom of fish hold to top of hold
[m], compare Fig. 3.4
b' = upper breadth of hold [m]
y = distance of load centre from the vertical lon-
gitudinal central plane of tank [m]
a
V
= acceleration factor according to GL Rules
Chapter 1 Hull Structures, Section 4, C.1.1
3.3.2 In order to prevent galvanic corrosion, insula-
tion is to be fitted at connections or contact surfaces
between steel and aluminium.
Corrugated boards are to be made of seawater resistant
aluminium.
The minimum thickness of wooden boards should be
65 mm.
4. Removable bulkheads of steel or aluminium
4.1 Removable steel or aluminium bulkheads
which are used in connection with hatches are to be
double plated with the stiffeners placed horizontally.
Internal surfaces of steel bulkheads are to be covered
by a corrosion-resistant coating.
4.2 The plate thickness is to be at least:
t = c s h 0, 5 + [mm]
t
min
= 6 mm
c = 3,4 for steel
= 4,7 for aluminium
s = stiffener spacing [m]
h = height [m] from upper edge of bulkhead to
lower edge of plating
4.3 The section modulus of horizontal stiffeners
is not to be less than:
W = c
2
s h [cm
3
]
c = 7,0 for steel
= 13,5 for aluminium
= stiffener span [m]
s = stiffener spacing [m]
h = height [m] from midpoint of stiffener span to
top of bulkhead
For aluminium materials with a guaranteed 0,1% ten-
sile proof stress R
p0,1
which exceeds 125 N/mm
2
, the
value of W can be reduced in direct proportion. If
however, the materials guaranteed R
p0,2
value is
greater than 70 % of the guaranteed ultimate tensile
strength R
m
, the lower value is to be used as a basis
for scantlings.
4.4 The moment of inertia of stiffeners is not to
be less than:
I =
3 4
c W [cm
4
]
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 3 Special Requirements for Hull Structures Chapter 8
Page 37

C
c = 2,2 for steel
= 5,75 for aluminium
W = as given in 4.3 for steel
4.5 Guides for removable bulkheads are to have
brackets at 1 m spacing. The depth of the support at
the sides of removable bulkheads is to be at least equal
to the bulkhead thickness and not less to 65 mm. The
minimum thickness of sections or plates, which form
the guides is 10 mm.
If necessary, removable bulkheads are to be equipped
with a securing arrangement to prevent the bulkhead
from floating.
4.6 Removable aluminium bulkheads are to be
constructed of a seawater-resistant alloy.
In order to prevent galvanic corrosion, insulation is to
be fitted at connections or contact surfaces between
steel and aluminium.
D. Fish Tanks
Tanks for the transport of fish in refrigerated seawater
(RSW) have to meet the following requirements.
1. Scantlings
In general RSW tanks are open at the top and as the
tank is filled with fish, the equivalent volume of water
flows over on the weather deck. Therefore the tank
can be dimensioned according to the GL Rules de-
fined in Chapter 1 Hull Structures, Section 12 using
a pressure p
1
as defined in C.3.3.1 but with h = dis-
tance from load centre to top of overflow.
2. Filling and drainage
For filling, drainage, sounding, etc. compare Section
4.
E. Fish Processing Holds
1. General
Design and testing of fish processing machinery is not
subject to Classification by GL. However, approval of
foundations of the machinery taking into account the
forces and their integration into the hull structure as
well as safety aspects for the vessel resulting from the
processing procedure are part of Classification.
2. Bulkheads
Where in processing holds located above the bulkhead
deck the distance between the bulkheads forming the
boundaries of that space exceeds 30 m, partial bulk-
heads extending inboard for not less than 0,5 of the
tween deck height are to be fitted on the bulkhead
deck at each side of the vessel in line with watertight
bulkheads.
The thickness of the partial bulkhead plating is to be
not less than that of the top strake of the correspond-
ing watertight bulkhead below the deck where the
considered processing hold is located.
Partial bulkheads are to be strengthened with horizon-
tal stiffeners according to the basic Rules. Strengthen-
ing with vertical stiffeners is permitted with fitting the
horizontal stiffeners between the side shell and the
nearest vertical stiffener in compliance with B.2.5.4.
Partial bulkheads are to be interconnected with deck
transverses supported by pillars in a required number.
Alternative structural arrangements may be used if
approved as equivalent by GL.
Where multi-tier deckhouses are arranged above the
processing holds, rigid supporting members (bulk-
heads, partial bulkheads) are to be fitted within the
processing holds.
3. Foundations
The assembly drawings of the main components of the
processing plant with the information of weight, cen-
tre of gravity and possibility of bolting them to the
deck of the processing hold have to be submitted to
GL. In addition the dynamic behaviour of the machin-
ery has to be documented. It is recommended to sum-
marize this data in a load plan. The calculation of the
individual foundations for the main components has to
be submitted to GL for approval.
4. Discharge of refuse and water
It has to be ensured that all kinds of refuse and water
accumulating in the course of processing the catch
may be discharged or carried outboards without en-
dangering the vessel. For details see Section 4, D.
F. Membrane Type Tanks for Brines
1. General
1.1 Membrane type tanks for brines are tanks
consisting of a liquid tight barrier (membrane) which
is supported through insulation by a load bearing tank
structure. The load bearing tank is normally formed by
the hull structure (bulkheads, decks, shell, inner bot-
tom).
1.2 The load bearing tank structure is to comply
with the relevant requirements for decks, shell, inner
bottom, etc., but must at least have scantlings comply-
ing with the requirements stipulated in B.
1.3 Prefabricated membrane tanks are to be di-
mensioned such that they are capable of being trans-
ported without undue overstressing the membrane
walls.
Chapter 8
Page 38
Section 3 Special Requirements for Hull Structures I - Part 1
GL 2007

F
1.4 Details of the membrane and the insulation
material (preferably, polyurethane foam) are to be
submitted for approval.
2. Testing for tightness of the membrane
2.1 The tanks are to be suitably tested for tight-
ness by applying a test pressure (air pressure) of not
less than 0,15 bar gauge.
2.2 Hollow spaces between the membrane and
the hull are to be tested for tightness as stipulated
under 2.1.
2.3 Prior to installation of the membrane, shell,
decks, bulkheads, etc. are to be hose tested for tight-
ness.
3. Foam material, foam application
3.1 The foam material shall have sufficient com-
pressive strength to transmit the liquid pressures from
the membrane to the hull.
3.2 The foam application is to be carried out
according to manufacturer's instructions.
3.3 It is to be assured that all hollow spaces be-
tween hull and membrane are completely filled with
foam.
G. Side Doors
1. General
1.1 In general, doors shall not extend below the
load waterline.
1.2 At the corners of the doors strengthened
plates are to be provided which are to extend over a
length of at least 1,5 frame spacings each beyond the
doors.
1.3 Doors shall be designed to preferably open
outwards.
1.4 Door openings in the shell are to have well
rounded corners and adequate compensation is to be
arranged with web frames at sides and stringers or
equivalent above and below.
2. Scantlings
2.1 In general the strength of side doors is to be
equivalent to the strength of the surrounding structure.
2.2 Doors are to be adequately stiffened. Where
necessary, stiffeners are to be supported by girders.
Means are to be provided to prevent movement of the
doors when closed. Adequate strength is to be pro-
vided in the connections of the lifting/manoeuvring
arms and hinges to the door structure and to the ship
structure.
2.3 Where doors also serve as vehicle ramps, the
design of the hinges should take into account the ves-
sels angle of trim which may result in uneven loading
on the hinges.
2.4 Where doors also serve as vehicle ramps,
plate thickness and stiffeners will be specially consid-
ered.
2.5 Thickness of the door plating, section
modulus and shear area of stiffeners and girders are to
be determined according to the GL Rules Chapter 1
Hull Structures, Section 6.
2.6 The girder system is to have sufficient stiff-
ness to ensure integrity of the boundary support of the
door. Edge stiffeners/girders should be adequately
stiffened against rotation.
For edge girders supporting main door girders be-
tween securing devices, the moment of inertia is to be
increased in relation to the additional force.
3. Closing and securing devices of doors
3.1 The design force for closing and securing
devices are to determined according to the GL Rules
defined in Chapter 1 Hull Structures, Section 6, J.
3.2 The closing and/or supporting devices are to
be fitted not more than 2,5 m apart and as close to
corner as possible. However, a large number of small
devices should be avoided. The total vertical and hori-
zontal force may normally be considered as equally
distributed between the devices.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 3 Special Requirements for Hull Structures Chapter 8
Page 39

G


Section 4

Hull Outfit
A. Sheathings and Ceilings
1. Deck sheathings
1.1 Generally the different deck sheathings of a
fishing vessel on the weatherdeck, on superstructures
and deckhouses have to meet the following require-
ments:
protection of the hull structure against corrosion
in a standard climate to be defined by the owner
good connection to the deck area
fire-resistant or at least of low flammability
special requirements of the owner
1.2 The surface of all decks shall be so designed
or treated as to minimize the slip hazard for personnel.
In particular, decks of working areas, such as machin-
ery spaces, in galleys, at winches and where fish is
handled as well as at the foot and head of ladders and
in front of doors, shall be provided with anti-skid
surfaces.
1.3 Before applying the deck sheathing the sur-
face preparation of the relevant deck area has to be
prepared according to the specification of the sheath-
ing supplier.
1.4 The compliance with the requirements de-
fined in 1.1 and 1.2 has to be shown by the supplier by
tests with a reasonable number of specimens accord-
ing to recognized standards and approved by GL. The
samples have to be brought up on the relevant struc-
tural deck material utilized for the fishing vessel
(steel, aluminium, GRP, etc.).
2. Bottom ceiling
2.1 If a vessel contains holds for the transport of
materials or fish products a tight bottom ceiling is to
be fitted on the bottom of such a hold. It is recom-
mended, that the thickness of a wooden ceiling is not
less than 60 mm. If no ceiling is provided, GL will
decide whether the thickness of the load bearing bot-
tom areas has to be increased case by case. If opera-
tion of fork lift trucks is planned, only steel decks
without wooden ceiling have to be provided.
2.2 On single bottoms, ceilings are to be remov-
able for inspection of bottom plating at any time.
2.3 Ceilings on double bottoms are to be laid on
battens not less than 12,5 mm thick providing a clear
space for drainage of water or leakage oil. The ceiling
may be laid directly on the inner bottom plating, if
embedded in preservation and sealing compound.
2.4 It is recommended to fit double ceilings un-
der deck openings used for loading/unloading.
2.5 The manholes are to be protected by a steel
coaming welded around each manhole and shall be
fitted with a cover of wood or steel, or by other suit-
able means.
3. Ceiling at tank bulkheads
Where tanks are intended to carry liquids at tempera-
tures exceeding 40 C, their boundaries facing holds
for transport or storage shall be fitted with a ceiling.
At vertical walls, sparred ceilings may be sufficient.
The ceiling may be dispensed only with consent of the
Flag State Administration.
B. Air Pipes, Overflow Pipes, Sounding Pipes
1. Each tank is to be fitted with air pipes, over-
flow pipes and sounding pipes. The air pipes are in
general to be led to above the exposed deck. For the
arrangement and scantlings of pipes see Section 9d.
For the height from the deck to the point where the
water may have access see Section 2, Table 2.2.
2. Suitable closing appliances are to be provided
for air pipes, overflow pipes and sounding pipes.
Where fishing gear or materials, etc. are carried on
deck, the closing appliances are to be readily accessi-
ble at all times. In vessels for which flooding calcula-
tions are to be made, the ends of the air pipes are to be
above the damage waterline in the flooded condition.
Where they immerse at intermediate stages of flood-
ing, these conditions are to be examined separately.
3. Closely under the inner bottom or the tank
top, holes are to be cut into floor plates and side gird-
ers as well as into beams, girders, etc., to give the air
free access to the air pipes. Besides, all floor plates
and side girders are to be provided with limbers to
permit the water or oil to reach the pump suctions.
4. Sounding pipes are to be extended to directly
above the tank bottom. The shell plating is to be
strengthened by thicker plates or doubling plates under
the sounding pipes.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 4 Hull Outfit Chapter 8
Page 41

B
C. Ventilators
1. The height of ventilator coamings and the
relevant closing appliances on the exposed deck, quar-
ter deck and on exposed superstructure decks are de-
fined in Section 2, B.6. For the case of fire, draught-
tight fire dampers are to be fitted.
2. Ventilators of holds are not to have any con-
nection with other spaces.
3. The thickness of the coaming plates is to be
1,0 mm larger than the thickness of the surrounding
deck.
4. The thickness of ventilator posts should be at
least equal to the thickness of coamings as per 3. The
wall thickness of ventilator posts of a clear sectional
area exceeding 1600 cm
2
is to be increased according
to the expected loads.
5. Generally, the coamings and posts shall pass
through the deck and shall be welded to the deck plat-
ing from above and below. Where coamings or posts
are welded on the deck plating, fillet welds of a = 0,5
t (t = thickness of the thinner plate) should be adopt-
ed for welding inside and outside, where applicable.
6. Coamings and posts particularly exposed to
wash of the sea are to be efficiently connected with
the vessel's structure. Coamings of a height exceeding
900 mm are to be specially strengthened.
7. Where beams are pierced by ventilator coam-
ings, carlings of adequate scantlings are to be fitted
between the beams in order to maintain the strength of
the deck.
D. Waste and Water Discharge in Fish Holds
1. Cargo fish holds
1.1 There is to be a good drainage of water, oil or
brine from the cargo. Trunks and gutters are to be
located such that they will provide at all times good
drainage from all layers of cargo, throughout the hold.
1.2 In each bin there is to be drainage to a bilge
well through vertical drainage trunks of perforated
plates, grating, etc. The minimum acceptable perfo-
rated circumference per trunk is 0,3 m. The number of
trunks and the total length of perforated circumference
are defined in Table 4.1. The perforations are to con-
sist of holes with a diameter of 4 to 8 mm or equiva-
lent.
Table 4.1 Drainage arrangement in cargo fish
holds
Area A of bin
below deck
[m
2
]
Minimum
number of
drainage trunks
per bin
Total length of
perforated trunk
circumference
per bin [m]
A < 10 2 0,8
10 A < 15 3 1,0
15 A < 20 3 1,2
20 A < 25 4 1,4
25 A < 30 4 1,6
30 A < 35 5 1,8


1.3 Each cargo hold shall have a bilge well at its
after end. If the length of the watertight compartment
exceeds 9 m, there shall also be a bilge well at the
forward end.
1.4 Bilge wells of not less than 0,2 m
3
capacity
are to be arranged in fish holds. They are to be
equipped with an arrangement for rinsing the bilge
sections, which is to be secured against unintentional
operation.
1.5 From each bilge well, a separate branch suc-
tion line shall be led to the machinery space. The in-
ternal diameter of this line is to be as required for
main bilge lines. Minimum diameter is 50 mm.
1.6 The bilge distribution chest valves are to be
of screw-down non-return type. The valve chest col-
lecting branch suction lines from the cargo fish holds
are to have no connections from dry compartments.
The valve chest is to be directly connected to the larg-
est bilge pump. In addition, a connection is to be pro-
vided to another bilge pump. All valves are to be fitted
in readily accessible positions.
1.7 Means for back-flushing bilge suctions shall
be provided. The connecting of water supply may be
done by portable means, e.g. hoses.
2. Cargo fish tween deck
2.1 If fish shall be carried loose in tween deck
satisfactory arrangement of drainage has to be pro-
vided. The drainage may be led to the bilge well in the
hold below or arranged as described in 1.
2.2 For tween deck compartments having no
openings where sea may penetrate and where the fish
processing requires no supply of water, drainage to
bilge well in the machinery space may be accepted.
The drainage pipes shall have a self-closing valve at
the machinery space side.
Chapter 8
Page 42
Section 4 Hull Outfit I - Part 1
GL 2007

D
3. Fish processing areas
3.1 It has to be ensured that all kinds of refuse
and water accumulating in the course of processing of
the catch may be discharged or carried outboards
without endangering the vessel. The bilge pumps are
to have sufficient power.
3.2 Where the fish processing holds are located
below the weather deck, the refuse and water accumu-
lating in the course of processing are to be discharged
outboards through suitable pumps or conveyor worms.
The respective outlets at the shell shall be located as
near as possible to the weather deck and are to be
closable by means of sluice valves. Where the dis-
charge line is raised up above the weather deck, a
swing check valve may be fitted instead of a sluice
valve.
Where the pumps are sucking from outboard, a block-
ing device is required to prevent water from being
pumped into the tween deck space.
3.3 Stone shoots in fish processing decks are to
be fitted as high as practicable. The lowest point of the
inner openings shall not come to water at inclinations
of less than 15, vessel fully loaded. In addition to the
watertight covers of the stone shoots swell shutters are
to be fitted at the shell.
3.4 Bilge wells
For bilge wells see 1.4 and 1.5.
4. Fish tanks
The requirements for fish tanks are included in Sec-
tion 3, D.
5. Fish pounds
Fixed and removable parts of the fish pounds for hold-
ing the catch on and below deck shall be of adequate
size. Fish pounds on deck shall be constructed in such
a way that water can drain out of them without hin-
drance.
E. Protective Measures
1. General measures
1.1 A lifeline system shall be designed to be
effective for all needs, and the necessary wires, ropes,
shackles, eye bolts and cleats shall be provided.
1.2 Deck openings provided with coamings or
sills of less than 600 mm in height shall be provided
with guards, such as hinged or portable railings or
nettings. The Administration may exempt small open-
ings such as fish scuttles from compliance with these
requirements.
1.3 Skylights or other similar openings shall be
fitted with protective bars not more than 350 mm
apart, compare Section 2, B.11.6. The Administration
may exempt small openings from compliance with this
requirement.
2. Deck openings
2.1 Hinged covers of hatchways, manholes and
other openings shall be protected against accidental
closing. In particular, heavy covers on escape hatches
shall be equipped with counterweights and so con-
structed as to be capable of being opened from each
side of the cover.
2.2 Dimension of access hatches shall be not less
than 600 mm by 600 mm or 600 mm diameter.
2.3 Where practicable, hand-holds shall be pro-
vided above the level of the deck over escape open-
ings.
2.4 Hatch covers are to be dimensioned and ar-
ranged according to the GL Rules Chapter 1 Hull
Structures, Section 17, B.
3. Bulwarks, rails and guards
3.1 Efficient bulwarks or guard rails shall be
fitted on all exposed parts of the working deck and on
superstructure decks if they are working platforms.
The height of bulwarks or guard rails above deck shall
be at least 1m. Where this height would interfere with
the normal operation of the vessel, a lesser height may
be approved by the Flag State Administration.
3.2 The minimum vertical distance from the
deepest operation waterline to the lowest point of the
top of the bulwark, or to the edge of working deck if
guard rails are fitted, shall ensure adequate protection
of the crew from water shipped on deck, taking into
account the sea states and the weather conditions in
which the vessel may operate, the areas of operation,
type of vessel and its method of fishing and shall be to
the satisfaction of the Administration.
3.3 Guard-rails are to be constructed in accor-
dance with DIN 81702 or equivalent standards.
Equivalent constructions of sufficient strength and
safety can be accepted. Clearance below the lowest
course of guard rails to the foot bar shall not exceed
230 mm, other courses shall not be more than 380 mm
apart. Rails shall be free from sharp points, edges and
corners and shall be of adequate strength.
In a vessel with rounded gunwales guard rail supports
shall be placed on the flat part of the deck. Guard rail
stanchions are not to be welded to the shell plating and
the distance between stanchions shall not be more than
1,5 m.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 4 Hull Outfit Chapter 8
Page 43

E
3.4 Means such as guard rails, lifelines, gang-
ways or under deck passages to protect the crew in
moving between accommodation, machinery and
other working spaces shall be provided to the satisfac-
tion of GL. Storm rails shall be fitted as necessary to
the outside of all deckhouses and casings to secure
safety of passage or work for the crew.
3.5 Stern trawlers shall be provided with suitable
protection such as doors, gates or nets at the top of the
stern ramp at the same height as the adjacent bulwark
or guard rails. When such protection is not in position
a chain or other means of protection shall be provided
across the ramp.
4. Stairways and ladders
For the safety of the crew, stairways and ladders of
adequate size and strength with handrails and non-slip
treads shall be provided to the satisfaction of GL. See
also F.4.9.
F. Signal and Radar Masts
1. General
1.1 Drawings of masts, mast substructures and
hull connections are to be submitted for approval.
1.2 Loose and accessory parts are to comply with
the GL Rules VI Additional Rules and Guidelines,
Part 2 Life-Saving Appliances, Lifting Appliances,
Accesses, Chapter 2 Guidelines for the Construction
and Survey of Lifting Appliances. All parts which
shall be supervised and certified by GL are to be indi-
vidually tested.
1.3 Other masts than covered by 2. and 3. as well
as special construction forms, shall as regards dimen-
sions and design, in each case be individually agreed
with GL.
2. Signal masts
The following requirements apply to single tubular or
equivalent rectangular sections made of steel with an
ultimate tensile strength of 400 N/mm, which are
typically designed to carry only signals (navigation
lanterns, flag and day signals).
2.1 Stayed masts
2.1.1 Stayed masts may be constructed as simply
supported masts (rocker masts) or may be supported
by one or more decks (constraint masts).
2.1.2 The diameter of stayed steel masts at the up-
permost support is to be at least 20 mm for each 1 m
height of mast h from the uppermost support to the
fixing point of shrouds. The length of the mast top
above the fixing point of shrouds is not to exceed 1/3 h.
2.1.3 Masts according to 2.1.2 may be gradually
tapered towards the fixing point of shrouds to 75 per
cent of the diameter at the uppermost support. The
plate thickness is not to be less than 1/70 of the diame-
ter or at least 4 mm (see 4.1).
2.1.4 Wire ropes for shrouds are to be thickly gal-
vanized. It is recommended to use wire ropes com-
posed of a minimum number of thick wires, as for
instance a rope construction 6 7 with a tensile break-
ing strength of 1570 N/mm
2
on which Table 4.2 is
based. Other rope constructions shall be of equivalent
stiffness.
2.1.5 Where masts are stayed forward and back-
wards by two shrouds on each side of the vessel, steel
wire ropes are to be used according to Table 4.2.
Table 4.2 Definition of ropes for stays
h [m] 6 8 10 12 14 16
Rope diameter
[mm]
14 16 18 20 22 24
Nominal size of
shackle, rigging
screw, rope socket
1,6 2,0 2,5 3,0 4,0 4,0
h = height of shroud fixing point above shroud foot point


2.1.6 Where steel wire ropes according to Table 4.2
are used, the following conditions apply:
b 0,3 h
0,15 h a b
a = the longitudinal distance from a shroud's foot
point to its fixing point
b = the transverse distance from a shroud's foot
point to its fixing point
Alternative arrangements of stayings are to be of
equivalent stiffness.
2.2 Unstayed masts
2.2.1 Unstayed masts may be completely con-
strained in the uppermost deck or be supported by two
or more decks. In general, the fastenings of masts to
the hull of a vessel should extend over at least one
deck height.
2.2.2 The scantlings for unstayed steel masts are
given in the Table 4.3.
2.2.3 The diameter of masts may be gradually
tapered to D/2 at the height of 0,75 l
m
.
Chapter 8
Page 44
Section 4 Hull Outfit I - Part 1
GL 2007

F
Table 4.3 Scantlings of unstayed steel masts
Length
of mast
l
m
[m]
6 8 10 12 14
D t
[mm]
160 4 220 4 290 4,5 360 5,5 430 6,5
l
m
= length of mast from uppermost support to the top
D = diameter of mast at uppermost support
t = plate thickness of mast


3. Radar masts
These masts are typically of 3-leg, box girder or frame
work design.
3.1 For dimensioning the dead loads, acceleration
forces and wind loads are to be considered.
3.2 Where necessary additional loads, e.g. loads
caused by the sea, fastening of crane booms or tension
wires are also to be considered.
3.3 The design loads for 3.1 and 3.2 as well as
the allowable stresses can be taken from the GL Rules
VI Additional Rules and Guidelines, Part 2 Life
Saving Appliances, Lifting Appliances, Accesses,
Chapter 2 Guidelines for the Construction and Sur-
vey of Lifting Appliances.
3.4 In case of 3-leg masts the individual leg
forces shall be calculated with the before mentioned
forces acting in the direction of a considered leg and
rectangular to the two other legs.
3.5 Single tubular or rectangular masts mounted
on the top of box girder or frame work masts may be
dimensioned according to 2.
3.6 In case of thin walled box girder masts a
stiffening and/or additional buckling stiffeners may be
necessary.
4. Structural details
4.1 Steel masts closed all-round shall have a wall
thickness of at least 4 mm.
For masts not closed all-round the minimum wall
thickness is 6 mm.
For masts used as funnels a corrosion addition of at
least 1 mm is required.
4.2 The foundations of the mast integrated in the
deck structure are to be dimensioned in accordance
with the acting forces.
4.3 Doubling plates at mast feet are permissible
only for the transmission of compressive forces.
4.4 In case of tubular constructions all welded
fastenings and connections have to be of full penetra-
tion weld type.
4.5 If necessary, slim tubular structures are to be
additionally stayed or supported in order to avoid
vibrations.
4.6 The dimensioning normally does not require
a calculation of vibrations. However, in case of undue
vibrations occurring during the vessels trial a respec-
tive calculation will be required.
4.7 For determining scantlings of masts made
from aluminium or austenitic steel see Section 3.
4.8 At masts solid steel ladders have to be fixed
at least up to 1,50 m below top, if they have to be
climbed for operational or maintenance purposes.
Above the ladders, suitable handgrips are necessary.
4.9 If possible from the construction point of
view, ladders have to be at least 0,30 m wide. The
distance between the rungs shall be 0,30 m. The hori-
zontal distance of the rung centre from fixed structural
components shall not be less than 0,15 m. The rungs
shall be aligned and be made of square steel bars
20/20 set up on edge.
4.10 Platforms on masts which have to be used for
operational reasons, shall have a rail of at least 0,90 m
in height with one intermediate bar. Safe access from
the mast ladders to the platform is to be provided.
4.11 If necessary on masts a safety installation
consisting of foot, back, and hand rings enabling safe
work in places of operating and maintenance has to be
provided.
G. Life-Saving Appliances
1. It is assumed that for the arrangement and
operation of lifeboats and other life-saving appliances
the regulations defined by the Administration are
complied with. For regulations and guidelines see
Section 1, A.3.
2. The designing and testing of life saving ap-
pliances are not part of Classification. However, ap-
proval of the hull structure in way of the launching
appliances, taking into account the reaction forces
from the relevant appliances, is part of Classification.
Note
In all cases where GL is requested to approve the life-
saving appliances, the GL Rules VI Additional Rules
and Guidelines, Part 2 Life Saving Appliances, Lift-
ing Appliances, Accesses, Chapter 1 Guidelines for
Life-Saving Launching Appliances apply.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 4 Hull Outfit Chapter 8
Page 45

G


Section 5

Anchoring and Mooring Equipment
A. General
1. Scope
Anchor equipment designed for quick and safe opera-
tion shall be provided which consists of anchoring
equipment, anchor chains and wire ropes, stoppers and
a windlass or other arrangements for dropping and
hoisting the anchor and for holding the vessel at an-
chor in all foreseeable service conditions.
Vessels shall be provided with adequate mooring
equipment for safe mooring in all operating conditions.
2. Materials
Vessels built under survey of GL and which are to
have the mark stated in their Certificate and in the
Register Book have to be equipped with anchors and
chain cables complying with the GL Rules II Mate-
rials and Welding and having been tested on approved
machines in the presence of a GL Surveyor. For ves-
sels having the Class Notation K affixed to their Char-
acter of Classification proof is sufficient that the an-
chors and chain cables have been properly tested.
B. Equipment Numeral
1. Equipment numeral Z
F

The equipment numeral Z
F
is to be calculated as fol-
lows:

3 2
F
A
Z 2 h
10
= + + B
= moulded displacement [t] in seawater having
a density of 1,025 t/m
3
to the summer load
waterline
h = effective height from the summer load water-
line to the top of the uppermost house
= a + h
i

a = distance [m] from the summer load waterline,
amidships, to the upper deck at side
h
i
= sum of height [m] on centreline of each tier
of superstructures and deckhouses having a
breadth greater than B/4. Deck sheer, if
any, is to be ignored.
For the lowest tier "h" is to be measured at
centre line from the upper deck or from an
assumed deck line where there is local dis-
continuity in the upper deck
A = area [m
2
], in profile view of the hull, super-
structures and houses, having a breadth
greater than B/4, above the summer load wa-
terline within the length L and up to the
height h
Where a deckhouse having a breadth greater than B/4
is located above a deckhouse having a breadth of B/4
or less, the wide house is to be included and the nar-
row house ignored.
Screens of bulwarks 1,5 m or more in height above
deck at side are to be regarded as parts of houses when
determining h and A, e.g. the area specially marked in
Fig. 5.1 is to be included in A.
Bulwark
1
,
5

m
1
,
5

m
DWL
a
L / 2 L / 2

Fig. 5.1 Bulwark relevant for equipment numeral
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 5 Anchoring and Mooring Equipment Chapter 8
Page 51

B
2. Equipment numeral Z
K

The equipment numeral Z
K
is to be calculated as fol-
lows:

K
1
Z ( ) h
2
= + + L B H
= length of individual superstructures and deck-
houses [m] within length L
h = height of individual superstructures and deck-
houses at centreline of the vessel [m]
Deckhouses having a breadth of less than B/4 may be
ignored.
3. Application
Anchors, chain cables and the recommended mooring
ropes are to be determined in accordance with the
equipment numbers Z
F
according to 1. and Z
K
accord-
ing to 2. respectively.
3.1 Vessels with Z
F
> 720
Where Z
F
exceeds 720 the requirements of the GL
Rules defined in Chapter 1 Hull Structures, Sec-
tion 18 apply.
3.2 Vessels with L 45 m and Z
F
720
For vessels with Z
F
less or equal to 720 and no Class
Notation K, Table 5.1 applies. The index "F" will be
affixed to their equipment register number in the Cer-
tificate and in the Register Book.
3.3 Vessels with 24 m L < 45 m and Nota-
tion K
For vessels with a length 24 m L < 45 m and which
will have the Class Notation K attached to their Char-
acter of Classification the equipment numeral Z
K
and
Table 5.2 apply. The index "FC" will be affixed to
their equipment register number in the Certificate and
in the Register Book. Without Class Notation K Table
5.1 applies.
3.4 Vessels with 12 m L < 24 m
The equipment is to be determined for the length L in
Table 5.2. The index "FC" will be affixed to their
equipment register number in the Certificate and in the
Register Book.
C. Anchors
1. Arrangement
The rule bower anchors are to be connected to their
chain cables and positioned on board ready for use.
Normally each anchor should be stowed in the hawse
and hawse pipe in such a way, that it remains firmly
secured in seagoing conditions.
Other equivalent arrangements may be possible and
have to be in accordance with relevant maritime Ad-
ministration rules. If an anchor arrangement is located
at the aft part of the vessel, it has to be guaranteed,
that the propeller will be protected against damage by
chain cable or steel wire. Anchor manoeuvring has to
be carried out with the propulsion engine in the stand-
by condition.
2. Anchor design
2.1 Anchors have to be of approved design. The
mass of the heads of patent (ordinary stockless) an-
chors, including pins and fittings, is not to be less than
60 per cent of the total mass of the anchor.
2.2 For stock anchors, the total mass of the an-
chor, including stock, shall comply with the values in
Tables 5.1 or 5.2. The mass of the stock shall be 20
percent of this total mass.
2.3 The mass of each individual bower anchor
may vary by up to 7 per cent above or below the re-
quired individual mass provided that the total mass of
all bower anchors is not less than the sum of the re-
quired individual masses.
3. High holding power anchors
3.1 Where special anchors are approved by GL as
"High Holding Power Anchors" (HHP), the anchor
mass may be 75 per cent of anchor mass as per Table
5.1 or 5.2.
"High Holding Power Anchors" are anchors which are
suitable for the vessel's use at any time and which do
not require prior adjustment or special placement on
sea bed.
3.2 For approval as a "High Holding Power An-
chor", satisfactory tests are to be made on various
types of bottom and the anchor is to have a holding
power at least twice that of a patent anchor ("Admi-
ralty Standard Stockless") of the same mass. These
tests have to be approved by GL.
3.3 Dimensioning of chain cable and of windlass
is to be based on the undiminished anchor mass ac-
cording to Table 5.1 or 5.2.
4. Holding equipment for vessels with 12 m
L < 24 m
Scallop rakes and comparable items may be used in
lieu of anchors if they are of equivalent holding
power.
Chapter 8
Page 52
Section 5 Anchoring and Mooring Equipment I - Part 1
GL 2007

C
Table 5.1 Anchor, chain cables and ropes
2 bower
anchors
Stud link chain cables
1
for bower anchors Recommended mooring ropes
Diameter
No. for
register
Equip-
ment
numeral
Z
F

Weight
per
anchor
Total
length
d
1
d
2
d
3

Number Length
Breaking
load
[kg] [m] [mm] [mm] [mm] [m] [kN]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
101 F 30 70 137,5 11 11 11 2 40 25
102 F 30 - 40 80 165 11 11 11 2 50 30
103 F 40 - 50 100 192,5 11 11 11 2 60 30
104 F 50 - 60 120 192,5 12,5 12,5 12,5 2 60 30
105 F 60 - 70 140 192,5 12,5 12,5 12,5 2 80 30
106 F 70 - 80 160 220 14 12,5 12,5 2 100 35
107 F 80 - 90 180 220 14 12,5 12,5 2 100 35
108 F 90 -100 210 220 16 14 14 2 110 35
109 F 100 -110 240 220 16 14 14 2 110 40
110 F 110 -120 270 247,5 17,5 16 16 2 110 40
111 F 120 -130 300 247,5 17,5 16 16 2 110 45
112 F 130 -140 340 275 19 17,5 17,5 2 120 45
113 F 140 -150 390 275 19 17,5 17,5 2 120 50
114 F 150 -175 480 275 22 19 19 2 120 55
115 F 175 -205 570 302,5 24 20,5 20,5 2 120 60
116 F 205 -240 660 302,5 26 22 20,5 2 120 65
117 F 240 -280 780 330 28 24 22 3 120 70
118 F 280 -320 900 357,5 30 26 24 3 140 80
119 F 320 -360 1020 357,5 32 28 24 3 140 85
120 F 360 -400 1140 385 34 30 26 3 140 95
121 F 400 -450 1290 385 36 32 28 3 140 100
122 F 450 -500 1440 412,5 38 34 30 3 140 110
123 F 500 -550 1590 412,5 40 34 30 4 160 120
124 F 550 -600 1740 440 42 36 32 4 160 130
125 F 600 -660 1920 440 44 38 34 4 160 145
126 F 660 -720 2100 440 46 40 36 4 160 160
Remarks:
1
studless chain cables in accordance with DIN 766 of at least same proof load may be taken in lieu of stud link chain cables up to 16 mm
diameter
d
1
= chain diameter Grade K 1 (ordinary quality)
d
2
= chain diameter Grade K 2 (special quality)
d
3
= chain diameter Grade K 3 (extra special quality)


D. Chain Cables
1. Chain cable diameters given in Tables 5.1
and 5.2 apply to chain cables made of chain cable
materials specified in the requirements of the GL
Rules II Materials and Welding, Part 1 Metallic
Materials, Chapter 4 Equipment for following
grades:
Grade K 1 (ordinary quality)
Grade K 2 (special quality)
Grade K 3 (extra special quality)
Grade K 1 material used for chain cables in conjunc-
tion with "High Holding Power Anchors" shall have a
tensile strength R
m
of not less than 400 N/mm
2
.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 5 Anchoring and Mooring Equipment Chapter 8
Page 53

D
Table 5.2 Anchors, chain cables and ropes of fishing vessels in coastal operation
Equip-
ment
numeral
Bower anchors
Stud link chain cables
1
for
bower anchor
Recommended mooring
ropes
Diameter Diameter
No.
for
register
Length

L
Z
K
Number
Weight
per
anchor
Total
length
d
1
d
2

Total
length
d
4
d
5

[m] [kg] [m] [mm] [mm] [m] [mm] [mm]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
105 FC 12 - 14 2 60 95,0 11,0 11,0 80 20
106 FC 14 - 17 2 80 110,0 11,0 11,0 100 10 20
107 FC 17 - 20 2 95 110,0 12,5 12,5 120 10 20
108 FC 270 2 110 137,5 12,5 12,5 150 10 22
109 FC 270-300 2 140 165,0 14,0 12,5 180 10 22
110 FC 300-330 2 180 165,0 14,0 12,5 200 10 22
111 FC 330-360 2 210 220,0 16,0 14,0 225 10 24
112 FC 360-400 2 250 220,0 16,0 14,0 225 10 24
113 FC 400-450 2 300 247,5 17,5 16,0 225 10 24
114 FC 450-500 2 370 247,5 19,0 17,0 250 12 26
115 FC



20 - 45

>500 2 440 275,0 22,0 19,0 250 12 26
Remarks:
1
studless chain cables in accordance with DIN 766 (or equivalent) of at least same proof load may be taken in lieu of stud link chain cables
d
1
= chain diameter Grade K 1 (ordinary quality)
d
2
= chain diameter Grade K 2 (special quality)
d
4
= diameter of wire rope 6 24, nominal breaking strength: 1570 N/mm
2

d
5
= diameter of polyamid ropes of normal construction and manila ropes (Grade 1)
The breaking load of polyester and polypropylen ropes is to be the same as of polyamid ropes.

Grade K 2 and K 3 chain cables have to be purchased
and quenched and tempered after production from
recognized manufacturers only.
2. The total length of chain given in Table 5.1
and Table 5.2 is to be divided in approximately equal
parts between the two bower anchors.
3. Short link chain cables in accordance with
DIN 766, or equivalent, of same proof load may be
taken in lieu of stud link chain cables of up to 16 mm
diameter.
4. For connection of the anchor with the chain
cable approved Kenter-type anchor shackles may be
chosen in lieu of the common Dee-shackles. A fore-
runner with swivel is to be fitted between anchor and
chain cable. In lieu of a forerunner with swivel an
approved swivel shackle may be used. However,
swivel shackles are not to be connected to the anchor
shank unless specially approved. A sufficient number
of suitable spare shackles are to be kept on board to
facilitate fitting of the spare anchor at any time. On
Owner's request the swivel shackle may be dispensed
with.
5. The attachment of inboard ends of chain
cables to the vessel's structure is to be provided with a
mean suitable to permit, in case of emergency, an easy
slipping of chain cables to sea, operable from an ac-
cessible position outside the chain locker.
The inboard ends of chain cables are to be secured to
the structures by a fastening able to withstand a force
not less than 15 % nor more than 30 % of the rated
breaking load of the chain cable.
E. Ropes instead of Chain Cables
1. Vessels with 30 m L < 45 m
1.1 The chain cable of one or two anchors may
be replaced by a steel wire rope.
1.2 Where steel wire ropes are fitted in lieu of
chain cables, the following is to be observed:
Chapter 8
Page 54
Section 5 Anchoring and Mooring Equipment I - Part 1
GL 2007

E
1.2.1 The length of the rope is to be equal to 1,5
times the corresponding tabular chain cable length.
The breaking load of the rope is not to be less than the
breaking load of the tabular chain cable of Grade K 1.
1.2.2 A short length of chain cable is to be fitted
between anchor and wire rope having a length of 12,5
m or equal to the distance between anchor in stowed
position and winch, whichever is less.
1.2.3 Wire rope winches are to be fitted which
comply with the requirements defined in Section 6.
1.2.4 Wire ropes of trawl winches may be used as
anchor chain cables. Lead blocks and guide rollers
shall be suitably fitted and arranged to prevent the
ropes from chafing at deckhouses, superstructures,
deck plating and equipment on deck. Where the rope
diameter is 18 mm and greater the guide rollers are to
be permanently fitted. The trawl winch is to comply
with the requirements of Section 6.
2. Vessels with L < 30 m
The chain cables of both anchors may be replaced by
steel wire ropes. The requirements of 1.2 have to be
considered.
3. Vessels with 12 m L < 24 m
For vessels with L < 24 m, a manila or synthetic fibre
rope of not less than 20 mm diameter may be fitted
instead of the steel wire rope for the second anchor
(see 1.). The breaking load of a manila rope is not to
be less than the breaking load of the chain cable.
Suitable means for holding the vessel at anchor (rope
winch, bollard) and for lifting the anchor (rope drum
or warping head of a rope winch or a trawl winch) are
to be provided. The requirements of Section 6 are to
be observed.
4. Anchors of 60 kg or less
Where anchors of 60 kg or less are fitted, the follow-
ing applies:
4.1 Manila or synthetic fibre ropes may be fitted
for both anchors. The length of the rope is not to be
less than 1,5 times the required chain length. The rope
diameter is not to be less than 20 mm.
4.2 Between anchor and anchor rope a short
length of chain according to 1.2.2 is to be fitted.
4.3 In lieu of the rope winch required according
with 1.2.3 other suitable means for holding the vessel
at anchor and lifting the anchor may be fitted, e.g.
bollard, warping head of trawl or rope winch. The
requirements of Section 6 are to be observed. In spe-
cial cases and upon application of the owner, the
winch may be dispensed with if it is proved by trials
that the anchor can be dropped and lifted by hand
without exposing the crew to any danger.
F. Chain Locker
1. The chain locker is to be of capacity and
depth adequate to provide an easy direct lead of the
cables through the chain pipes and self-stowing of the
cables.
The minimum required stowage capacity without mud
box for the two bow anchor chains is as follows:

2 3
S 1,1 d [m ]
100000
=


d = chain diameter [mm] according to Table 5.1
or Table 5.2
= total length of stud link chain cable according
to Table 5.1 or Table 5.2
The total stowage capacity is to be distributed on two
chain lockers of equal size for port and starboard chain
cables. The shape of the base areas shall as far as
possible be quadratic with a maximum length of 33 d.
As an alternative, circular base areas may be selected,
the diameter of which shall not exceed 30 35 d.
Above stowage of each chain locker in addition a free
depth of
h = 1500 [mm]
is to be provided, if the local arrangement enables this.
2. The chain locker boundaries and their access
openings are to be watertight to prevent flooding of
adjacent spaces, where essential installations or
equipment are arranged in order to not affect the
proper operation of the vessel after accidental flooding
of the chain locker.
3. Adequate drainage facilities of the chain
locker are to be provided.
4. Where chain locker boundaries are also tank
boundaries their scantlings of stiffeners and plating are
to be determined as for tanks in accordance with Sec-
tion 3.
Where this is not the case, plate thickness is to be
determined as for t
2
and the section modulus as for W
2

in accordance with Chapter 1 Hull Structures, Sec-
tion 12, B.2. and B.3. respectively. The distance from
the load centre to the top of chain locker pipe is to be
taken for calculating the load.
A corrosion allowance of 1,5 mm has to be applied.
The minimum thickness of plating is 5,0 mm.
G. Windlasses
1. Basic Rules
The design and construction of windlasses for fishing
vessels shall be based on the Chapter 2 Machinery
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 5 Anchoring and Mooring Equipment Chapter 8
Page 55

G
Installations, Section 14, D. unless they are super-
seded by the special requirements defined in this Sec-
tion.
2. Design principles
2.1 Fishing vessels provided with anchors of or
above 150 kg shall be fitted with a windlass. The
windlass shall be fitted with a messenger wheel and/or
drum for each anchor and means for release of each
messenger wheel or drum. If for anchors with a weight
of less than 150 kg no windlass is provided, other
arrangements for dropping and hoisting the anchor are
to be considered.
2.2 It shall not be possible to carry the chains
forward to the hawsepipe, skid or similar arrangement
without the chain passing the messenger wheels.
When anchor wire is used it shall pass a roller adja-
cent to the hawsepipe to avoid chafing.
2.3 The windlass, its support and its brakes shall
be capable of absorbing a static tension of at least 45
% of the breaking strength of the anchor chain or
anchor wire without the occurrence of any permanent
deformations and without the brake losing its hold.
Furthermore, a chain stopper or wire nipper should be
fitted between the windlass and the hawsepipe or
similar for each anchor chain or anchor wire capable
of holding the vessel while at anchor.
If chain stoppers or wire nippers are not fitted, the
windlass, its support and its brake shall be capable of
absorbing a static tension of at least 80 % of the break-
ing strength of the anchor chain or anchor wire.
The chain stopper or wire nipper and their supports
shall be capable of absorbing a static tension of at
least 80 % of the breaking strength of the anchor
chain/wire without the occurrence of any permanent
deformations and without the chain stopper or wire
nipper losing its hold.
2.4 If the trawl winch is fitted with messenger
wheels, etc. and meets the requirements set out in 2.1
to 2.3 such a winch may be used as a windlass.
2.5 Fishing vessels which have been authorized
to use trawl warp as anchor wire may use their trawl
winch as a windlass provided the trawl warp can be
wound on a drum with a braking device that is inde-
pendent of the actual trawl warps in use for fishing.
Lead blocks and guide rollers shall be suitably fitted
and arranged to prevent the warps from chafing at the
deckhouses, superstructures, deck plating and equip-
ment on deck.
H. Mooring Equipment
Note
For estimating approximate mooring forces, a GL
computer program system is available.
1. Ropes
1.1 The mooring ropes specified in Tables 5.1
and 5.2 and the content of 1.2 and 1.3 are recommen-
dations only, a compliance with which is not a condi-
tion of Class.
1.2 Breaking load
For mooring lines steel wire ropes as well as fibre
ropes made of natural or synthetic fibres or wire ropes
consisting of steel wire and fibre cores may be used.
Nominal breaking loads specified in Table 5.1 are
valid for wire ropes only. Where ropes of synthetic
fibre are used, the breaking load is to be increased
above the table values. The extent of increase depends
on material quality.
The required diameters of synthetic fibre ropes used in
lieu of steel wire ropes may be taken from Table 5.3.
Table 5.3 Equivalent diameters of synthetic wire and fibre ropes related to steel wire ropes
Synthetic wire ropes Fibre Ropes
Steel wire ropes
1

Polyamide
2
Polyamide Polyester Polypropylene
Diameter [mm] Diameter [mm] Diameter [mm] Diameter [mm] Diameter [mm]
13 32 32 32 32
14 36 36 36 36
16 40 40 40 40
18 44 44 44 44
20 48 48 48 48
22 48 48 48 52
24 52 52 52 56
26 56 60 60 64
1
according to DIN 3068 or equivalent
2
Regular laid ropes of refined polyamide monofilaments and filament fibres

Chapter 8
Page 56
Section 5 Anchoring and Mooring Equipment I - Part 1
GL 2007

H
Regardless of the breaking load, recommended in
Table 5.1, the diameter of fibre ropes should not be
less than 20 mm.
1.3 Type of wire ropes
Wire ropes shall be of the following type:
6 24 wires with 7 fibre cores for breaking
loads of up to 500 kN type: standard
6 36 wires with 1 fibre core for breaking loads
of more than 500 kN type: standard
Where wire ropes are stored on mooring winch drums,
steel cored wire ropes may be used e.g.:
6 19 wires with 1 steel core type: seal
6 36 wires with 1 steel core
type: Warrington-seal
1.4 Length
The length of the individual mooring ropes may be up
to 7 per cent less than that given in Table 5.1 and
Table 5.2 provided that the total length of all the wires
and ropes is not less than the sum of the individual
lengths.
2. Mooring winches, bollards, hawses
2.1 Mooring winches are to be designed accord-
ing to the basic Rules defined in G.1. taking into ac-
count the actual mooring lines and 80 % of their
nominal breaking loads. Substructures are to be di-
mensioned according to Section 3.
2.2 Hawses, bollards and cleats shall be so de-
signed as to protect the ropes against excessive wear.
They are to be of proved construction and shall com-
ply with relevant standards.
Note
Attention is drawn to relevant National Standards.
2.3 Hawses, bollards, cleates and their substruc-
tures are to be strengthened, if they are intended to be
belayed by multiple lines. In this case 80 % of the
nominal breaking load of the individual lines has to be
used as pulling forces.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 5 Anchoring and Mooring Equipment Chapter 8
Page 57

H


Section 6

Fishing Gear and Lifting Appliances
A. General
1. Scope of application
1.1 Equipment which is used for fishing, catch
handling, loading and/or discharging is subject to
these Rules.
1.2 Equipment according to 1.1 is not part of a
fishing vessel's Classification even in case the Class
Notation CFG (Certified Fishing Gear) has been as-
signed to the vessel.
1.3 In a fishing vessel's Classification all founda-
tions and their substructures for cranes, masts, gan-
tries, gallows, winches, fairleads, etc. are included.
1.4 If the Class Notation CFG shall be assigned
to a vessel, the requirements according to F.2. and F.3.
are to be met.
1.5 In these Rules the requirements for fishing
gear and lifting appliances as well as ropes and acces-
sories will be defined.
2. Definitions
2.1 Fishing gear
2.1.1 Masts, gantries, gallows, outriggers, jumper
stays/tackles and other gear used for fishing and/or
catch handling at sea are defined as fishing gear.
2.1.2 Deck equipment like winches, fairleads, roll-
ers, pad eyes, etc. used for fishing is also part of the
fishing gear.
2.2 Lifting appliances
2.2.1 All cranes, derricks, hoists, tackles and other
gear used for loading and/or discharging of, e.g. proc-
essed catch, fish meal, supplies, equipment, etc. in a
harbour (for exceptions see C.3.2), are defined as
lifting appliances.
2.2.2 Some gear/appliance or parts of it may be
regarded as fishing gear and lifting appliance alike.
2.3 Ropes and accessories
2.3.1 Running and standing wire ropes used for
fishing, catch handling, loading and/or discharging are
defined as ropes.
2.3.2 Chains, rings, hooks, shackles, swivels,
blocks, etc. are defined as accessories.
2.3.3 Ropes and accessories are usually part of a
fishing gear or lifting appliance. They may, however,
be fixed or used individually on the deck of a fishing
vessel as well.
2.4 Loads
2.4.1 Design load DL
n

The design load DL
n
is the static load a fishing gear is
dimensioned for and will be distinguished as follows:
DL
1
is the design load for catch handling at sea
DL
2
is the nominal winch pull when there is
only one rope layer on the drum.
DL
3
is the minimum breaking load of a trawl
warp
For dimensioning, DL
1
and DL
2
are to be multiplied
by the operating factor f
o
, see C.2.1.2.
2.4.2 Operation load
L
1
is the operation load for catch handling gear
L
2
is the operation load for pelagic trawling gear
2.5 Safe working load SWL
The safe working load SWL is the maximum static
load a lifting appliance is allowed to handle with its
hook or any other load attaching device. For dimen-
sioning the SWL is to be multiplied by a dynamic
factor as described in the Lifting Appliance Guide-
lines, see 3.3.1.
2.6 Certification
Following plan approval as well as initial tests and
examination fishing gear and lifting appliances will
get the GL documentation as described in F.4.1. This
combined approval system is called "Certification".
2.7 Class Notation
On the basis of "Certification" and in case GL is en-
trusted to conduct annual/5-yearly surveys and the
supervision of load testing every five years the vessel
will get the "Class Notation" CFG (Certified Fishing
Gear). For documentation see F.4.2.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 6 Fishing Gear and Lifting Appliances Chapter 8
Page 61

A
3. Applicable regulations, rules and stan-
dards
3.1 International regulations
For international regulations see Section 1, A.3.3.
3.2 Flag state regulations
Flag State regulations for the stability of the vessel,
accident prevention, dimensioning, etc., if existing, are
generally to be observed.
3.3 GL Rules and Guidelines
3.3.1 GL Rules VI Additional Rules and Guide-
lines, Part 2 Life-Saving Appliances, Lifting Appli-
ances, Accesses, Chapter 2 Guidelines for the Con-
struction and Survey of Lifting Appliances, in short
"Lifting Appliance Guidelines". These Guidelines are
dealing in detail with design and dimensioning re-
quirements, plan approval, supervision during con-
struction, Certification of components, examination
and testing, accident prevention and with the Certifi-
cation system for lifting appliances, ropes and acces-
sories.
3.3.2 Chapters 1 4 and GL Rules II Materials
and Welding, for hull structures, machinery and elec-
trical installations must be applied accordingly.
3.4 Standards
In general international and national standards for
ropes and accessories are accepted. Other standards
may be accepted after verification.
B. Plan Approval
1. General
Depending on the contractual and legal situation the
following applies:
1.1 Classification
For the Classification of the vessel it is conditional
that the documents, as listed in 2.1, undergo approval
and/or verification.
1.2 Certification
For the Certification of fishing gear and lifting appli-
ances the documents as described in 2.2 shall undergo
approval and/or verification.
1.3 Class Notation
For assigning a Class Notation to a vessel no addi-
tional plan approval and/or verification in excess of
those addressed in 1.1 and 1.2 is required.
2. Documents for approval
The approval documents shall contain all dimensions,
details of materials and welding as well as accident
prevention measures. If necessary parts lists are to be
added.
2.1 Documents for Classification
For plan approval the following documents shall be
submitted in triplicate:
General arrangement drawings showing the
fishing gear, lifting appliances and deck equip-
ment together with their rope reeving/leading
systems.
Drawings showing all foundations with their
substructures for fishing gear, lifting appliances
and deck equipment.
Information about the forces which may act on
the foundations and their substructures, at least
the following:
for fishing gear the respective DL
n
values
and, if necessary, height and angles of rope
attack, see also C.2.
for lifting appliances the SWL value and as-
sociated load radii, see also C.3.
Stability sheets covering the fishing gear and/or
lifting appliances as may be necessary.
2.2 Documents for Certification
These documents are only required in case of national
regulations asking for plan approval/Certification and
if this is agreed with the shipyard and/or owners.
2.2.1 Documents for fishing gear
For plan approval the following documents are to be
submitted in triplicate except strength calculations
and/or force diagrams which are required in duplicate
only:
strength calculations and/or force diagrams
detailed rope reeving / leading plans of fishing
gear
drawings of masts and booms, gantries, gallows,
outriggers, etc. together with their fittings
information about the machinery such as hoist-
ing, slewing and luffing mechanisms plus gen-
eral drawings of the winches including their de-
sign data, and detail drawings of base plate and
drums
hydraulic circuit diagrams of all machinery
2.2.2 Documents for lifting appliances
For plan approval the documents prescribed by the
Lifting Appliance Guidelines are to be submitted in
triplicate, except strength calculations and/or force
diagrams which are required in duplicate only.
Chapter 8
Page 62
Section 6 Fishing Gear and Lifting Appliances I - Part 1
GL 2007

B
2.2.3 Documents for ropes and accessories
2.2.3.1 Information about all ropes as defined in
A.2.3.1 are to be provided, e.g. rope standard, con-
struction, diameter and strength of material. (The
minimum breaking load is specified in the applicable
standard).
2.2.3.2 Information about location and nominal sizes
of all accessories which are used for fishing gear and
lifting appliances are to be provided. In addition draw-
ings of all accessories are required which are not
manufactured according to standards, e.g. rollers,
blocks, esp. trawl warp blocks, swivels, etc.
C. Dimensioning
1. General
1.1 While fishing gear is to be dimensioned for a
defined design load DL
n
, lifting appliances must be
assessed for a defined safe working load SWL. These
loads shall be specified in the drawings and calcula-
tions submitted. Allowance is to be made for possible
oblique loading and simultaneous loading of a sup-
porting structure by more than one fishing gear and/or
lifting appliance.
1.2 Shipyard, design office, manufacturers and/or
owners, as the case may be, have to decide on the
operating conditions and to specify the angles of trawl
warp attack and there possible combinations, the de-
sign loads DL
n
of fishing gear and the SWL of lifting
appliances to provide the basis for dimensioning and
approval.
2. Fishing gear
2.1 General
2.1.1 For dimensioning it has to be considered that
the forces acting on fishing gear cannot be determined
exactly. This is especially valid for loads acting on
e.g. net tails, jumper stay tackles or trawling gear.
2.1.2 Consequently the operating factor f
o
= 1,5 as
applied in the following makes up for these uncertain
loads.
2.1.3 Fish pumps and power blocks for hauling of
nets will be dealt with individually, if necessary.
2.2 Catch handling gear
2.2.1 The dimensioning of catch handling gear is to
be based on the following:
L
1
= DL
1
f
o

15 angle of rope attack in all directions in case
of freely suspended loads, e.g. jumper stay tack-
les
allowable stresses according to load condition B
in the Lifting Appliance Guidelines
2.2.2 For dimensioning of jumper stays it has to be
assumed that the minimum breaking load of the
jumper stays is not to be less than the product of the
maximum rope tension (due to SWL and pre-
tensioning) and a factor of utilization K equal to 4.
The slag span f of the unloaded rope shall be limited
by:
l / f = length between suspension/slag span < 50
values between 10 and 30 are recommended
2.2.3 In case there are several tackles suspended
from a jumper stay it will be assumed that only one at
a time is in operation if not otherwise described in the
approval documentation.
2.3 Trawling gear
The dimensioning of trawling gear is to be based on
the nominal winch pull (pelagic trawl) or, in case the
net may be caught, on the minimum breaking load of a
trawl warp (ground trawl).
2.3.1 Pelagic trawl
The dimensioning of pelagic trawling gear is to be
based on the following:
L
2
= DL
2
f
o

trawl warp angles of egression from the vessel's
hull as specified but within the following limits:
- 15 up to 45 in the vertical plane against
horizontal level
- 0 up to 45 in the horizontal plane against
vertical level
allowable stresses according to load condition B
in the Lifting Appliance Guidelines
2.3.2 Ground trawl
The dimensioning of ground trawling gear is to be
based on the following:
DL
3

trawl warp angle of egression as described in
2.3.1
allowable normal or von Mises stress equal to
R
eH
in case of normal strength materials
a safety factor of 1,1 against R
eH
or R
p0,2
if being
decisive
In case of breakage of a trawl warp, gantries,
masts, derricks, gallows, etc., shall not fail and
remain in place
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 6 Fishing Gear and Lifting Appliances Chapter 8
Page 63

C
2.3.3 The angles of trawl warp of egression as
specified consider dynamic vessel inclinations as
prescribed in the Lifting Appliance Guidelines.
2.3.4 If higher strength materials are used their R
eH

or R
p0,2
shall be reduced in accordance with the Lifting
Appliance Guidelines. R
eH
respectively R
p0,2
is to be
taken from the applicable material standards.
2.3.5 In the North and Baltic Sea, or in other shal-
low waters with similar conditions, it is recommended
that trawl booms and their forward stays should be
dimensioned with an additional safety margin of 10 %.
3. Lifting appliances
3.1 The dimensioning of lifting appliances is to
be based on SWL, load radius, dynamic influences,
etc. for a Type A lifting appliance as described in the
Lifting Appliance Guidelines for load handling in
sheltered waters, i.e. in harbours. This system is based
on allowed stresses, proof against R
eH
or R
p0,2
and
fatigue, as may be necessary.
For dimensioning a minimum static vessel inclination
is prescribed in the Lifting Appliance Guidelines.
Depending on the actual stability of a given vessel a
bigger inclination may have to be taken into consid-
eration.
3.2 A dimensioning of lifting appliances for load
handling at sea may be considered individually on the
basis of the Lifting Appliance Guidelines, if this may
be necessary. In such cases a larger vessel inclination
and additional dynamic influences are to be taken into
consideration.
4. Ropes and accessories
4.1 Ropes
Construction and diameter of the various wire ropes
used on a fishing vessel are to be chosen by shipyard,
design office, manufacturers and/or owners as the case
may be, however, the following is to be observed:
4.1.1 The minimum breaking load of ropes for
catch handling gear and lifting appliances is to be
calculated by multiplying their static rope forces with
the utility factor as given in the Lifting Appliances
Guidelines. Static rope forces are to be calculated
without dynamic influences but by taking into consid-
eration the friction and bending resistance in the rope
sheaves.
4.1.2 The minimum breaking load of trawl warps
shall be at least 2,5 times the design load DL
2
, see
A.2.4.
4.2 Accessories
4.2.1 In case of accessories for catch handling gear
and lifting appliances their nominal sizes shall be
equal to the static forces acting on them, e.g. DL
1
or
SWL. This system is described in the Lifting Appli-
ance Guidelines.
4.2.2 In case of accessories for trawling gear their
nominal sizes shall be equal to the design load DL
2
.
4.2.3 Accessories which have to take the trawl
warp pull and go over board for fishing, shall have
nominal sizes at least equal to half the design load
DL
2
.
4.2.4 Accessories which have to take the pull of
jumper stays shall have nominal sizes at least equal to
half the minimum breaking load of the jumper stays.
4.2.5 The nominal sizes of accessories are to be
finally determined by interpolation between the nomi-
nal sizes as shown e.g. in the relevant Tables in the
Lifting Appliance Guidelines. If a design value is
25 % higher than the difference towards the following
nominal size, this higher nominal size shall be chosen.
D. Construction
1. General
Constructional requirements for lifting appliances are
defined in the Lifting Appliance Guidelines. For fish-
ing gear the following applies additionally:
1.1 Fishing in arctic waters requires a special
design to prevent undue accumulation of ice as far as
possible, e.g. mast stays should be avoided.
1.2 Materials and welding procedures as well as
the construction measures of hydraulic components
shall be in line with the relevant principles of the GL
Rules, see A.3.3.2.
2. Fishing gear
2.1 Stern gantries
2.1.1 Stern gantries shall be dimensioned for angles
of rope attack in accordance with C.2.3.1 as need may
be. All locations where rope blocks are fixed shall be
sufficiently strengthened, e.g. by inside frames and
outside brackets.
2.1.2 End operating/rest positions of hinged gan-
tries shall be able to be sufficiently locked or secured
by mechanical or hydraulic means.
2.1.3 The movement of hinged gantries shall be
controlled from a local control stand inaccessible to
unauthorized persons or from a central control stand,
e.g. at the rear of the bridge. As soon as the controls,
such as push-buttons, levers and similar are released,
movement of the gantry shall stop immediately.
If central control is realized, emergency stop buttons
have to be provided in the rear working deck area. The
gantry has to be fully visible from the control station.
Chapter 8
Page 64
Section 6 Fishing Gear and Lifting Appliances I - Part 1
GL 2007

D
2.1.4 Fixed stern gantries shall have safe access to
their top and to platforms, if any. Top and platforms
shall have sufficient handrails and foot bars, compare
Section 4, E.3.
2.2 Side gallows
2.2.1 Side gallows (fish davits) typically arranged
on starboard side need to have sufficient additional
strength because they may get heavy blows when the
trawl boards are hauled in at bad seaway conditions.
2.2.2 Means are to be provided in front of side
gallows for a secure stowage of trawl boards and trawl
doors, if any.
2.3 Jumper stays
2.3.1 Sheaves rolling onto the jumper stay shall
have at least a minimum diameter of 14 times the rope
diameter.
2.3.2 To reduce the effect of corrosion, jumper stay
ropes shall be galvanized and shall have wire cores.
2.3.3 Wire rope clips and other detachable clamps
are not permitted for rope end attachments. For
shackle connections only type C shackles as shown in
the Lifting Appliance Guidelines shall be employed.
2.4 Trawl booms
If trawl booms are also employed for loading and
discharging, they have to be designed as fishing gear
and lifting appliances alike.
3. Deck equipment
3.1 Winches
3.1.1 Winches shall be designed in accordance with
the Chapter 2 Machinery Installations and be of
reversible type. Also the rope paying out shall be
motor controlled.
3.1.2 Winches for ground trawling shall be dimen-
sioned to withstand the design load DL
3
, i.e. the
breaking of a trawl warp. Winches for pelagic trawling
shall be designed to withstand the nominal winch pull
DL
2
multiplied by the operating factor f
o
. (see A.2.4
and C.2.1.2).
3.1.3 Satisfactory spooling of ropes onto the drums
shall be ensured. Winch drums of trawl warps shall
have a diameter ratio (d : D) between ropes and drums
of 1:14. The direction in which the rope reels onto the
drum shall be clearly indicated on the winch.
3.1.4 The way in which the first layer of rope is
wound onto the drum shall be chosen depending on
the lay of the rope so that the rope does not unlay.
3.1.5 Trawl winches and their leading rollers shall
be arranged such that the rope fleet angles to either
side of the drum centre are symmetrical.
3.1.6 The number of safety turns of rope left on a
drum shall be such that the maximum rope tension,
which is in case of winches for ground trawling the
minimum rope breaking load, can be taken jointly by
the remaining turns and the end fastenings.
3.1.7 Rope end fastenings shall be designed such
that they
do not pull the rope over sharp edges
cannot be released unintentionally
are easy to inspect
3.2 Fairleads and rollers
3.2.1 Centre fairleads on side trawlers shall be
provided with a protective guard extending at the sides
at least 0,30 m beyond the outer periphery of the fair-
leads.
3.2.2 The groove of rollers passed over by shack-
les, swivels, chain links, etc. shall be specially de-
signed to prevent undue stressing of these parts.
3.2.3 Rope sheaves are to be fitted with a protec-
tive device which prevents the ropes from jumping out
of the sheave.
3.2.4 The sheave for the trawl warp messenger
rope shall be fixed in the bulwark. Fixing on top of the
bulwark is not allowed.
3.2.5 The fleet angle of wire ropes running over
metallic rope sheaves shall not exceed 4.
3.2.6 Rope sheaves made of plastic may only be
employed with the consent of GL and owners.
3.2.7 The groove diameter of rope sheaves shall be
at least 14 times the rope diameter in case of running
ropes under load.
4. Ropes and accessories
4.1 Ropes, especially trawl warps, which are
spooled in several layers, shall have a steel wire core.
4.2 Portable guide rollers shall not be used unless
fitted with an efficient and adequately designed rope
restraining device.
4.3 Shackles, swivels, chain links, etc. which are
to pass over rollers shall be specially designed in order
to prevent overstressing.
4.4 Bows and pad eyes for attaching of moveable
blocks shall be aligned in such a way that they may
not be undue stressed rectangular to their main load
plane.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 6 Fishing Gear and Lifting Appliances Chapter 8
Page 65

D
4.5 The material properties and dimensions of
pad eyes for high tensile shackles, e.g. green pin
shackles, may be obtained from GL Head Office upon
request.
4.6 Chains used for fishing or load handling shall
meet the requirements in the relevant GL Rules, see
A.3.3.2.
E. Accident Prevention
1. Deck areas
1.1 After the net has been hauled in or out, the
stern ramp shall be properly secured by suitable
equipment.
1.2 Provision shall be made for the stowage of
bulky netting to allow drainage and to prevent shift-
ing. The stowage area shall be of adequate dimensions
to hold down the centre of gravity of the stowed net as
far as possible and to allow for the crew to work not
endangered when handling the nets.
1.3 In the range of fishing winches and net
drums, a passageway at least 0,60 m wide shall be
maintained.
1.4 Fixed and removable fish pounds for holding
the catch on and below deck shall be of adequate size.
Fish pounds on deck shall be constructed in such a
way that water can drain without hindrance.
1.5 For further protective measures see Section
4, E.
2. Fishing gear
2.1 Fishing gear shall be designed to avoid work-
ing accidents and damage to the gear if the operating
instructions to be provided are consequently followed.
Possible danger scenarios during operations have to be
clearly addressed in these instructions.
2.2 Where practicable, provision shall be made to
stop trawl boards from swinging inboard, such as the
fitting of a portable prevention bar at the gallows aper-
ture, or other equally effective means.
2.3 If no fishing activities are under way, the
complete fishing gear has to be stowed in a safe way.
Adequate devices for lashing have to be provided.
2.4 Where manually operated gear is installed it
should be capable of being disengaged when the
warps are paying out. The operating wheels shall be
without spokes or protrusions which could cause in-
jury to the operator.
3. Lifting appliances
The relevant requirements in the Lifting Appliance
Guidelines apply.
4. Winches and controls
4.1 The controls and monitoring instruments of
winches shall be clearly arranged on the control plat-
form. They shall be placed to give the winch driver
ample room for unimpeded operation and an unob-
structed view of the working area.
4.2 Controls and monitoring instruments have to
be permanently, clearly and intelligible marked with
the direction or the function of the movement they
control. The arrangement and direction of movement
of controls and monitoring instruments must match the
direction of the movement which they control. In the
case of pushbutton controls there shall be a separate
button for each direction of movement.
4.3 Where a fishing winch is controlled from the
bridge, the arrangements shall be such that the opera-
tor has a clear view of the winch and the adjacent area.
In addition to an emergency button at the winch, an
emergency button on the bridge shall be provided.
4.4 Where necessary, emergency buttons for
winches shall be provided remote from the winch to
protect fishermen working in places which are dan-
gerous for operating trawl warps and boards.
F. Tests, Examinations, Certification and
Class Notation
1. General
1.1 The following statements outline the test,
survey and Certification system applied by GL in case
this is required by Flag State Regulations or agreed
upon with owners. The Class Notation system will be
applied in case the vessel shall get the Class Notation
CFG.
1.2 Lifting appliances with a SWL below one
tonne will be treated in the same way as those with
one tonne and more, except national regulations stipu-
late otherwise.
2. Certification
Certification of fishing gear and lifting appliances is
mainly intended to confirm adequate strength of load
bearing structural members and requires individual
Certificates for ropes and accessories. For Certifica-
tion plan approval as well as initial tests and examina-
tion of fishing gear and lifting appliances shall be
conducted before putting the gear/appliances into
operation, but no periodical surveys are required.
Chapter 8
Page 66
Section 6 Fishing Gear and Lifting Appliances I - Part 1
GL 2007

F
2.1 Supervision of construction
2.1.1 Supervision of construction at the premises of
subcontractors is not prescribed. Subcontractors shall
deliver fishing gear and lifting appliances with their
works Certificates for being presented to a GL Sur-
veyor by the shipyard.
2.1.2 In case of components being constructed at
the shipyard, i.e. hinged stern gantries, etc., a GL
Surveyor shall conduct supervision and certify the
construction. Fixed stern gantries are subject to Classi-
fication of the vessel and generally undergo supervi-
sion of construction.
2.2 Certificates for ropes and accessories
2.2.1 Works Certificates for wire ropes and acces-
sories will be accepted, if tensile testing to destruction
in case of ropes, respectively static load testing in case
of accessories as prescribed in the Lifting Appliance
Guidelines is confirmed in the Certificates.
2.2.2 The Certificates for wire ropes and accesso-
ries are to be ordered by the manufacturers of fishing
gear and lifting appliances at subcontractors and shall
be delivered to the shipyard together with the fabri-
cated gear/appliances for being handed over to a GL
Surveyor by the shipyard.
2.3 Initial tests and examination
2.3.1 Before being taken into operation, fishing
gear shall be presented to a GL Surveyor and function
tested in his presence as far as possible by the ship-
yard. Following this the GL Surveyor will examine the
gear.
2.3.2 Before being taken into operation lifting
appliances shall be load and function tested on the
vessel, usually by the shipyard, supervised by a GL
Surveyor who will examine the appliances after the
test.
2.3.3 Following supervision of load and/or function
testing and after examination, the acting GL Surveyor
will issue a GL load test Certificate, Form LA2, for
the lifting appliances, confirm the examinations con-
ducted by him for both fishing gear and lifting appli-
ances into a GL Register Book, Form LA1, and re-
lease the complete documentation as described under 4.
3. Class Notation
For the Class Notation CFG, in addition to Certifica-
tion, annual and 5-yearly examinations of fishing gear
and lifting appliances are to be conducted by a GL
Surveyor who will also supervise the 5 yearly load
testing of lifting appliances.
The Class Notation will automatically become invalid
and will be withdrawn by GL Head Office if fishing
gear and lifting appliances are no more presented for
surveys and/or load testing within the time windows
according to 3.1.4. The following tests and examina-
tions are to be performed:
3.1 Periodical tests and examinations
3.1.1 Once a year in conjunction with Annual Class
Surveys fishing gear and lifting appliances will be
surveyed by the acting GL Surveyor. Following this,
the GL Surveyor will confirm the surveys conducted
by him in the Register Book (Form LA1).
3.1.2 Every five years, in conjunction with the Class
Renewal Survey of the vessel, a new function/load
testing of fishing gear/lifting appliances, as far as pos-
sible, supervised by a GL Surveyor is required.
3.1.3 Following function/load testing in according
with 3.1.2 the acting GL Surveyor will examine all
gear/appliances, issue a new load test Certificate for
the lifting appliances, confirm all examinations con-
ducted by him in the Register Book and add the load
test Certificate to it.
3.1.4 All time windows for tests and surveys are
the same as for the Class Surveys of the vessel.
3.2 Tests and examinations after repair
3.2.1 After repair of load bearing parts of fishing
gear an examination is required.
3.2.2 After repair of load bearing parts of lifting
appliances a new load testing/examination and a new
load test Certificate is required.
3.2.3 Replacement of axles, shafts, rope sheaves,
ropes, accessories, etc. due to wear and tear does not
necessitate load testing and subsequent examination.
3.2.4 Newly issued Certificates have to be included
into the Register Book and the examinations have to
be confirmed in this book.
4. Documentation
4.1 Certification
4.1.1 Following successful tests and examinations
as described in the foregoing, the acting GL Surveyor
will issue a GL Register Book for all fishing gear and
lifting appliances on the vessel which shall remain on
board for at least 5 years after the last 5 yearly survey/
load testing.
4.1.2 In the Register Book all Certificates for load
testing of lifting appliances as well as for testing of
ropes and attachments will be collected as evidence to-
wards all parties concerned. In addition the GL Survey-
or will add rope reeving plans for lifting appliances and
fishing gear to the Register Book, as far as available.
4.2 Class Notation
The Class Notation CFG is subject to a contractual
agreement. No special Certificate will be issued to this
regard. The Class Notation will be stated in the Class
Certificate of the vessel by GL Head Office after suc-
cessful initial tests and examinations as well as Certi-
fication.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 6 Fishing Gear and Lifting Appliances Chapter 8
Page 67

F


Section 7

Structural Fire Protection
A. General
1. Application
The requirements in this Section are generally valid
for unrestricted service of fishing vessels as defined in
Section 1, B.3. Exceptions may be granted by GL for
restricted service ranges according to the Class Nota-
tions M, K and W.
2. Documents to be submitted
The following drawings and documents are to be
submitted, at least in triplicate for approval. GL re-
serve the right to ask for supplementary copies, if
deemed necessary.
fire division plan
insulation plan (may be part of the fire division
plan)
ventilation and air condition scheme
deck covering plan
door plan
fire control plan
list of approved materials and equipment
3. GL approval
3.1 The term "approved" relates to a material or
construction, for which GL has issued an Approval
Certificate. A type approval can be issued on the basis
of a successful standard fire test, which has been car-
ried out by neutral and recognized fire test institutes.
3.2 The type "A", "B" and "C" class partitions,
fire dampers, duct penetrations as well as the insula-
tion materials, linings, ceilings, surface materials and
not readily ignitable deck coverings shall be of ap-
proved type.
4. Equivalence
Where this Section requires that a particular fitting,
material, appliance or apparatus, or type thereof, shall
be fitted or carried in a fishing vessel, or that any
particular provision shall be made, GL may allow any
other fitting, material, appliance or apparatus, or type
thereof, to be fitted or carried, or any other provision
to be made in the vessel, if it is satisfied by trial
thereof or otherwise that such fitting, material, appli-
ance or apparatus or type thereof, or provision, is at
least as effective as that required by this Section.
Where compliance with any of the requirements of
this Section would be impracticable for the particular
design of the vessel, GL may substitute those with
alternative requirements, provided that equivalent
safety is achieved.
5. References
For the rules for fire protection and fire fighting see
Section 8, for electrical installations for fire detection
see Section 11h, D.4.
B. Requirements for Fire Protection for Fish-
ing Vessels with 12 m L < 45 m
1. Material
1.1 The hull, decks, structural bulkheads, super-
structures and deckhouses are to be of steel except
where in special cases the use of other suitable mate-
rial may be approved, having in mind the risk of fire.
1.2 Bulkheads and decks enclosing machinery
spaces, cargo spaces, emergency generator rooms,
galleys, pantries containing cooking appliances, store
rooms containing flammable liquids and workshops
other than those forming part of the machinery spaces
are to be of steel or equivalent material.
1.3 All stairways shall be of steel frame construc-
tion or equivalent material.
2. Exemptions
For fishing vessels with L < 24 m GL may accept
deviations from material requirements of 1.1 and 1.2.
3. Restricted use of combustible materials
3.1 Paints, varnishes and other finishes used on
exposed interior surfaces shall not offer an undue fire
hazard and shall not be capable of producing exces-
sive quantities of smoke.
3.2 Primary deck coverings, if applied, in ac-
commodation and service spaces and control stations,
which are located above machinery spaces, shall be of
an approved material which will not readily ignite.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 7 Structural Fire Protection Chapter 8
Page 71

B
4. Ventilation systems
4.1 The main inlet and outlets of all ventilation
systems shall be capable of being closed from outside
the respective spaces in the event of a fire.
4.2 Where they pass through accommodation
spaces or spaces containing combustible materials, the
exhaust ducts from galley ranges shall be appropri-
ately isolated.
5. Means of escape
5.1 Stairways and ladders shall be so arranged as
to provide, from all accommodation spaces and from
spaces in which the crew is normally employed, other
than machinery spaces, ready means of escape to the
open deck and from there to the lifeboats and liferafts.
5.2 At all levels of accommodation there shall be
provided at least two widely separated means of es-
cape from each restricted space or group of spaces.
5.3 Dispense may be given with one of the means
of escape, due regard being paid to the nature and
location of spaces and to the numbers of persons who
normally might be quartered or employed there.
5.4 No dead-end corridors having a length of
more than 7 m shall be accepted. A dead-end corridor
is a corridor or part of a corridor from which there is
only one escape route.
5.5 Two means of escape shall be provided from
the machinery space by two sets of steel ladders as
widely separated as possible leading to doors in the
upper part of the space similarly separated and from
which access is provided to the open deck.
5.6 For a vessel of a gross tonnage less than
1000, dispense may be given with one of the means of
escape due regard being paid to the dimension and
disposition of the upper part of the space.
C. Requirements for Fire Protection for Fish-
ing Vessels with L 45 m
1. Materials
1.1 The hull, decks, structural bulkheads, super-
structures and deckhouses are to be of steel except
where in special cases the use of other suitable mate-
rial may be approved, having in mind the risk of fire.
1.2 Components made from aluminium alloys
require special treatment, with regard to the mechani-
cal properties of the material in case of temperature
increase. In principle, the following is to be observed:
1.2.1 The insulation of "A" or "B" class divisions
shall be such that the temperature of the structural core
does not rise more than 200 C above the ambient
temperature at any time during the applicable fire
exposure to the standard fire test.
1.2.2 Special attention shall be given to the insula-
tion of aluminium alloy components of columns, stan-
chions and other structural members required to sup-
port lifeboat and liferaft stowage, launching and em-
barkation areas, and "A" and "B" class divisions to
ensure:
that for such members supporting lifeboat and
liferaft areas and "A" class divisions, the tem-
perature rise limitation specified in 1.2.1 shall
apply at the end of one hour; and
that for such members required to support "B"
class divisions, the temperature rise limitation
specified in 1.2.1 shall apply at the end of half
an hour.
1.2.3 Crowns and casings of machinery spaces of
category A shall be of steel construction and be insu-
lated as required by Table 7.1 as appropriate. Open-
ings therein, if any, shall be suitably arranged and
protected to prevent the spread of fire.
2. Accommodation and service spaces
2.1 One of the following methods of protection
shall be adopted in accommodation and service areas:
2.1.1 Method IC
The construction of all internal divisional bulkheading
of non-combustible "B" or "C" class divisions gener-
ally without the installation of an automatic sprinkler,
fire detection and fire alarm system in the accommo-
dation and service spaces, except as required by 10.1;
or
2.1.2 Method IIC
The fitting of an automatic sprinkler, fire detection
and fire alarm system, as required by 10.2 for the
detection and extinction of fire in all spaces in which
fire might be expected to originate, generally with no
restriction on the type of internal divisional bulkhead-
ing; or
2.1.3 Method IIIC
The fitting of a fixed fire detection and fire alarm
system, as required by 10.3, in all spaces in which a
fire might be expected to originate, generally with no
restriction on the type of internal divisional bulkhead-
ing, except that in no case must the area of any ac-
commodation space or spaces bounded by an "A" or
"B" class division exceed 50 m
2
. Consideration may
be given to increasing this area for public spaces.
2.2 The requirements for the use of non-com-
bustible materials in construction and insulation of the
boundary bulkheads of machinery spaces, control
stations, service spaces, etc., and the protection of
stairway enclosures and corridors will be common to
all three methods.
Chapter 8
Page 72
Section 7 Structural Fire Protection I - Part 1
GL 2007

C
Table 7.1 Fire integrity of bulkheads separating adjacent spaces
Spaces [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10]
Control stations [1] A-0
5
A-0 A-60 A-0 A-15 A-60 A-15 A-60 A-60
7
Corridors [2] C B-0
B-0
A-0
3

B-0 A-60 A-0 A-0 A-0
7
Accommodation spaces [3] C
1, 2

B-0
A-0
3

B-0 A-60 A-0 A-0 A-0
7
Stairways [4]
B-0
A-0
3

B-0
A-0
3

A-60 A-0 A-0 A-0
7
Service spaces (low risk) [5] C A-60 A-0 A-0 A-0
7
Machinery spaces of category A [6]
7
A-0 A-0 A-60
7
Other machinery spaces [7] A-0
4
A-0 A-0
7
Cargo spaces [8]
7
A-0
7
Service spaces (high risk) [9] A-0
4

7
Open decks [10]
Notes
1
No special requirements are imposed upon bulkheads in methods IIC and IIIC fire protection.
2
In case of method IIC "B" class bulkheads of "B-0" rating shall be provided between spaces or groups of spaces of 50 m
2
and over in area.
3
For clarification as to which applies, see 3. and 5.
4
Where spaces are of the same numerical category and superscript 4 appears, a bulkhead or deck of the rating shown in the Tables is only
required when the adjacent spaces are for a different purpose, e.g. in category 9. A galley next to a galley does not require a bulkhead but
a galley next to a paint room requires an "A-0" bulkhead.
5
Bulkheads separating the wheelhouse, chartroom and radio room from each other may be "B-0" rating.
6
Fire insulation need not be fitted if the machinery space in category 7, has little or no fire risk.
7
Where a 7 appears in the Tables, the division is required to be of steel or other equivalent material but is not required to be of "A" class
standard.


3. Bulkheads within the accommodation and
service spaces
3.1 All bulkheads required to be "B" class divi-
sions shall extend from deck to deck and to the shell
or other boundaries, unless continuous "B" class ceil-
ings or linings are fitted on both sides of the bulkhead
in which case the bulkhead may terminate at the con-
tinuous ceiling or lining.
3.2 Method IC
All bulkheads not required by this or other require-
ments of this Section to be "A" or "B" class divisions,
shall be of at least "C" class construction.
3.3 Method IIC
There shall be no restriction on the construction of
bulkheads not required by this or other requirements
of this Section to be "A" or "B" class divisions except
in individual cases where "C" class bulkheads are
required in accordance with Table 7.1.
3.4 Method IIIC
There shall be no restriction on the construction of
bulkheads not required by this Section to be "A" or "B"
class divisions except that the area of any accommoda-
tion space or spaces bounded by a continuous "A" or
"B" class division must in no case exceed 50 m
2
except
in individual cases where "C" class bulkheads are re-
quired in accordance with Table 7.1. Consideration
may be given to increasing this area for public spaces.
4. Fire integrity of bulkheads and decks
4.1 In addition to complying with the specific
provisions for fire integrity of bulkheads and decks
mentioned elsewhere in this Section, the minimum fire
integrity of bulkheads and decks shall be as prescribed
in Tables 7.1 and 7.2.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 7 Structural Fire Protection Chapter 8
Page 73

C
Table 7.2 Fire integrity of decks separating adjacent spaces
Spaces [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10]
Control stations [1] A-0 A-0 A-0 A-0 A-0 A-60 A-0 A-0 A-0
7
Corridors [2] A-0
7

7
A-0
7
A-60 A-0 A-0 A-0
7
Accommodation spaces [3] A-60 A-0
7
A-0
7
A-60 A-0 A-0 A-0
7
Stairways [4] A-0 A-0 A-0
7
A-0 A-60 A-8 A-8 A-8
7
Service spaces (low risk) [5] A-15 A-0 A-0 A-0
7
A-60 A-0 A-0 A-0
7
Machinery spaces of category A [6] A-60 A-60 A-60 A-60 A-60
7
A-60
6
A-30 A-60
7
Other machinery spaces [7] A-15 A-0 A-0 A-0 A-0 A-0
7
A-0 A-0
7
Cargo spaces [8] A-60 A-0 A-0 A-0 A-0 A-0 A-0
7
A-0
7
Service spaces (high risk) [9] A-60 A-0 A-0 A-0 A-0 A-60 A-0 A-0 A-0
4

7
Open decks [10]
7 7

7

7

7

7

7

7

7

See notes under Table 7.1


4.2 Continuous "B" class ceilings or linings, in
association with the relevant decks or bulkheads, may
be accepted as contributing, wholly or in part, to the
required insulation and integrity of a division.
4.3 External boundaries which are required in 1.1
to be of steel or other equivalent material may be
pierced for the fitting of windows and sidescuttles
provided that there is no requirement for such bounda-
ries to have "A" class integrity elsewhere in these
requirements. Similarly, in such boundaries which are
not required to have "A" class integrity, doors may be
of materials to meet the requirements of their applica-
tion.
4.4 The following requirements shall govern
application of the Tables:
Tables 7.1 and 7.2 shall apply respectively to the
bulkheads and decks separating adjacent spaces.
4.5 For determining the appropriate fire integrity
standards to be applied to divisions between adjacent
spaces, such spaces are classified according to their
fire risk as shown in the following categories 1 to 10.
Where the contents and use of a space are such that
there is a doubt as to its classification for the purpose
of this regulation, or where it is possible to assign two
or more classifications to a space, it shall be treated as
a space within the relevant category having the most
stringent boundary requirements. Smaller, enclosed
rooms within a space that have less than 30 % com-
municating openings to that space are to be considered
as separate spaces. The fire integrity of the boundary
bulkheads of such smaller rooms shall be as pre-
scribed in Tables 7.1 and 7.2.
The title of each category is intended to be typical
rather than restrictive. The number in parentheses
preceding each category refers to the applicable col-
umn or row number in the Tables.
[1] Control stations
Spaces containing emergency sources of power
and lighting. Wheelhouse and chartroom.
Spaces containing the vessel's radio equipment.
Fire control stations. Control room for propul-
sion machinery when located outside the ma-
chinery space. Spaces containing centralized fire
alarm equipment.
[2] Corridors
Corridors and lobbies.
[3] Accommodation spaces
Spaces used for public spaces, lavatories, cab-
ins, offices, hospitals, hobby rooms, pantries
containing no cooking appliances and similar
spaces.
[4] Stairways
Interior stairways, totally enclosed emergency
escape trunks and enclosures thereto.
In this connection, a stairway which is enclosed
only at one level shall be regarded as part of the
space from which it is not separated by a fire
door.
Chapter 8
Page 74
Section 7 Structural Fire Protection I - Part 1
GL 2007

C
[5] Service spaces (low risk)
Lockers and store-rooms not having provisions
for the storage of flammable liquids and having
areas less than 4 m
2
and drying rooms and laun-
dries.
[6] Machinery spaces of category A
Spaces and trunks to such spaces which contain:
Internal combustion machinery used for main
propulsion; or
internal combustion machinery used for pur-
poses other than main propulsion where such
machinery has in the aggregate a total power
output of not less than 375 kW; or
any oil-fired boiler or oil fuel unit.
[7] Other machinery spaces
Spaces, other than machinery spaces of category
A, containing propulsion machinery, boilers,
fuel oil units, steam and internal combustion en-
gines, generators and major electrical machin-
ery, oil filling stations, refrigerating, stabilizing,
ventilation and air conditioning machinery, and
similar spaces, and trunks to such spaces. Elec-
trical equipment rooms (auto-telephone ex-
change, air-conditioning duct spaces).
[8] Cargo spaces
All spaces used for cargo and trunkways and
hatchways to such spaces.
[9] Service spaces (high risk)
Galleys, pantries containing cooking appliances,
saunas, paint and lamp rooms, lockers and store-
rooms having areas of 4 m
2
or more, spaces for
the storage of flammable liquids, and workshops
other than those forming part of the machinery
spaces.
[10] Open decks
Open deck spaces having no fire risk. Air spaces
(the space outside superstructures and deck-
houses).
5. Protection of stairways in accommodation
spaces, service spaces and control stations
5.1 Stairways which penetrate only a single deck
shall be protected at least at one level by at least "B-0"
class divisions and self-closing doors. Stairways
which penetrate more than a single deck shall be sur-
rounded by at least "A-0" class divisions and be pro-
tected by self-closing doors at all levels.
5.2 On vessels having accommodation for 12
persons or less, where stairways penetrate more than a
single deck and where there are at least two escape
routes direct to the open deck at every accommodation
level, consideration may be given reducing the "A-0"
requirements of 5.1 to "B-0".
5.3 All stairways shall be of steel frame construc-
tion or of other equivalent material.
6. Openings in fire resisting divisions
6.1 Where "A" or "B" class divisions are pene-
trated for the passage of electric cables, pipes, trunks,
ducts, etc. or for girders, beams or other structural
members, arrangements shall be made to ensure that
the fire resistance is not impaired.
6.2 Except for hatches between cargo, special
category, store, and baggage spaces, and between such
spaces and the weather decks, all openings shall be
provided with permanently attached means of closing
which shall be at least as effective for resisting fires as
the divisions in which they are fitted.
1

6.3 The fire resistance of doors shall be equiva-
lent to that of the division in which they are fitted.
Doors and door frames in "A" class divisions shall be
constructed of steel. Doors in "B" class divisions shall
be non-combustible. Doors fitted in boundary bulk-
heads of machinery spaces of category A shall be
reasonably gastight and self-closing. In vessels con-
structed according to method IC the use of combusti-
ble materials in doors separating cabins from individ-
ual interior sanitary accommodation such as showers
may be permitted.
6.4 Doors required to be self-closing shall not be
fitted with hold-back hooks. However, hold-back
arrangements fitted with remote release devices of the
fail-safe type may be utilized.
6.5 In corridor bulkheads ventilation openings
may be permitted only in and under class B-doors of
cabins and public spaces. Ventilation openings are
also permitted in B-doors leading to lavatories, of-
fices, pantries, lockers and store rooms. Except as
permitted below, the openings shall be provided only
in the lower half of a door. Where such opening is in
or under a door the total net area of any such opening
or openings shall not exceed 0,05 m
2
. Alternatively, a
non-combustible air balance duct routed between the
cabin and the corridor, and located below the sanitary
unit is permitted where the cross-sectional area of the
duct does not exceed 0,05 m
2
. Ventilation openings,
except those under the door, shall be fitted with a
grille made of non-combustible material.
6.6 Watertight doors need not be insulated.

1
Reference is made to the Fire Test Procedure Code, Annex 1,
Part 3, adopted by IMO by Resolution MSC.61(67).
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 7 Structural Fire Protection Chapter 8
Page 75

C
7. Ventilation systems
7.1 Ventilation ducts shall be of non-combustible
material. Short ducts, however, not generally exceed-
ing 2 m in length and with a cross-section not exceed-
ing 0,02 m
2
need not be non-combustible, subject to
the following conditions:
7.1.1 these ducts shall be of a material having low
flame spread characteristics which is type approved;
2

7.1.2 they may only be used at the end of the venti-
lation device;
7.1.3 they shall not be situated less than 600 mm,
measured along the duct, from an opening in an "A" or
"B" class division including continuous "B" class
ceilings.
7.2 Where a thin plated duct with a free cross-
sectional area equal to, or less than, 0,02 m
2
passes
through "A" class bulkheads or decks, the opening
shall be lined with a steel sheet sleeve having a thick-
ness of at least 3 mm and a length of at least 200 mm,
divided preferably into 100 mm on each side of the
bulkhead or, in the case of the deck, wholly laid on the
lower side of the decks pierced. Where ventilation
ducts with a free cross-sectional area exceeding 0,02
m
2
pass through "A" class bulkheads or decks, the
opening shall be lined with a steel sheet sleeve. How-
ever, where such ducts are of steel construction and
pass through a deck or bulkhead, the ducts and sleeves
shall comply with the following:
7.2.1 The sleeves shall have a thickness of at least
3 mm and a length of at least 900 mm. When passing
through bulkheads, this length shall be divided pref-
erably into 450 mm on each side of the bulkhead.
These ducts, or sleeves lining such ducts, shall be
provided with fire insulation. The insulation shall have
at least the same fire integrity as the bulkhead or deck
through which the duct passes.
7.2.2 Ducts with a free cross-sectional area exceed-
ing 0,075 m
2
shall be fitted with fire dampers in addi-
tion to the requirements of 7.2.1. The fire damper shall
also be capable of being closed manually from both
sides of the bulkhead or deck. The damper shall be
provided with an indicator which shows whether the
damper is open or closed. Fire dampers are not re-
quired, however, where ducts pass through spaces
surrounded by "A" class divisions, without serving
those spaces, provided those ducts have the same fire
integrity as the divisions which they pierce.
7.2.3 The following arrangement shall be of an
approved type.
3


2
Reference is made to the Fire Test Procedure Code, Annex 1,
Part 5, adopted by IMO by Resolution MSC.61(67).
3
Reference is made to the Fire Test Procedure Code, Annex 1,
Part 3, adopted by IMO by Resolution MSC.61(67).
7.2.3.1 fire dampers, including relevant means of
operation;
7.2.3.2 duct penetrations through "A" class divisions.
Where steel sleeves are directly joined to ventilation
ducts by means of riveted or screwed flanges or by
welding, the test is not required.
7.3 The main inlets and outlets of all ventilation
systems shall be capable of being closed from outside
the respective spaces in the event of a fire.
7.4 Where they pass through accommodation
spaces or spaces containing combustible materials, the
exhaust ducts from galley ranges shall be constructed
of insulated "A" class divisions. Each exhaust duct
shall be fitted with:
7.4.1 a grease trap readily removable for cleaning;
7.4.2 a fire damper located in the lower end of the
duct;
7.4.3 arrangements, operable from within the gal-
ley, for shutting off the exhaust fan; and
7.4.4 fixed means for extinguishing a fire within
the duct, see Section 8, H.1.
7.5 Such measures as are practicable shall be
taken in respect of control stations outside machinery
spaces in order to ensure that ventilation, visibility and
freedom from smoke are maintained, so that in the
event of fire the machinery and equipment contained
therein may be supervised and continue to function
effectively. Alternative and separate means of air
supply shall be provided; air inlets of the two sources
of supply shall be so disposed that the risk of both
inlets drawing in smoke simultaneously is minimized.
Such requirements need not apply to control stations
situated on, and opening on to, an open deck.
7.6 The ventilation system for machinery spaces
of category A, galleys, special category spaces and
cargo spaces shall, in general, be separated from each
other and from the ventilation systems serving other
spaces. Except that, galley ventilation on vessels of
less than 4 000 gross tonnage need not be completely
separated, but may be served by separate ducts from a
ventilation unit serving other spaces. In any case, an
automatic fire damper shall be fitted in the galley
ventilation ducts near the ventilation unit.
7.7 Ducts provided for the ventilation of machin-
ery spaces of category A, galleys or special category
spaces shall not pass through accommodation spaces,
service spaces or control stations unless the ducts are
either:
7.7.1 constructed of steel having a thickness of at
least 3 mm and 5 mm for ducts the widths or diame-
ters of which are up to and including 300 mm and
760 mm and over respectively and, in the case of such
Chapter 8
Page 76
Section 7 Structural Fire Protection I - Part 1
GL 2007

C
ducts, the widths or diameters of which are between
300 mm and 760 mm having a thickness to be ob-
tained by interpolation;
suitably supported and stiffened;
fitted with automatic fire dampers close to the bounda-
ries penetrated; and
insulated to "A-60" standard from the machinery
spaces, galleys or special category spaces to a point at
least 5 m beyond each fire damper;
or
7.7.2 constructed of steel suitable supported and
stiffened and insulated to "A-60" standard throughout
the accommodation spaces, service spaces or control
stations.
7.8 Ducts provided for the ventilation to accom-
modation spaces, service spaces or control stations
shall not pass through machinery spaces of category
A, galleys or special category spaces unless either:
7.8.1 the ducts where they pass through a machin-
ery space of category A, galley or special category
space are constructed of steel, suitable supported and
stiffened and automatic fire dampers are fitted close to
the boundaries penetrated; and
automatic fire dampers are fitted close to the bounda-
ries penetrated and
the integrity of the machinery space, galley or special
category space boundaries is maintained at the pene-
trations; or
7.8.2 the ducts where they pass through a machin-
ery space of category A, galley or special category
space are constructed of steel, suitable supported and
stiffened, and
are insulated to "A-60" standard throughout the ac-
commodation spaces, service spaces or control sta-
tions.
7.9 Ventilation ducts with a free cross-sectional
area exceeding 0,02 m
2
passing through "B" class
bulkheads shall be lined with steel sheet sleeves of
900 mm in length divided preferably into 450 mm on
each side of the bulkheads unless the duct is of steel
for this length.
7.10 Power ventilation of accommodation spaces,
service spaces, cargo spaces, control stations and
machinery spaces shall be capable of being stopped
from an easily accessible position outside the space
being served. This position should not be readily cut
off in the event of a fire in the spaces served. The
means provided for stopping the power ventilation of
the machinery spaces shall be entirely separate from
the means provided for stopping ventilation of other
spaces.
7.11 Control of smoke spread
7.11.1 Purpose
The purpose of this requirement is to control the
spread of smoke in order to minimize the hazards from
smoke. For this purpose, means for controlling smoke
in atriums, control stations, machinery spaces and
concealed spaces shall be provided.
7.11.2 Prevention of spread of smoke over several
decks
Ventilation ducts serving more than one deck level
shall be provided with readily accessible means of
closure at each deck level.
7.11.3 Release of smoke from machinery spaces
7.11.3.1 The provisions of 7.11.3.2 to 7.11.3.4 shall
apply to machinery spaces of category A, and where
considered desirable to other machinery spaces.
7.11.3.2 Suitable arrangements shall be made to per-
mit the release of smoke in the event of fire, from the
space to be protected. The normal ventilation systems
may be acceptable for this purpose, subject to the
provisions in GL Rules according to Chapter 21
Ventilation, Section 1, E.5.9.
7.11.3.3 Means of control shall be provided for per-
mitting the release of smoke and such controls shall be
located outside the space concerned so that they will
not be cut off in the event of fire in the space they
serve.
7.11.3.4 The controls shall be easily accessible as well
as prominently and permanently marked and shall
indicate whether the shutoff is open or closed.
8. Restricted use of combustible materials
8.1 All exposed surfaces in corridors and stair-
way enclosures and surfaces including grounds in
concealed or inaccessible spaces in accommodation
and service spaces and control stations shall have low
flame-spread characteristics. Exposed surfaces of
ceilings in accommodation and service spaces (except
saunas) and control stations shall have low flame-
spread characteristics.
4

8.2 Paints, varnishes and other finishes used on
exposed interior surfaces shall not offer an undue fire
hazard and shall not be capable of producing exces-
sive quantities of smoke.
5

8.3 Primary deck coverings, if applied, in ac-
commodation and service spaces and control stations
shall be of an approved material which will not readily

4
Reference is made to the Fire Test Procedure Code, Annex 1,
Part 5, adopted by IMO by Resolution MSC.61(67).
5
Reference is made to the Fire Test Procedure Code, Annex 1,
Part 2, adopted by IMO by Resolution MSC.61(67).
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 7 Structural Fire Protection Chapter 8
Page 77

C
ignite, or give rise to toxic or explosive hazardous at
elevated temperatures.
6

8.4 Waste receptacles shall be constructed of
non-combustible materials with no openings in the
sides or bottom. Containers in galleys, pantries, gar-
bage handling or storage spaces and incinerator rooms
which are intended purely for the carriage of wet
waste, glass bottles and metal cans may be constructed
of combustible materials.
9. Details of construction
9.1 Method IC
In accommodation and service spaces and control sta-
tions all linings, draught stops, ceilings and their asso-
ciated grounds shall be of non-combustible materials.
9.2 Methods IIC and IIIC
In corridors and stairway enclosures serving accom-
modation and service spaces and control stations,
ceilings, linings, draught stops and their associated
grounds shall be of non-combustible materials.
9.3 Methods IC, IIC and IIIC
9.3.1 Except in cargo spaces or refrigerated com-
partments of service spaces, insulating materials shall
be non-combustible. Vapour barriers and adhesives
used in conjunction with insulation, as well as the
insulation of pipe fittings, for cold service systems,
need not be of non-combustible materials, but they
shall be kept to the minimum quantity practicable and
their exposed surfaces shall have low flame spread
characteristics.
9.3.2 Where non-combustible bulkheads, linings
and ceilings are fitted in accommodation and service
spaces they may have a combustible veneer with a
calorific value
7
not exceeding 45 MJ/m
2
of the area
for the thickness used.
9.3.3 The total volume of combustible facings,
mouldings, decorations and veneers in any accommo-
dation and service space bounded by non-combustible
bulkheads, ceilings and linings shall not exceed a
volume equivalent to a 2,5 mm veneer on the com-
bined area of the walls and ceilings.
9.3.4 Air spaces enclosed behind ceilings, panel-
lings, or linings, shall be divided by close-fitting
draught stops spaced not more than 14 m apart. In the
vertical direction, such air spaces, including those
behind linings of stairways, trunks, etc., shall be
closed at each deck.

6
Reference is made to the Fire Test Procedure Code, Annex 1,
Part 6, adopted by IMO by Resolution MSC.61(67).
7
The gross calorific value measured in accordance with ISO
standard 1716 - "Building Materials - Determination of Calo-
rific Potential", should be quoted.
10. Fixed fire detection and fire alarm sys-
tems, automatic sprinkler, fire detection
and fire alarm system
10.1 In vessels in which method IC is adopted, a
smoke detection system shall be so installed and ar-
ranged as to protect all corridors, stairways and escape
routes within accommodation spaces.
10.2 In vessels in which method IIC is adopted, an
automatic sprinkler, fire detection and fire alarm sys-
tem shall be so installed and arranged as to protect
accommodation spaces, galleys and other service
spaces, except spaces which afford no substantial fire
risk such as void spaces, sanitary spaces, etc. In addi-
tion, a fixed fire detection and fire alarm system shall
be so arranged and installed as to provide smoke de-
tection in all corridors, stairways and escape routes
within accommodation spaces.
10.3 In vessels in which method IIIC is adopted, a
fixed fire detection and fire alarm system shall be so
installed and arranged as to detect the presence of fire
in all accommodation spaces and service spaces, ex-
cept spaces which afford no substantial fire risk such
as void spaces, sanitary spaces, etc. In addition, a
fixed fire detection and fire alarm system shall be so
arranged and installed as to provide smoke detection
in all corridors, stairways and escape routes within
accommodation spaces.
11. Means of escape
11.1 Stairways and ladders shall be so arranged as
to provide, from all accommodation spaces and from
spaces in which the crew is normally employed, other
than machinery spaces, ready means of escape to the
open deck and from there to the lifeboats and liferafts.
11.2 At all levels of accommodation there shall be
provided at least two widely separated means of es-
cape from each restricted space or group of spaces.
11.3 Dispense may be given with one of the means
of escape, due regard being paid to the nature and
location of spaces and to the numbers of persons who
normally might be quartered or employed there.
11.4 No dead-end corridors having a length of
more than 7 m shall be accepted. A dead-end corridor
is a corridor or part of a corridor from which there is
only one escape route.
11.5 Two means of escape shall be provided from
the machinery space by two sets of steel ladders as
widely separated as possible leading to doors in the
upper part of the space similarly separated and from
which access is provided to the open deck.
11.6 For a vessel of a gross tonnage less than
1000, dispense may be given with one of the means of
escape due regard being paid to the dimension and
disposition of the upper part of the space.
Chapter 8
Page 78
Section 7 Structural Fire Protection I - Part 1
GL 2007

C
12. Miscellaneous items
12.1 The cargo holds and machinery spaces have
to be capable of being effectively sealed such as to
prevent the inlet of air. Doors fitted in boundary bulk-
heads of machinery spaces of category A shall be
reasonably gastight and self-closing.
12.2 Construction and arrangement of saunas
12.2.1 The perimeter of the sauna shall be of "A"
class boundaries and may include changing rooms,
showers and toilets. The sauna shall be insulated to
"A-60" standard against other spaces except those
inside the perimeter and spaces of category (5), (9)
and (10).
12.2.2 Bathrooms with direct access to saunas may
be considered as part of them. In such cases, the door
between sauna and the bathroom need not comply
with fire safety requirements.
12.2.3 The traditional wooden lining on the bulk-
heads and on the ceiling are permitted in the sauna.
The ceiling above the oven shall be lined with a non-
combustible plate with an air-gap of at least 30 mm.
The distance from the hot surfaces to combustible
materials shall be at least 500 mm or the combustible
materials shall be suitably protected.
12.2.4 The traditional wooden benches are permitted
to be used in the sauna.
12.2.5 The sauna door shall open outwards by push-
ing.
12.2.6 Electrically heated ovens shall be provided
with a timer.
13. Protection of cargo spaces
Fire-extinguishing arrangements according to Sec-
tion 8, H.4. are to be provided for cargo spaces.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 7 Structural Fire Protection Chapter 8
Page 79

C


Section 8

Fire Protection and Fire Fighting
A. General
1. Scope
The Rules in this Section apply to fire protection in
machinery spaces and to systems and equipment to be
provided for fire fighting purposes in machinery
spaces and throughout the fishing vessel.
2. Application
2.1 General
In general the GL Rules defined in the following are
valid for all types of fishing vessels. Some of the de-
tailed requirements are to be applied in dependence of
the length of the vessel, using the characteristic values
L = 24 m and L = 45 m.
2.2 International Torremolinos Convention
Fishing vessels of flag states which have already rati-
fied the Torremolinos International Convention for
fishing vessels with a length L 45 m, see Section 1,
A.3., have to follow directly the requirements defined
therein.
2.3 European Community
Fishing vessels with a length L 24 m flying the flag
of a state of the European Community or vessels fish-
ing in the waters of the European Community have to
follow the requirements of the Torremolinos Conven-
tion according to 2.2 overruled by the Commission
Directives defined in Section 1, A.3.3. A copy of the
consolidated text can be delivered by GL.
2.4 National regulations
Where national regulations are existing, these regula-
tions have to be met in addition. It will be decided
case by case if GL will supervise also the compliance
with such regulations.
3. Documents for approval
Diagrammatic plans, drawings and documents are to
be submitted in triplicate for approval.
All necessary details of the systems to be installed
shall be given and in particular as follows:
3.1 Water fire extinguishing system (Fire and
deckwash system)
position, type and capacity of pumps and posi-
tion of associated power sources
arrangement of pipes, valves and hydrants in-
cluding material, pipe diameters and wall thick-
nesses
sizes and numbers of fire hoses and nozzles
3.2 Fire extinguishers
types, sizes and position
3.3 Fixed gas fire extinguishing system
arrangement of pipes, nozzles, gas cylinders,
controls and alarms
schematic diagram and details of the release
system, alarm system and the means of monitor-
ing as applicable
GL-form F 88 for CO
2
-system
calculation of the required quantity of extin-
guishing medium
hydraulic calculation
3.4 High-expansion foam system
arrangement drawing
details on foam generator, pumps, power supply
and supply of foam concentrate
3.5 Pressure water-spraying system (sprinkler
and deluge system)
arrangement drawing
details on materials, nozzle characteristics,
pumps and power supply
calculation of pump capacity and hydraulic
calculation
3.6 Fixed water-based local application fire-
fighting system (FWBLAFFS) in category
A machinery spaces, if applicable
arrangement drawing
details on piping, nozzle characteristics, supply
pump and water supply
details of the release and alarm system
calculation of pump capacity and hydraulic
calculation
3.7 Fire extinguishing system for galley range
exhaust ducts, if applicable
arrangement drawing
details of the release station
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 8 Fire Protection and Fire Fighting Chapter 8
Page 81

A
3.8 Fire extinguishing system for deep-fat
cooking equipment
arrangement drawing
details on piping and nozzle characteristics
details of the release station
3.9 Fire extinguishing systems for cargo spaces
and paint stores
arrangement drawing
details on piping and nozzle characteristics
details of the release station
B. Fire Protection in Machinery Spaces
1. Machinery space arrangement
1.1 The arrangement of machinery spaces shall
be so that safe storage and handling of flammable
liquids is ensured.
1.2 All spaces in which internal combustion
engines, oil burners or fuel settling or service tanks are
located shall be easily accessible and sufficiently ven-
tilated.
1.3 Where leakages of flammable liquids may
occur during operation or routine maintenance work,
special precautions are to be taken to prevent these
liquids from coming into contact with sources of igni-
tion.
1.4 Materials used in machinery spaces shall
normally not have properties increasing the fire poten-
tial of these rooms.
1.5 Materials used as flooring, bulkhead lining,
ceiling or deck in control rooms, machinery spaces or
rooms with oil tanks shall be non-combustible. This
requirement, however, does not apply to vessels the
hull of which is constructed of combustible materials.
1.6 Where there is a danger that oil may penetrate
insulating materials, these shall be protected against
the penetration of oil or oil vapours.
2. Installation of boilers
2.1 Boilers are to be located at a sufficient dis-
tance from fuel and lubricating oil tanks and from
cargo space bulkheads in order to prevent undue heat-
ing of the tank contents or the cargo. Alternatively, the
tank sides or bulkheads are to be insulated.
2.2 Oiltight coamings are to be provided between
boiler and engine rooms not separated by watertight
bulkheads.
2.3 Where boilers are located in machinery
spaces on 'tween-decks and the boiler rooms are not
separated from the machinery spaces by watertight
bulkheads, the 'tween-decks are to be provided with
oiltight coamings at least 200 mm high. Drains from
this area may be led to the bilges. In case of thermal
oil boilers, however, the drains are to be led to a leak-
age oil tank.
3. Insulation of lines and appliances
3.1 All parts with surface temperatures above
220, e.g. steam, thermal oil and exhaust gas lines,
exhaust gas boilers and silencers, turbochargers etc.,
are to be effectively insulated with non-combustible
materials. The insulation shall be such that oil or fuel
cannot penetrate into the insulating material. Metal
cladding or approved hard jacketing of the insulation
is considered to afford effective protection against
such penetration.
3.2 Boilers are to be provided with non-com-
bustible insulation which is to be clad with steel sheet
or equivalent.
3.3 Insulation shall be such that it will not crack
or deteriorate when subject to vibration.
4. Fuel and lubricating oil tanks
The Rules in Section 9d, Q. are to be observed.
5. Protection against fuel and oil leakage
5.1 Suitable means of collection are to be fitted
below potential leakage points.
Where oil leakage is liable to be frequent, e.g. with oil
burners, separators, drains and valves of service tanks,
the collectors are to be drained to an oil drain tank.
Leakage oil drains may not be part of an overflow
system.
5.2 The arrangement of piping systems and their
components intended for combustible liquids, shall be
such that leakage of these liquids cannot come into
contact with heated surfaces or other sources of igni-
tion. Where this cannot be precluded by structural
design, suitable precautionary measures are to be
taken.
5.3 Tanks, pipelines, filters, preheaters, etc. con-
taining combustible liquids may not be placed directly
above heat sources such as boilers, steam lines, ex-
haust gas manifolds and silencers or items of equip-
ment which have to be insulated in accordance with
3.1 and may also not be placed above electrical
switchgear.
Chapter 8
Page 82
Section 8 Fire Protection and Fire Fighting I - Part 1
GL 2007

B
5.4 Where tanks with flammable liquids are re-
plenished automatically or remote controlled, means
are to be provided to prevent overflow spillage.
5.5 In periodically unattended machinery spaces
fuel injection high pressure lines of diesel engines are
to be shielded or installed in such a way, that, should
leakage occur, the leaking fuel can be safely collected
in a suitable drain tank with high level alarm.
6. Bulkhead penetrations
Pipe penetrations through class A or B divisions shall
be able to withstand the temperature for which the
divisions were designed.
Where steam, exhaust gas and thermal oil lines pass
through bulkheads, the bulkhead shall be suitably
insulated to protect it against excessive heating.
7. Means for emergency closing of openings,
stopping of machinery and fuel shutoffs
7.1 Any opening in machinery spaces and boiler
rooms shall be capable of being effectively sealed
from outside the space.
7.2 Means are to be provided for stopping venti-
lating fans serving machinery spaces or boiler rooms
from outside such spaces.
7.3 Any forced - or induced - draft fans, oil fuel
unit pump, oil fuel transfer pump shall be capable of
being stopped from outside the space concerned.
7.4 Except for small independent tanks every oil
fuel suction pipe from storage, settling or service tanks
situated above the double bottom is to be fitted with a
cock or valve capable of being closed from outside the
space concerned. This regulation applies also to lubri-
cating oil tanks.
7.5 The controls required by 7.2, 7.3 and 7.4
should be arranged in as few locations as possible, be
readily accessible, not likely to be cut-off in the event
of a fire in the space concerned and bear clear de-
nominations.
C. Fire Detection
1. Periodically unattended machinery spaces are
to be equipped with an approved fire detection and
alarm system.
2. The design and arrangement are to comply
with Section 11h and Section 12, D.
D. Water Fire Extinguishing System (Fire
and Deckwash System)
Every fishing vessel shall be provided with a water
fire extinguishing system according to the require-
ments defined in the following.
1. Fire pumps
1.1 Fishing vessels with L 24 m shall be fitted
with at least two (2) fire pumps one of which is to be
independent from the main engine.
1.2 Fishing vessels with L < 24 m shall be fitted
with at least one fire pump which may be coupled to
the main engine provided that the propeller shaft can
be readily declutched or that a variable pitch propeller
is fitted.
1.3 The fire pumps shall be capable of supplying
a total quantity of water for fire fighting of not less
than two-thirds of the total capacity of the required
bilge pumps.
1.4 The minimum capacity of any fire pump shall
not be less than 25 m
3
/h for fishing vessels with L
45 m and 15 m
3
/h for fishing vessels with L < 45 m.
1.5 With the fire pumps supplying water for the
number of jets specified in 4.1, through nozzles speci-
fied in 4.9, a pressure of at least 0,25 N/mm
2
is to be
maintained at any hydrant.
1.6 Where two pumps are required one of them
may be reduced to 40 % of the capacity specified in
1.3, but not less than the capacity specified in 1.4,
provided that the prescribed total capacity is main-
tained by increasing the capacity of the second pump
accordingly.
1.7 Bilge, ballast or other seawater pumps of
sufficient capacity and head may be used as fire
pumps provided that at least one pump is immediately
available for fire fighting purposes.
1.8 Where more than one pump is connected to
the fire main a screw-down non-return valve or a
combination of shut-off and check valve is to be fitted
at the outlet of each pump.
1.9 Provisions are to be made as to safeguard the
supply of water for fire fighting under all conditions of
list, trim, roll and pitch likely to be encountered by the
vessel.
1.10 For vessels with unattended machinery
spaces according to Section 12 remote start for at least
one fire pump is to be provided.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 8 Fire Protection and Fire Fighting Chapter 8
Page 83

D
2. Emergency fire pump
2.1 For vessels of 1000 GT and above an emer-
gency fire pump shall be provided, if a fire in one
compartment can put all the main fire pumps out of
service. The emergency fire pump shall be capable of
delivering at least 40 % of the capacity specified in
1.3, but in any case not less than the capacity specified
in 1.4.
2.2 Emergency fire pumps shall meet the re-
quirements specified in 1.5, 1.8 and 1.9 and including
their source of power and fuel supply be independent
from the space containing the main fire pumps and be
capable of supplying water to the fire main for at least
18 hours.
2.3 A shut-off valve shall be provided such as to
be capable of isolating the fire main within the space
where the main fire pumps are installed from the rest
of the fire main. The shut-off valve shall be arranged
in a suitable location outside of such space.
2.4 Any diesel driven power source for the pump
shall be capable of being readily started in cold condi-
tion down to a temperature of 0 C. If lower tempera-
tures are likely to be encountered proper means are to
be provided to the satisfaction of GL so that ready
starting will be safeguarded.
3. Fire piping
3.1 The piping system for the distribution of
water for fire fighting shall be designed for the total
capacity of the fire pumps required.
3.2 Materials readily rendered ineffective by heat
shall not be used unless adequately protected. Ordi-
nary cast iron shall not be used.
3.3 The pipes and their accessories are to be
adequately protected against corrosion, shock and
freezing. Drain cocks are to be provided in suitable
locations in order to drain all parts of the system
which may be subjected to freezing.
4. Fire hydrants, hoses and nozzles
4.1 The number and position of hydrants shall be
such that any part of the vessel normally accessible
while at sea can be reached with:
one jet of water from a single length of hose in a
vessel with L < 24 m
two jets of water not emanating from the same
hydrant in a vessel with L 24 m, one of the
jets shall be from a single length of hose.
4.2 Fire hydrants shall be fitted with a shut-off
such that any fire hose can be disconnected while the
system is pressurized.
4.3 One hydrant is to be arranged near the en-
trance to any space containing internal combustion
machinery or oil fired boilers.
4.4 The hydrants are to be so located as to be
readily accessible at any time.
4.5 Fire hoses shall be of appropriate materials.
Their length should be chosen in view of easy han-
dling considering the vessel's dimensions, however,
the length shall not exceed 20 m on deck and 15 m in
machinery spaces.
4.6 The number of fire hoses provided shall be
at least two in vessels with L < 24 m
at least three in vessels with L 24 m
in vessels of 1000 GT and above one hose for
each 30 m of vessel's length but at least five.
Hoses for machinery spaces and boiler rooms
shall be provided in addition to this figure.
4.7 Fire hoses with nozzles attached are to be
located near the fire hydrants, the position to be
marked conspicuously.
4.8 Only appropriate quick-acting couplings shall
be used for the connection of hoses to hydrants and
nozzles.
4.9 Nozzle size shall be 12 mm in vessels with
L 24 m and 10 mm in vessels with L < 24 m.
4.10 Nozzles for use in machinery spaces and
boiler rooms shall be of dual purpose type (full
jet/spray with shut-off). However, it is recommended
to use this type of nozzle throughout the vessel.
E. Portable Fire Extinguishers in Accom-
modations and Service Spaces
1. Portable fire extinguishers shall be provided
in accommodation and service spaces.
The number of extinguishers provided shall not be less
than:
five in vessels with L 45 m
three in vessels with L < 45 m
2. Portable extinguishers should be of a type
suitable for all types of fires to be expected in accom-
modation and service spaces.
3. Fire extinguishers shall meet the require-
ments specified in G.
Chapter 8
Page 84
Section 8 Fire Protection and Fire Fighting I - Part 1
GL 2007

E
F. Fire Extinguishing Arrangements in Ma-
chinery Spaces
1. Oil-fired boilers or internal combustion
engines
Spaces containing oil-fired boilers or internal combus-
tion machinery shall be provided with:
(a) one wheeled fire extinguisher of 45 ltrs. foam or
50 kg dry powder
(b) one portable fire extinguisher for each 750 kW
or part thereof of the total power output of inter-
nal combustion machinery. The total number is
not to be less than 2 and need not exceed 6.
(c) a receptacle containing sand or other appropriate
dry material and a scoop. One additional port-
able extinguisher may be substituted as an alter-
native.
In vessels with L < 24 m the extinguisher specified in
(a) may be replaced by one additional portable extin-
guisher.
2. Internal combustion engines only
In spaces containing only internal combustion machin-
ery, other than for propulsion, of a total power output
of less than 110 kW, one portable extinguisher will be
accepted in lieu of the equipment specified in 1.
3. Internal combustion engines and domestic
boilers
In spaces containing only domestic boilers with a
capacity of less than 175 kW one portable extin-
guisher will be accepted in lieu of the extinguisher
specified in 1. (a). This may also be applied where
internal combustion machinery is installed in the same
space if 175 kW are not exceeded when adding up the
output of internal combustion machinery and the ca-
pacity of the boiler.
4. Installation of fixed fire extinguishing sys-
tems
A fixed fire extinguishing system as specified in 5.
shall be provided for:
4.1 All vessels in machinery spaces containing
internal combustion machinery of total power output
of 375 kW or above.
4.2 Vessels of 500 GT and above in machinery
spaces containing internal combustion machinery used
for the main propulsion and for spaces containing oil-
fired boilers or oil-fuel units. For fishing vessels with
Class Notation AUT the GL Rules according to
Chapter 2 Machinery Installations, Section 12 apply.
4.3 Vessels constructed mainly of wood or GRP
in machinery spaces decked with such material and
which contain internal combustion machinery or oil
fired boilers.
5. Types of fixed fire extinguishing systems
The fixed fire extinguishing system required by 4.
shall be any one of the following:
5.1 A gas system complying with GL Rules ac-
cording to Chapter 2 Machinery Installations, Sec-
tion 12, G. or I.
5.2 A high expansion foam system complying
with GL Rules according to Chapter 2 Machinery
Installations, Section 12, K.3.
5.3 A pressure water-spraying system complying
with GL Rules according to Chapter 2 Machinery
Installations, Section 12, L.2.1.
6. Fixed water based local application fire
fighting system (FWBLAFFS)
In fishing vessels of 2000 GT and above, fire hazard
areas in category A machinery spaces above 500 m
3
in
gross volume shall be protected with a fixed local
application fire fighting system. The design of the
system and the protected areas shall be in compliance
with the GL Rules according to Chapter 2 Machin-
ery Installations, Section 12, L.3.
G. Fire Extinguishers
1. Type of fire
Portable and wheeled fire extinguishers provided in
accordance with these Rules shall be of a type suitable
for the fire to be extinguished.
2. Approval
All extinguishers shall normally be approved by the
competent National Authority. Extinguishers approved
by other authorities may be accepted if they are con-
sistent with applicable National Regulations.
3. Minimum charge
The charge in portable dry powder and gas extin-
guishers should be at least 5 kg and the content of
foam and water extinguishers should be not less than
9 liters.
4. Toxic gases
Fire extinguishers containing an extinguishing me-
dium which either by itself or under expected condi-
tions gives off toxic gases in such quantities as to
endanger persons shall not be permitted.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 8 Fire Protection and Fire Fighting Chapter 8
Page 85

G
5. CO
2
extinguishers
CO
2
extinguishers may not be located in accommoda-
tion spaces and water-filled extinguishers may not be
provided for the extinguishers required in machinery
spaces or boiler rooms.
6. Location
The extinguishers are to be installed in readily acces-
sible positions. If stowed in a cabinet, conspicuous
marking is to be provided.
One of the extinguishers intended for use in any space
is to be located near the entrance to that space.
7. Instruction plates
Instruction plates shall be fitted either near the extin-
guishers or on the extinguishers themselves, stating
that a discharged extinguisher may not be put back
into place.
8. Spare charges
8.1 For fire extinguishers, capable of being re-
charged on board, spare charges are to be provided:
100 % for the first 10 extinguishers of each type
50 % for the remaining extinguishers of each
type, but not more than 60 (fractions to be
rounded off)
8.2 For fire extinguishers which cannot be re-
charged on board, additional portable fire extinguish-
ers of same type and capacity shall be provided. The
number is to be determined as per 8.1.
H. Fire Extinguishing Arrangements in
Spaces other than Machinery Spaces
1. Galley range exhaust duct
Where the galley range exhaust duct passes through
accommodation spaces or spaces containing combus-
tible materials, a fixed fire extinguishing system shall
be provided complying with the GL Rules according
to Chapter 2 Machinery Installations, Section 12,
M.2.
2. Deep-fat cooking equipment
Deep-fat cooking equipment is to be fitted with ar-
rangements as specified in the GL Rules according to
Chapter 2 Machinery Installations, Section 12, M.3.
3. Paint stores and flammable liquid lockers
Paint stores and flammable liquid lockers are to be
protected with a fixed fire extinguishing system com-
plying with the GL Rules according to Chapter 2
Machinery Installations, Section 12, M.1.
4. Cargo spaces
Cargo spaces on fishing vessels of 2000 GT and above
are to be provided with a fixed CO
2
system complying
with GL Rules according to Chapter 2 Machinery
Installations, Section 12, G.
5. Scavenge trunks of two-stroke internal
combustion engines
Scavenge trunks of two-stroke internal combustion
engines, if applied, are to be provided with a fixed
CO
2
system or another extinguishing system approved
by the engine manufacturer which is independent of
the engine room fire extinguishing system.
Chapter 8
Page 86
Section 8 Fire Protection and Fire Fighting I - Part 1
GL 2007

H
Section 9a

General Rules for Machinery Installations
A. General
1. The Rules for Machinery Installations apply
to the propulsion installations of ships classed by
Germanischer Lloyd (GL), including all the auxiliary
machinery and equipment necessary for the operation
and safety of the fishing vessel.
They also apply to machinery which GL is to confirm
as being equivalent to classed machinery.
2. Apart from the machinery and equipment
detailed in the following, the Rules are also individu-
ally applicable to other machinery and equipment
where this is necessary to the safety of the vessel or its
cargo.
3. Designs which deviate from the Rules for the
Construction of Machinery Installations may be ap-
proved provided that such designs have been exam-
ined by GL for suitability and have been recognized as
equivalent.
4. Machinery installations which have been
developed on novel principles and/or which have not
yet been sufficiently tested in shipboard service re-
quire GL's special approval.
Such machinery may be marked by the Class Notation
EXP affixed to the Character of Classification and be
subjected to intensified survey, if sufficiently reliable
proof cannot be provided of its suitability and equiva-
lence in accordance with 3.
5. In the instances mentioned in 3. and 4. GL is
entitled to require additional documentation to be
submitted and special trials to be carried out.
6. In addition to the Rules, GL reserve the right
to impose further requirements in respect of all types
of machinery where this is unavoidable due to new
findings or operational experience, or GL may permit
deviations from the Rules where these are specially
warranted.
7. National rules or regulations outside GL's
Rules remain unaffected.
B. Documents for Approval
The general conditions for these documents are de-
fined in Section 1, E. The scope of the documentation
is defined in the different Sections where the require-
ments for the different elements of the fishing vessel
are given.
C. Ambient Conditions
1. Operating conditions, general
1.1 The general ambient conditions for the opera-
tions of the machinery installations are defined in
Section 1, C.
1.2 Account is to be taken of the effects on the
machinery installation of distortions of the vessel's
hull.
2. Vibrations
2.1 Machinery, equipment and hull structures are
normally subjected to vibration stresses. Design, con-
struction and installation must in every case take ac-
count of these stresses.
The faultless long-term service of individual compo-
nents shall not be endangered by vibration stresses.
2.2 Assessment, proof and measurement of vibra-
tions shall follow the GL Rules according to Chapter 2
Machinery Installations.
D. Design and Construction of the Machinery
Installations
1. Dimensions of components
1.1 All parts must be capable of withstanding the
stresses and loads peculiar to shipboard service, e.g.
those due to movements of the vessel, vibrations,
intensified corrosive attack, temperature changes and
wave impact, and has to be dimensioned in accordance
with the requirements set out in the following Sec-
tions.
In the absence of Rules governing the dimensions of
parts, the recognized rules of engineering practice are
to be applied.
1.2 Where connections exist between systems or
plant items which are designed for different forces,
pressures and temperatures (stresses), safety devices
are to be fitted which prevent the over-stressing of the
system or plant item designed for the lower design
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 9a General Rules for Machinery Installations Chapter 8
Page 9a1

D
parameters. To preclude damage, such systems are to
be fitted with devices affording protection against
excessive pressures and temperatures and/or against
overflow.
2. Materials
All components must comply with the GL Rules II
Materials and Welding.
3. Welding
The fabrication of welded components, the approval
of companies and the testing of welders are subject to
the GL Rules II Materials and Welding, Part 3
Welding, Chapters 1 - 3.
4. Tests
4.1 Machinery and its component parts are sub-
ject to constructional and material tests, pressure and
leakage tests, and trials. All the tests prescribed in the
following Sections are to be conducted under the su-
pervision of GL.
In the case of parts produced in series, other methods
of testing may be agreed with GL instead of the tests
prescribed, provided that the former are recognized as
equivalent by GL.
4.2 GL reserve the right, where necessary, to
increase the scope of the tests and also to subject to
testing those parts which are not expressly required to
be tested according to the Rules.
4.3 Components subject to mandatory testing
must be replaced with tested parts.
4.4 After installation on board of the main and
auxiliary machinery, the operational functioning of the
machinery including the associated ancillary equip-
ment is to be verified. All safety equipment is to be
tested, unless adequate testing has already been per-
formed at the manufacturer's works in the presence of
GL's Representative.
In addition, the entire machinery installation is to be
tested during sea trials, as far as possible under the
intended service conditions.
5. Corrosion protection
Parts which are exposed to corrosion are to be safe-
guarded by being manufactured of corrosion-resistant
materials or provided with effective corrosion protec-
tion.
6. Availability of machinery
6.1 Vessel's machinery is to be so arranged and
equipped that it can be brought into operation from the
"dead ship" condition with the means available on
board.
The "dead ship" condition means that the complete
machinery installation including the main electrical
power supply is out of operation and auxiliary sources
of energy such as starting air, battery-supplied starting
current, etc. are not available for restoring the vessel's
main electrical system, restarting auxiliary operation
and bringing the propulsion installation back into
operation.
To overcome the "dead ship" condition use may be
made of an emergency generator set provided that it is
ensured that the electrical power for emergency ser-
vices is available at all times. It is assumed that means
are available to start the emergency generator at all
times.
6.2 In case of "dead-ship" condition it must be
ensured that it will be possible for the propulsion sys-
tem and all necessary auxiliary machinery to be re-
started within a period of 30 minutes, see Section 11c,
C.
7. Control and regulating
7.1 Machinery must be so equipped that it can be
controlled in accordance with operating requirements
in such a way that the service conditions prescribed by
the manufacturer can be met.
7.1.1 For the control equipment of main engine and
systems essential for operation see Section 11h.
7.2 In the event of failure or fluctuations of the
supply of electrical, pneumatic or hydraulic power to
regulating and control systems, or in case of a break in
a regulating or control circuit, steps have to be taken
to ensure that:
the appliances remain at their present opera-
tional setting or, if necessary, are changed to a
setting which will have the minimum adverse
effect on operation (fail-safe conditions)
the power output or engine speed of the machin-
ery being controlled or governed is not in-
creased and
no unintentional start-up sequences are initiated.
7.3 Manual operation
Every functionally important, automatically or remote
controlled system shall also be capable of manual
operation.
8. Propulsion plant
8.1 Manoeuvring equipment
Every engine control platform is to be equipped in
such a way that
the propulsion plant can be adjusted to any set-
ting
Chapter 8
Page 9a2
Section 9a General Rules for Machinery Installations I - Part 1
GL 2007


D
the direction of propulsion can be reversed and
the propulsion unit or the propeller shaft can be
stopped.
8.2 Remote controls
The remote control of the propulsion plant from the
bridge is subject to the Rules in Section 12.
8.3 Multiple-shaft and multi-engine systems
Steps are to be taken to ensure that in the event of the
failure of a propulsion engine, operation can be main-
tained with the other engines, where appropriate by a
simple change-over system.
For multiple-shaft systems, each shaft is to be pro-
vided with a locking device by means of which drag-
ging of the shaft can be prevented.
9. Turning appliances
9.1 Machinery is to be equipped with the neces-
sary turning appliances.
9.2 The turning appliances are to be of the self-
locking type. Electric motors are to be fitted with
suitable retaining brakes.
9.3 An automatic interlocking device is to be
provided to ensure that the propulsion and auxiliary
prime movers cannot start up while the turning gear is
engaged. In case of manual turning installations warn-
ing devices may be provided alternatively.
10. Operating and maintenance instructions
Manufacturers of machinery, boilers and auxiliary
equipment have to supply a sufficient number of oper-
ating and maintenance notices and manuals together
with the equipment.
In addition, an easily legible board is to be mounted
on boiler operating platforms giving the most impor-
tant operating instructions for boilers and oil-firing
equipment.
11. Markings, identification of machinery
parts
In order to avoid unnecessary operating and switching
errors, all parts of the machinery whose function is not
immediately apparent are to be adequately marked and
labelled.
12. Fuels and consumables for operation
12.1 All fuels and consumables used for opera-
tions of the machinery installations have to be in ac-
cordance with the requirements of the manufacturers.
12.2 The flash point
1
of liquid fuels for the opera-
tion of boilers and diesel engines may not be lower
than 60 C.
For emergency generating sets, however, use may be
made of fuels with a flash point of 43 C. The fuel
shall enable a starting of the emergency generating set
at ambient temperatures of 15 C and above.
12.3 In exceptional cases, for vessels intended for
operation in limited geographical areas or where spe-
cial precautions subject to GL's approval are taken,
fuels with flash points between 43 C and 60 C may
also be used. This is conditional upon the requirement
that the temperatures of the spaces in which fuels are
stored or used shall invariably be 10 C below the
flash point.
13. Refrigerating installations
The requirements for refrigeration installations are
defined in Section 10.
E. Engine and Boiler Room Equipment
1. Operating and monitoring equipment
1.1 Instruments, warning and indicating systems
and operating appliances are to be clearly displayed
and conveniently sited. Absence of dazzle, particularly
on the bridge, is to be ensured.
Operating and monitoring equipment is to be grouped
in such a way as to facilitate easy supervision and
control of all important parts of the installation.
The following requirements are to be observed when
installing systems and equipment:
protection against humidity and the effects of
dirt
avoidance of excessive temperature variations
adequate ventilation
In consoles and cabinets containing electrical or hy-
draulic equipment or lines carrying steam or water the
electrical gear is to be protected from damage due to
leakage. Redundant ventilation systems are to be pro-
vided for air-conditioned machinery and control
rooms.
1.2 Pressure gauges
The scales of pressure gauges are to be dimensioned
up to the specified test pressure. The maximum per-
mitted operating pressures are to be marked on the
pressure gauges for boilers, pressure vessels and in
systems protected by safety valves. Pressure gauges

1
Based, up to 60 C, on determination of the flash point in a
closed crucible (cup test).
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 9a General Rules for Machinery Installations Chapter 8
Page 9a3


E
shall be installed in such a way that they can be iso-
lated. Lines leading to pressure gauges shall be in-
stalled in such a way that the readings cannot be af-
fected by liquid heads and hydraulic hammer.
2. Accessibility of machinery and boilers
2.1 Machinery- and boiler installations and appa-
ratus have to be accessible for operation and mainte-
nance.
2.2 In the layout of machinery spaces (design of
foundation structures, laying of pipelines and cable
conduits, etc.) and the design of machinery and equip-
ment (mountings for filters, coolers, etc.), 2.1 is to be
complied with.
3. Engine control rooms
Engine control rooms are to be provided with at least
two exits, one of which can also be used as an escape
route.
4. Lighting
All operating spaces shall be adequately lit to ensure
that control and monitoring instruments can be easily
read. In this connection see Section 11i.
5. Bilge wells/bilges
5.1 Bilge wells and bilges shall be readily acces-
sible, easy to clean and either easily visible or ade-
quately lit.
5.2 Bilges beneath electrical machines shall be so
designed as to prevent bilge water from penetrating
into the machinery at all angles of inclination and
movements of the vessel in service.
5.3 For the following spaces bilge level monitor-
ing is to be provided and limit values being exceeded
are to be indicated at a permanently manned alarm
point:
Unmanned machinery rooms of category "A"
and other machinery rooms (Class Notation
AUT) are to be equipped with at least 2 indica-
tors for bilge level monitoring.
(For division of machinery rooms into category
"A" and other "machinery rooms", see Sec-
tion 7.)
Other unmanned machinery rooms, such as bow
thruster and steering gear compartments ar-
ranged below the load waterline are irrespective
of Class Notation AUT to be equipped at least
with one indicator for bilge level monitoring.
6. Ventilation
The machinery ventilation is to be designed under
consideration of ambient conditions as defined in C.1.
7. Noise abatement
In compliance with the relevant national regulations,
care is to be taken to ensure that operation of the ves-
sel is not unacceptably impaired by engine noise.
F. Safety Equipment and Protective Meas-
ures
Machinery is to be installed and safeguarded in such a
way that the risk of accidents is largely ruled out.
Besides national regulations particular attention is to
be paid to the following:
1. Moving parts, flywheels, chain and belt
drives, linkages and other components which could
constitute an accident hazard for the operating person-
nel are to be fitted with guards to prevent contact. The
same applies to hot machine parts, pipes and walls for
which no thermal insulation is provided, e.g. pressure
lines to air compressors.
2. When using hand cranks for starting internal
combustion engines, steps are to be taken to ensure
that the crank disengages automatically when the
engines start.
Dead-Man's circuits are to be provided for rotating
equipment.
3. Blowdown and drainage facilities are to be
designed in such a way that the discharged medium
can be safely drained off.
4. In operating spaces, anti-skid floor plates and
floor-coverings have to be used.
5. Service gangways, operating platforms,
stairways and other areas open to access during opera-
tion are to be safeguarded by guard rails. The outside
edges of platforms and floor areas are to be fitted with
coamings unless some other means is adopted to pre-
vent persons and objects from sliding off.
6. Devices for blowing through water level
gauges shall be capable of safe operation and observa-
tion.
7. Safety valves and shutoffs shall be capable of
safe operation. Fixed steps, stairs or platforms are to
be fitted where necessary.
8. Safety valves are to be installed to prevent the
occurrence of excessive operating pressures.
Chapter 8
Page 9a4
Section 9a General Rules for Machinery Installations I - Part 1
GL 2007


F
9. Steam and feedwater lines, exhaust gas ducts,
boilers and other equipment and pipelines carrying
steam or hot water are to be effectively insulated.
Insulating materials have to be incombustible. Points
at which combustible liquids or moisture can penetrate
into the insulation are to be suitably protected, e.g. by
means of shielding.
G. Communication and Signalling Equipment
1. Voice communication
Means of voice communication are to be provided
between the vessel's manoeuvring station, the engine
room and the steering gear compartment, and these
means shall allow fully satisfactory intercommunica-
tion independent of the shipboard power supply under
all operating conditions, see also Section 11h, C.
2. Engineer alarm
From the engine room or the engine control room it
shall be possible to activate an alarm in the engineers'
living quarters, see also Section 11h, D.
3. Engine telegraph
Machinery operated from the engine room are to be
equipped with a telegraph.
In the case of multiple-shaft installations, a telegraph
shall be provided for each unit.
Local control stations are to be equipped with an
emergency telegraph.
4. Shaft revolution indicator
The speed and direction of rotation of the propeller
shafts are to be indicated on the bridge and in the
engine room. In the case of small propulsion units, the
indicator may be dispensed with.
Barred speed ranges are to be marked on the shaft
revolution indicators, see Section 9c, F.
5. Design of communication and signalling
equipment
Reversing, command transmission and operating con-
trols, etc. are to be grouped together at a convenient
point on the control platform.
The current status, "Ahead" or "Astern", of the revers-
ing control is to be clearly indicated on the propulsion
plant control platform.
Signalling devices shall be clearly perceptible from all
parts of the engine room when the machinery is in full
operation.
For details of the design of electrically operated com-
mand transmission, signalling and alarm systems, see
Section 11h and Section 12.
H. Essential Equipment
1. Principal requirements
Essential (operationally important) equipment is re-
quired to ensure continuity of the following functions:
propulsion, manoeuvrability, navigation and
safety of the vessel
safety of the crew
functioning of all equipment, machinery and
appliances needed to an unrestricted extent for
the primary duty of the fishing vessel
These requirements apply for the mechanical part of
the equipment and complete equipment units supplied
by subcontractors.
Essential equipment is subdivided into:
primary essential equipment according to 2.
secondary essential equipment according to 3.
2. Primary essential equipment
Primary essential equipment is that required to be
operative at all times to maintain the manoeuvrability
of the vessel as regards propulsion and steering and
that required directly for the primary duty of the fish-
ing vessel.
It comprises e.g.:
steering gear
controllable pitch propeller installation
fuel oil supply pumps, fuel booster pumps, fuel
valve cooling pumps, lubricating oil pumps,
cooling water pumps for main and auxiliary en-
gines and turbines necessary for propulsion
forced draught fans, feed water pumps, water
circulating pumps, vacuum pumps and conden-
sate pumps for auxiliary boilers of vessels where
steam is used for equipment supplying primary
essential equipment
burner equipment for auxiliary steam boilers of
vessels where steam is used for equipment sup-
plying primary essential equipment
azimuth thrusters which are the sole means for
propulsion/steering including lubricating oil
pumps, cooling water pumps
main propulsion plant with internal combustion
engines and gas turbines, gears, main shafting,
propellers
electric generator units and associated power
sources supplying primary essential equipment
hydraulic pumps for primary essential equip-
ment
drives for fishing gear
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 9a General Rules for Machinery Installations Chapter 8
Page 9a5


H
3. Secondary essential equipment
Secondary essential equipment is that required for the
safety of vessel and crew, and is such equipment
which can briefly be taken out of service without the
propulsion, steering and equipment needed for the
primary duty of the fishing vessel, being unacceptably
impaired.
It comprises e.g.:
windlasses
azimuth thrusters, if they are auxiliary equip-
ment
fuel oil transfer pumps and fuel oil treatment
equipment
lubrication oil transfer pumps and lubrication oil
treatment equipment
starting air and control air compressors
turning device for main engines
bilge, ballast and heel-compensating installa-
tions
fire pumps and other fire fighting installations
ventilating fans for engine and boiler rooms
equipment considered necessary to maintain
endangered spaces in a safe condition
equipment for watertight closing appliances
auxiliary and main engine starting installations
generator units supplying secondary essential
equipment, if this equipment is not supplied by
generators as described in 2.
hydraulic pumps for secondary essential equip-
ment
compressors, pumps and fans for the refrigerat-
ing installations
4. Non-essential equipment
Non-essential equipment is that which temporary
disconnection does not impair the principal require-
ments defined in 1.
Chapter 8
Page 9a6
Section 9a General Rules for Machinery Installations I - Part 1
GL 2007


H
Section 9b

Internal Combustion Engines and Air Compressors
A. General
1. Scope
The Rules contained in this Section are valid for inter-
nal combustion engines as main and auxiliary drives
as well as air compressors. Internal combustion en-
gines in the sense of these Rules are non-reversible,
four-stroke diesel engines with trunk piston.
For the purpose of these requirements, internal com-
bustion engines are diesel engines.
For other types of internal combustion engines the GL
Rules according to Chapter 2 Machinery Installa-
tions, Section 2 are to be applied.
2. Ambient conditions
For all engines, which are used on fishing vessels, the
definition of the performance has to be based on the
ambient conditions according to Section 1, C.
3. Rated power
3.1 Diesel engines are to be designed such that
their rated power when running at rated speed accord-
ing to the definitions of the engine manufacturer at
ambient conditions as defined in Section 1, C. can be
delivered as continuous power. Diesel engines are to
be capable of continuous operation within power
range 1 in Fig. 9b.1 and of short period operation in
power range 2. The extent of the power ranges is to be
stated by the engine manufacturer.
3.2 Continuous power is to be understood as the
standard service power which an engine is capable of
delivering continuously, provided that the mainte-
nance prescribed by the engine manufacturer is carried
out, between the maintenance intervals stated by the
engine manufacturer.
3.3 The rated power is to be specified in a way
that an overload power corresponding to 110 % of the
rated power can be demonstrated at corresponding
speed for an uninterrupted period of 1 hour. Devia-
tions from the overload power value require the
agreement of GL.
3.4 After running on the test bed, the fuel deliv-
ery system of main engines is normally to be so ad-
justed that overload power cannot be given in service.
The limitation of the fuel delivery system has to be
secured permanently.
3.5 Subject to the prescribed conditions, diesel
engines driving electric generators are to be capable of
overload operation even after installation on board.
3.6 Subject to the approval of GL, diesel engines
for special applications may be designed for a con-
tinuous power (fuel stop power) which cannot be
exceeded.
3.7 For main engines, a power diagram (Fig.
9b.1) is to be prepared showing the power ranges
within which the engine is able to operate continu-
ously and for short periods under service conditions.
4. Fuels
4.1 The use of liquid fuels is subject to the Rules
contained in Section 9a, D.12.
4.2 For fuel treatment and supply, see Section 9d.
5. Accessibility of engines
Engines are to be so arranged in the engine room that
all the assembly holes and inspection ports provided
by the engine manufacturer for inspections and main-
tenance are accessible. A change of components, as
far as practicable on board, shall be possible. Re-
quirements related to space and construction have to
be considered for the installation of the engines.
Overload power
Nominal
propeller curve
Rated
(continuous)
power
Engine speed [%]
P
o
w
e
r

[
%
]
1
2
Intermittent
operation
Continuous
operation

Fig. 9b.1 Example of a power diagram
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 9b Internal Combustion Engines and Air Compressors Chapter 8
Page 9b1

A
6. Electronic components and systems
6.1 For electronic components and systems
which are necessary for the control of internal com-
bustion engines the following items have to be ob-
served:
6.2 Electronic components and systems have to
be type approved according to the GL Rules VI
Additional Rules and Guidelines, Part 7 Guidelines
for the Performance of Type Approvals, Chapter 2
Test Requirements for Electrical / Electronic Equip-
ment and Systems.
6.3 For computer systems the Rules according to
Section 11h, A.2. have to be observed.
6.4 For main propulsion engines one failure of an
electronic control system shall not result in any sud-
den loss or change of the propulsion power. In indi-
vidual cases, GL may approve other failure conditions,
whereby it is ensured that no increase in vessel's speed
occurs.
6.5 The non-critical behaviour in case of a failure
of an electronic control system has to be proven by a
structured analysis (e.g. FMEA), which has to be pro-
vided by the system's manufacturer. This shall include
the effects on persons, environment and technical
condition.
6.6 Where the electronic control system incorpo-
rates a speed control, F.1.3, Section 11h, C. and Sec-
tion 12 have to be observed.
7. Local control station
7.1 For the local control station, I. has to be ob-
served.
7.2 The indicators named in I. shall be realised in
such a way that one failure can only affect a single
indicator. Where these indicators are an integral part
of an electronic control system, means shall be taken
to maintain these indications in case of failure of such
a system.
7.3 Where these indicators are realised electri-
cally, the power supply of the instruments and of the
electronic system has to be realised in such way to
ensure the behaviour stated in 7.2.
B. Documents for Approval
1. General
The general conditions for these documents are de-
fined in Section 1, E. For each engine type the draw-
ings and documents listed in Table 9b.1 shall, wher-
ever applicable, be submitted by the engine manufac-
turer to GL for approval (A) or information (R).
Where considered necessary, GL may request further
documents to be submitted. This also applies to the
documentation of design changes according to 4.
2. Engines manufactured under licence
For each engine type manufactured under licence, the
licensee shall submit to GL, as a minimum require-
ment, the following documents:
comparison of all the drawings and documents
as per Table 9b.1 - where applicable indicating
the relevant drawings used by the licensee and
the licensor
all drawings of modified components, if avail-
able, as per Table 9b.1 together with the licen-
sor's declaration of consent to the modifications
a complete set of drawings at the disposal of the
local inspection office of Germanischer Lloyd as
a basis for the tests and inspections
3. Definition of a diesel engine type
The type specification of an internal combustion en-
gine is defined by the following data:
manufacturer's type designation
cylinder bore
stroke
method of injection
fuels which can be used
working cycle (4-stroke)
method of gas exchange (naturally aspirated or
supercharged)
rated power per cylinder at rated speed and
maximum continuous brake mean effective
pressure
method of pressure charging (pulsating pressure
system or constant-pressure system)
charge air cooling system
cylinder arrangement (in-line, vee)
4. Design modifications
Following initial approval of an engine type by GL,
only those documents listed in Table 9b.1 require to
be resubmitted for examination which embody impor-
tant design modifications.
5. Additional engine components
The approval of exhaust gas turbochargers, heat ex-
changers, engine-driven pumps, etc. the corresponding
applications are to be submitted to GL by the respec-
tive manufacturer.
Chapter 8
Page 9b2
Section 9b Internal Combustion Engines and Air Compressors I - Part 1
GL 2007


B
Table 9b.1 Documents for approval
Serial
no.
A / R Description Quantity Remarks
1 R
Details required on GL Forms F 144 and F 144/1 when applying for
approval of an internal combustion engine
3
2 R Engine transverse cross-section 3
3 R Engine longitudinal section 3
4 R Cast bedplate and crankcase 1
5 R Thrust bearing assembly 3 1
6 R Cast thrust bearing bedplate 1
7 R Tie rod 1
8 R Cylinder cover/head, assembly 1
9 R Cylinder liner 1
10 A
Crankshaft, details for each number of cylinders, with data sheets for
calculation of crankshafts
3
11 A Crankshaft, assembly for each number of cylinders 3
12 A Shaft coupling bolts 3
13 R Counterweights(if not integral with crankshaft), including fastening 3
14 R Connecting rod, details 3
15 R Connecting rod, assembly 3
16 R Piston assembly 1
17 R Camshaft drive, assembly 1
18 A
Material specification of main parts with information on non-destructive
tests and pressure tests
3 6
19 R Arrangement of foundation (for main engines only) 3
20 A Schematic layout or other equivalent documents of starting air system 3 4
21 A Schematic layout or other equivalent documents of fuel oil system 3 4
22 A Schematic layout or other documents of lubricating oil system 3 4
23 A Schematic layout or other documents of cooling water system 3 4
24 A Schematic diagram of engine control and safety system 3 4
25 A Schematic diagram of electronic components and systems 1
26 R Shielding and insulation of exhaust pipes, assembly 1
27 A Shielding of high pressure fuel pipes, assembly 3 2
28 A Arrangement of crankcase explosion relief valves 3 3
29 R Operation and service manuals 1 5
30 A
Schematic layout or other equivalent documents of hydraulic system (for
valve lift) on the engine
3
31 A Type test program and type test report 1
32 A High pressure parts for fuel oil injection system 3 7
A for approval
R for reference
1 if integral with engine and not integrated in the bedplate
2 all engines
3 only for engines with a bore > 200 mm or a crankcase volume 0,6 m
3

4 and the system so far as supplied by the engine manufacturer. If engines incorporate electronic control systems a failure mode and effects
analysis (FMEA) is to be submitted to demonstrate that failure of an electronic control system will not result in the loss of essential
services for the operation of the engine and that operation of the engine will not be lost or degraded beyond an acceptable performance
criteria of the engine
5 operation and service manuals are to contain maintenance requirements (servicing and repair) including details of any special tools and
gauges that are to be used with their fittings/settings together with any test requirements on completion of maintenance
6 for comparison with GL requirements for material, NDT and pressure testing as applicable
7 the documentation has to contain specification of pressures, pipe dimensions and materials

I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 9b Internal Combustion Engines and Air Compressors Chapter 8
Page 9b3


B
C. Crankshaft Calculation
1. Design methods
1.1 Crankshafts are to be designed to withstand
the stresses occurring when the engine runs at rated
power and the documentation has to be submitted for
approval. Calculations are to be based on the GL
Rules VI Additional Rules and Guidelines, Part 4
Diesel Engines, Chapter 2 Guidelines for the Calcu-
lation of Crankshafts for I.C. Engines. Other methods
of calculation may be used provided that they do not
result in crankshaft dimensions smaller than those
obtained by applying the aforementioned regulations.
1.2 Outside the end bearings, crankshafts de-
signed according to the requirements specified in 1.1
may be adapted to the diameter of the adjoining shaft
d by a generous fillet (r 0,06 d) or a taper.
1.3 Design methods for application to crankshafts
of special construction and to the crankshafts of en-
gines of special type are to be agreed with GL.
2. Screw joints
2.1 Split crank shafts
Only fitted bolts may be used for assembling split
crankshafts.
2.2 Power-end flange couplings
The bolts used to connect power-end flange couplings
are normally to be designed as fitted bolts in accor-
dance with Section 9c, A.4.
If the use of fitted bolts is not feasible, GL may agree
to the use of an equivalent frictional resistance trans-
mission. In these cases the corresponding calculations
are to be submitted for approval.
3. Torsional vibration, critical speeds
Section 9c, F. applies.
D. Materials
1. Approved materials
1.1 The mechanical characteristics of materials
used for the components of diesel engines have to
conform to GL Rules II Materials and Welding, Part
1 Metallic Materials, Chapter 2 Steel and Iron
Materials. The materials approved for the various
components are shown in Table 9b.3 together with
their minimum required characteristics and material
Certificates.
1.2 Materials with properties deviating from
those specified may be used only with GL's special
approval. GL requires proof of the suitability of such
materials.
2. Testing of materials
2.1 In the case of individually produced engines,
the following parts are to be subjected to material tests
in the presence of the GL representative.
1. Crankshaft
2. Crankshaft coupling flange (non-integral) for
main power transmission
3. Crankshaft coupling bolts
4. Pistons or piston crowns made of steel, cast steel
or nodular cast iron
5. Connecting rods including the associated bear-
ing covers
6. Cylinder liners made of steel or cast steel
7. Cylinder covers made of steel or cast steel
8. Tie rods
9. Bolts and studs for:
cylinder covers
main bearings
connecting rod bearings
10. Camshaft drive gear wheels and chain wheels
made of steel or cast steel.
2.1.1 Materials tests are to be performed in accor-
dance with Table 9b.2.
Table 9b.2 Material tests
Cylinder bore
Parts to be tested
(numbered according to the
list under D.2.1)
300 mm 1 5 8
> 300 400 mm 1 5 6 7 8 9
> 400 mm all parts


2.1.2 In addition, material tests are to be carried out
on pipes and parts of the starting air system and other
pressure systems forming part of the engine, see Sec-
tion 9d.
2.1.3 Material for charge air coolers are to be sup-
plied with manufacturer test reports.
2.2 In the case of individually manufactured
engines, non-destructive material tests are to be per-
formed on the parts listed below in accordance with
Tables 9b.4 and 9b.5.
Chapter 8
Page 9b4
Section 9b Internal Combustion Engines and Air Compressors I - Part 1
GL 2007


D
Table 9b.3 Approved materials and type of test Certificate
Test Certificate **
Approved materials GL Rules * Components
A B C
Crankshafts


Connection rods


Piston and piston crowns

3

4


Cylinder covers/heads


Forged steel:
R
m
360 N/mm
2

Section 3, C.
Camshaft drive wheels

3

4


Tie rods

Rolled and forged steel rounds:
R
m
360 N/mm
2

Section 3, C.
Bolts and studs

1

2


Bearing transverse girders
(weldable)


Pistons and piston crowns

3

4


Cylinder covers/heads

1

2


Cast steel Section 4, C.
Camshaft drive wheels

3

4


Engine blocks

1


Bedplates

1


Cylinder blocks

1


Piston and piston crowns

3

4


Cylinder covers/heads

1


Flywheels

1


Nodular cast iron, preferably
ferritic grades:
R
m
370 N/mm
2

Section 5, B.
Valve bodies

1


Engine blocks

Bedplates

Cylinder blocks

Cylinder liners

Cylinder covers/heads

Lammelar cast iron:
R
m
200 N/mm
2

Section 5, C.
Flywheels

* all details refer to GL Rules II Materials and Welding, Part 1 Metallic Materials, Chapter 2 Steel and Iron Materials
** Test Certificates are to be issued in accordance with GL Rules II Materials and Welding, Part 1 Metallic Materials, Chapter 1
Principles and Test Procedures Section 1, H. with the following abbreviations:
A: GL Material Certificate, B: Manufacturer Inspection Certificate, C: Manufacturer Test Report
1
only for cylinder bores > 300 mm
2
for cylinder bores 300 mm
3
only for cylinder bores > 400 mm
4
for cylinder bores 400 mm


1. Steel castings for bedplates, e.g. bearing trans-
verse girders, including their welded joints
2. Solid forged crankshafts
3. Cast, rolled or forged parts of fully built crank-
shafts
4. Connecting rods
5. Piston crowns of steel or cast steel
6. Tie rods (at each thread over a distance corre-
sponding to twice the threaded length)
7. Bolts which are subjected to alternating loads,
e.g.:
main bearing bolts
connecting rod bolts
cylinder cover bolts
8. Cylinder covers made of steel or cast steel
9. Camshaft drive gear wheels made of steel or
cast steel
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 9b Internal Combustion Engines and Air Compressors Chapter 8
Page 9b5


D
2.2.1 Magnetic particle or dye penetrant tests are to
be performed in accordance with Table 9b.4 at those
points, to be agreed between the GL Surveyor and the
manufacturer, where experience shows that defects are
liable to occur.
2.2.2 Ultrasonic tests are to be carried out by the
manufacturer in accordance with Table 9b.5, and the
corresponding signed manufacturer's Certificates are
to be submitted.
2.2.3 Welded seams of important engine compo-
nents may be required to be subjected to approved
methods of testing.
2.2.4 Where there is reason to doubt the soundness
of any engine component, non-destructive testing by
approved methods may be required in addition to the
tests mentioned above.
Table 9b.4 Magnetic particle tests
Cylinder bore
Parts to be tested
(numbered according to the
list under D.2.2)
400 mm 1 2 3 4
> 400 mm all parts


Table 9b.5 Ultrasonic tests
Cylinder bore
Parts to be tested
(numbered according to the
list under D.2.2)
400 mm 1 2 3 4 5 8
> 400 mm 1 2 3 4 5 8 9


2.3 Crankshafts welded together from forged or
cast parts are subject to GL special approval. Both the
manufacturers and the welding process shall have
been accepted. The materials and the welds are to be
tested.
E. Tests and Trials
1. Manufacturing inspections
1.1 The manufacture of all engines with GL
Classification is subject to supervision by GL.
1.2 Where engine manufacturers have been ap-
proved by GL as "Suppliers of Mass Produced En-
gines", these engines are to be tested in accordance
with GL Guidelines VI Additional Rules and Guide-
lines, Part 4 Diesel Engines, Chapter 1 Guidelines
for Mass Produced Engines, Section 1, C.
2. Pressure tests
The individual components of internal combustion
engines are to be subject to pressure tests at the pres-
sures specified in Table 9b.6. GL Certificates are to be
issued for the results of the pressure tests.
3. Type approval testing (TAT)
3.1 General
Engines for installation on board of the vessel have to
be type tested by GL. For this purpose a type approval
test in accordance with 3.1.2 is to be performed.
3.1.1 Preconditions for type approval testing
Preconditions for type approval testing are that:
the engine to be tested conforms to the specific
requirements for the series and has been suitably
optimized
the inspections and measurements necessary for
reliable continuous operation have been per-
formed during works tests carried out by the en-
gine manufacturer and GL has been informed of
the results of the major inspections
GL has issued the necessary approval of draw-
ings on the basis of the documents to be submit-
ted in accordance with B.
3.1.2 Scope of type approval testing
The type approval test is subdivided into three stages,
namely:
Stage A - Internal tests
Functional tests and collection of operating
values including test hours during the internal
tests, which are to be presented to GL during the
type test.
Stage B - Type test
This test is to be performed in the presence of
the GL representative.
Stage C Component inspection
After conclusion of the tests, major components
are to be presented for inspection.
The operating hours of the engine components
which are presented for inspection after type
testing in accordance with 3.4, are to be stated.
3.2 Stage A - Internal tests
Functional tests and the collection of operating data
are to be performed during the internal tests. The en-
gine is to be operated at the load points important for
the engine manufacturer and the pertaining operating
values are to be recorded. The load points are to be
selected according to the range of application of the
engine.
Chapter 8
Page 9b6
Section 9b Internal Combustion Engines and Air Compressors I - Part 1
GL 2007


E
Table 9b.6 Pressure tests
1

Component Test pressure, p
p
[bar]
2

Cylinder cover, cooling water space
3
7
Cylinder liner, over whole length of cooling water
space
5

7
Cylinder jacket, cooling water space 4, at least 1,5 p
e,zul

Exhaust valve, cooling water space 4, at least 1,5 p
e,zul

Piston, cooling water space
(after assembly with piston rod, if applicable)
7
Pump body, pressure side 1,5 p
e,zul
or p
e,zul
+ 300 (whichever is less)
Valves 1,5 p
e,zul
or p
e,zul
+ 300 (whichever is less) Fuel injection system
Pipes 1,5 p
e,zul
or p
e,zul
+ 300 (whichever is less)
Hydraulic system
High pressure piping for
hydraulic drive of exhaust
gas valves

1,5 p
e,zul

Exhaust gas turbocharger, cooling water space 4, at least 1,5 p
e,zul

Exhaust gas line, cooling water space 4, at least 1,5 p
e,zul

Coolers, both sides
4
4, at least 1,5 p
e,zul

Engine-driven pumps
(oil, water, fuel and bilge pumps)
4, at least 1,5 p
e,zul

Starting and control air system 1,5 p
e,zul
before installation
1
In general, items are to be tested by hydraulic pressure as indicated in the Table. Where design or testing features may require
modification of these test requirements, special consideration will be given.
2
p
e, zul
[bar] = maximum allowable working pressure in the part concerned.
3
For forged steel cylinder covers test methods other than pressure testing may be accepted, e.g. suitable non-destructive examination and
dimensional control exactly recorded.
4
Charge air coolers need only be tested on the water side.
5
For centrifugally cast cylinder liners, the pressure test can be replaced by a crack test.

3.2.1 Normal case
The normal case includes the load points 25 %, 50 %,
75 %, 100 % and 110 % of the maximum rated power:
a) along the nominal (theoretical) propeller curve
and/or at constant speed for propulsion engines
b) at rated speed with constant governor setting for
generator drive
The limit points of the permissible operating range as
defined by the engine manufacturer are to be tested.
3.2.2 Emergency operation situations
For turbocharged engines the achievable output in
case of turbocharger damage is to be determined as
follows:
engines with one turbocharger, when rotor is
blocked or removed
engines with two or more turbochargers, when
the damaged turbocharger is shut off
Note
The engine manufacturer has to state whether the
achievable output is continuous. If there is a time
limit, the permissible operating time is to be indicated.
3.3 Stage B - Type test
During the type test all the tests listed under 3.3.1 to
3.3.3 are to be carried out in the presence of the GL
representative. The results achieved are to be recorded
and signed by GL representative. Deviations from this
program, if any, require the agreement of GL.
3.3.1 Load points
Load points at which the engine is to be operated are
to conform to the power/speed diagram in Fig. 9b.2.
The data to be measured and recorded when testing
the engine at various load points has to include all the
parameters necessary for an assessment.
The operating time per load point depends on the en-
gine size and on the time for collection of the operating
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 9b Internal Combustion Engines and Air Compressors Chapter 8
Page 9b7


E
= Range of continuous operation
= Range of intermittent operation
= Range of short-time overload operation
in special applications
7
8 11
10
9
1 2
3a 3
100
90
80
70
60
40
30
50
6
5
4
2
3
1
110 105,8
110
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
P
o
w
e
r

[
%
]
Speed [%]
1
0
3
,
2
1
0
0
Rated power
(continuous power)
T
o
r
q
u
e

[
%
]
Overload power
N
o
m
i
n
a
l

p
r
o
p
e
l
l
e
r

c
u
r
v
e
1
2
3

Fig. 9b.2 Power/speed diagram
values. The measurements shall in every case only be
performed after achievement of steady-state condition.
Normally, an operating time of 0,5 hour can be as-
sumed per load point.
At 100 % output (rated power) in accordance with
3.3.1.1 an operating time of 2 hours is required. At
least two sets of readings are to be taken at an interval
of 1 hour in each case.
If an engine can continue to operate without its opera-
tional safety being affected in the event of a failure of
its independent cylinder lubrication, proof of this shall
be included in the type test.
3.3.1.1 Rated power (continuous power)
The rated power is defined as 100 % output at 100 %
torque and 100 % speed (rated speed) corresponding
to load point 1.
Chapter 8
Page 9b8
Section 9b Internal Combustion Engines and Air Compressors I - Part 1
GL 2007


E
3.3.1.2 100 % power
The operation point 100 % output at maximum allow-
able speed corresponding to load point 2 has to be
performed.
3.3.1.3 Maximum permissible torque
The maximum permissible torque normally results at
110 % output at 100 % speed corresponding to load
point 3 or at maximum permissible power (normally
110 %) at a speed according to the nominal propeller
curve corresponding to load point 3a.
3.3.1.4 Minimum permissible speed for intermit-
tent operation
The minimum permissible speed for intermittent op-
eration has to be adjusted:
at 100 % torque corresponding to load point 4
at 90 % torque corresponding to load point 5
3.3.1.5 Part-load operation
For part-load operation the operation points 75 %,
50 %, 25 % of the rated power at speeds according to
the nominal propeller curve at load points 6, 7 and 8
and proceeding from the nominal speed at constant
governor setting has to be adjusted corresponding to
load points 9, 10 and 11.
3.3.2 Emergency operation
The maximum achievable power when operating in
accordance with 3.2.2 has to be performed:
at speed conforming to nominal propeller curve
with constant governor setting for rated speed
3.3.3 Functional tests
Functional tests to be carried out as follows:
ascertainment of lowest engine speed according
to the nominal propeller curve
starting tests
governor test
test of the safety system particularly for over-
speed and failure of the lubricating oil pressure
test of electronic components and systems ac-
cording to the test program approved by GL
3.4 Stage C Component inspection
Immediately after the test run the components of one
cylinder for in-line engines and two cylinders for V-
engines are to be presented for inspection as follows:
piston, removed and dismantled
crank bearing and main bearing, dismantled
cylinder liner in the installed condition
cylinder head, valves disassembled
camshaft, camshaft drive and crankcase with
opened covers
Note
If deemed necessary by the GL representative, further
dismantling of the engine may be required.
3.5 Test approval test report
The results of the type approval test are to be com-
piled in a report which is to be submitted to GL.
3.6 Test approval Certificate
After successful conclusion of the test and appraisal of
the required documents GL issues a Type Approval
Certificate.
3.7 Type testing of mass produced engines
3.7.1 For engines with cylinder bores 300 mm
which are to be manufactured in series the type test
shall be carried out in accordance with GL Rules VI
Additional Rules and Guidelines, Part 4 Diesel En-
gines, Chapter 1 Guidelines for Mass Produced En-
gines.
3.7.2 For the performance of the type test, the en-
gine is to be fitted with all the prescribed items of
equipment. If the engine, when on the test bed, cannot
be fully equipped in accordance with the require-
ments, the equipment may be demonstrated on another
engine of the same series.
3.8 Renewal of type test
If the rated power (continuous power) of a type tested
and operationally proven engine is increased by more
than 10 %, a new type test is required. Approval of the
power increase includes examination of the relevant
drawings.
4. Works trials
4.1 General
In general, engines are to be subjected to trials on the
test bed at the manufacturer's works and under GL
supervision. The scope of these trials shall be as speci-
fied below. Exceptions to this require the agreement of
GL.
4.2 Scope of works trials
During the trials the operating values corresponding to
each load point are to be measured and recorded by
the engine manufacturer. All the results are to be
compiled in an acceptance protocol to be issued by the
engine manufacturer.
In each case all measurements conducted at the vari-
ous load points shall be carried out under steady oper-
ating conditions. The readings for 100 % power (rated
power at rated speed) are to be taken twice at an inter-
val of at least 30 minutes.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 9b Internal Combustion Engines and Air Compressors Chapter 8
Page 9b9


E
4.2.1 Main engines for direct propeller drive
The operation points have to be adjusted according to
a) e), functional tests have to be performed accord-
ing to d) f).
a) 100 % power (rated power):
at 100 % engine speed (rated engine speed)
for at least 60 minutes after reaching the steady-
state conditions
b) 110 % power:
at 103 % engine speed
for 30 minutes after reaching the steady-state
conditions
Note
After the test bed trials the output shall normally be
limited to the rated power (100 % power) so that the
engine cannot be overloaded in service (see A.3.4).
c) 90 %, 75 %, 50 % and 25 % power in accor-
dance with the nominal propeller curve
d) starting and reversing manoeuvres, see H.2.4
e) test of governor and independent overspeed
protection device
f) test of engine shutdown devices
4.2.2 Main engines for electrical propeller drive
The test is to be performed at rated speed with a con-
stant governor setting under conditions of:
a) 100 % power (rated power):
for at least 60 minutes after reaching the steady-
state condition
b) 110 % power:
for 30 minutes after reaching the steady-state
condition
Note
After the test bed trials the output of engines driving
generators is to be so adjusted that overload (110 %)
power can be supplied in service after installation on
board in such a way that the governing characteristics
and the requirements of the generator protection de-
vices can be fulfilled at all times (see A.3.5).
c) 75 %, 50 % and 25 % power and idle run
d) start-up tests, see H.2.4
e) test of governor and independent overspeed
protection device
f) test of engine shutdown devices
4.2.3 Auxiliary driving engines and engines
driving electric generators
The tests have to be performed according to 4.2.2.
For testing of diesel generator sets, see also Sec-
tion 11 l.
4.3 Depending on the type of plant concerned,
GL reserve the right to call for a special test schedule.
4.4 In the case of engines driving electrical gen-
erators the rated electrical power as specified by the
manufacurer is to be verified as minimum power.
4.5 Component inspection
After the test run randomly selected components shall
be presented for inspection. The crankshaft web de-
flection is to be checked.
5. Shipboard trials (dock and sea trials)
After the conclusion of the running-in programme
prescribed by the engine manufacturer engines are to
undergo the trials specified below.
5.1 Scope of sea trials
5.1.1 Main propulsion engines driving fixed
propellers
The tests have to be carried out as follows:
a) at rated engine speed:
for at least 4 hours and
at engine speed corresponding to normal cruise
power:
for at least 2 hours
b) at 103 % engine speed:
for 30 minutes
where the engine adjustment permits, see A.3.4
c) determination of the minimum on-load speed.
d) starting and reversing manoeuvres see H.2.4
e) in reverse direction of propeller rotation during
the sea trials at a minimum speed of 70 % en-
gine speed:
for 10 minutes
f) testing of the monitoring and safety systems
5.1.2 Main propulsion engines driving control-
lable pitch propellers or reversing gears
5.1.1 applies as appropriate.
Controllable pitch propellers are to be tested with
various propeller pitches. Where provision is made for
operating in a combinator mode, the combinator dia-
gram is to be plotted and verified by measurements.
5.1.3 Main engines driving generators for pro-
pulsion
The tests are to be performed at rated speed with a
constant governor setting under conditions of
a) 100 % power (rated power):
for at least 4 hours
and
at normal continuous cruise power:
for at least 2 hours
Chapter 8
Page 9b10
Section 9b Internal Combustion Engines and Air Compressors I - Part 1
GL 2007


E
b) 110 % power:
for 30 minutes
c) in reverse direction of propeller rotation during
the sea trials at a minimum speed of 70 % of the
nominal propeller speed:
for 10 minutes
d) starting manoeuvres, see H.2.4
e) testing of the monitoring and safety systems
Note
Tests are to be based on the rated powers of the driven
generators.
5.1.4 Engines driving auxiliaries and electrical
generators
These engines are to be subjected to an operational
test for at least four hours. During the test the set con-
cerned is required to operate at its rated power for an
extended period.
It is to be demonstrated that the engine is capable of
supplying 110 % of its rated power, and in the case of
shipboard generating sets account shall be taken of the
times needed to actuate the generator's overload pro-
tection system.
5.2 The suitability of main and auxiliary engines
to burn special fuels is to be demonstrated if the ma-
chinery installation is designed to burn such fuels.
5.3 The scope of the shipboard trials may be
extended in consideration of special operating condi-
tions such as low-load operation, towing, trawling, etc.
5.4 Earthing
It is necessary to ensure that the limits specified for
main engines by the engine manufacturers for the
difference in electrical potential (Voltage) between the
crankshaft/shafting and the hull are not exceeded in
service. Appropriate earthing devices including limit
value monitoring of the permitted voltage potential are
to be provided.
F. Safety Devices
1. Speed control and engine protection
against overspeed
1.1 Main and auxiliary engines
1.1.1 Each diesel engine not used to drive an elec-
tric generator has to be equipped with a speed gover-
nor or regulator so adjusted that the engine speed
cannot exceed the rated speed by more than 15 %.
1.1.2 In addition to the normal governor, each main
engine with a rated power of 220 kW or over which
can be declutched in service or which drives a vari-
able-pitch propeller must be fitted with an independent
overspeed protection device so adjusted that the en-
gine speed cannot exceed the rated speed by more than
20 %.
Equivalent equipment may be approved by GL.
1.2 Engines driving electric generators
1.2.1 Each diesel engine used to drive an electric
main or emergency generator has to be fitted with a
governor which will prevent transient frequency varia-
tions in the electrical network in excess of 10 % of
the rated frequency with a recovery time to steady
state conditions not exceeding 5 seconds when the
maximum electrical step load is switched on or off.
In the case when a step load equivalent to the rated
output of the generator is switched off, a transient
speed variation in excess of 10 % of the rated speed
may be acceptable, provided this does not cause the
intervention of the overspeed device as required by
1.1.1.
1.2.2 In addition to the normal governor, each
diesel engine with a rated power of 220 kW or over
shall be equipped with an overspeed protection device
independent of the normal governor which prevents
the engine speed from exceeding the rated speed by
more than 15 %.
1.2.3 The diesel engine shall be suitable and de-
signed for the special requirements of the vessel's
electrical system.
Where two stage load application is required, the fol-
lowing procedure is to be applied: Sudden loading
from no-load to 50 %, followed by the remaining 50
% of the rated generator power, duly observing the
requirements of 1.2.1 and 1.2.4.
Application of the load in more than two steps, see
Fig. 9b.3, is acceptable on condition that:
the vessel's electrical system is designed for the
use of such generator sets
load application in more than two steps is con-
sidered in the design of the vessel's electrical
system and is approved when the drawings are
reviewed
during shipboard trials the functional tests are
carried out without objections. Here the loading
of the vessels electrical net while sequentially
connecting essential equipment after breakdown
and during recovery of the net is to be taken into
account.
the safety of the vessel's electrical system in the
event of parallel generator operation and failure
of a generator is to be demonstrated
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 9b Internal Combustion Engines and Air Compressors Chapter 8
Page 9b11


F
Mean eff. working pressure p
e,e
[bar]
at rated power of diesel engine
L
o
a
d

i
n
c
r
e
a
s
e

r
e
f
e
r
r
e
d

t
o

r
a
t
e
d

p
o
w
e
r

[
%
]
limiting curve for
3rd load step
6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
limiting curve for
2nd load step
limiting curve for
1st load step

Fig. 9b.3 Limiting curves for loading 4-stroke diesel engines step by step from no load to rated
power as function of the brake mean effective pressure
1.2.4 Speed shall be stabilized and in steady-state
condition within five seconds, inside the permissible
range for the permanent speed variation
T
.
The steady-state condition is considered to have been
reached when the residual speed variation does not
exceed 1 % of the speed associated with the set
power.
1.2.5 The characteristic curves of the governors of
diesel engines of generator sets operating in parallel
must not exhibit deviations larger than those specified
in Sections 11a 11 l.
1.2.6 Generator sets which are installed to serve
stand-by circuits are to satisfy the corresponding re-
quirements when the engine is cold. The start-up and
loading sequence is to be concluded in about 30 sec-
onds.
1.2.7 Emergency generator sets have to satisfy the
above governor conditions also unlimited with the
start-up and loading sequence having to be concluded
in about 45 seconds.
1.2.8 The governors of the engines mentioned in
1.2.1 have to enable the rated speed to be adjusted
over the entire power range with a maximum devia-
tion of 5 %.
1.2.9 The rate of speed variation of the adjusting
mechanisms has to permit satisfactory synchronization
in a sufficiently short time. The speed characteristic
should be as linear as possible over the whole power
range. The permanent deviation from the theoretical
linearity of the speed characteristic may, in the case of
generating sets intended for parallel operation, in no
range exceed 1 % of the rated speed.
Notes relating to 1.1 and 1.2:
a) The rated power and the corresponding rated
speed relate to the conditions under which the
engines are operated in the system concerned.
b) An independent overspeed protection device
means a system all of whose component parts,
including the drive, work independently of the
normal governor.
1.3 Use of electrical/electronic governors
1.3.1 The governor and the associated actuator
shall, for controlling the respective engine, be suitable
for the operating conditions laid down in the Con-
struction Rules and for the requirements specified by
the engine manufacturer. For single propulsion drives
it has to be ensured that in case of a failure of the
governor or actuator the control of the engine can be
taken over by another control device.
The regulating conditions required for each individual
application as described in 1.1 and 1.2 are to be satis-
fied by the governor system.
Electronic governors and the associated actuators are
subject to type testing.
For the power supply, see Sections 11a 11 l.
Chapter 8
Page 9b12
Section 9b Internal Combustion Engines and Air Compressors I - Part 1
GL 2007


F
1.3.2 Requirements applying to main engines
For propulsion installations, to ensure continuous
speed control or immediate resumption of control after
a fault, at least one of the following requirements is to
be satisfied:
a) The governor system has an independent back-
up system or
b) there is a redundant governor assembly for man-
ual change-over with a separately protected
power supply or
c) the engine has a manually operated fuel admis-
sion control system suitable for manoeuvring
In the event of a fault in the governor system, the
operating condition of the engine shall not become
dangerous, that is, the engine speed and power shall
not increase.
Alarms to indicate faults in the governor system are to
be fitted.
1.3.3 Requirements applying to auxiliary en-
gines for driving electrical generators
Each auxiliary engine has to be equipped with its own
governor system.
In the event of a fault in the governor system, the fuel
admission in the injection pumps shall be set to "0".
Alarms to indicate faults in the governor system are to
be fitted.
1.3.4 The special conditions necessary to start
operation from the dead ship condition are to be ob-
served, see Sections 11a 11 l.
2. Cylinder overpressure warning device
2.1 All the cylinders of engines with a cylinder
bore of > 230 mm are to be fitted with cylinder over-
pressure warning devices. The response threshold of
these warning devices shall be set at not more than 40
% above the combustion pressure at the rated power.
2.2 A warning device may be dispensed with if it
is ensured by an appropriate engine design or by con-
trol functions that the cylinder pressure cannot in-
crease in an unacceptable range.
3. Crankcase airing and venting
3.1 Crankcase airing
The airing of crankcases is not allowed.
3.2 Crankcase venting
3.2.1 Where crankcase venting systems are pro-
vided their clear opening is to be dimensioned as small
as possible.
3.2.2 Where provision has been made for the
forced extracting the lubricating oil vapours, e.g. for
monitoring the oil vapour concentration, the negative
pressure in the crankcase may not exceed 2,5 mbar.
3.2.3 The vent pipes of two or more engines shall
not be combined. Exemptions may be approved if an
interaction of the combined systems is inhibited by
suitable means.
4. Crankcase safety devices
4.1 Crankcase safety devices have to be type
approved.
4.2 Safety valves to safeguard against overpres-
sure in the crankcase are to be fitted to all engines
with a cylinder bore of > 200 mm and/or a crankcase
volume of 0,6 m
3
.
All separated spaces within the crankcase, e.g. gear or
chain casings for camshafts or similar drives, are to be
equipped with additional safety devices if the volume
of these spaces exceeds 0,6 m
3
.
4.3 Engines with a cylinder bore of > 200 mm
and 250 mm shall be equipped with at least one
safety valve at each end of the crankcase. If the crank-
shaft has more than 8 throws, an additional safety
valve is to be fitted near the middle of the crankcase.
Engines with a cylinder bore of > 250 mm and 300
mm shall have at least one safety valve close to every
second crank throw, subject to a minimum number of
two.
Engines with a cylinder bore of > 300 mm shall have
at least one safety valve close to each crank throw.
4.4 Each safety valve shall have a free relief area
of at least 45 cm
2
.
The total relief area of all safety valves fitted to an
engine to safeguard against overpressure in the crank-
case may not be less than 115 cm
2
/m
3
of crankcase
volume.
Notes relating to 4.2 and 4.4
a) In estimating the gross volume of the crankcase,
the volume of the fixed parts which it contains
may be deducted.
b) A space communicating with the crankcase via a
total free cross-sectional area of > 115 cm
2
/m
3

of volume need not be considered as a separate
space. In calculating the total free cross-
sectional area, individual sections of < 45 cm
2

are to be disregarded.
c) Each safety valve required may be replaced by
not more than two safety valves of smaller
cross-sectional area provided that the cross-
sectional area of each safety valve is not less
than 45 cm
2
.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 9b Internal Combustion Engines and Air Compressors Chapter 8
Page 9b13

F
4.5 The safety devices are to be of quick acting
and self closing type. In service they shall be oiltight
when closed and have to prevent air from flowing into
the crankcase. The gas flow caused by the response of
the safety device shall be deflected, e. g. by means of
a baffle plate, in such a way as not to endanger per-
sons standing nearby.
Safety devices shall respond quickly and be fully
opened at a differential pressure not greater than 0,2
bar.
4.6 Crankcase doors and their fittings are to be so
dimensioned as not to suffer permanent deformation
due to the overpressure occurring during the response
of the safety equipment.
4.7 Crankcase doors and hinged inspection ports
are to be equipped with appropriate latches to effec-
tively prevent unintended closing.
4.8 A warning sign specifying that the crankcase
doors and/or sight holes may not be opened immedi-
ately after stopping the engine, but only after a suffi-
cient cooling period has elapsed, is to be mounted on
the local engine control platform or, if appropriate, on
both sides of the engine.
4.9 Engines with a cylinder diameter > 300 mm
or a rated power of 2250 kW and above are to be fitted
with crankcase oil mist detections systems.
4.10 The oil mist monitoring and alarm informa-
tion is to be capable of being read from a safe location
away from the engine.
4.11 For multiple engine installations each engine
is to be provided with a separate oil mist detection
system and a dedicated alarm.
4.12 A copy of the documention supplied with the
oil mist detection system such as maintainance and
test manuals are to be provided on board vessel.
5. Safety devices in the starting air system
The following equipment is to be fitted to safeguard
the starting air system against explosions due to fail-
ure of starting valves:
5.1 An isolation non-return valve is to be fitted to
the starting air line serving each engine.
5.2 Engines with cylinder bores of > 230 mm are
to be equipped with flame arrestors immediately in
front of the intake of the main starting air line to each
engine.
5.3 Equivalent safety devices may be approved
by GL.
6. Safety devices in the lubricating oil system
Each engine with a rated power of 220 kW or over is
to be fitted with devices which automatically shut
down the engine in the event of failure of the lubricat-
ing oil supply. This is not valid for engines serving
solely for the drive of emergency generator sets and
emergency fire pumps. For these engines an alarm has
to be provided.
7. Safety devices in scavenge manifolds
The scavenge air manifolds in open connection to the
cylinders are to be fitted with explosion relief valves
as in 4.
G. Auxiliary Systems
1. General
For piping systems and accessory filter arrangements
Section 9d is to be applied, additionally.
2. Fuel oil system
2.1 General
2.1.1 Only pipe connections with metal sealing
surfaces or equivalent pipe connections of approved
design may be used for fuel injection lines.
2.1.2 Feed and return lines are to be designed in
such a way that no unacceptable pressure surges occur
in the fuel supply system. Where necessary, the en-
gines are to be fitted with surge dampers approved by
GL.
2.1.3 All components of the fuel system are to be
designed to withstand the maximum peak pressures
which will be expected in the system.
2.1.4 If fuel oil reservoirs or dampers with a lim-
ited life cycle are fitted in the fuel oil system the life
cycle together with overhaul instructions is to be
specified by the engine manufacturer in the corre-
sponding manuals.
2.1.5 Oil fuel lines are not to be located immedi-
ately above or near units of high temperature, steam
pipelines, exhaust manifolds, silencers or other equip-
ment required to be insulated by 7.1. As far as practi-
cable, oil fuel lines are to be arranged far apart from
hot surfaces, electrical installations or other potential
sources of ignition and are to be screened or otherwise
suitably protected to avoid oil spray or oil leakage
onto the sources of ignition. The number of joints in
such piping systems is to be kept to a minimum.
2.2 Shielding
2.2.1 Regardless of the intended use and location
of internal combustion engines, all external fuel injec-
tion lines (high pressure lines between injection
pumps and injection valves) are to be shielded by
jacket pipes in such a way that any leaking fuel is:
Chapter 8
Page 9b14
Section 9b Internal Combustion Engines and Air Compressors I - Part 1
GL 2007

G
safely collected
drained away unpressurized and
efficiently monitored and alarmed
2.2.2 If pressure variations of > 20 bar occur in fuel
feed and return lines, these lines are also to be
shielded.
2.2.3 The high pressure fuel pipe and the outer
jacket pipe have to be of permanent assembly.
2.2.4 Where pipe sheaths in the form of hoses are
provided as shielding, the hoses have to be demon-
strably suitable for this purpose and approved by GL.
2.3 Fuel leak drainage
Appropriate design measures are to be introduced to
ensure generally that leaking fuel is drained efficiently
and cannot enter into the engine lube oil system.
2.4 Heat tracing, thermal insulation, re-
circulation
Fuel lines, including fuel injection lines, to engines
which are operated with preheated fuel are to be insu-
lated against heat losses and, as far as necessary, pro-
vided with heat tracing.
Means of fuel circulation are also to be provided.
2.5 Fuel oil emulsions
For engines operated on emulsions of fuel oil and
other liquids it has to be ensured that engine operation
can be resumed after failures to the fuel oil treatment
system.
3. Filter arrangements for fuel oil and lubri-
cating oil systems
3.1 Fuel and lubricating oil filters which are to be
mounted directly on the engine are not to be located
above rotating parts or in the immediate proximity of
hot components.
3.2 Where the arrangement stated in 3.1 is not
feasible, the rotating parts and the hot components are
to be sufficiently shielded.
3.3 Filters have to be so arranged that fluid resi-
dues can be collected by adequate means. The same
applies to lubricating oil filters if oil can escape when
the filter is opened.
3.4 Change-over filters with two or more cham-
bers are to be equipped with means enabling a safe
pressure release before opening and a proper venting
before re-starting of any chamber. Normally, shut-off
devices are to be used. It shall be clearly visible,
which chamber is in and which is out of operation.
3.5 Oil filters fitted parallel for the purpose of
enabling cleaning without disturbing oil supply to
engines (e.g. duplex filters) are to be provided with
arrangements that will minimize the possibility of a
filter under pressure being opened by mistake. Filters/
filter chambers shall be provided with suitable means
for:
venting when put into operation
depressurizing before being opened
Valves or cocks with drain pipes led to a safe location
shall be used for this purpose.
4. Lubricating oil system
4.1 General requirements relating to lubricating
oil systems and to the cleaning, cooling, etc. of the
lubricating oil are contained in Section 9d, F. For
piping arrangement 2.1.3 is to be applied.
4.1.1 Engines which sumps serve as oil reservoirs
shall be so equipped that the oil level can be estab-
lished and, if necessary, topped up during operation.
Means are to be provided for completely draining the
oil sump.
4.1.2 The combination of the oil drainage lines
from the crankcases of two or more engines is not
allowed.
4.1.3 Drain lines from the engine sump to the drain
tank are to be submerged at their outlet ends.
4.2 The equipment of engines fitted with lubri-
cating oil pumps is subject to Section 9d, F.
4.2.1 Main lubricating oil pumps driven by the
engine are to be designed to maintain the supply of
lubricating oil over the entire operating range.
4.2.2 Main engines which drive main lubricating
oil pumps are to be equipped with independently
driven stand-by pumps.
4.2.3 In multi-engine installations having separate
lubricating oil systems approval may be given for the
carriage on board of reserve pumps ready for mount-
ing provided that the arrangement of the main lubri-
cating oil pumps enables the change to be made with
the means available on board.
4.2.4 Lubricating oil systems for cylinder lubrica-
tion which are necessary for the operation of the en-
gine and which are equipped with electronic dosing
units have to be approved by GL.
5. Cooling system
5.1 For the equipment of engines with cooling
water pumps and for the design of cooling water sys-
tems, see Section 9d.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 9b Internal Combustion Engines and Air Compressors Chapter 8
Page 9b15

G
5.1.1 Main cooling water pumps driven by the
engine are to be designed to maintain the supply of
cooling water over the entire operating range.
5.1.2 Main engines which drive main cooling water
pumps are to be equipped with independently driven
stand-by pumps or with means for connecting the
cooling water system to independently driven stand-by
pumps.
5.1.3 In multi-engine installations having separate
fresh cooling water systems approval may be given for
the carriage on board of reserve pumps ready for
mounting provided that the arrangement of the main
fresh cooling water pumps enables the change to be
made with the means available on board. Shutoff
valves shall be provided enabling the main pumps to
be isolated from the fresh cooling water system.
5.2 If cooling air is drawn from the engine room,
the design of the cooling system is to be based on a
room temperature of at least 45 C.
The exhaust air of air-cooled engines may not cause
any unacceptable heating of the spaces in which the
plant is installed. The exhaust air is normally to be led
to the open air through special ducts.
5.3 Where engines are installed in spaces in
which oil-firing equipment is operated, Section 9e is
also to be complied with.
6. Charge air system
6.1 Exhaust gas turbochargers
6.1.1 The construction and testing of exhaust gas
turbochargers are subject to the GL Rules according to
Chapter 2 Machinery Installations, Section 3b.
6.1.2 Exhaust gas turbochargers may exhibit no
critical speed ranges over the entire operating range of
the engine.
6.1.3 The lubricating oil supply shall also be en-
sured during start-up and run-down of the exhaust gas
turbochargers.
6.1.4 Even at low engine speeds, main engines are
to be supplied with charge air in a manner to ensure
reliable operating.
6.1.5 If, in the lower speed range or when used for
manoeuvring, an engine can be operated only with a
charge air blower driven independently of the engine,
a stand-by charge air blower is to be installed or an
equivalent device of approved design.
6.1.6 With main engines emergency operation has
to be possible in the event of a turbocharger failure.
6.2 Charge air cooling
6.2.1 The construction and testing of charge air
coolers are subject to Section 9e, B.
6.2.2 Means are to be provided for regulating the
temperature of the charge air within the temperature
range specified by the engine manufacturer.
6.2.3 The charge air lines of engines with charge
air coolers are to be provided with sufficient means of
drainage.
7. Exhaust gas lines
7.1 Exhaust gas lines are to be insulated and/or
cooled in such a way that the surface temperature
cannot exceed 220 C at any point.
Insulating material must be non-combustible.
7.2 General rules relating to exhaust gas lines are
defined in Section 9d.
H. Starting Equipment
1. General
Engine starting equipment shall enable engines to be
started up from the shutdown condition using only the
means available on board.
2. Starting with compressed air
2.1 Starting air systems for main engines are to
be equipped with at least two starting air compressors.
At least one of the air compressors shall be driven
independently of the main engine and has to supply at
least 50 % of the total capacity required.
2.2 The total capacity of the starting air compres-
sors is to be such that the starting air receivers de-
signed in accordance with 2.4 or 2.5, as applicable,
can be charged from atmospheric pressure to their
final pressure within one hour.
Normally, compressors of equal capacity are to be
installed.
This does not apply to an emergency air compressor
which may be provided to meet the requirement stated
in 1.
2.3 If the main engine is started with compressed
air, the available starting air is to be divided between
at least two starting air receivers of approximately
equal size which can be used independently of each
other.
2.4 The total capacity of air receivers is to be
sufficient to provide, without their being replenished,
not less than six starts.
Chapter 8
Page 9b16
Section 9b Internal Combustion Engines and Air Compressors I - Part 1
GL 2007

H
2.5 With multi-engine installations the number of
start-up operations per engine may, with GL's agree-
ment, be reduced according to the concept of the pro-
pulsion plant.
2.6 If starting air systems for auxiliaries or for
supplying pneumatically operated regulating and ma-
noeuvring equipment or tyfon units are to be fed from
the main starting air receivers, due attention is to be
paid to the air consumption of this equipment when cal-
culating the capacity of the main starting air receivers.
2.7 Other consumers with a high air consumption
apart from those mentioned in 2.6 may not be con-
nected to the main starting air system. Separate air
supplies are to be provided for these units. Deviations
to this require the agreement of GL.
2.8 If auxiliary engines are started by compressed
air sufficient air capacity for three consecutive starts
of each auxiliary engine is to be provided.
2.9 If starting air systems of different engines are
fed by one receiver it is to be ensured that the receiver
air pressure cannot fall below the highest of the differ-
ent systems minimum starting air pressure.
2.10 For the approximate calculation of the start-
ing air capacity, use may be made of the formula
given in the Rules defined in L.
3. Electrical starting equipment
3.1 Where main engines are started electrically,
two mutually independent starter batteries are to be
installed. The batteries are to be so arranged that they
cannot be connected in parallel with each other. Each
battery shall enable the main engine to be started from
cold.
The total capacity of the starter batteries shall be suffi-
cient for the execution within 30 minutes, without
recharging the batteries, of the same number of start-
up operations as is prescribed in 2.4 or 2.5 for starting
with compressed air.
3.2 If two or more auxiliary engines are started
electrically, at least two mutually independent batter-
ies are to be provided. Where starter batteries for the
main engine are fitted, the use of these batteries is
acceptable.
The capacity of the batteries has to be sufficient for at
least three start-up operations per engine.
If only one of the auxiliary engines is started electri-
cally, one battery is sufficient.
3.3 The starter batteries may only be used for
starting (and preheating where applicable) and for
monitoring equipment belonging to the engine.
3.4 Steps are to be taken to ensure that the batter-
ies are kept charged and the charge level is monitored.
3.5 For ventilation requirements see also Section
11b, C.3.
4. Start-up of emergency generating sets
4.1 Emergency generating sets are to be so de-
signed that they can be started up readily even at a
temperature of 0 C.
If the set can be started only at higher temperatures, or
where there is a possibility that lower ambient tem-
peratures may occur, heating equipment is to be fitted
to ensure ready reliable starting.
The operational readiness of the set shall be guaran-
teed under all weather and seaway conditions. Fire
flaps required in air inlet and outlet openings shall
only be closed in case of fire and are to be kept open
at all other times. Warning signs to this effect are to be
installed. In the case of automatic fire flap actuation
dependent on the operation of the set warning signs
are not required. Air inlet and outlet openings shall not
be fitted with weatherproof covers.
4.2 Each emergency generating set required to be
capable of automatic starting is to be equipped with an
automatic starting system approved by GL, the capac-
ity of which is sufficient for at least three consecutive
starts, compare Section 11c, C.
Additionally a second source of energy is to be pro-
vided capable of three further starting operations
within 30 minutes. This requirement is not applicable
if the set can be started manually.
4.3 In order to guarantee the availability of the
starting equipment, steps are to be taken to ensure that
a) electrical and hydraulic starting systems are
supplied with energy from the emergency
switchboard
b) compressed air starting systems are supplied via
a non-return valve from the main and auxiliary
compressed air receivers or by an emergency air
compressor, the energy for which is provided
via the emergency switchboard and
c) the starting, charging and energy storage equip-
ment is located in the emergency generator
room.
4.4 Where automatic starting is not specified,
reliable manual starting systems may be used, e.g. by
means of hand cranks, spring-loaded starters, hand-
operated hydraulic starters or starters using ignition
cartridges.
4.5 Where direct manual starting is not possible,
starting systems in accordance with 4.2 and 4.3 are to
be provided, in which case the starting operation may
be initiated manually.
4.6 The starters of emergency generator sets may
be used only for the purpose of starting the emergency
generator sets.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 9b Internal Combustion Engines and Air Compressors Chapter 8
Page 9b17

H
5. Start-up of emergency fire-extinguisher
sets
5.1 Diesel engines driving emergency fire pumps
are to be so designed that they can still be reliably
started by hand at a temperature of 0 C.
If the engine can be started only at higher tempera-
tures, or where there is a possibility that lower tem-
peratures may occur, heating equipment is to be fitted
to ensure reliable starting.
5.2 If manual start-up using a hand crank is not
possible, the emergency fire-extinguisher set is to be
fitted with a starting device approved by GL which
enables at least 6 starts to be performed within 30
minutes, two of these being carried out within the first
10 minutes.
I. Control Equipment
1. General
For unmanned machinery installations Section 12 is to
be observed in addition to the following requirements.
2. Main engines
2.1 Local control station
To provide emergency operation of the propulsion
plant a local control station is to be installed from
which the plant can be operated and monitored.
2.1.1 Indicators according to Table 9b.7 are to be
clearly sited on the local main engine control station.
2.1.2 Temperature indicators are to be provided on
the local control station or directly on the engine.
2.1.3 In the case of gear and controllable pitch
propeller systems, the local control indicators and
control equipment required for emergency operation
are to be installed at the main engines' local control
station.
2.1.4 Critical speed ranges are to be marked in red
on the tachometers.
2.2 Machinery control room/control centre
If the fishery vessel has a control station for the pro-
pulsion system with remote operation or control, the
indicators listed in Table 9b.7 are to be installed in the
machinery control room, see also Section 12.
Table 9b.7 Alarms and indicators
Description
Propulsion
engines
Auxiliary
engines
Emergency
engines
Speed / direction I
Engine overspeed
4
A, S A, S A, S
Lubricating oil pressure at engine inlet I, L, S I, L, S I, L
Lubricating oil temperature at engine inlet I, H I
4
, H
4
I
4
, H
4

Fuel oil pressure at engine inlet I I
Fuel oil leakage from high pressure pipes A A A
Cylinder cooling water pressure or flow at engine inlet I, L I
3
, L
3
I
3
, L
3

Cylinder cooling water temperature at engine outlet I, H I, H I, H

Charge air pressure at cylinder inlet I
Charge air temperature at charge air cooler inlet I
Charge air temperature at charge air cooler outlet I, H
Starting air pressure I, L
Control air pressure I, L
Exhaust gas temperature
1
I, H
2

Oil mist concentration in crankcase or alternative monitoring
system
6, 7

I, H
5
I, H
5
I, H
5

1
where ever the dimensions permit, at each cylinder outlet and I: Indicator
at the turbo charger inlet and outlet A: Alarm
2
at turbo charger outlet only H: Alarm for upper limit
3
cooling water pressure or flow L: Alarm for lower limit
4
only for an engine output > 220 kW S: Shutdown
5
for engines having an output > 2250 kW or a cylinder bore > 300 mm
6
alternative methods of monitoring may be approved by GL
7
an engine shutdown may be provided where necessary

Chapter 8
Page 9b18
Section 9b Internal Combustion Engines and Air Compressors I - Part 1
GL 2007

I
2.3 Bridge/navigation centre
2.3.1 The essential operating parameters for the
propulsion system are to be provided in the control
station area.
2.3.2 The following stand-alone control equipment
is to be installed showing:
speed of main engine
speed/direction of rotation of shafting
propeller pitch (controllable pitch propeller)
starting air pressure (if applicable)
control air pressure (if applicable)
2.3.3 In the case of engine installations up to a total
output of 600 kW, simplifications can be agreed with
GL.
2.4 Auxiliary engines
For auxiliary engines and emergency application en-
gines as a minimum requirement the controls given in
Table 9b.7, third and forth column are to be provided.
J. Alarms
1. General
1.1 The following requirements apply to machin-
ery installations which have been designed for con-
ventional operation without any degree of automation.
1.2 Within the context of these requirements, the
word alarm is to be understood as the visual and audi-
ble warning of abnormal operating parameters.
2. Scope of alarms
Alarms have to be provided for main, auxiliary and
emergency engines according to Table 9b.7.
K. Engine Alignment/Seating
1. Engines are to be mounted and secured to
their foundations in conformity with the GL Guide-
lines VI Additional Rules and Guidelines, Part 4
Diesel Engines, Chapter 3 Guidelines for the Seating
of Propulsion Plants and Auxiliary Machinery.
2. The crankshaft alignment is to be checked
every time an engine has been aligned on its founda-
tion by measurement of the crank web deflection
and/or other suitable means.
For the purpose of subsequent alignments note is to be
taken of:
the draught/load condition of the vessel
the condition of the engine - cold/preheated/hot
3. Where the engine manufacturer has not speci-
fied values for the permissible crank web deflection,
assessment is to be based on GL's reference values
according to Chapter 2 Machinery Installations, Sec-
tion 2, K.4.
L. Approximate Calculation of the Starting
Air Supply
This calculation shall follow the GL Rules according
to Chapter 2 Machinery Installations, Section 2, L.
M. Air Compressors
The requirements for design and construction of air
compressors are defined in the GL Rules according to
Chapter 2 Machinery Installations, Section 2, M.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 9b Internal Combustion Engines and Air Compressors Chapter 8
Page 9b19


M



Section 9c

Propulsion System
A. Main Shafting
1. General
1.1 Scope
The following requirements apply to standard and
established types of shafting for main and auxiliary
propulsion. Deviating designs require GL's special
approval.
In the case of fishing vessels with ice classes, the
strengthening factors given in E. are to be complied
with. GL reserve the right to call for propeller shaft
dimensions in excess of those specified in this Section
if the propeller arrangement results in increased bend-
ing stresses.
1.2 Documents for approval
General drawings of the entire shafting, from the main
engine coupling flange to the propeller, and detail
drawings of the shafts, couplings and other component
parts transmitting the propelling engine torque, in
addition detail drawings and the arrangement of the
stern tube seals and the cast resin mount for the stern
tubes and shaft bearings are to be submitted to GL in
triplicate for approval.
For the arrangement of the shaft bearings an alignment
calculation, including alignment instructions, has to be
submitted for approval. With consent of GL for shaft-
ings with intermediate shafts d < 200 mm the align-
ment calculation may be waived.
The submitted documentation must contain all the data
necessary to enable the stresses to be evaluated.
2. Materials
2.1 Approved materials
Propeller, intermediate and thrust shafts together with
flange and clamp couplings are to be made of forged
steel; where appropriate, couplings shall be made of
cast steel. Rolled round steel may be used for plain,
flangeless shafts.
In general, the tensile strength of steels used for shaft-
ing (shafts, flange couplings, bolts/fitted bolts) shall
be between 400 N/mm
2
and 800 N/mm
2
. However, the
value of R
m
used for the calculation of the material
factor C
w
in accordance with formula (2) for propeller
shafts shall not be greater than 600 N/mm
2
. Where in
special cases wrought copper alloys resistant to sea-
water are to be used for the shafting, the consent of
GL shall be obtained.
2.2 Testing of materials
All component parts of the shafting which assist in
transmitting the torque from the vessel's propulsion
plant are subject to the GL Rules II Materials and
Welding and are to be tested. This requirement also
covers metal propeller shaft liners. Where propeller
shafts running in seawater are protected against sea-
water penetration not by a metal liner but by plastic
coatings, the coating technique used is to be approved
by GL.
For fishing vessels with L < 24 m Inspection Certifi-
cates 3.1B according to EN 10204 : 1995 can be ac-
cepted.
3. Shaft dimensions
3.1 General
All parts of the shafting are to be dimensioned in ac-
cordance with the following formulae and in compli-
ance with the requirements relating to torsional vibra-
tions set out in F. The dimensions of the shafting shall
be based on the total rated installed power. Where the
geometry of a part is such that it cannot be dimen-
sioned in accordance with these formulae, special
evidence of the mechanical strength of the part or
parts concerned is to be furnished to GL.
3.2 Minimum shaft diameter
3.2.1 For fishing vessels with L < 24 m and fishing
along the coast line at a distance not exceeding 20
nautical miles from main land or off-shore islands the
minimum shaft diameter is to be determined by the
following formula:

W
3
a
P
d d k C [mm]
n
(1a)
d
a
= actual outer shaft diameter [mm]
d = required outside diameter of shaft [mm]
P
W
= rated power of propulsion motor [kW]
n = shaft speed [min
-1
]
k = 90 for shafts of corrosion-resistant steel,
wrought copper alloys, nickel alloys or
non-corrosion resistant steel if the shaft is
protected against contact with seawater
= 75 for shafts of high tensile wrought nickel
alloys
1


1
e.g. "Monal alloy K-500", tensile strength > 800 N/mm
2

I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 9c Propulsion System Chapter 8
Page 9c1

A
C = 1,06 for vessels with one propulsion line
= 1,0 for vessels with two propulsion lines
3.2.2 For all other fishing vessels the minimum
shaft diameter is to be determined by applying for-
mula (1b):

W
a W
4
3
i
a
P
d d F k C
d
n 1
d








(1)
d
i
= diameter of shaft bore, where present [mm]
If the bore in the shaft is = 0,4 d, 1,0 may be
applied for the expression:
= 1 (d
i
/ d
a
)
4

F = factor for the type of propulsion installation
[]
a) Intermediate and thrust shafts
= 95
for engine installations with slip cou-
plings and electric propulsion installations
= 100
for all other propulsion installations
b) Propeller shafts
= 100
for all types of installations
C
W
= material factor []
= 560 / (R
m
+ 160) (2)
R
m
= tensile strength of the shaft material (see also
2.1) [N/mm
2
]
k = factor for the type of shaft []
= 1,0 for intermediate shafts with integral
forged coupling flanges or with shrink-
fitted keyless coupling flanges
= 1,10 for intermediate shafts where the cou-
pling flanges are mounted on the ends of
the shaft with the aid of keys. At a dis-
tance of at least 0,2 d from the end of
the keyway, such shafts can be reduced
to a diameter corresponding to k = 1,0
= 1,10 for intermediate shafts with radial holes
which diameter is not greater than 0,3 d
= 1,10 for thrust shafts near the plain bearings
on both sides of the thrust collar, or near
the axial bearings where a roller bearing
design is used
= 1,15 for intermediate shafts designed as
multi-splined shafts where d is the out-
side diameter of the splined shaft. Out-
side the splined section, the shafts can
be reduced to a diameter corresponding
to k = 1,0
= 1,20 for intermediate shafts with longitudinal
slots where the length and width of the
slot do not exceed 1,17 d and 0,25 d
respectively.
= 1,22 for propeller shafts in the area of the aft
stern tube or shaft bracket bearing to the
forward face of the propeller boss sub-
ject to a minimum of 2,5 d, if the pro-
peller is shrink-fitted, without key, on to
the tapered end of the propeller shaft us-
ing a method approved by GL, or if the
propeller is bolted to a flange forged on
the propeller shaft.
= 1,26 for propeller shafts in the area specified
for k = 1,22, if the propeller is keyed to
the tapered propeller shaft
= 1,40 for propeller shafts in the area specified
for k = 1,22, if the shaft inside the stern
tube is lubricated with grease.
= 1,15 for propeller shafts forward portion of
shafts to where they emerge from the
stern tube. The portion of the propeller
shaft located forward of the stern tube
seal can be gradually reduced to the size
of the intermediate shaft.
4. Design
4.1 General
Changes in diameter are to be effected by tapering or
ample radiusing. For intermediate shafts, the radius at
forged flanges is to be at least 0,08 d, that at the aft
propeller shaft flange at least 0,125 d.
4.2 Shaft tapers and nut threads
Keyways in the shaft taper for the propeller shall be so
designed that the forward end of the groove makes a
gradual transition to the full shaft section. In addition,
the forward end of the keyway shall be spoon-shaped.
The edges of the keyway at the surface of the shaft
taper for the propeller are not to be sharp. The forward
end of the rounded keyway has to lie well within the
seating of the propeller boss. Threaded holes to ac-
commodate the securing screws for propeller keys shall
be located only in the aft half of the keyway, see Fig.
9c.1.
In general, tapers for securing flange couplings which
are jointed with keys shall have a conicity of between
1 : 12 and 1 : 20. See C. for details of propeller shaft
tapers on the propeller side.
The outside diameter of the threaded end for the pro-
peller retaining nut shall not be less than 60 % of the
calculated big taper diameter.
4.3 Propeller shaft protection
4.3.1 Sealing
Propeller shafts with oil or grease lubrication are to be
fitted with seals of proven efficiency and approved by
Chapter 8
Page 9c2
Section 9c Propulsion System I - Part 1
GL 2007


A
d
up to 150
up to 250
up to 450
from 450
r
5
3
4
5
6
r
1
< r
2
< r
3
< r
4
Standard values of r
5
d
X
Sections: A - A
r
1
r
5
B - B C - C D - D
Section E - E
r6 ~ 0,5 b
Detail X
E E
a
( a ~ b )
b
A B C D
A B C D
r
5
r
5
r
5
r
2
r
3
r
4

Fig. 9c.1 Design of keyway in propeller shaft
GL at the stern tube ends, see also the requirements
applicable to the external sealing of the stern tube in
the context with the propeller shaft survey prescribed
in the GL Rules Part 0 Classification and Surveys,
Section 3.
The securing at stern tube, shaft line or propeller (e.g.
chrome steel liner) shall guarantee a permanent tight-
ness. GL reserve the right to demand corresponding
verifications.
For protection of the sealing a rope guard shall be
provided.
The propeller boss seating is to be effectively pro-
tected against the ingress of seawater. This seal can be
dispensed with if the propeller shaft is made of corro-
sion-resistant material.
In the case of Class Notation IW, the seal shall be
fitted with a device by means of which the bearing
clearance can be measured when the vessel is afloat.
4.3.2 Shaft liners
4.3.2.1 Propeller shafts which are not made of corro-
sion- resistant material and which run in seawater are
to be protected against ingress of seawater by sea-
water-resistant metal liners or other liners approved by
GL and by proven seals at the propeller.
4.3.2.2 Metal liners in accordance with 4.3.2.1,
which run in seawater, shall be made in a single piece.
Only with the expressed consent of GL and in excep-
tional cases the liner may consist of two or more parts,
provided that the abutting edges of the parts are addi-
tionally sealed and protected after fitting by a method
approved by GL to guarantee water-tightness. Such
joints will be subject to special tests to prove their
effectiveness.
4.3.2.3 Minimum wall thickness of shaft liners
The minimum wall thickness s [mm] of metal shaft
liners in accordance with 4.3.2.1 is to be determined
using the following formula:
s = 0,03 d + 7,5 (3)
d = shaft diameter under the liner [mm]
In the case of continuous liners, the wall thickness
between the bearings may be reduced to 0,75 s.
4.4 Coupling connection
4.4.1 The thickness of coupling flanges on the
intermediate and thrust shafts and on the forward end
of the propeller shaft shall be equal to at least 20 % of
the calculated minimum diameter of a solid shaft at
the relevant location.
Where propellers are attached to a forged flange on
the propeller shaft, the flange has to have a thickness
equal to at least 25 % of the calculated minimum di-
ameter of a solid shaft at the relevant location.
These flanges shall not be thinner than the Rule di-
ameter of the fitted bolts if these are based on the
same tensile strength as that of the shaft material.
In the formulae (4), (5), (6) and (7), the following
symbols are used:
A = effective area of shrink-fit seating [mm
2
]
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 9c Propulsion System Chapter 8
Page 9c3


A
c
A
= coefficient for shrink-fitted joints [], de-
pending on the kind of driving unit
= 1,0 for geared diesel engine and turbine
drives
= 1,2 for direct coupled diesel engine drives
C = conicity of shaft ends []
= difference in tapers diameters/length of tapers
d = shaft diameter in area of clamp-type coupling
[mm]
d
s
= diameters of fitted bolts [mm]
d
k
= inner throat diameter for necked-down bolts
[mm]
D = diameter of pitch circle of bolts [mm]
f = coefficient for shrink-fitted joints []
Q = peripheral force at the mean joint diameter of
a shrink fit [N]
n = shaft speed [min
-1
]
p = contact pressure of shrink fits [N/mm
2
]
P
W
= rated power of the driving motors [kW]
R
m
= tensile strength of fitted or necked-down bolt
material [N/mm
2
]
s
fl
= flange thickness in area of bolt pitch circle
[mm]
S = safety factor against slipping of shrink fits in
the shafting []
= 3,0 between motor and gear
= 2,5 for all other applications
T = propeller thrust [N]
z = number of fitted or necked-down bolts []

0
= coefficient of static friction []
= 0,15 for hydraulic shrink fits
= 0,18 for dry shrink fits
= half conicity of shaft ends []
= C /2
4.4.2 The bolts used to connect flange couplings
are normally to be designed as fitted bolts. The mini-
mum diameter d
s
of fitted bolts at the coupling flange
faces is to be determined by applying the formula:

6
w
s
m
10 P
d 16
n D z R

=

[mm] (4)
4.4.3 Where, in special circumstances, the use of
fitted bolts is not feasible, GL may agree to the use of
an equivalent frictional transmission.
4.4.4 The minimum thread root diameter d
k
of the
connecting bolts used for clamp-type couplings is to
be determined using the formula:

6
w
k
m
10 P
d 12
n d z R

=

[mm] (5)
4.4.5 The shaft of necked-down bolts shall not be
less than 0,9 times the thread root diameter. If, besides
the torque, the bolted connection has to transmit con-
siderable additional forces, the bolts shall be increased
accordingly.
4.4.6 Shrink fitted couplings
Where shafts are connected by keyless shrink fitted
couplings (flange or sleeve type), the dimensioning of
these shrink fits shall be chosen in a way that the
maximum von Mises equivalent stress in all parts will
not exceed 80 % of the yield strength of the specific
materials during operation and 95 % during mounting
and dismounting.
For the calculation of the safety margin of the connec-
tion against slippage, the maximum clearance will be
applied, derived as the difference between the lowest
respectively highest still acceptable limit of the ap-
plied nominal tolerance field for the bore and the
shaft. The contact pressure p in the shrunk-on joint to
achieve the required safety margin may be determined
by applying formulae (6) and (7).
( ) A
2 2 2 2 2
T f c Q T T
p
A f

+ +
=

[N/mm
2
] (6)
"+" sign following the root applies to conical shrunk
joints without an axial stop to absorb astern
thrust
"" sign following the root if the conical shrunk
joint has an axial stop to absorb astern thrust

2
2 o
f
S

=


[] (7)
4.5 Shafting bearings
4.5.1 Arrangement of shaft bearings
Shaft bearings both inside and outside the stern tube
are to be so arranged that, when the plant is hot and
irrespective of the condition of loading of the vessel,
each bearing is subjected to positive reaction forces.
Chapter 8
Page 9c4
Section 9c Propulsion System I - Part 1
GL 2007


A
By appropriate spacing of the bearings and by the
alignment of the shafting in relation to the coupling
flange at the engine or gearing, care is to be taken to
ensure that no undue shear forces or bending moments
are exerted on the crankshaft or gear shafts when the
plant is at operating state temperature. By spacing the
bearings sufficiently far apart, steps are also to be
taken to ensure that the reaction forces of line or gear
shaft bearings are not significantly affected should the
alignment of one or more bearings be altered by hull
deflections or by displacement or wear of the bearings
themselves.
Guide values for the maximum permissible distance
between bearings
max
[mm] can be determined using
formula (8):

max 1
K d = (8)
d = diameter of shaft between bearings [mm]
K
1
= 450 for oil-lubricated white metal bearings
= 280 for grey cast iron, grease-lubricated stern
tube bearings
= 280 350 for water-lubricated rubber bear-
ings in stern tubes and shaft brackets (upper
values for special designs only)
Where the shaft speed exceeds 350 min
-1
it is recom-
mended that the maximum bearing spacing is deter-
mined in accordance with formula (9) in order to
avoid excessive loads due to bending vibrations. In
limiting cases a bending vibration analysis should be
made for the shafting system.

max 2
d
K
n
= (9)
n = shaft speed [min
-1
]
K
2
= 8500 for oil-lubricated white metal bearings
= 7500 for water lubricated rubber bearings
= 5200 for grease-lubricated, grey cast iron
bearings
4.5.2 Stern tube bearings
4.5.2.1 Inside the stern tube the propeller shaft shall
normally be supported by two bearing points. In short
stern tubes the forward bearing may be dispensed
with, in which case at least one free-standing journal
shaft bearing should be provided.
4.5.2.2 Where the propeller shaft inside the stern tube
runs in oil-lubricated white metal bearings or in syn-
thetic rubber or reinforced resin or plastic materials
approved for use in oil-lubricated stern tube bearings,
the lengths of the after and forward stern tube bearings
shall be approximately 2 d
a
and 0,8 d
a
respectively.
The length of the after stern tube bearing may be re-
duced to 1,5 d
a
where the contact load, which is cal-
culated from the static load and allowing for the
weight of the propeller is less than 0,8 MPa in the case
of shafts supported on white metal bearings and less
than 0,6 MPa in the case of bearings made of synthetic
materials.
4.5.2.3 Where the propeller shaft inside the stern
tube runs in bearings made of lignum vitae, rubber or
plastic approved for use in water-lubricated stern tube
bearings, the length of the after stern tube bearing
shall be approximately 4 d
a
and that of the forward
stern tube bearing approximately 1,5 d
a
.
A reduction of the bearing length may be approved if
the bearing is shown by means of bench tests to have
sufficient load-bearing capacity.
4.5.2.4 Where the propeller shaft runs in grease-
lubricated, grey cast iron bushes the lengths of the
after and forward stern tube bearings should be ap-
proximately 2,5 d
a
and 1,0 d
a
respectively.
The peripheral speed of propeller shafts in grease-
lubricated grey cast iron bearings shall not exceed 2,5
up to a maximum of 3 m/s and that of propeller shafts
in rubber and water-lubricated lignum vitae bearings
shall not exceed 6 m/s and 3 up to a maximum of 4
m/s respectively.
4.5.2.5 Where propeller shafts are to run in roller
bearings inside the stern tube, these should wherever
possible take the form of cylindrical roller bearings
with cambered rollers or races and with increased
bearing clearance. The camber must be large enough
to accommodate a 0,1 % inclination of the shaft rela-
tive to the bearing axis without adverse effects.
For application of roller bearings care must be taken
that the minimum load requirements as specified by
the manufacturer are fulfilled (axial adjustment rec-
ommended).
4.5.3 Bearing lubrication
4.5.3.1 Lubrication and matching of materials of the
plain and roller bearings for the shafting have to meet
the operational demands of seagoing vessels.
4.5.3.2 Lubricating oil or grease shall be introduced
into the stern tube in such a way as to ensure a reliable
supply of oil or grease to the forward and after stern
tube bearing.
With grease lubrication, the forward and after bearings
are each to be provided with a grease connection.
Wherever possible, a grease pump driven by the shaft
is to be used to secure a continuous supply of grease.
Where the shaft runs in oil within the stern tube, a
header tank is to be fitted at a sufficient height above
the vessel's load line. Facilities are to be provided for
checking the level of oil in the tank at any time.
The temperature of the after stern tube bearing is to be
indicated. Alternatively, with propeller shafts less than
400 mm in diameter the stern tube oil temperature
may be indicated. In this case the temperature sensor
is to be located in the vicinity of the after stern tube
bearing.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 9c Propulsion System Chapter 8
Page 9c5


A
4.5.3.3 In the case of vessels with automated ma-
chinery, Section 12 has to be complied with.
4.5.4 Stern tube water-lubricated connections
Oil-lubricated stern tubes are to be fitted with filling,
testing and drainage connections as well as with a vent
pipe.
Where the propeller shaft runs in seawater, a flushing
line is to be fitted in front of the forward stern tube
bearing in place of the filling connection.
4.5.5 Cast resin mounting
The mounting of stern tubes and stern tube bearings
made of cast resin and also the seating of intermediate
shaft bearings on cast resin parts is to be carried out by
GL-approved companies in the presence of a GL Sur-
veyor. Only GL-approved cast resins may be used for
seatings. Note is to be taken of the installation instruc-
tions issued by the manufacturer of the cast resin.
For further details see the GL Rules VI Additional
Rules and Guidelines, Part 4 Diesel Engines, Chap-
ter 3 Guidelines for the Seating of Propulsion Plants
and Auxiliary Machinery and Part 9 Materials and
Welding, Chapter 5 Guidelines for the Approval of
Reaction Plastics and Composite Materials for the
Seating and Repair of Components.
4.5.6 Shaft alignment
It has to be verified by alignment calculation that the
requirements for shaft-, gearbox- and engine bearings
are fulfilled in all relevant working conditions. There-
fore all essential static, dynamic and thermal effects
have to be taken into account.
The submitted calculation reports shall include the
complete scope of used input data and has to disclose
the resulting shaft deflection, bending stress and bear-
ing loads and the compliance with the specific maker
requirements.
An instruction for the alignment procedure has to be
issued describing the execution on board and listing
the permissible gap and sag values for open flange
connections or jack-up loads for bearings.
The final alignment on board has to be checked by
suitable measurement methods in afloat condition in
presence of the GL Surveyor.
5. Pressure Tests
5.1 Shaft liners
Prior to fitting in the finish-machined condition, shaft
liners are to be subjected to a hydraulic tightness test
at 2 bar pressure.
5.2 Stern tubes
Prior to fitting in the finish-machined condition, cast
stern tubes and cast stern tube parts are to be sub-
jected to a hydraulic tightness test at 2 bar pressure. A
further tightness test is to be carried out after fitting.
For stern tubes fabricated from welded steel plates, it is
sufficient to test for tightness during the pressure tests
applied to the hull spaces passed by the stern tube.
B. Gears, Couplings
1. General
1.1 Scope
1.1.1 These requirements apply to spur, planetary
and bevel gears and to all types of couplings for in-
corporation in the main propulsion plant or essential
equipment as specified in Section 9a, H. The design
requirements laid down here may also be applied to
the gears and couplings of equipment other than that
mentioned in Section 9a, H., if equivalent evidence of
mechanical strength is not available.
1.1.2 Application of these requirements to the
auxiliary machinery couplings mentioned in 1.1.1 may
generally be limited to a basic design approval by GL
of the particular coupling type. Regarding the design
of elastic couplings for use in generator sets, reference
is made to 7.2.6.
1.1.3 For the dimensional design of gears and cou-
plings for vessels with ice class, see E.
1.2 Documents for approval
Assembly and sectional drawings together with the
necessary detail drawings and parts lists are to be
submitted to GL in triplicate for approval. They shall
contain all the data necessary to enable the load calcu-
lations to be checked.
2. Materials
2.1 Approved materials
2.1.1 Shafts, pinions, wheels and wheel rims of
gears in the main propulsion plant shall preferably be
made of forged steel. Rolled steel bar may also be
used for plain, flangeless shafts. Gear wheel bodies
may be made of grey cast iron
2
or nodular cast iron or
may be fabricated from welded steel plate with steel or
cast steel hubs.
2.1.2 Couplings in the main propulsion plant shall
be made of steel, cast steel or nodular cast iron with a
mostly ferritic matrix. Grey cast iron or suitable cast
aluminium alloys may also be permitted for lightly
stressed external components of couplings and the
rotors and casings of hydraulic slip couplings.
2.1.3 The gears of essential equipment according to
Section 9a, H. are subject to the same requirements as

2
The peripheral speed of cast iron gear wheels shall generally
not exceed 60 m/s, that of cast iron coupling clamps or bowls,
40 m/s.
Chapter 8
Page 9c6
Section 9c Propulsion System I - Part 1
GL 2007


B
those specified in 2.1.1 as regards the materials used.
For gears intended for equipment other than that men-
tioned in Section 9a, H. other materials may also be
permitted.
2.1.4 Flexible coupling bodies for essential auxil-
iary machinery according to Section 9a, H. may gen-
erally be made of grey cast iron, and for the outer
coupling bodies a suitable aluminium alloy may also
be used. However, for generator sets use shall only be
made of coupling bodies preferably made of nodular
cast iron with a mostly ferritic matrix, of steel or of
cast steel, to ensure that the couplings are well able to
withstand the shock torques occasioned by short cir-
cuits. GL reserve the right to impose similar require-
ments on the couplings of particular auxiliary drive
units.
2.2 Testing of materials
All gear and coupling components which are involved
in the transmission of torque and which are intended for
the main propulsion plant have to be tested in accord-
ance with the GL Rules II Materials and Welding,
Part 1 Metallic Materials. The same applies to the
materials used for gear components with major torque
transmission function and couplings in generator
drives.
For fishing vessels with L < 24 m Inspection Certifi-
cates 3.1 B according to EN 10204 : 1995 can be ac-
cepted.
Suitable documentation is to be submitted for the
materials used for the major components of the cou-
plings and gears of all other functionally essential
equipment in accordance with Section 9a, H. This
documentation may be a GL Material Test Certificate
or an acceptance test Certificate of the steelmaker.
3. Calculation of the load-bearing capacity of
cylindrical and bevel gearing
For gears in main propulsion plants and for dynami-
cally and statically loaded gears of essential equip-
ment sufficient load bearing capacity of the toothing
has to be proven according to Chapter 2 Machinery
Installations, Section 5, C. But for fishing vessels with
L < 24 m, the following minimum safety margins for
flank and root bending stress may be used:
S
H
= 1,3 S
F
= 1,8 for vessels with one propul-
sion line
S
H
= 1,2 S
F
= 1,55 for vessels with two propul-
sion lines
4. Gear shafts
4.1 Minimum diameter
The dimensions of shafts of reversing and reduction
gears are to be calculated by applying the following
formula:
a w
4
3
i
a
P
d d F k C
d
n 1
d










i
a
4
i
a
d
for 0, 4 the expression
d
d
1 may be set to1, 0.
d

d = required outside diameter of shaft [mm]
d
i
= diameter of shaft bore, if applicable [mm]
d
a
= actual shaft diameter [mm]
P = driving power of shaft [kW]
n = shaft speed [min
-1
]
F = factor for the type of drive []
= 95 for turbine plants, electrical drives and
internal combustion engines with slip
couplings
= 100 for all other types of drive. GL reserve
the right to specify higher F values if
this appears necessary in view of the
loading of the plant.
C
W
= material factor []
=
m
560
R 160 +

R
m
= tensile strength of the shaft material [N/mm
2
]
However, for wheel shafts the value applied
for R
m
in the formula shall not be higher than
800 N/mm
2
. For pinion shafts the actual ten-
sile strength value may be applied.
k = 1,10 for gear shafts []
= 1,15 for gear shafts in the area of the pinion
or wheel body if this is keyed to the
shaft and for multiple-spline shafts.
Higher values of k may be specified by GL
where increased bending stresses in the shaft
are liable to occur because of the bearing ar-
rangement, the casing design, the tooth pres-
sure, etc.
5. Equipment
5.1 Oil level indicator
For monitoring the lubricating oil level in main and
auxiliary gears, equipment shall be fitted to enable the
oil level to be determined.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 9c Propulsion System Chapter 8
Page 9c7


B
5.2 Pressure and temperature control
Temperature and pressure gauges are to be fitted to
monitor the lubricating oil pressure and the lubricating
oil temperature at the oil-cooler outlet before the oil
enters the gears.
Plain journal bearings are also to be fitted with tem-
perature indicators.
Where gears are fitted with anti-friction bearings, a
temperature indicator is to be mounted at a suitable
point. For gears rated up to 2000 kW, special ar-
rangements may be agreed with GL.
Where vessels are equipped with automated machin-
ery, the requirements of Section 12 are to be complied
with.
5.3 Lubricating oil pumps
Lubricating oil pumps driven by the gearing must be
mounted in such a way that they are accessible and
can be replaced.
For the pumps to be fitted, see Section 9d.
5.4 Gear casings
The casings of gears belonging to the main propulsion
plant and to essential auxiliaries shall be fitted with
removable inspection covers to enable the toothing to
be inspected, the thrust bearing clearance to be meas-
ured and oil sump to be cleaned.
5.5 Seating of gears
The seating of gears on steel or cast resin chocks is to
conform to the GL Rules VI Additional Rules and
Guidelines, Part 4 Diesel Engines, Chapter 3
Guidelines for the Seating of Propulsion Plants and
Auxiliary Machinery.
In the case of cast resin seatings, the thrust must be
absorbed by means of stoppers. The same applies to
cast resin seatings of separate thrust bearings.
6. Balancing and testing
6.1 Balancing
6.1.1 Gear wheels, pinions, shafts, gear couplings
and, where applicable, high-speed flexible couplings
shall be assembled in a properly balanced condition.
6.1.2 The generally permissible residual imbalance
U per balancing plane of gears for which static or dy-
namic balancing is rendered necessary by the method
of manufacture and by the operating and loading condi-
tions can be determined by applying the formula

n z
G Q 6 , 9
U

= [kgmm]
G = mass of body to be balanced [kg]
n = operating speed of body to be balanced [min
-1
]
z = number of balancing planes []
Q = degree of balance []
= 6,3 for gear shafts, pinions and coupling
members for engine gears
= 2,5 for torsion shafts and gear couplings,
pinions and gear wheels within turbine
driven plants
6.2 Testing of gears
6.2.1 Testing in the manufacturer's works
When the testing of materials and component tests
have been carried out, gearing systems for the main
propulsion plant and for essential auxiliaries in accor-
dance with Section 9a, H. are to be presented to GL
for final inspection and operational testing in the
manufacturer's works. For the inspection of welded
gear casing, see GL Rules II Materials and Welding,
Part 3 Welding, Chapter 3 Welding in the Various
Fields of Application.
The final inspection is to be combined with a trial run
lasting several hours under part or full-load condi-
tions, on which occasion the tooth clearance and con-
tact pattern are to be checked. In the case of a trial at
full-load, any necessary running-in of the gears shall
have been completed beforehand. Where no test facili-
ties are available for the operational and on-load test-
ing of large gear trains, these tests may also be per-
formed on board vessel on the occasion of the dock
trials.
Tightness tests are to be performed on those compo-
nents to which such testing is appropriate.
Reductions in the scope of the tests require the consent
of GL.
6.2.2 Tests during sea trials
6.2.2.1 Prior to the start of sea trials, the teeth of the
gears belonging to the main propulsion plant are to be
coloured with suitable dye to enable the contact pat-
tern to be checked. During the sea trials, the gears are
to be checked at all forward and reverse speeds for
their operational efficiency and smooth running as
well as the bearing temperatures and the pureness of
the lubricating oil. At the latest on conclusion of the
sea trials, the gearing is to be examined via the inspec-
tion openings and the contact pattern checked. If pos-
sible the contact pattern has to be checked after con-
clusion of every load step. Assessment of the contact
pattern is to be based on the guide values for the pro-
portional area of contact in the axial and radial direc-
tions of the teeth given in Table 9c.1 and shall take
account of the running time and loading of the gears
during the sea trial.
Chapter 8
Page 9c8
Section 9c Propulsion System I - Part 1
GL 2007


B
Table 9c.1 Percentage area of contact
Material /
Manufactur-
ing
of toothing
Working tooth
depth (without
tip relief)
Width of tooth
(without end
relief)
heat-treated,
milling shaping
33 % average
values
70 %
surface-hard-
ened, grinding,
scarping
40 % average
values
80 %


6.2.2.2 In the case of multistage gear trains and
planetary gears manufactured to a proven high degree
of accuracy, checking of the contact pattern after sea
trials may, with the consent of GL, be reduced.
7. Design and construction of couplings
7.1 Tooth couplings
7.1.1 Adequate loading capacity of the tooth flanks
has to be proven according the generally accepted
methods defined in Chapter 2 Machinery Installa-
tions, Section 5, G. For fishing vessels with L < 24 m
Inspection Certificates 3.1 B according to EN 10204 :
1995 can be accepted.
7.1.2 The coupling teeth are to be effectively lubri-
cated. For this purpose a constant oil level maintained
in the coupling may generally be regarded as adequate
if
d n
2
< 6 10
9
[mm/min
2
]
For higher values of d n
2
, couplings in main propul-
sion plants are to be provided with a circulating lubri-
cation oil system.
7.1.3 For the dimensional design of the coupling
sleeves, flanges and bolts of tooth couplings the for-
mulae given in A. are to be applied.
7.2 Flexible couplings
7.2.1 Flexible couplings shall be type approved for
the loads specified by the manufacturer and for use in
main propulsion plants and essential auxiliary machin-
ery.
7.2.2 Flexible couplings in the main propulsion
plant and in power-generating plants shall be so di-
mensioned that they are able to withstand for a rea-
sonable time operation with one engine cylinder out of
service. Additional dynamic loads for vessels with ice
class are to be taken into account. In this connection
reference is made to E.
7.2.3 With regard to the routine supervision of
coupling types already approved by GL and in order to
prove adequate dynamic fatigue strength prior to the
issue of a general type approval for flexible couplings
to be introduced into shipbuilding for the first time,
GL reserve the right to call for the execution of special
dynamic loading tests appropriate to the design of the
coupling in question.
7.2.4 With regard to casings, flanges and bolts of
flexible couplings, the requirements specified in A.4.
are to be complied with.
7.2.5 When flexible couplings are exposed due to
special arrangements (e.g. couplings in propeller shaft
line) to additional axial forces (thrust), their design
shall be adequate to transmit these forces additionally
to the torque.
7.2.6 Flexible couplings for diesel generator sets
shall be capable of absorbing impact moments due to
electrical short circuits up to a value of 6 times the
nominal torque of the plant.
7.3 Flange and clamp-type couplings
In the dimensional design of the coupling bodies,
flanges and bolts of flange and clamp-type couplings,
the requirements specified in A. are to be complied
with.
7.4 Testing of couplings
Couplings for vessel's propulsion plants and couplings
for generator sets and transverse thrusters are to be
presented to GL for final inspection and, where appro-
priate, for the performance of functional and tightness
tests.
C. Propellers and Special Propulsion Devices
1. General
1.1 Scope
The requirements defined in C. apply to fixed pitch
screw propellers and lateral thrust units. For controlla-
ble pitch propellers see Chapter 2 Machinery Instal-
lations, Section 6, B. and D.; for rudder propeller units
see Section 14, B.
1.2 Documents for approval
1.2.1 The general conditions for these documents
are defined in Section 1, E.
1.2.2 Design drawings of propellers in main pro-
pulsion systems having an engine output in excess of
300 kW and in lateral thrust systems of over 500 kW,
as well as a general arrangement drawing are to be
submitted to GL in triplicate for examination. The
drawings are required to contain all the details neces-
sary to carry out an examination in accordance with
the following requirements.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 9c Propulsion System Chapter 8
Page 9c9


C
1.3 Materials
1.3.1 Propellers and propeller hubs
Propellers are to be made of sea-water-resistant cast
copper alloys or cast steel alloys with a minimum
tensile strength of 440 N/mm
2
, according to the GL
Rules II Materials and Welding, Part 1 Metallic
Materials. For the purpose of the following design
requirements governing the thickness of the propeller
blades, the requisite resistance to seawater of a cast
copper alloy or cast steel alloy is considered to be
achieved if the alloy used is capable to withstand a
fatigue test under alternating bending stresses com-
prising 10
8
load cycles amounting to about 20 % of
the minimum tensile strength and carried out in a 3 %
NaCl solution, and if it can be proven that the fatigue
strength under alternating bending stresses in natural
seawater is not less than about 65 % of the values
established in 3 % NaCl solution. Sufficient fatigue
strength under alternating bending stresses has to be
proven by a method recognized by GL.
1.3.2 Components for built-up propellers
The blade retaining bolts of assembled propellers are
to be manufactured from seawater-resistant materials
if they are not protected against contact with seawater.
1.3.3 Novel materials
Where it is proposed to use propeller materials whose
serviceability is not attested by a sufficient period of
practical experience, GL has to be provided with spe-
cial proof of the suitability of such materials.
1.3.4 Material testing
The material of propellers, propeller bosses and all
other essential components involved in the transmis-
sion of torque is to be tested in accordance with the
GL Rules II Materials and Welding, Part 1 Metal-
lic Materials. For fishing vessels having an output
below 300 kW Manufacturer Inspection Certificates
according to GL Rules II Materials and Welding,
Part 1 Metallic Materials, Chapter 1 Principles and
Test Procedures, Section 1, H. can be accepted.
2. Dimensions and design of propellers
2.1 Symbols and terms
A = effective area of a shrink fit [mm
2
]
B = developed blade width of cylindrical sections
at radii 0,25 R, 0,35 R and 0,6 R in an ex-
panded view [mm]
c
A
= coefficient for shrunk joints []
= 1,0 for engine gear transmissions and electric
motor drives
= 1,2 for direct drives
C
G
= size factor in accordance with formula (2) []
C
dyn
= dynamic factor in accordance with formula
(3) []
C
W
= characteristic material value for propeller
material [] as shown in Table 9c.2 (corre-
sponds to the minimum tensile strength R
m
of
the propeller material where this has been
shown to possess sufficient fatigue strength
under alternating bending stresses in accor-
dance with 1.3.1)
Table 9c.2 Characteristic values C
w
Material Description
1
C
w

Cu 1
Cu 2
Cu 3
Cu 4
Cast manganese brass
Cast manganese nickel brass
Cast nickel aluminium bronze
Cast manganese aluminium
bronze
440
440
590
630
Fe 1
Fe 2
Fe 3

Fe 4

Fe 5

Fe 6
Unalloyed cast steel
Low-alloy cast steel
Martensitic cast chrome steel
13/1-6
Martensitic cast chrome steel
17/4
Ferritic-austenitic cast steel
24/8
Austenitic cast steel 18/8-11
440
440
600

600

600

500
1
For the chemical composition of the alloys, see GL Rules
II Materials and Welding.


C = conicity of shaft ends []
=
taper of length
diameter taper in difference

d = pitch circle diameter of blade or propeller-
fastening bolts [mm]
d
k
= root diameter of blade or propeller-fastening
bolts [mm]
D = diameter of propeller [mm]
= 2 R
d
m
= mean taper diameter [mm]
e = blade rake to aft acc. Fig. 9c.2 [mm]
= R tan
E
T
= thrust stimulating factor in accordance with
formula (5) []
f, f
1
, f
2
= factors in formulae (2), (4) and (7) []
H = pitch of propeller blade pressure side at radii
0,25 R, 0,35 R and 0,6 R [mm]
Chapter 8
Page 9c10
Section 9c Propulsion System I - Part 1
GL 2007


C
H
m
= mean effective propeller pitch on pressure
side for pitch varying with the radius [mm]
=
(R B H)
(R B)



R, B and H are corresponding measures of
the various sections.
k = coefficient for various profile shapes in ac-
cordance with Table 9c.3 []
Table 9c.3 Values of k for various profile shapes
Values of k
Profile shape
0,25 R 0,35 R 0,6 R
Segmental profiles
with circular arced
back
73 62 44
Segmental profiles
with parabolic
suction side
77 66 47
Blade profiles as
for Wageningen B
Series propellers
80 66 44


L = pull-up length when mounting propeller on
taper [mm]
L
mech
= pull-up length at t = 35 C [mm]
L
temp
= temperature-related portion of pull-up length
at t < 35 C [mm]
M = torque [Nm]
n
2
= propeller speed [min
-1
]
P
w
= nominal power of driving engine [kW]
p = surface pressure in shrink joint between pro-
peller and shaft [N/mm
2
]
Q = peripheral force at mean taper diameter [N]
R
p 0,2
= 0,2 % proof stress [N/mm
2
]
R
eH
= yield strength [N/mm
2
]
R
m
= tensile strength [N/mm
2
]
S = margin of safety against propeller slipping on
cone
= 2,8 []
t = maximum blade thickness of developed cy-
lindrical section at radii 0,25 R (t
0,25
), 0,35
R (t
0,35
), 0,6 R (t
0,6
) and 1,0 R (t
1,0
) [mm]
T = propeller thrust [N]
V
S
= speed of vessel [kn]
w = wake fraction []
W
0,35R
, W
0,6R
= section modulus of cylindrical blade
section at radii 0,35 R and 0,6 R
[mm
3
]
z = number of blades []
= pitch angle of profile at radii 0,25 R, 0,35 R
and 0,6 R []

D
H 27
,
1
tan arc
25 , 0

=

D
H 91
,
0
tan arc
35 , 0

=

D
H 53
,
0
tan arc
6 , 0

=
= angle included by face generatrix and normal
[]
= half-conicity []
=
2
C

o
= coefficient of static friction []
= 0,13 for hydraulic oil shrunk joints brass/
bronze to steel
= 0,15 for hydraulic oil shrunk joints steel to
steel
= 0,18 for dry shrunk joints brass/bronze to steel
= 0,20 for dry shrunk joints steel to steel
= skew angle acc. to Fig. 9c.2 []
max
m

=
ratio of maximum to mean stress at pressure
side of blades []
2.2 Calculation of blade thickness
2.2.1 At radii 0,25 R and 0,6 R, the maximum
blade thickness of solid propellers shall, at minimum
comply with formula (1).
t K
0
k K
1
C
G
C
dyn
(1)
K
0
=
15000
n
H
cos e
1
2
+

+
k as in Table 9c.3
K
1
=
5
w
m
2
2 w
D
P 10 2 cos sin
H
n B z C cos

+




C
G
= size factor []
=
1
D
f
1000
12, 2

(2)

G
1,1 C 0, 85
f
1
= 7,2 for solid propellers
= 6,2 for separately casted blades of built-up
propellers
C
dyn
= dynamic factor []
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 9c Propulsion System Chapter 8
Page 9c11


C
B
0,6
B
0,25
y
1,0 R
0,9 R
0,8 R
0,7 R
0,6 R
0,5 R
0,4 R
0,25 R
0,2 R
e
t
1,0
(+) (-)
D
e
t
0,25
r
D
r
S
t
0,6
max.
thickness line
mid chord line
leading edge trailing edge
Blade-sections according to
Wageningen B-series
curve of
swept area

Fig. 9c.2 Blade geometry
C
dyn
=
max m
/ 0, 8
1, 0
0, 7

(3)
for
max
m
1, 5

>

; otherwise
C
dyn
= 1,0

max
/
m
is generally to be taken from the detailed
calculation analogously to the calculation in 2.2.5. If,
in exceptional cases, no such calculation exists, the
stress ratio may be calculated approximately accord-
ing to formula (4).

max
m

= f
2
E
T
+ 1 (4)
E
T
=
3
9 S 2
V n (1 w) D
4, 3 10
T

(5)
f
2
= 0,4 0,6 for single-screw vessels, the lower
value applying to stern shapes with a wide
propeller tip clearance and no rudder heel,
and the larger value to sterns with small
clearance and with rudder heel. Intermediate
values are to be selected accordingly.
= 0,2 for twin-screw vessels
2.2.2 The blade thicknesses calculated by applying
formula (1) are minima for the finish-machined pro-
pellers.
2.2.3 The fillet radius at the transition from the
pressure and suction side of the blades to the propeller
boss shall correspond, in the case of three and four-
bladed propellers, to about 3,5 % of the propeller dia-
meter. For propellers with a larger number of blades
the maximum possible fillet radius shall be aimed at,
but the radius shall not in any case be made smaller
than 40 % of the blade root thickness.
2.2.4 A variable fillet radius, ensuring a uniform
stress distribution, may be accepted based on a
strength calculation case by case. The resulting calcu-
lated maximum stress shall not exceed the values,
resulting from a standard constant fillet radius design
in accordance to 2.2.3.
2.2.5 For special designs such as propellers with
skew angle 25, tip fin propellers, special profiles,
etc., special mechanical strength calculations are to be
submitted to GL.
A blade geometry data file and details on the meas-
ured wake are to be submitted to GL by data carrier or
e-mail: prop@gl-group.com, together with the design
documents to enable the check of the blade stress
distribution of these special designs.
2.2.6 If the propeller is subjected to an essential
wear due to special operating conditions, e.g. abrasion
Chapter 8
Page 9c12
Section 9c Propulsion System I - Part 1
GL 2007


C
in tidal flats, a wear addition has to be provided to the
thickness determined under 2.2.1. If the actual thick-
ness in service drops below 50 % at the blade tip or 90
% at other radii of the rule thickness obtained from
2.2.1, effective countermeasures have to be taken.
In case of unconventional blade geometries according
to 2.2.5, the design thickness as shown on the ap-
proved drawing shall be used in lieu of the rule thick-
ness according to 2.2.1.
3. Propeller Mounting
3.1 Cone connection
3.1.1 Where the cone connection between the shaft
and the propeller is fitted with a key, the propeller is
to be mounted on the tapered shaft in such a way that
approximately 120 % of the mean torque can be trans-
mitted from the shaft to the propeller by the frictional
bond.
The tapers of propellers which are mounted with a key
should not be more than 1 : 10 or less than 1 : 15.
3.1.2 Where the tapered fit to the shaft is per-
formed by the hydraulic oil technique without the use
of a key, the necessary pull-up distance L on the ta-
pered shaft is given by formula (6). Where appropri-
ate, allowance is also to be made for surface smooth-
ing when calculating L.
L = L
mech
+ L
temp
(6)
Where appropriate allowance is also made for surface
smoothing when calculating L, where L
mech
is deter-
mined according to the formulae of elasticity theory
applied to shrink joints for a specific surface pressure
p [N/mm] at the mean taper diameter determined by
applying formula (7) and for a water temperature of
35 C.

( )
2 2 2 6 2 2
A e
T f c c Q T T
p
A f
+ +
=

(7)
f =
2
2 o
S




(8)

6 m
temp
d
L 6 10 (35 t)
C

= (9)
t = the temperature at which the propeller is
mounted [C]
L
temp
applies only to propellers made of brass,
bronze and austenitic steel.
Note:
"+" sign following the root applies to shrunk joints
of tractor propeller
"" sign following the root applies to shrunk joints
of push propeller
The safety factor has to be taken as S = 2,8 for geared
plants.
For direct drives the safety factor has to be taken as
S = 1,0 and the peripheral force Q has to be replaced
by Q
FR
according to formula (10)

FR V MCR
Q 2, 0 Q 1,8 Q

= + (10)
where Q
FR
replaces Q in formula (7).
Q
V-MCR
is the maximum value from torsional vibration
evaluations, but is not to be taken less than 0,44 times
the Q value. The torsional vibration evaluation is to
consider the worst relevant operating conditions, e.g.
such as misfiring (one cylinder with no injection) and
cylinder unbalance.
3.1.3 The von Mises' equivalent stress based on the
maximum specific pressure p and the tangential stress
in the bore of the propeller hub may not exceed 75 %
of the 0,2 % proof stress or yield strength of the pro-
peller material when the propeller is installed and 90
% during mounting and dismounting, respectively.
3.1.4 The cones of propellers which are mounted
on the propeller shaft with the aid of the hydraulic oil
technique shall not be more than 1 : 15 and not less
than 1 : 25.
3.1.5 The propeller nut shall be strongly secured to
the propeller shaft.
3.2 Blade retaining bolts
The blade retaining bolts of built-up propellers have to
be dimensioned according to Chapter 2 Machinery
Installations, Section 6, D.3. For fishing vessels with
a length L < 24 m the dimensioning may follow the
GL Rules Part 2 Inland Navigation Vessels, C
Machinery, Systems and Electricity, Ch. 1, Sec. 2,
4.4.4.
3.3 Flange connections
The flange connections have to be dimensioned as for
controllable pitch propellers according to the GL
Rules defined in 1.1.
For fishing vessels with a length L < 24 m the dimen-
sioning of the flange connections may follow the
GL Rules Part 2 Inland Navigation Vessels, C
Machinery, Systems and Electricity, Ch. 1, Sec. 2,
4.6.2.
4. Balancing and testing
4.1 Balancing
Monobloc propellers ready for mounting are required
to undergo static balancing. Thereby the mass differ-
ence between blades of built-up fixed pitch propeller
has to be less than 1,5 %.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 9c Propulsion System Chapter 8
Page 9c13


C
4.2 Testing
4.2.1 Fixed pitch propellers are to be presented to
GL for final inspection and verification of the dimen-
sions.
GL reserve the right to require non-destructive tests to
be conducted to detect surface cracks or casting de-
fects.
4.2.2 Casted propeller boss caps have to be tested
for tightness at the manufacturer's workshop, so far
they also serve as corrosion protection. GL reserve the
right to require a tightness test of the aft propeller boss
sealing in assembled condition.
4.2.3 If the propeller is mounted onto the shaft by a
hydraulic shrink fit connection, a blue print test show-
ing at least a 70 % contact area has to be demonstrated
to the Surveyor. The blue print pattern shall not show
any larger areas without contact, especially not at the
forward cone end. The blue print pattern has to be
demonstrated using the original components.
If alternatively a male / female calibre system is used,
a contact area of at least 80 % has to be demonstrated
and certified. After ten applications or five years the
blue print prove has to be renewed.
5. Lateral thrust units
5.1 General
5.1.1 Scope
The requirements contained in 5. apply to the lateral
thrust unit, the control station and all the transmission
elements from the control station to the lateral thrust
unit.
5.1.2 Documents for approval
Assembly and sectional drawings for lateral thrust
units with an input power of 100 kW and more to-
gether with detailed drawings of the gear mechanism
and propellers containing all the data necessary for
checking are each to be submitted to GL in triplicate
for approval. In case of propellers, this only applies to
propulsive power levels above 500 kW.
5.2 Materials
Materials are subject, as appropriate, to the provisions
of A.2., B.2. as well as of 1.3 concerning the materials
and the material testing of propellers. Fishing vessels
with L < 24 m are treated in the same way as larger
vessels.
5.3 Dimensioning and design
The design of the driving mechanisms of lateral thrust
units is governed by A. and B., that of the propellers
by 1. to 4.
The pipe connections of hydraulic drive systems are
subject to the applicable requirements contained in
D.2.1.3 and D.2.1.4.
Lateral thrust units shall be capable of being operated
independently of other connected systems.
Windmilling of the propeller during passages has to be
taken into account as an additional load case. Other-
wise effective countermeasures have to be introduced
to avoid windmilling, e.g. a shaft brake.
In the propeller area the thruster tunnel shall be pro-
tected against damages caused by cavitation corrosion,
e.g. by providing effective measures such as stainless
steel plating.
For the electrical equipment of lateral thrust units, see
Section 11g, B.
5.4 Tests in the manufacturer's works
D.6. is applicable as appropriate.
For hydraulic pumps and motors with a drive power of
100 kW or more, the tests are to be conducted in the
presence of a GL Surveyor.
For lateral thrust units with an input power of less than
100 kW final inspection and function tests may be
carried out by the manufacturer, who will then issue
the relevant Inspection Certificate.
5.5 Shipboard trials
Testing is to be carried out during sea trials during
which the operating times are to be established.
D. Steering Gear
1. General
1.1 Scope
For the purposes of D. steering gears comprise all the
equipment used to operate the rudder from the rudder
actuator to the steering station including the transmis-
sion elements.
The requirements set out in SOLAS Chapter II-1,
Regulation 29 and 30 in their most actual version are
integral part of these Rules and are to be satisfied as
far as an application for fishing vessels is senseful.
1.2 Documents for approval
Assembly and general drawings of all steering gears,
diagrams of the hydraulic and electrical equipment
together with detail drawings of all important load-
transmitting components are to be submitted to GL in
triplicate for approval.
The drawings and other documents shall contain all
the information relating to materials, working pres-
sures, pump delivery rates, drive motor ratings etc.
necessary to enable the documentation to be checked.
Chapter 8
Page 9c14
Section 9c Propulsion System I - Part 1
GL 2007


D
2. Materials
2.1 Approved materials
2.1.1 As a rule, important load-transmitting com-
ponents of the steering gear shall be made of steel or
cast steel complying with the GL Rules II Materials
and Welding, Part 1 Metallic Materials.
With the consent of GL, cast iron may be used for
certain components.
Pressure vessels shall in general be made of steel, cast
steel or nodular cast iron (with a predominantly fer-
ritic matrix).
For welded structures, the GL Rules II Materials and
Welding, Part 3 Welding are to be observed.
2.1.2 Casings of journal and guide bearings on
vessels with a nozzle rudder and ice class are not to be
made of grey cast iron.
2.1.3 The pipes of hydraulic steering gears are to
be made of seamless or longitudinally welded steel
tubes. The use of cold-drawn, unannealed tubes is not
permitted.
At points where they are exposed to damage, copper
pipes for control lines are to be provided with protec-
tive shielding and are to be safeguarded against hard-
ening due to vibration by the use of suitable fasten-
ings.
2.1.4 High-pressure hose assemblies may be used
for short pipe connections subject to compliance with
Section 9d, if this is necessary due to vibrations or
flexibly mounted units.
2.1.5 The materials used for pressurized compo-
nents including the seals shall be suitable for the hy-
draulic oil in use.
2.2 Testing of materials
2.2.1 The materials of important load-transmitting
components of the steering gear as well as of the pres-
surized casings of hydraulic steering gears are to be
tested under the supervision of GL in accordance with
the Rules II Materials and Welding, Part 1 Metal-
lic Materials.
For pressurized oil pipes the requirements according
to Section 9d are to be observed
For welded pressurized casings, the GL Rules II
Materials and Welding, Part 3 Welding are to be
applied.
2.2.2 In the case of small hand-operated main
steering gears and small manually operated auxiliary
equipment GL may dispense with testing the materials
of individual components such as axiometer gear
shafts, etc.
3. Design and equipment
3.1 Number of steering gears
Every vessel has to be equipped with at least one main
and one auxiliary steering gear. Both steering gears
are to be independent of each other and, wherever
possible, act separately upon the rudder stock. GL
may agree to components being used jointly by the
main and auxiliary steering gear.
3.2 Main steering gear
3.2.1 Main steering gears shall, with the rudder
fully immersed in calm water, be capable of putting
the rudder from 35 port to 35 starboard and vice
versa at the vessel's speed for which the rudder has
been designed in accordance with Section 3. The time
required to put the rudder from 35 port to 30 star-
board or vice versa shall not exceed 28 seconds. The
maximum pressure occurring during this manoeuvre is
referred to as working pressure. Pressure loaded com-
ponents of the steering gear must be designed for a
pressure of at least 1,25 times the working pressure.
As a rule the main steering gear shall be power-
operated.
3.2.2 Manual operation is acceptable for rudder
stock diameters up to 120 mm calculated for torsional
loads in accordance with Section 3. Not more than 25
turns of the hand-wheel shall be necessary to put the
rudder from one hard over position to the other. Tak-
ing account of the efficiency of the system, the force
required to operate the handwheel shall generally not
exceed 200 N.
3.3 Auxiliary steering gear
3.3.1 Auxiliary steering gears shall, with the rudder
fully immersed in calm water, be capable of putting
the rudder from 15 port to 15 starboard or vice versa
within 60 seconds at 50 % of the vessel's maximum
speed, subject to a minimum of eight knots. Hydrauli-
cally operated auxiliary steering gears are to be fitted
with their own piping system independent of that of
the main steering gear. The pipe or hose connections
of steering gears shall be capable of being shut off
directly at the pressurized casings.
3.3.2 Manual operation of auxiliary steering gear
systems is permitted up to a theoretical stock diameter
of 230 mm referring to steel with a minimum nominal
upper yield stress R
eH
= 235 N/mm
2
.
3.4 Power unit
3.4.1 Where power operated hydraulic main steer-
ing gears are equipped with two or more identical
power units, no auxiliary steering gear need be in-
stalled provided that the following conditions are
fulfilled.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 9c Propulsion System Chapter 8
Page 9c15


D
3.4.1.1 The power units shall be so designed that
requirements 3.2.1 and 4. are complied with while any
one of the power units is out of operation.
3.4.1.2 In the event of failure of a single component
of the main steering gear including the piping, exclud-
ing the rudder tiller or similar components as well as
the cylinders, rotary vanes and casing, means are to be
provided for quickly regaining control of one steering
system.
3.4.1.3 In the event of a loss of hydraulic oil, it shall
be possible to isolate the damaged system in such a
way that the second control system remains fully ser-
viceable.
3.5 Rudder angle limitation
The rudder angle in normal service is to be limited by
devices fitted to the steering gear (e.g. limit switches)
to a rudder angle of 35 on both sides. Deviations from
this requirement are permitted only with the consent
of GL.
3.6 End position limitation
For the limitation by means of stoppers of the end
positions of tillers and quadrants, see Section 3.
In the case of hydraulic steering gears without an end
position limitation of the tiller and similar compo-
nents, an end position limiting device shall be fitted
within the rudder actuator.
3.7 Locking equipment
Steering gear systems are to be equipped with a lock-
ing system effective in all rudder positions, see Sec-
tion 3.
Where hydraulic plant is fitted with shutoffs directly
at the cylinders or rotary vane casings, special locking
equipment may be dispensed with.
For steering gears with cylinder units which may be
independently operated these shut-off devices do not
have to be fitted directly on the cylinders.
3.8 Overload protection
3.8.1 Power-operated steering gear systems are to
be equipped with overload protection (slip coupling,
relief valves) to ensure that the driving torque is lim-
ited to the maximum permissible value. The overload
protection device shall be secured to prevent later
adjustment by unauthorized persons. Means have to be
provided for checking the setting while in service.
The pressurized casings of hydraulic steering gears
which also fulfil the function of the locking equipment
mentioned in 3.7 are to be fitted with relief valves
unless they are so designed that the pressure generated
when the elastic-limit torque is applied to the rudder
stock cannot cause rupture, deformation or other dam-
age of the pressurized casing.
3.8.2 Relief valves have to be provided for protect-
ing any part of the hydraulic system which can be
isolated and in which pressure can be generated from
the power source or from external forces.
The relief valves shall be set to a pressure value equal
or higher than the working pressure but lower than
1,25 times working pressure, compare 3.2.1.
The minimum discharge capacity of the relief valve(s)
shall not be less than 1,1 times the total capacity of the
pumps, which can deliver through it (them).
With this setting any higher peak pressure in the sys-
tem than 1,1 times the setting pressure of the valves
has to be prohibited.
3.9 Controls
3.9.1 Control of the main and auxiliary steering
gears shall be exercised from a steering station on the
bridge. Controls have to be mutually independent and
so designed that the rudder cannot move unintention-
ally.
3.9.2 Means shall also be provided for exercising
control from the steering gear compartment. The
transmission system has to be independent of that
serving the main steering station.
3.9.3 Suitable equipment is to be installed to pro-
vide means of communication between the bridge, all
steering stations and the steering gear compartment.
3.9.4 Failures of single control components (e.g.
control system for variable displacement pump or flow
control valve) which may lead to loss of steering shall
cause an audible and visible alarm on the navigating
bridge, if loss of steering cannot be prevented by other
measures.
3.10 Rudder angle indication
3.10.1 The rudder position shall be clearly indicated
on the bridge and at all steering stations. Where the
steering gear is operated electrically or hydraulically,
the rudder angle has to be indicated by a device (rud-
der position indicator) which is actuated either by the
rudder stock itself or by parts which are rigidly con-
nected to it. In case of time-dependent control of the
main and auxiliary steering gear, the midship position
of the rudder shall be indicated on the bridge by some
additional means (signal lamp or similar). In general,
this indicator is still to be fitted even if the second
control system is a manually operated hydraulic sys-
tem.
See also Sections 11a 11 l.
3.10.2 The actual rudder position shall also be indi-
cated at the steering gear itself.
It is recommended that an additional rudder angle
indicator is fitted at the main engine control station.
Chapter 8
Page 9c16
Section 9c Propulsion System I - Part 1
GL 2007


D
3.11 Piping
3.11.1 The pipes of hydraulic steering gear systems
are to be installed in such a way as to ensure maxi-
mum protection while remaining readily accessible.
Pipes are to be installed at a sufficient distance from
the vessel's shell. As far as possible, pipes should not
pass through cargo spaces.
Connections to other hydraulic systems are not permit-
ted.
3.11.2 For the design and dimensions of pipes,
valves, fittings, pressure vessels etc., see Section 9d.
3.12 Oil level indicators, filters
3.12.1 Tanks within the hydraulic system are to be
equipped with oil level indicators.
3.12.2 The lowest permissible oil level is to be
monitored. Audible and visual alarms shall be given
on the navigating bridge and in the machinery space.
The alarm on the navigating bridge shall be individual
alarm.
3.12.3 Filters for cleaning the operating fluid are to
be located in the piping system.
3.13 Storage tank
In power-operated steering gear systems, an additional
permanently installed storage tank is to be fitted which
has a capacity sufficient to refill at least one of the
control systems including the service tank. This stor-
age tank is to be permanently connected by pipes to
the control systems so that the latter can be refilled
from a position inside the steering gear compartment.
3.14 Arrangement
Steering gears are to be installed in a way to be acces-
sible at any time and to be easily maintainable.
3.15 Electrical equipment
For the electrical part of steering gear systems, see
Section 11g, A.
4. Power of steering gears
The power of the steering gear is governed by the
requirements set out in 3.2 and 3.3. For the determina-
tion of the necessary power the frictional losses in the
rudder stock bearings and in the steering gear itself are
to be considered.
5. Design of transmission components
For the design of the transmission components
Chapter 2 Machinery Installations, Section 14, A.4.2
applies.
6. Tests in the manufacturers works
For the tests in the manufacturers works see Chapter
2 Machinery Installations, Section 14, A.5.
7. Shipboard trials
The operational efficiency of the steering gear is to be
proved during the sea trials. For this purpose, the Z
manoeuvre corresponding to 3.2.1 and 3.3.1 is to be
executed as a minimum requirement.
E. Machinery for Fishing Vessels with Ice
Classes
1. Scope
The machinery of fishing vessels strengthened for
navigation in ice is designated after the Character of
Classification +MC by the additional Notations E, E1,
E2, E3 or E4, provided the requirements defined
herein and the relevant structural requirements set out
in Section 3 are satisfied. The reinforcements neces-
sary for the Class Notation E may also be applied to
the machinery alone.
2. Minimum required propulsion power
The installed propulsion power has to be equal or
greater than the minimum required propulsion power
for the corresponding ice class as defined in Chapter 1
Hull Structures, Section 15.
The rated output of the main engines in accordance
with Section 9b, A.3. shall be such that they are able
to supply in continuous service the propulsion power
necessary for the ice class concerned.
3. Necessary reinforcements
Depending on the actual ice class, reinforcements
have to be provided for
propeller, intermediate and thrust shafts
coupling bolts, shrink joints
propellers
gears
flexible couplings.
The relevant requirements are defined in Chapter 2
Machinery Installations, Section 13, C.
F. Torsional Vibrations
1. Scope
For the purposes of these requirements, torsional vi-
bration stresses are additional loads due to torsional
vibrations. They result from the alternating torque
which is superimposed on the main torque.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 9c Propulsion System Chapter 8
Page 9c17


F
2. Prohibited range of operation
2.1 Operating ranges which, because of the mag-
nitude of the torsional vibration stresses for shaftings
and torsional torques for elastic couplings and gears,
may only be passed through, are to be indicated as
prohibited ranges of operation by red marks on the
tachometer or in some other suitable manner at the
operating station. In normal operation the speed range
0,8 is to be kept free of prohibited ranges of opera-
tion, where is the speed ratio actual speed to nomi-
nal speed.
In specifying prohibited ranges of operation it is im-
portant to ensure that the navigating and manoeuvring
functions are not severely restricted.
2.2 Measures necessary to avoid overloading of
the propulsion plant under misfiring conditions are to
be displayed on instruction plates to be affixed to all
engine control stations.
3. Further details
The calculations and the permissible torsional
stresses/torques, as well as relevant requirements for
measurements are defined in Chapter 2 Machinery
Installations, Section 16.
For fishing vessels with a length L < 24 m measure-
ments of torsional vibrations are in general not re-
quired.
Chapter 8
Page 9c18
Section 9c Propulsion System I - Part 1
GL 2007


F
Section 9d

Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps
A. General
1. Scope
1.1 For fishing vessels with a length L 45 m the
GL Rules Chapter 2 Machinery Installations, Sec-
tion 11 are to be applied. For fishing vessels with a
length 12 m L < 45 m, the requirements defined in
the following have to be applied.
1.2 The requirements of B. to P. apply to pipes
and piping systems, including valves, fittings and
pumps, which are necessary for the operation of the
main propulsion plant together with its auxiliaries and
equipment. They also apply to piping systems used in
the operation of the vessel whose failure could directly
or indirectly impair the safety of vessel or catch, and
to piping systems which are dealt with in other parts
of the Rules.
1.3 The requirements of Q. apply to the storage
of liquid fuels, lubricating and hydraulic oils as well
as to oil residues.
1.4 For systems and equipment not covered by
these Rules, please refer to Chapter 2 Machinery
Installations, Section 10 and Section 11.
1.5 Ventilation systems are subject to Chapter 21
- Ventilation.
1.6 Gas welding equipment is subject to the GL
Rules VI Additional Rules and Guidelines, Part 3
Machinery Installations, Chapter 5 Guidelines for
the Design, Equipment and Testing of Gas Welding
Installations on Seagoing Ships.
2. Documents for approval
2.1 The following drawings/documents are to be
submitted for approval, at least in triplicate:
2.1.1 Engine room arrangement plan.
2.1.2 Ventilation system drawings for machinery
spaces and cargo holds, stating volumes of air, coam-
ing heights, type of mechanical ventilators as well as
arrangement and operating devices of fire/weathertight
closures.
2.1.3 Tank plan including particulars regarding
arrangement, medium and volume of tanks as well as
information about the maximum height of the over-
flow level.
2.1.4 Diagrammatic plans of the following piping
systems including all the details necessary for ap-
proval (e.g. lists of valves, fittings and pipes):
fuel systems (bunkering, transfer and supply
systems)
seawater / fresh water cooling systems
lubricating oil systems
starting air, control air and working air systems
exhaust gas systems
bilge systems
equipment for the treatment and storage of bilge
water and fuel oil residues
air, overflow and sounding pipes including de-
tails of filling pipe cross sections
sanitary water piping (fresh water, drinking
water, seawater & sewage)
2.1.5 For remotely controlled valves; diagrammatic
piping plans and the arrangement of piping and con-
trol stands in the vessel, including power units, control
stands, pressure vessels and electrical circuit dia-
grams.
3. Pipe classes
For the testing of pipes, selection of joints, welding
and heat treatment, pipes are subdivided into three
classes as indicated in Table 9d.1.
B. Materials and Testing
1. General
Materials shall be suitable for the proposed application
and comply with GL Rules II Materials and Weld-
ing, Part 1 Metallic Materials.
In case of especially corrosive media, GL may impose
special requirements on the materials used. For welds
see GL Rules II Materials and Welding, Part 3
Welding.
2. Materials
Components intended to be used in pipe class I and II
are to be manufactured by GL approved manufactur-
ers.
2.1 Pipes, valves and fittings of steel
Pipes belonging to Classes I and II shall be either
seamless drawn or fabricated by a welding procedure
approved by GL. In general, carbon and carbon-
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 9d Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps Chapter 8
Page 9d1

B
Table 9d.1 Classification of pipes into classes
Medium/type of pipeline
Design pressure PR [bar]
Design temperature t [C]
Pipe class I II III
Air, gas
Non-flammable hydraulic fluid
Boiler feedwater, condensate
Seawater and fresh water for cooling
Brine in refrigerating plant
PR > 40
or
t > 300
PR 40
and
t 300
PR 16
and
t 200
Liquid fuels, lubricating oil, flammable hydraulic fluid
PR > 16
or
t > 150
PR 16
and
t 150
PR 7
and
t 60
Refrigerants all
Open-ended pipelines (without shutoff), e.g. drains, venting pipes,
overflow lines and boiler blowdown lines


manganese steel pipes, valves and fittings are not to be
used for temperatures above 400 C. However, they
may be used for higher temperatures provided that
their metallurgical behaviour and their strength prop-
erty after 100 000 h of operation are in accordance
with national or international regulations or standards
and if such values are guaranteed by the steel manu-
facturer. Otherwise, alloy steels in accordance with
GL Rules II Materials and Welding, Part 1 Metal-
lic Materials are to be used.
2.2 Pipes, valves and fittings of copper and
copper alloys
Pipes of copper and copper alloys shall be of seamless
drawn material or fabricated according to a method
approved by GL. Copper pipes for Classes I and II
must be seamless.
In general, copper and copper alloy pipe lines shall not
be used for media having temperatures above the
following limits:
copper and aluminium brass 200 C
copper nickel alloys 300 C
high-temperature bronze 260 C
2.3 Pipes, valves and fittings of nodular fer-
ritic cast iron
Pipes, valves and fittings of nodular ferritic cast iron
according to the GL Rules II Materials and Welding,
Part 1 Metallic Materials may be accepted for bilge
and ballast pipes within double-bottom tanks and for
other purposes approved by GL.
In special cases (applications corresponding in princi-
ple to classes II and III) and subject to GL special
approval, valves and fittings made of ferritic nodular
cast iron may be accepted for temperatures up to
350 C. Nodular ferritic cast iron for pipes, valves and
fittings fitted on the vessel's side have to comply with
GL Rules II Materials and Welding, Part 1 Metal-
lic Materials.
2.4 Pipes, valves and fittings of lamellar-
graphite cast iron (grey cast iron)
Pipes, valves and fittings of grey cast iron may be
accepted by GL for Class III.
This applies also to the hose connections of fuel and
lubricating oil filling lines.
The use of grey cast iron is not allowed:
for pipes, valves and fittings for media having
temperatures above 220 C and for pipelines
subject to water hammer, severe stresses or vi-
brations
for sea valves and pipes fitted on the vessel sides
and for valves fitted on the collision bulkhead
for valves on fuel and oil tanks subject to static
head
The use of grey cast iron in cases other than those
stated is subject to GL approval.
2.5 Plastic pipes
2.5.1 Plastic pipes may be used after type approval
by GL.
1
The use of such systems is restricted to pipe
class III only.
2.5.2 Pipes, connecting pieces, valves and fittings
made of plastic materials are to be subjected to a con-
tinuous GL-approved quality control by the manufac-
turer.
2.5.3 Pipe penetrations through watertight bulk-
heads and decks as well as through fire divisions are
to be approved by GL. Dependent on application and
installation location additional flame tests may be
required.

1
See IMO Resolution A.753 (18): Guidelines for the Applica-
tion of Plastic Pipes on Ships.
Chapter 8
Page 9d2
Section 9d Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps I - Part 1
GL 2007


B
2.5.4 Plastic pipes are to be continuously and per-
manently marked with the following particulars:
manufacturer's marking
standard specification number
outside diameter and wall thickness of pipe
year of manufacture
2.5.5 Valves and connecting pieces made of plastic
shall, as a minimum requirement, be marked with the
manufacturer's marking and the outside diameter of
the pipe.
2.6 Aluminium and aluminium alloys
Aluminium and aluminium alloys shall comply with
GL Rules II Materials and Welding, Part 1 Metal-
lic Materials and may in individual cases, with the
agreement of GL, be used for temperatures up to
200 C. They are not acceptable for use in fire extin-
guishing lines.
2.7 Application of materials
For the pipe classes mentioned in A.3. materials shall
be applied according to Table 9d.2
Table 9d.2 Approved materials
Pipe class
Material or application
I II III
Pipes
Steel pipes for high temperatures
above 300 C,
pipes made of steel with high/ low
temperature toughness at tempera-
tures below 10 C,
stainless steel pipes for chemicals
Pipes for
general
applications
Steel not subject to any special
quality specification, weldability in
accordance with Rules for Welding
Forgings,
plates,
flanges,
Steel suitable for the corresponding service and processing conditions,
high temperature steel for temperatures above 300 C,
steel with high/low-temperature toughness for temperatures below 10 C
S
t
e
e
l
s

Bolts,
nuts
Bolts for general machinery con-
structions,
high-temperature steel for tempera-
tures above 300 C,
steel with high/low temperature
toughness for temperatures below
10 C
Bolts for general machine construction
Cast steel
High-temperature cast steel for
temperatures above 300 C,
cast steel with high/low tempera-
ture toughness at temperatures
below 10 C,
stainless castings for aggressive
media
Cast steel for general applications
Nodular cast iron Only ferritic grades, elongation A
5
at least 15 %
C
a
s
t
i
n
g
s

(
v
a
l
v
e
s
,

f
i
t
t
i
n
g
s
,

p
i
p
e
s
)

Cast iron with lamel-
lar graphite

At least GG-20 up to 220 C, grey
cast iron is not permitted for valves
and fittings on ship's side, on the
collision bulkhead and on fuel and
oil tanks
Copper,
copper alloys

For seawater and alkaline water only corrosion resis-
tant copper and copper alloys
N
o
n
f
e
r
r
o
u
s

m
e
t
a
l
s

(
v
a
l
v
e
s
,

f
i
t
t
i
n
g
s
,

i
)
Aluminium, alumin-
ium alloys

Only with the agreement of GL up to 200 C,
not permitted in fire extinguishing systems
N
o
n
-
m
e
t
a
l
l
i
c

m
a
t
e
r
i
a
l
s

Plastics
On special approval
(see 2.5)


I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 9d Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps Chapter 8
Page 9d3


B
Table 9d.3 Approved material and types of material Certificates
Type Certificate
+

Type of
component
Approved materials
Design
temperature
Pipe
class
Nominal diameter
DN
A B C
I
> 50
50






II
> 50
50






Pipes
1
,
Pipe elbows,
Fittings
Steel,
Copper,
Copper alloys,
Aluminium
Aluminium alloys
Plastics

III All
Steel,
Cast steel,
Nodular cast iron
> 300 C
Copper,
Copper alloys
> 225 C
I, II
DN > 100
DN 100






PB DN > 2500
or DN > 250

Valves
1
,
Flanges,
Steel,
Cast steel,
Nodular cast iron
300 C I, II
PB DN 2500
and DN 250


Steel,
Cast steel,
Nodular cast iron,
Grey cast iron
III All

Copper,
Copper alloys
225 C PB DN > 1500

Aluminium,
Aluminium alloys
200 C
I, II
PB DN 1500
Plastics
Acc. to Type
Approval
Certificate
III All
I, II
Semi-finished
products,
Screws and
other compo-
nents
According to Table 9d.2
III
1 Casings of valves and pipes fitted on vessels side and bottom and bodies of valves fitted on collision bulkhead are to be included in pipe
class II.
+
Test Certificates are to be issued in accordance with GL Rules II Materials and Welding, Part 1 Metallic Materials, Chapter 1
Principles and Test Procedures, Section 1, H. with the following abbreviations:
A: GL Material Certificate, B: Manufacturer Inspection Certificate, C: Manufacturer Test Report


Chapter 8
Page 9d4
Section 9d Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps I - Part 1
GL 2007


B
3. Testing of materials
3.1 For piping systems belonging to class I and
II, tests in accordance with GL Rules II Materials
and Welding, Part 1 Metallic Materials and under
GL supervision are to be carried out in accordance
with Table 9d.3 for:
pipes, bends and fittings
valve bodies and flanges
3.2 Welded joints in pipelines of classes I and II
are to be tested in accordance with GL Rules II Ma-
terials and Welding, Part 3 Welding.
4. Hydraulic tests on pipes
4.1 Definitions
4.1.1 Maximum allowable working pressure PB
[bar], Formula symbol: p
e,zul

This is the maximum allowable internal or external
working pressure for a component or piping system
with regard to the materials used, piping design re-
quirements, the working temperature and undisturbed
operation.
4.1.2 Nominal pressure, PN [bar]
This is the term applied to a selected pressure tem-
perature relation used for the standardization of struc
tural components. In general, the numerical value of
the nominal pressure for a standardized component
made of the material specified in the standard will
correspond to the maximum allowable working pres-
sure PB at 20 C.
4.1.3 Test pressure, PP [bar], Formula symbol:
p
p

This is the pressure to which components or piping
systems are subjected for testing purposes.

4.1.4 Design pressure, PR [bar], Formula sym-
bol: p
c

This is the maximum allowable working pressure PB
for which a component or piping system is designed
with regard to its mechanical characteristics. In gen-
eral, the design pressure is the maximum allowable
working pressure at which the safety equipment will
interfere (e.g. activation of safety valves, opening of
return lines of pumps, operating of overpressure safety
arrangements, opening of relief valves) or at which the
pumps will operate against closed valves.
The design pressure for fuel pipes shall be chosen
according to Table 9d.4.
Table 9d.4 Design pressure for fuel pipes
Max. working
temperature
Max. working
pressure
T 60 C T > 60 C
PB 7 bar
3 bar or max.
working pres-
sure, whichever
is greater
3 bar or max.
working pres-
sure, whichever
is greater
PB > 7 bar
max. working
pressure
14 bar or max.
working pres-
sure, whichever
is greater

4.2 Pressure test prior to installation on board
4.2.1 All Class I and II pipes as well as steam lines,
feed water pressure pipes, compressed air and fuel
lines having a design pressure PR greater than 3,5 bar
together with their integral fittings, connecting pieces,
branches and bends, after completion of manufacture
but before insulation and coating, if this is provided,
shall be subjected to a hydraulic pressure test in the
presence of the Surveyor at the following value of
pressure:
p
p
= 1,5 p
c
[bar] p
c
= design pressure
4.2.2 Where for technical reasons it is not possible
to carry out complete hydraulic pressure tests on all
sections of piping before assembly on board, propos-
als are to be submitted to GL for approval for testing
pipe connections on board, particularly in respect of
welding seams.
4.2.3 Where the hydraulic pressure test of piping is
carried out on board, these tests may be conducted in
conjunction with the tests required under 4.3.
4.2.4 Pressure testing of pipes with less than DN 15
may be omitted at GL's discretion depending on the
application.
4.3 Test after installation on board
4.3.1 After assembly on board, all pipelines cov-
ered by these requirements are to be subjected to a
tightness test in the presence of a GL Surveyor.
In general, all pipe systems are to be tested for leakage
under operational conditions. If necessary, special
techniques other than hydraulic pressure tests are to be
applied.
4.3.2 Heating coils in tanks and pipe lines for fuels
are to be tested to not less than 1,5 PR but in no case
less than 4 bar.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 9d Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps Chapter 8
Page 9d5


B
4.4 Pressure testing of valves
The following valves are to be subjected in the manu-
facturer's works to a hydraulic pressure test in the
presence of a GL Surveyor:
valves of pipe classes I and II to 1,5 PR
valves on the vessel's side to not less than 5 bar
Shut-off devices of the above type are to be addition-
ally tested for tightness with the nominal pressure.
5. Structural tests, heat treatment and non-
destructive testing
Attention shall be given to the workmanship in con-
struction and installation of the piping systems accord-
ing to the approved data in order to obtain the maxi-
mum efficiency in service. For details concerning
structural tests and tests following heat treatments, see
GL Rules II Materials and Welding, Part 1 Metal-
lic Materials.
C. Wall Thickness of Pipe Lines
1. Minimum wall thickness
1.1 The pipe thicknesses stated in Tables 9d.5 to
9d.8 are the assigned minimum thicknesses, unless
due to stress analysis greater thicknesses are neces-
sary.
Provided that the pipes are effectively protected
against corrosion, the wall thicknesses of group M and
D stated in Table 9d.6 may, with GL's agreement, be
reduced by up to 1 mm, the amount of the reduction is
to be in relation to the wall thickness.
Table 9d.5 Minimum wall thickness groups N, M and D of steel pipes and approved locations
Location
Piping system
M
a
c
h
i
n
e
r
y

S
p
a
c
e
s

C
o
f
f
e
r
d
a
m
s

/

v
o
i
d

s
p
a
c
e
s

C
a
r
g
o

h
o
l
d
s

B
a
l
l
a
s
t

w
a
t
e
r

t
a
n
k
s

F
u
e
l

a
n
d

c
h
a
n
g
e
o
v
e
r

t
a
n
k
s

F
r
e
s
h

c
o
o
l
i
n
g

w
a
t
e
r

t
a
n
k
s

L
u
b
r
i
c
a
t
i
n
g

o
i
l

t
a
n
k
s

H
y
d
r
a
u
l
i
c

o
i
l

t
a
n
k
s

D
r
i
n
k
i
n
g

w
a
t
e
r

t
a
n
k
s

T
h
e
r
m
a
l

o
i
l

t
a
n
k
s

C
o
n
d
e
n
s
a
t
e

a
n
d

f
e
e
d
w
a
t
e
r

t
a
n
k
s

A
c
c
o
m
m
o
d
a
t
i
o
n

W
e
a
t
h
e
r

d
e
c
k

Bilge lines M D M
Ballast lines X
Seawater lines
M
M
D
M
1

Fuel lines
D
D N
X X
Lubricating lines X X
X
N
X
Thermal lines N
X
X
Steam lines
Condensate lines
M M M M

N
Feedwater lines
X
N
X
Drinking lines
X X X
N N
Fresh water lines
X
D N D
X
X
X
Compressed air lines M M N N
Hydraulic lines
N
M
M
M M
X X
N
X
X
X
X
N
1
Seawater discharge lines, see O.
X Pipelines are not to be installed.


Chapter 8
Page 9d6
Section 9d Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps I - Part 1
GL 2007


C
Table 9d.6 Minimum wall thickness for steel pipes
Group N Group M Group D
d
a
s d
a
s d
a
s d
a
s
[mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm]
10,2 1,6 from 406,4 6,3 from 21,3 3,2 from 38,0 6,3
from 13,5 1,8 from 660,0 7,1 from 38,0 3,6 from 88,9 7,1
from 20,0 2,0 from 762,0 8,0 from 51,0 4,0 from 114,3 8,0
from 48,3 2,3 from 864,0 8,8 from 76,1 4,5 from 152,4 8,8
from 70,0 2,6 from 914,0 10,0 from 177,8 5,0 from 457,2 8,8
Protective coatings, e.g. hot-dip galvanizing, can be
recognized as an effective corrosion protection pro-
vided that the preservation coating during installation
is guaranteed.
For steel pipes the wall thickness group corresponding
to the location is to be as stated in Table 9d.5.
1.2 The minimum wall thicknesses for austenitic
stainless steel pipes are given in Table 9d.7.
Table 9d.7 Minimum wall thickness for austen-
itic stainless steel pipes
Pipe outside
diameter
d
a

[mm]
Minimum wall
thickness
s
[mm]
up to 17,2
up to 48,3
up to 88,9
up to 168,3
up to 219,1
up to 273,0
up to 406,0
over 406,0
1,0
1,6
2,0
2,3
2,6
2,9
3,6
4,0


Table 9d.8 Minimum wall thickness for
copper and copper alloy pipes
Minimum wall thickness
s
[mm]
Pipe outside
diameter
d
a

[mm] Copper Copper alloys
8 10
12 20
25 44,5
50 76,1
88,9 108
133 159
193,7 267
273 457,2
(470)
508
1,0
1,2
1,5
2,0
2,5
3,0
3,5
4,0
4,0
4,5
0,8
1,0
1,2
1,5
2,0
2,5
3,0
3,5
3,5
4,0

1.3 For the minimum wall thickness of air,
sounding and overflow pipes through weather decks,
see M., Table 9d.17a.
1.4 Where the application of mechanical joints re-
sults in reduction in pipe wall thickness (bite type rings
or other structural elements) this is to be taken into
account in determining the minimum wall thickness.
1.5 For the calculation of pipe wall thicknesses
see Chapter 2 Machinery Installations, Section 11, C.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 9d Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps Chapter 8
Page 9d7


C
D. Principles for the Construction of Pipes,
Valves, Fittings and Pumps
1. General principles
1.1 Piping systems are to be constructed and
manufactured on the basis of standards generally used
in shipbuilding.
1.2 Welded connections rather than detachable
couplings shall be used for pipelines carrying toxic
media and inflammable liquefied gases.
1.3 Expansion in piping systems due to heating
and shifting of their suspensions caused by deforma-
tion of the vessel are to be compensated by bends,
compensators and flexible pipe connections. The ar-
rangement of suitable fixed points is to be taken into
consideration.
1.4 Where pipes are protected against corrosion
by special protective coatings, e.g. hot-dip galvanis-
ing, rubber lining etc., it is to be ensured that the pro-
tective coating will not be damaged during installa-
tion.
2. Pipe connections
2.1 Types of pipe connections
The following pipe connections may be used:
full penetration butt welds with/without provi-
sion to improve the quality of the root
socket welds with suitable fillet weld thickness
and in accordance with recognized standards
steel flanges may be used in accordance with the
permitted pressures and temperatures specified
in the relevant standards
mechanical joints (e.g. pipe unions, pipe cou-
plings, press fittings) of an approved type
For the use of welded pipe connections, see Table
9d.9.
Table 9d.9 Pipe connections
Types of connections Pipe class
Outside
diameter
Welded butt-joints
with special provisions
for root side
I, II, III
Welded butt-joints
without special provi-
sions for root side
II, III
III
all
Socket weld
II 60,3 mm


2.2 Flange connections
2.2.1 Dimensions of flanges and bolting shall com-
ply with recognized standards.
2.2.2 Gaskets are to be suitable for the intended
media under design pressure and temperature condi-
tions and their dimensions and construction shall be in
accordance with recognized standards.
2.2.3 Steel flanges may be used as shown in Tables
9d.13 and 9d.14 in accordance with the permitted
pressures and temperatures specified in the relevant
standards.
2.2.4 Flanges made of non-ferrous metals may be
used in accordance with the relevant standards and
within the limits laid down in the approvals. Flanges
and brazed or welded collars of copper and copper
alloys are subject to the following requirements:
a) welding neck flanges according to standard up
to 200 C or 300 C applicable to all classes of
pipes
b) loose flanges with welding collar; as for a)
c) plain brazed flanges: for pipe class III up to a
nominal pressure of 16 bar and a temperature of
120C
2.2.5 Flange connections for pipe classes I and II
with temperatures over 300 C are to be provided with
necked-down bolts.
2.3 Welded socket connections
Welded socket connections may be accepted accord-
ing to Table 9d.9. Following conditions are to be ob-
served.
The thickness of the sockets is to be in accor-
dance with C.1.1 at least equal to the thickness
of the pipe.
The clearance between the pipes and the socket
is to be as small as possible.
The use of welded socket connections in sys-
tems of pipe class II may be accepted only under
the condition that in the systems no excessive
stress, erosion and corrosion are expected.
2.4 Screwed socket connections
2.4.1 Screwed socket connections with parallel and
tapered threads shall comply with requirements of
recognized national or international standards.
2.4.2 Screwed socket connections with parallel
threads are permitted for pipes in class III with an
outside diameter 60,3 mm as well as for subordinate
systems (e.g. sanitary and hot water heating systems).
They are not permitted for systems for flammable
media.
Chapter 8
Page 9d8
Section 9d Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps I - Part 1
GL 2007


D
2.4.3 Screwed socket connections with tapered
threads are permitted for the following:
class I, outside diameter not more than 33,7 mm
class II and class III, outside diameter not more
than 60,3 mm
Screwed socket connections with tapered threads are
not permitted for piping systems conveying toxic or
flammable media or services where fatigue, severe
erosion or crevice corrosion is expected to occur.
2.5 Brazed connections may be used after special
approval by GL.
2.6 Mechanical joints
2.6.1 Type approved mechanical joints
2
may be
used as shown in Tables 9d.10 to 9d.12.
2.6.2 Mechanical joints in bilge and seawater sys-
tems within machinery spaces or spaces of high fire
risk, shall be flame resistant.
2.6.3 Mechanical joints are not to be used in piping
sections directly connected to sea openings or tanks
containing flammable liquids.
2.6.4 The use of slip-on joints is not permitted in:
bilge lines inside ballast and fuel tanks
seawater and ballast lines including air and
overflow pipes inside cargo holds and fuel tanks
fuel and oil lines including air and overflow
pipes inside machinery spaces, cargo holds and
ballast tanks
non water filled pressure water spraying systems
(dry pipe systems)
Slip-on joints inside tanks may be permitted only if
the pipes contain the same medium as the tanks.
Unrestrained slip on joints may be used only where
required for compensation of lateral pipe movement.
3. Layout, marking and installation
3.1 Piping systems shall be adequately identified
according to their purpose. Valves are to be perma-
nently and clearly marked.
3.2 Pipe penetrations leading through bulk-
heads/decks and tank walls have to be water and oil
tight. Bolts through bulkheads are not permitted.
Holes for fastening screws shall not be drilled in the
tank walls.

2
See also "List of Type Tested Appliances and Equipment".
3.3 Watertight bulkhead penetrations of supply
and operating installations, such as piping, scuppers or
electric cables, require to be approved by type test
3

that for a period of 30 minutes leakages will not occur
at the penetrations. The pressure assumed is to at least
correspond to the pressure head prevailing at the in-
tended points of installation of the penetrations.
Penetrations welded into bulkheads watertight are not
subject to type testing.
3.4 Piping close to electrical switchboards shall
be so installed or protected that a leakage cannot dam-
age the electrical installation.
3.5 Piping systems are to be so arranged that they
can be completely emptied, drained and vented. Pip-
ing systems in which the accumulation of liquids dur-
ing operation could cause damage shall be equipped
with special drain arrangements.
3.6 Pipe lines laid through ballast tanks, which
are coated in accordance with Chapter 1 Hull Struc-
tures, Section 35, F. are to be either effectively pro-
tected against corrosion or they are to be of low sus-
ceptibility to corrosion.
The method of corrosion protection of tanks and pipes
shall be compatible.
3.7 The wall thickness of pipes between vessel's
side and first shut-off device is to be in accordance
with Table 9d.17 b, column B. Pipes are to be con-
nected by welding or flanges.
4. Shut-off devices
4.1 Shut-off devices shall comply with a recog-
nized standard. Valves with screwed-on covers are to
be secured to prevent unintentional loosening of the
cover.
4.2 Hand-operated shut-off devices are to be
closed by turning in the clockwise direction.
4.3 Valves must be clearly marked to show
whether they are in the open or closed position.
4.4 Change-over devices in piping systems in
which a possible intermediate position of the device
could be dangerous in service shall not be used.
4.5 Valves are to be permanently marked. The
marking shall comprise at least the following details:
material of valve body
nominal diameter
nominal pressure

3
VI Additional Rules and Guidelines, Part 7 Guidelines for
the Performance of Type Approvals, Chapter 4 Test Re-
quirements for Sealing Systems of Bulkhead and Deck Pene-
trations.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 9d Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps Chapter 8
Page 9d9


D
Table 9d.10 Examples of mechanical joints
Pipe Unions
Welded and
brazed type

Compression Couplings
Swage type

Press type

Bite type

Flared type

Slip-on Joints
Grip type

Machine grooved
type



Chapter 8
Page 9d10
Section 9d Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps I - Part 1
GL 2007


D
Table 9d.10 Examples of mechanical joints (continued)
Slip type


Table 9d.11 Application of mechanical joints
Kind of connections
Systems Pipe Unions Compression couplings
5
Slip-on joints
Flammable fluids (Flash point > 60 C)
Fuel oil + + +
2,

3

Lubricating oil + + +
2,

3

Hydraulic oil + + +
2,

3

Sea water
Bilge + + +
1

Fire main and water spray + + +
3

Foam + + +
3

Sprinkler + + +
3

Cooling water + + +
1

Non-essential + + +
Fresh water
Cooling water system + + +
1

Non-essential system + + +
Sanitary / Drain / Scuppers
Deck drains (internal) + + +
4

Sanitary drains + + +
Scuppers and discharge + +
Sounding / Vent
Water tanks / Dry spaces + + +
Oil tanks (F.p. > 60 C) + + +
2,

3

Miscellaneous
Starting-/ control air + +
Service air (non-essential) + + +
Brine + + +
CO
2
system
1
+ +
Abbreviations:
+ Application is allowed
Application is not allowed
Footnotes:
1
Inside machinery spaces of category A only approved fire resistant types
2
Not inside machinery spaces of category A or accommodation spaces. May be accepted in other
machinery spaces provided the joints are located in easily visible and accessible positions.
3
Approved fire resistant types
4
Above freeboard deck only
5
If compression couplings include any components which readily deteriorate in case of fire, they are
to be of approved fire resistant type as required for Slip-on joints.

I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 9d Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps Chapter 8
Page 9d11


D
Table 9d.12 Application of mechanical joints depending upon the class of piping
Types of joints Classes of piping systems
I II III
Pipe Unions
Welded and brazed type
+
(d
a
60,3 mm)
+
(d
a
60,3 mm)
+

Compression Couplings
Swage type + + +
Press type +
Bite type
Flared type
+
(d
a
60,3 mm)
+
(d
a
60,3 mm)
+

Slip-on Joints
Machine grooved type + + +
Grip type + +
Slip type + +
Abbreviations:
+ Application is allowed
Application is not allowed


Table 9d.13 Use of flange types
Toxic, corrosive and
combustible media,
liquefied gases (LG)
Steam, thermal oils
Lubricating
oil, fuel oil
Other media
Pipe
class
PR [bar]
Type of
flange
Temperature
[C]
Type of
flange
Type of
flange
Temperature
[C]
Type of
flange
I
> 10
10
A
A, B
1

> 400
400
A
A, B
1

A, B > 400
400
A
A, B
II
A, B, C > 250
250
A, B, C
A, B, C, D, E
A, B, C, E
2
> 250
250
A, B, C
A, B, C, D, E
III A, B, C, D, E A, B, C, E A, B, C, D, E, F
3
1
Type B only for outside diameter d
a
< 150 mm
2
Type E only for t < 150 C and PR < 16 bar
3
Type F only for water pipes and open-ended lines

5. Valves on the shell plating
5.1 For the mounting of valves on the shell plat-
ing, see Chapter 1 Hull Structures, Section 6, G.
5.2 Valves on the shell plating shall be easily
accessible. Seawater inlet and outlet valves have to be
capable of being operated from above the floor plates.
Cocks on the shell plating shall be so arranged that the
handle can only be removed when the cock is closed.
5.3 Valves with only one flange may be used on
the shell plating and on the sea chests only after spe-
cial approval.
5.4 On vessels with > 500 GT, in periodically
unattended machinery spaces, the controls of sea inlet
discharge valves shall be sited so as to allow to reach
and operate sea inlet and discharge valves in case of
influx of water within 10
6
minutes after triggering of
the bilge alarm.
Non return discharge valves need not to be considered.
Chapter 8
Page 9d12
Section 9d Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps I - Part 1
GL 2007


D
6. Pumps
6.1 For materials and construction requirements
VI Additional Rules and Guidelines, Part 6
Pumps, Chapter 1 Guidelines for Design, Construc-
tion and Testing of Pumps of GL are to be applied.
6.2 For the pumps listed below, a performance
test is to be carried out in the manufacturer's works
under GL supervision:
bilge pumps / bilge ejectors
cooling water pumps (seawater / freshwater)
fire pumps
lubricating oil pumps
fuel oil pumps
brine pumps / refrigerant pumps
7. Protection of piping systems against over-
pressure
The following piping systems are to be fitted with
safety valves to avoid excessive overpressures:
piping systems and valves in which liquids can
be enclosed and heated
piping systems which may be exposed to pres-
sures in excess of the design pressure
Safety valves shall be capable of discharging the me-
dium at a maximum pressure increase of 10 % of the
allowable working pressure. Safety valves are to be
fitted on the low pressure side of reducing valves.
E. Oil Fuel Systems
1. Bunker lines
The bunkering of oil fuels is to be effected by means
of permanently installed lines, from the open deck.
Bunker stations are to be so arranged that the bunker-
ing can be performed from both sides of the vessel
without danger. The bunkering lines are to be fitted
with blind flanges on deck.
2. Tank filling and suction lines
2.1 Filling and suction lines from storage and
settling tanks situated above the double bottom and
from which in case of their damage fuel oil may leak,
are to be fitted directly on the tanks with shut-off
devices capable of being closed from a safe position
outside the space concerned.
In the case of deep tanks situated in shaft or pipe tunnel
or similar spaces, shut-off devices are to be fitted on the
tanks. The control in the event of fire may be effected
by means of an additional shut-off device in the pipe
outside the tunnel or similar space. If such additional
shut-off device is fitted in the machinery space it shall
be operated from a position outside this space.
2.2 Shut-off devices on fuel oil tanks having a
capacity of less than 500 l need not be provided with
remote control.
2.3 Filling lines are to extend to the bottom of the
tank. Short filling lines directed to the side of the tank
may be admissible. Storage tank suction lines may
also be used as filling lines.

2.4 Where filling lines are led through the tank
top and end below the maximum oil level in the tank,
a non-return valve at the tank top is to be arranged.
2.5 The inlet connections of suction lines are to
be arranged far enough from the drains in the tank so
that water and impurities which have settled out will
not enter the suctions.
3. Pipe layout
3.1 Fuel lines may not pass through tanks con-
taining feed water, drinking water or lubricating oil.
3.2 Fuel lines which pass through tanks with
other media, are to have an increased wall thickness
according to Table 9d.5.
3.3 Fuel lines may not be laid directly above or in
the vicinity of boilers, turbines or equipment with high
surface temperatures (over 220 C) or in way of other
sources of ignition.
3.4 Flanged and screwed socket connections in
fuel oil lines shall be screened or otherwise suitably
protected to avoid, as far as practicable, oil spray or
oil leakages onto hot surfaces, into machinery air
intakes, or other sources of ignition.
The number of detachable pipe connections is to be
limited. In general, flanged connections according to
recognized standards shall be used.
3.4.1 Flanged and screwed socket connections in
fuel oil lines which lay directly above hot surfaces or
other sources of ignition are to be screened and pro-
vided with drainage arrangements.
3.4.2 Flanged and screwed socket connections in
fuel oil lines with a maximum allowable working
pressure of more than 0,18 N/mm
2
and within about
3 m from hot surfaces or other sources of ignition and
direct sight of line must be screened. Drainage ar-
rangements need not to be provided.
3.4.3 Flanged and screwed socket connections in
fuel oil lines with a maximum allowable working
pressure of less than 0,18 N/mm
2
and within about
3 m from hot surfaces or other sources of ignition
shall be assessed individually taking into account
working pressure, type of coupling and possibility of
failure.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 9d Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps Chapter 8
Page 9d13


E
Table 9d.14 Types of flange connections
Type A
Type B
Type C
Type D Type E Type F
Welding neck flange Loose flange with welding neck
Slip-on welding flange - fully welded
Slip-on welding flange
Socket screwed flange
- conical threads -
Plain flange
- welded on both sides -
Lap joint flange
- on flanged pipe -

Chapter 8
Page 9d14
Section 9d Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps I - Part 1
GL 2007


E
3.4.4 Flanged and screwed socket connections in
fuel oil lines with a maximum allowable working
pressure of more than 1,6 N/mm
2
need normally to be
screened.
3.4.5 Pipes running below engine room floor need
normally not to be screened.
3.5 Shut-off valves in fuel lines in the machinery
spaces are to be operable from above the floor plates.
3.6 Glass and plastic components are not permit-
ted in fuel systems.
Sight glasses made of glass located in vertical over-
flow pipes may be permitted.
3.7 Fuel pumps shall be capable of being isolated
from the piping system by shut-off valves.
4. Fuel transfer, feed and booster pumps
4.1 Fuel transfer, feed and booster pumps shall be
designed for the operating temperature of the medium
pumped.
4.2 A fuel transfer pump is to be provided. Other
service pumps may be used as a stand-by pump pro-
vided they are suitable for this purpose.
4.3 At least two means of oil fuel transfer are to
be provided for filling the service tanks.
4.4 Where a feed or booster pump is required to
supply fuel to main or auxiliary engines, stand-by
pumps shall be provided. Where pumps are attached to
the engines, stand-by pumps may be dispensed with
for auxiliary engines.
5. Plants with more than one main engine
For plants with more than one engine, complete spare
feed or booster pumps stored on board may be ac-
cepted instead of stand-by pumps provided that the
feed or booster pumps are so arranged that they can be
replaced with the means available on board.
6. Filters
6.1 Fuel oil filters are to be fitted in the delivery
line of the fuel pumps.
6.2 For ships with Class Notation AUT the filter
equipment shall satisfy the requirements of Chapter 4
Automation, Section 2.
6.3 Mesh size and filter capacity are to be in
accordance with the requirements of the manufacturer
of the engine.
6.4 Uninterrupted supply of filtered fuel has to be
ensured during cleaning of the filtering equipment. In
case of automatic back-flushing filters it is to be en-
sured that a failure of the automatic back-flushing will
not lead to a total loss of filtration.
6.5 Back-flushing intervals of automatic back-
flushing filters provided for intermittent back-flushing
are to be monitored.
6.6 Fuel oil filters are to be fitted with differential
pressure monitoring. On engines provided for opera-
tion with gas oil only, differential pressure monitoring
may be dispensed with.
6.7 Engines for the exclusive operation of emer-
gency generators and emergency fire pumps may be
fitted with simplex filters.
6.8 Fuel transfer units are to be fitted with a sim-
plex filter on the suction side.
7. Purifiers
7.1 Manufacturers of purifiers for cleaning fuel
and lubricating oil have to be approved by GL.
7.2 Where a fuel purifier may exceptionally be
used to purify lubricating oil the purifier supply and
discharge lines are to be fitted with a change-over
arrangement which prevents the possibility of fuel and
lubricating oils being mixed.
Suitable equipment is also to be provided to prevent
such mixing occurring over control and compression
lines.
7.3 The sludge tanks of purifiers are to be fitted
with a level alarm which ensures that the level in the
sludge tank cannot interfere with the operation of the
purifier.
8. Service tanks and heavy fuel oils
Where service tanks or heavy fuel oil are used, the
requirements of Chapter 2 Machinery Installations,
Section 11, G. are to be applied as well as the require-
ments of Q.2.
F. Lubricating Oil System
1. General requirements
1.1 Lubricating oil systems are to be so con-
structed to ensure reliable lubrication over the whole
range of speed and during run-down of the engines
and to ensure adequate heat transfer.
1.2 Priming pumps
Where necessary, priming pumps are to be provided
for supplying lubricating oil to the engines.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 9d Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps Chapter 8
Page 9d15


F
1.3 Emergency lubrication
A suitable emergency lubricating oil supply (e.g. grav-
ity tank) is to be arranged for machinery which may
be damaged in case of interruption of lubricating oil
supply.
1.4 Lubricating oil treatment
Equipment necessary for adequate treatment of lubri-
cating oil such as purifiers, automatic back-flushing
filters, filters and free-jet centrifuges are to be pro-
vided.
2. Lubricating oil systems
2.1 Lubricating oil circulating tanks and grav-
ity tanks
2.1.1 For the capacity and location of these tanks
see Q.3.
2.1.2 The suction connections of lubricating oil
pumps are to be located as far as possible from drain
pipes.
2.1.3 Gravity tanks are to be fitted with an over-
flow pipe which leads to the circulating tank. Ar-
rangements are to be made for observing the flow of
excess oil in the overflow pipe.
2.2 Filling and suction lines
2.2.1 Filling and suction lines of lubricating oil
tanks with a capacity of 500 l and more located above
the double bottom and from which in case of their
damage lubricating oil may leak, are to be fitted di-
rectly on the tanks with shut-off devices according to
E.2.1.
The remote operation of shut-off valves according to
E.2.1 may be dispensed with for valves which are kept
closed during normal operation
2.2.2 Where lubricating oil lines are to be led in the
vicinity of hot machinery, steel pipes which shall be in
one length and which are protected where necessary
are to be used.
2.2.3 For screening arrangements of lubricating oil
pipes E.3.4 applies as appropriate.
2.3 Filters
2.3.1 Lubricating oil filters are to be fitted in the
delivery line of the lubricating oil pumps.
2.3.2 Mesh size and filter capacity are to be in
accordance with the requirements of the manufacturer
of the engine.
2.3.3 Uninterrupted supply of filtered lubricating
oil has to be ensured under cleaning conditions of the
filter equipment. In case of automatic back-flushing
filters it is to be ensured that a failure of the automatic
back-flushing will not lead to a total loss of filtration.
2.3.4 Back-flushing intervals of automatic back-
flushing filters provided for intermittent back-flushing
are to be monitored.
2.3.5 Main lubricating oil filters are to be fitted
with differential pressure monitoring. On engines
provided for operation with gas oil only, differential
pressure monitoring may be dispensed with.
2.3.6 Engines for the exclusive operation of emer-
gency generators and emergency fire pumps may be
fitted with simplex filters.
2.3.7 For protection of the lubricating oil pumps
simplex filters may be installed on the suction side of
the pumps if they have a minimum mesh size of
100 .
2.4 Oil level indicators
Machines with their own oil charge are to be provided
with a means of determining the oil level from outside
during operation. This requirement also applies to
reduction gears, thrust bearings and shaft bearings.
2.5 Purifiers
The requirements in E.7. apply as appropriate.
3. Lubricating oil pumps
3.1 Main engines
3.1.1 Main and independent stand-by pumps are to
be arranged for vessels for unrestricted service. Main
pumps driven by the main engines are to be so de-
signed that the lubricating oil supply is ensured over
the whole range of operation.
3.1.2 On vessels with more than one main engine
and with separate lubricating oil systems, complete
spare lubricating oil pumps on board may be accepted
instead of stand-by pumps, provided that the main
lubricating oil pumps are so arranged that they can be
replaced with the means available on board.
3.2 Main reduction gearing
3.2.1 Lubricating oil is to be supplied by a main
pump and an independent stand-by pump.
3.2.2 Where a reduction gear has been approved by
GL to have adequate self-lubrication at 75 % of the
torque of the propelling engine, a stand-by lubricating
oil pump for the reduction gear may be dispensed with
up to a power-speed ratio of
P / n
1
[kW/min
-1
] 3,0
n
1
= gear input revolution [min
-1
]
Chapter 8
Page 9d16
Section 9d Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps I - Part 1
GL 2007


F
3.2.3 The requirements under 3.1.2 are to be ap-
plied for multi-propeller plants and plants with more
than one engine.
3.3 Auxiliary machinery
3.3.1 Diesel generators
Where more than one diesel generator is available,
stand-by pumps are not required.
Where only one diesel generator is available a com-
plete spare pump is to be carried on board.
G. Seawater Cooling Systems
1. Sea suctions, sea chests
1.1 At least two sea chests are to be provided.
Wherever possible, the sea chests are to be arranged as
low as possible on either side of the vessel.
1.2 For service in shallow waters, it is recom-
mended that an additional high seawater intake is
provided.
1.3 It is to be ensured that the total seawater
supply for the engines can be taken from only one sea
chest.
1.4 Each sea chest is to be provided with an ef-
fective vent. The following venting arrangements will
be approved:
an air pipe of at least 32 mm ID which can be
shut off and which extends above the bulkhead
deck
adequately dimensioned ventilation slots in the
shell plating
1.5 Compressed air connections (or steam if
available) are to be provided for cleaning the sea chest
gratings. The compressed air lines are to be fitted with
shut-off valves fitted directly to the sea chests. Com-
pressed air for blowing through sea chest gratings may
exceed 2 bar only if the sea chests are constructed for
higher pressures. Alternative solutions have to be
agreed with GL.
1.6 Where a sea chest is exclusively arranged as
chest cooler the steam or compressed airlines for
clearing according to 1.5 may, with GL's agreement,
be dispensed with.
2. Special rules for vessels with ice class
2.1 For one of the sea chests specified in 1.1 the
sea inlet is to be located as near as possible to midship
and as far aft as possible. The seawater discharge line
of the entire engine plant is to be connected to the top
of the sea chest.
2.1.1 For vessels with ice class E1 to E4 the sea
chest is to be arranged as follows:
In calculating the volume of the sea chest the
following value shall be applied as a guide:
about 1 m
3
for every 750 kW of the vessel's
engine output including the output of auxiliary
engines.
The sea chest shall be of sufficient height to
allow ice to accumulate above the inlet pipe.
The free area of the strum holes shall be not less
than four times the sectional area of the seawater
inlet pipe.
2.1.2 As an alternative two smaller sea chests of a
design as specified in 2.1.1 may be arranged.
2.1.3 All discharge valves shall be so arranged that
the discharge of water at any draught will not be ob-
structed by ice.
2.2 Where necessary, a steam connection or a
heating coil is to be arranged for de-icing and thawing
the sea chests.
2.3 At least one fire pump shall have a suction
from the de-iced sea chest.
3. Sea valves
3.1 Sea valves are to be so arranged that they can
be operated from above the floor plates.
3.2 Discharge pipes for seawater cooling systems
are to be fitted with a shut-off valve of non-return type
at the shell.
4. Strainer
The suction lines of the seawater pumps are to be
fitted with strainers.
The strainers are to be so arranged that they can be
cleaned during service.
Alternatively, strainers may be arranged inside sea-
water cross-over.
5. Seawater cooling pumps
5.1 Diesel engine plants
5.1.1 Main propulsion plants are to be provided
with main and stand-by cooling water pumps.
5.1.2 The main cooling water pump may be at-
tached to the propulsion plant. It is to be ensured that
the attached pump is of sufficient capacity for the
cooling water required by main engines and auxiliary
equipment over the whole speed range of the propul-
sion plant.
The drive of the stand-by cooling water pump is to be
independent of the main engine.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 9d Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps Chapter 8
Page 9d17


G
5.1.3 Main and stand-by cooling water pumps are
each to be of sufficient capacity to meet the maximum
cooling water requirements of the plant.
5.1.4 Other suitable seawater pumps may be used
as stand-by cooling water pumps.
5.2 Plants with more than one main engine
For plants with more than one engine and with sepa-
rate cooling water systems, complete spare pumps
stored on board may be accepted instead of stand-by
pumps provided that the main seawater cooling pumps
are so arranged that they can be replaced with the
means available on board.
5.3 Cooling water supply for auxiliary engines
Where a common cooling water pump is provided to
serve more than one auxiliary engine, an independent
stand-by cooling water pump with the same capacity
is to be fitted. Independently operated cooling water
pumps of the main engine plant may be used to supply
cooling water to auxiliary engines while at sea, pro-
vided that the capacity of such pumps is sufficient to
meet the additional cooling water requirement.
If each auxiliary engine is fitted with an attached cool-
ing water pump, stand-by cooling water pumps need
not to be provided.
H. Fresh Water Cooling Systems
1. General
1.1 Fresh water cooling systems are to be so
arranged that the engines can be sufficiently cooled
under all operating conditions.
1.2 Depending on the requirements of the engine
plant, the following fresh water cooling systems are
allowed:
a single cooling circuit for the entire plant
separate cooling circuits for the main and auxil-
iary plant
several independent cooling circuits for the main
engine components which need cooling (e.g.
cylinders and fuel valves) and for the auxiliary
engines
separate cooling circuits for various temperature
ranges
1.3 The cooling circuits are to be so divided that,
should one part of the system fail, operation of the
auxiliary systems can be maintained. Change-over
arrangements are to be provided for this purpose if
necessary.
1.4 As far as possible, the temperature controls of
main and auxiliary engines as well as of different
circuits are to be independent of each other.
1.5 Where, in automated engine plants, heat
exchangers for fuel or lubricating oil are incorporated
in the cylinder cooling water circuit of main engines,
the entire cooling water system is to be monitored for
fuel and oil leakage.
1.6 Common engine cooling water systems for
main and auxiliary plants are to be fitted with shut-off
valves to enable repairs to be performed without tak-
ing the entire plant out of service.
2. Heat exchangers, coolers
2.1 The construction and equipment of heat ex-
changers and coolers are subject to the requirements
of Section 9e.
2.2 The coolers of cooling water systems, en-
gines and equipment are to be so designed to ensure
that the specified cooling water temperatures can be
maintained under all operating conditions. Cooling
water temperatures are to be adjusted to meet the re-
quirements of engines and equipment.
2.3 Heat exchangers for auxiliary equipment in
the main cooling water circuit are to be provided with
by-passes if in the event of a failure of the heat ex-
changer it is possible by these means to keep the sys-
tem in operation.
2.4 It is to be ensured that auxiliary machinery
can be maintained in operation while repairing the
main coolers. If necessary, means are to be provided
for changing over to other heat exchangers, machinery
or equipment through which a temporary heat transfer
can be achieved.
2.5 Shut-off valves are to be provided at the inlet
and outlet of all heat exchangers.
2.6 Every heat exchanger and cooler is to be
provided with a vent and a drain.
2.7 Keel coolers, box coolers
2.7.1 Arrangement and construction drawings of
keel and box coolers are to be submitted for approval.
2.7.2 Permanent vents for fresh water are to be
provided at the top of keel coolers and chest coolers.
2.7.3 Keel coolers are to be fitted with pressure
gauge connections at the fresh water inlet and outlet.
Chapter 8
Page 9d18
Section 9d Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps I - Part 1
GL 2007


H
3. Expansion tanks
3.1 Expansion tanks are to be arranged at suffi-
cient height for every cooling water circuit. Different
cooling circuits may only be connected to a common
expansion tank if they do not interfere with each other.
Care must be taken here to ensure that damage to or
faults in one system cannot affect the other system.
3.2 Expansion tanks are to be fitted with filling
connections, aeration/de-aeration devices, water level
indicators and drains.
4. Fresh water cooling pumps
4.1 Main and stand-by cooling water pumps are
to be provided for each fresh water cooling system.
4.2 Main cooling water pumps may be driven
directly by the main or auxiliary engines which they
are intended to cool provided that a sufficient supply
of cooling water is assured under all operating condi-
tions.
4.3 The drives of stand-by cooling water pumps
are to be independent of the main engines.
4.4 Stand-by cooling water pumps are to have the
same capacity as main cooling water pumps.
4.5 Main engines are to be fitted with at least one
main and one stand-by cooling water pump. Where
according to the construction of the engines more than
one water cooling circuit is necessary, a stand-by
pump is to be fitted for each main cooling water
pump.
4.6 For fresh cooling water pumps of essential
auxiliary engines the requirements for sea water cool-
ing pumps in G.5.3 may be applied.
4.7 A stand-by cooling water pump of a cooling
water system may be used as a stand-by pump for
another system provided that the necessary pipe con-
nections are arranged. The shut-off valves in these
connections are to be secured against unintended op-
eration.
4.8 Equipment providing emergency cooling
from another system can be approved if the plant and
the system are suitable for this purpose.
4.9 For plants with more than one main engine
the requirements for sea cooling water pumps in G.5.2
may be applied.
5. Temperature control
Cooling water circuits are to be provided with tem-
perature controls in accordance with the requirements.
Control devices whose failure may impair the func-
tional reliability of the engine are to be equipped for
manual operation.
6. Preheating of cooling water
Means are to be provided for preheating cooling fresh
water. Exceptions are to be approved by GL.
7. Emergency generating units
Internal combustion engines driving emergency gen-
erating units are to be fitted with independent cooling
systems. Such cooling systems are to be made proof
against freezing.
I. Compressed Air Lines
1. General
1.1 Pressure lines connected to air compressors
are to be fitted with non-return valves at the compres-
sor outlet.
1.2 For oil and water separators, see Section 9b,
M.
1.3 Starting air lines may not be used as filling
lines for air receivers.
1.4 Only type-tested hose assemblies made of
metallic materials may be used in starting air lines of
diesel engines which are permanently kept under pres-
sure.
1.5 The starting air line to each engine is to be
fitted with a non-return valve and a drain.
1.6 Tyfons are to be connected to at least two
compressed air receivers.
1.7 A safety valve is to be fitted downstream of
each pressure-reducing valve.
1.8 Pressure water tanks and other tanks con-
nected to the compressed air system are to be consid-
ered as pressure vessels and shall comply with the
requirements in Section 9e for the working pressure of
the compressed air system.
1.9 For compressed air connections for blowing
through sea chests refer to G.1.5.
1.10 Requirements for starting engines with com-
pressed air, see Section 9b, H.2.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 9d Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps Chapter 8
Page 9d19


I
2. Control air systems
2.1 Control air systems for essential consumers
are to be provided with the necessary means of air
treatment.
2.2 Pressure reducing valves in the control air
system of main engines are to be redundant.
J. Exhaust Gas Lines
1. Pipe layout
1.1 Engine exhaust gas pipes are to be installed
separately from each other, taking into account the
structural fire protection. Other designs are to be sub-
mitted for approval. The same applies to boiler ex-
haust gas pipes.
1.2 Account is to be taken of thermal expansion
when laying out and suspending the lines.
1.3 Where exhaust gas lines discharge near water
level, provisions are to be taken to prevent water from
entering the engines.
2. Silencers
Engine exhaust pipes are to be fitted with effective
silencers or other suitable means are to be provided.
Silencers are to be provided with an inspection open-
ing.
3. Water drains
Exhaust lines and silencers are to be provided with
suitable drains of adequate size.
4. Insulation
For insulation of exhaust gas lines inside machinery
spaces, see Section 8, B.3.1.
5. Engine exhaust gas lines are additionally
subject to Section 9b, G.7.
K. Bilge Systems
1. Bilge lines
1.1 Layout of bilge lines
1.1.1 Bilge lines and bilge suctions are to be so
arranged that the bilges can be completely drained
even under unfavourable trim conditions.
1.1.2 Bilge suctions are normally to be located on
both sides of the vessel. For compartments located
fore and aft in the vessel, one bilge suction may be
considered sufficient provided that it is capable of
completely draining the relevant compartment.
1.1.3 Spaces located forward of the collision bulk-
head and aft of the stern tube bulkhead and not con-
nected to the general bilge system are to be drained by
other suitable means of adequate capacity.
1.1.4 The required pipe thickness of bilge lines is
to be in accordance with Table 9d.5.
1.2 Pipes laid through tanks
1.2.1 Bilge pipes may not be led through tanks for
lubricating oil or drinking water.
1.2.2 Bilge pipes from spaces not accessible during
the voyage if running through fuel tanks located above
double bottom are to be fitted with a non-return valve
directly at the point of entry into the tank.
1.3 Bilge suctions and strums
1.3.1 Bilge suctions are to be so arranged as not to
impede the cleaning of bilges and bilge wells. They
are to be fitted with easily detachable, corrosion-
resistant strums.
1.3.2 Emergency bilge suctions are to be arranged
such that they are accessible, with free flow and at a
suitable distance from the tank top or the vessel's
bottom.
1.3.3 For the size and design of bilge wells see
Chapter 1 Hull Structures, Section 8, B.5.3.
1.3.4 Bilge alarms of main- and auxiliary machin-
ery spaces, see Section 9a, E.5. and Section 12.
1.4 Bilge valves
1.4.1 Valves in connecting pipes between the bilge
and the seawater and ballast water system, as well as
between the bilge connections of different compart-
ments, are to be so arranged that even in the event of
faulty operation or intermediate positions of the
valves, penetration of seawater through the bilge sys-
tem will be safely prevented.
1.4.2 Bilge discharge pipes are to be fitted with
shut-off valves and reverse-flow protection at the
vessel's shell.
1.4.3 Bilge valves are to be arranged so as to be
always accessible irrespective of the ballast and load-
ing condition of the vessel.
Chapter 8
Page 9d20
Section 9d Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps I - Part 1
GL 2007


K
1.5 Reverse-flow protection
1.5.1 A screw-down non-return valve or a combi-
nation of a non-return valve without positive means of
closing and a shut-off valve are recognized as reverse
flow protection.
1.6 Pipe layout
1.6.1 To prevent the ingress of ballast and seawater
into the vessel through the bilge system two means of
reverse-flow protection are to be fitted in the bilge
connections.
One of such means of protection is to be fitted in each
suction line.
1.6.2 The direct bilge suction and the emergency
suction need only have one means of reverse-flow
protection as specified in 1.5.1.
1.6.3 Where a direct seawater connection is ar-
ranged for attached bilge pumps to protect them
against running dry, the bilge suctions are also to be
fitted with two reverse flow protecting devices.
2. Calculation of pipe diameters
2.1 The calculated values according to formulae
(1) to (2) are to be rounded up to the next higher
nominal diameter.
2.2 Main and branch bilge lines
a) Main bilge pipes
( )
H
d 1, 68 L B H 25 = + + [mm] (1)
b) Branch bilge pipes
( )
z
d 2,15 B H 25 = + + [mm] (2)
d
H
= calculated inside diameter of main bilge pipe
[mm]
d
z
= calculated inside diameter of branch bilge
pipe [mm]
L = length of vessel between perpendiculars [m]
B = moulded breadth of ship [m]
H = depth of ship to the bulkhead deck [m]
= length of the watertight compartment [m]
2.3 Minimum diameter
The inside diameter of main and branch bilge pipes is
not to be less than 50 mm. For vessels under 24 m
length, the diameter may be reduced to 40 mm.
3. Bilge pumps
3.1 Capacity of bilge pumps
Each bilge pump shall be capable of delivering:

2
H
3
d 10 75 , 5 Q =

[m
3
/h] (3)
Q = minimum capacity [m
3
/h]
d
H
= calculated inside diameter of main bilge pipe
[mm]
3.2 The minimum capacity shall be 4/3 of the
required fire pump capacity.
3.3 Where centrifugal pumps are used for bilge
pumping, they shall be self-priming or priming units
are to be provided.
3.4 Use of other pumps for bilge pumping
3.4.1 Ballast pumps, stand-by seawater cooling
pumps and general service pumps may also be used as
independent bilge pumps provided they are self-
priming and of the required capacity according to
formula (3).
3.4.2 In the event of failure of one of the required
bilge pumps, one pump each has to be available for
fire fighting and bilge pumping.
3.4.3 Bilge ejectors are acceptable as bilge pump-
ing arrangements provided that there is an independent
supply of driving water.
3.5 Number of bilge pumps
Vessels are to be provided with two independent,
mechanically driven bilge pumps. One of these pumps
may be attached to the main engine.
On vessels of less than 100 gross tonnage, one me-
chanically driven bilge pump is sufficient. The second
independent bilge pump may be a permanently in-
stalled manual bilge pump. The engine-driven bilge
pump may be coupled to the main propulsion plant.
4. Bilge pumping for various spaces
4.1 Machinery spaces
4.1.1 On vessels of more than 100 gross tonnage,
the bilges of every main machinery space shall be
capable of being pumped simultaneously as follows:
a) through the bilge suctions connected to the main
bilge system
b) through one direct suction connected to the
largest independent bilge pump
c) through an emergency bilge suction connected
to the sea cooling water pump of the main pro-
pulsion plant or through another suitable emer-
gency bilge system
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 9d Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps Chapter 8
Page 9d21


K
4.1.2 On vessels with Class Notation K the emer-
gency bilge suction may be dispensed with.
4.1.3 If the vessel's propulsion plant is located in
several spaces, a direct suction in accordance with
4.1.1 b) is to be provided in each watertight compart-
ment in addition to branch bilge suctions in accor-
dance with 4.1.1 a).
When the direct suctions are in use, it must be possible
to pump simultaneously from the main bilge line by
means of all the other bilge pumps. The diameter of
the direct suction may not be less than that of the main
bilge pipe.
4.1.4 The diameter of the emergency suction shall
be equal to the diameter of the pump's suction line.
The emergency bilge suction must be connected to the
pump suction line by a reverse-flow protection accord-
ing to 1.5.
This valve is to be provided with a plate with the no-
tice:
Emergency bilge valve!
To be opened in an emergency only!
Emergency bilge valves and cooling water inlet valves
shall be capable of being operated from above the
floor plates.
4.1.5 Rooms and decks in engine rooms are to be
provided with drains to the engine room bilge. A drain
pipe which passes through a watertight bulkhead is to
be fitted with a self-closing valve.
4.2 Holds
4.2.1 Holds with bilge gutterways are to be fitted
with bilge suctions fore and aft.
4.2.2 Holds in which the tank decks extend to the
vessel's shell are to be provided with bilge wells of
adequate size.
On vessels with only one hold, bilge wells of suffi-
cient size are to be provided fore and aft.
4.3 Refrigerated cargo spaces
Refrigerated cargo spaces and thawing trays are to be
provided with drains which cannot be shut off. Each
drain pipe is to be fitted at its discharge end with a
trap to prevent the transfer of heat and odours.
4.4 Spaces above fore and aft peaks
These spaces shall either be connected to the bilge
system or are to be drained by means of hand pumps.
Spaces located above the aft peak may be drained to
the engine room bilge, provided the drain line is fitted
with a self-closing valve which is to be located at a
highly visible and accessible position. The drain lines
shall have a diameter of at least 40 mm.
4.5 Cofferdams, pipe tunnels and void
spaces
Cofferdams, pipe tunnels and void spaces adjoining
the vessel's shell are to be connected to the bilge sys-
tem. Where the aft peak is adjoining the engine room,
it may be drained over a self-closing valve to the en-
gine room bilge.
4.6 Chain lockers
Chain lockers are to be drained by means of appropri-
ate arrangements.
5. Bilge testing
All bilge arrangements are to be tested under GL's
supervision.
L. Equipment for the Treatment and Storage
of Bilge Water, Fuel/Oil Residues
4

1. Oily water separating equipment
1.1 Requirements of the flag state shall be ob-
served additionally.
1.2 Vessels of 400 gross tonnage and above shall
be fitted with an oily water separator or filtering.
1.3 A sampling device is to be arranged in a
vertical section of the discharge line of oily water
separating equipment/filtering systems.
1.4 By-pass lines are not permitted for oily-water
separating equipment/filtering systems.
1.5 Recirculating facilities have to be provided to
enable the oil filtering equipment to be tested with the
overboard discharge closed.
2. Discharge of fuel/oil residues
2.1 A sludge tank is to be provided. For the fit-
tings and mountings of sludge tanks, see Q.
2.2 A self-priming pump is to be provided for
sludge discharge to reception facilities. The capacity
of the pump shall be such that the sludge tank can be
emptied in a reasonable time.
2.3 A separate discharge line is to be provided for
discharge of fuel/oil residues to reception facilities.

4
Oily water separators, filter plants, collecting tanks, discharge
lines and a monitoring & control system or an 15 ppm alarm
shall comply with the International Convention for the Preven-
tion of Pollution from Ships, 1973, (MARPOL) and the Proto-
col 1978 as amended. Form F 323 (MP1) is to be submitted for
approval.
Chapter 8
Page 9d22
Section 9d Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps I - Part 1
GL 2007


L
M. Air, Overflow and Sounding Pipes
General
The laying of air, overflow and sounding pipes is
permitted only in places where the laying of the corre-
sponding piping system is also permitted, see Table
9d.5.
1. Air and overflow pipes
1.1 Arrangement
1.1.1 All tanks, void spaces, etc. are to be fitted at
their highest position with air pipes or overflow pipes.
Air pipes must normally terminate at the open deck.
1.1.2 Air and overflow pipes are to be laid verti-
cally.
1.1.3 Air and overflow pipes passing through cargo
holds are to be protected against damage.
1.1.4 For the height above deck of air and overflow
pipes, see Section 2, Table 2.2.
1.1.5 Air pipes from unheated leakage oil tanks and
lubricating oil tanks may terminate at clearly visible
positions in the engine room. Where these tanks form
part of the vessel's hull, the air pipes are to terminate
above the freeboard deck.
1.1.6 Air pipes from lubricating oil tanks and leak-
age oil tanks which terminate in the engine room are
to be provided with funnels and pipes for safe drain-
age in the event of possible overflow.
1.1.7 Air pipes for cofferdams/void spaces with
bilge connections are to be extended above the open
deck.
1.1.8 Where fuel service tanks are fitted with
change-over overflow pipes, the change-over devices
are to be so arranged that the overflow is led to one of
the storage tanks.
The overflow pipes of changeable tanks shall be capa-
ble of being separated from the fuel overflow system.
1.1.9 Where the air and overflow pipes of several
tanks situated at the vessel's shell lead to a common
line, the connections to this line are to be above the
freeboard deck, as far as practicable but at least so
high above the deepest load waterline that should a
leakage occur in one tank due to damage to the hull or
listing of the vessel, fuel or water cannot flow into
another tank.
1.1.10 The air and overflow pipes of lubricating oil
and fuel tanks shall be kept separate.
1.1.11 For the cross-sectional area of air pipes and
air/overflow pipes, see Table 9d.15.
1.2 Number of air and overflow pipes
1.2.1 The number and arrangement of the air pipes
is to be so performed that the tanks can be aerated and
de-aerated without exceeding the tank design pressure
by over- or underpressure.
1.2.2 Tanks which extend from side to side of the
vessel shall be fitted with an air/overflow pipe at each
side. At the narrow ends of double bottom tanks in the
forward and aft parts of the vessel, only one air/ over-
flow pipe is sufficient.
1.3 Air pipe closing devices
Air/overflow pipes terminating above the open deck
are to be fitted with approved air pipe heads.
Table 9d.15 Cross-sectional areas of air and over-
flow pipes
Cross-sectional areas of
air and overflow pipes
Tank filling systems
LR LR
by gravity
1/3 f
per tank

filling
mode
by pumping
1,25 f
per tank
1

Explanatory note:
LR = air pipe
LR = air-/overflow pipe
f = cross-sectional area of tank filling pipe
1
1,25 f as the total cross-sectional area is sufficient if it can
be proved that the resistance to flow of the air and
overflow pipes including the air pipe closing devices at the
proposed flow rate cannot cause unacceptable high
pressures in the tanks in the event of overflow.


To prevent blocking of the air pipe head openings by
their floats during tank discharge the maximum allow-
able air velocity determined by the manufacturer is to
be observed.
1.4 Overflow systems
1.4.1 The overflow collecting manifolds of fuel
tanks are to be led at a sufficient gradient to an over-
flow tank of sufficient capacity.
The overflow tank is to be fitted with a level alarm
which operates when the tank is about 1/3 full.
1.4.2 For the size of the air and overflow pipes, see
Table 9d.16.
1.4.3 The use of a fuel storage tank as overflow
tank is permissible but requires the installation of a
high level alarm and an air pipe with 1,25 times the
cross-sectional area of the main bunkering line.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 9d Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps Chapter 8
Page 9d23


M
Table 9d.16 Cross-sectional areas of air and overflow pipes (closed overflow systems)
Cross-sectional areas of air and overflow pipes
Tank filling and
overflow systems
LR R
2
AR
Remarks
Stand-pipe 1/3 f
cross-sectional area of
stand-pipe 1,25 F
Filling
Relief valve 1/3 f
1
min. 1,25 F
cross-sectional area of
relief valve 1,25 F
Overflow chest 1/3 F at chest min. 1,25 F 1,25 F
Manifold 1/3 F min. 1,25 F
Overflow
system
Overflow tank 1/3 F
Explanatory notes: LR = air pipe
R = overflow pipe
AR = drainage line
f = cross-sectional area of tank filling pipe
F = cross-sectional area of main filling pipe

1
1/3 f only for tanks in which an overflow is prevented by structural arrangements.

2
Determined in accordance with 1.4


1.5 Determination of the pipe cross-sectional
areas
For the cross-sectional areas of air and overflow
pipes, see Tables 9d.15 and 9d.16.
Air and overflow pipes shall have an outside diameter
of at least 60,3 mm.
1.6 The minimum wall thickness of air and
overflow pipes are to be in accordance with Table
9d.17a and 9d.17b, whereby A, B and C are the
groups for the minimum wall thickness.
1.7 The pipe materials are to be selected accord-
ing to B.
2. Sounding pipes
2.1 General
2.1.1 Sounding pipes are to be provided for tanks,
cofferdams and void spaces with bilge connections
and for bilges and bilge wells in spaces which are not
accessible at all times.
On application, the provision of sounding pipes for
bilge wells in permanently accessible spaces may be
dispensed with.
2.1.2 Where tanks are fitted with remote level
indicators which are type approved by GL, the ar-
rangement of sounding pipes can be dispensed with.
2.1.3 As far as possible, sounding pipes are to be
laid straight and are to extend as near as possible to
the bottom.
2.1.4 Sounding pipes which terminate below the
deepest load waterline are to be fitted with self-
closing shut-off devices. Such sounding pipes are
only permissible in spaces which are accessible at all
times.
All other sounding pipes are to be extended to the
open deck. The sounding pipe openings have to be
always accessible and fitted with watertight closures.
2.1.5 Sounding pipes of tanks are to be provided
close to the top of the tank with holes for equalising
the pressure.
2.1.6 In holds, a sounding pipe is to be fitted to
each bilge well.
2.1.7 Where level alarms are arranged in each
bilge well of cargo holds, the sounding pipes may be
dispensed with. The level alarms are to be independ-
ent from each other and are to be type approved by
GL
5
.
2.1.8 Sounding pipes passing through cargo holds
are to be laid in protected spaces or they are to be
protected against damage.
2.2 Sounding pipes for fuel and lubricating oil
tanks
2.2.1 Sounding pipes which terminate below the
open deck are to be provided with self-closing de-
vices as well as with self-closing test valves, see also
Q.2.3.3.6.

5
National Regulations, where existing, are to be considered.
Chapter 8
Page 9d24
Section 9d Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps I - Part 1
GL 2007


M
Table 9d.17a Classification of minimum wall thickness groups
Location
Drain lines and
scupper pipes
Air, sounding and
overflow pipes
below freeboard deck
or bulkhead deck
Piping sys-
tem or posi-
tion of open
pipe outlets
Tanks
with
same
media
Tanks
with
disparate
media
without
shut-off on
ship's side
with
shut-off on
ship's side
above
freeboard
deck
above
weather
deck
below
weather
deck
Cargo
holds
Machinery
spaces
Air, over-
flow and
sounding
pipes
C C A A
Scupper
pipes from
open deck
A
Discharge
and scupper
pipes leading
directly
overboard
B
Discharge
pipes of
pumps for
sanitary
systems
A
B

A
A
B
A

Table 9d.17b Minimum wall thickness of air, over-
flow, sounding and sanitary pipes
Minimum wall thickness
[mm]
Outside pipe
diameter d
a

[mm] A
1
B
1
C
1

38 - 82,5
88,9
101,6 - 114,3
127 - 139,7
152,4
159 - 177,8
193,7
219,1
244,5 - 457,2
4,5
4,5
4,5
4,5
4,5
5
5,4
5,9
6,3
7,1
8
8
8,8
10
10
12,5
12,5
12,5
6,3
6,3
7,1
8
8,8
8,8
8,8
8,8
8,8
1
wall thickness groups, see Table 9d.17a


2.2.2 Sounding pipes shall not be located in the
vicinity of oil firing equipment, machine components
with high surface temperatures or electrical equip-
ment.
2.2.3 Sounding pipes shall not terminate in ac-
commodation or service spaces.
2.2.4 Sounding pipes are not to be used as filling
pipes.
2.3 Cross-sections of pipes
2.3.1 Sounding pipes shall have an inside diameter
of at least 32 mm.
2.3.2 The diameters of sounding pipes which pass
through refrigerated holds at temperatures below 0 C
are to be increased to an inside diameter of 50 mm.
2.3.3 The minimum wall thicknesses of sounding
pipes are to be in accordance with Tables 9d.17a and
9d.17b.
N. Drinking Water System
5

1. Drinking water tanks
1.1 For the design and arrangement of drinking
water tanks, see Chapter 1 Hull Structures, Sec-
tion 12.
1.2 On vessels with ice class E1 to E4 and higher
drinking water tanks located at the vessel's side are to
be provided with means for tank heating to prevent
freezing.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 9d Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps Chapter 8
Page 9d25


N
2. Drinking water tank connections
2.1 Filling connections are to be located suffi-
ciently high above deck and are to be fitted with a
closing device.
2.1.1 Filling connections are not to be fitted to air
pipes.
2.2 Air/overflow pipes are to be extended above
the open deck and are to be protected against the entry
of insects by a fine mesh screen.
Air pipe closing devices, see M.1.3.
2.3 Sounding pipes shall terminate sufficiently
high above deck.
3. Drinking water pipe lines
3.1 Drinking water pipe lines are not to be con-
nected to pipe lines carrying other media.
3.2 Drinking water pipe lines are not to be laid
through tanks which do not contain drinking water.
3.3 Drinking water supply to tanks which do not
contain drinking water (e.g. expansion tanks of the
fresh water cooling system) is to be made by means of
an open funnel or with means of preventing back-
flow.
4. Pressure water tanks/calorifiers
For design, equipment, installation and testing of pres-
sure water tanks and calorifiers, Section 9e is to be
observed.
5. Drinking water pumps
5.1 Separate drinking water pumps are to be
provided for drinking water systems.
5.2 The pressure lines of the pumps of drinking
water pressure tanks are to be fitted with screw-down
non-return valves.
6. Drinking water generation
Where the distillate produced by the vessel's own
evaporator unit is used for the drinking water supply,
the treatment of the distillate has to comply with cur-
rent regulations of national health authorities.
O. Sewage Systems
1. General
1.1 Vessels of 400 gross tonnage and above and
vessels of less than 400 gross tonnage which are certi-
fied to carry more than 15 persons and with keel lay-
ing on or after 2003-09-27 are to be fitted with the
following equipment:
a sewage treatment plant approved according to
Resolution MEPC.2(VI), or
a sewage comminuting and disinfecting system
(facilities for the temporary storage of sewage
when the vessel is less than 3 nautical miles
from the nearest land, to be provided), or
a holding tank
1.2 A pipeline for the discharge of sewage to a
reception facility is to be arranged. The pipeline is to
be provided with a standard discharge connection.
1.3 National requirements are to be observed
additionally.
2. Arrangement
2.1 For scuppers and overboard discharges see
Chapter 1 Hull Structures, Section 21.
2.2 The minimum wall thicknesses of sanitary
pipes below freeboard and bulkhead decks are speci-
fied in Tables 9d.17a and 9d.17b.
2.3 For discharge lines located above freeboard
deck steel pipes according to Table 9d.6, Group N
may be used.
2.4 For sanitary discharge lines located below
freeboard deck within a watertight compartment,
which terminate in a sewage tank or in a sanitary
treatment plant, pipes according to 2.3 may be used.
2.5 Sewage tanks and sewage treatment sys-
tems
2.5.1 Sewage tanks are to be fitted with air pipes
leading to the open deck. For air pipe closing devices
see M.1.3.
2.5.2 Sewage tanks are to be fitted with a filling
connection, a rinsing connection and a level alarm.
2.5.3 The discharge lines of sewage tanks and
sewage treatment tanks are to be fitted at the vessel'
side with screw-down non-return valves.
When the valve is not arranged directly at the vessels
side, the thickness of the pipe is to be according to
Table 9d.17b, column B.
Chapter 8
Page 9d26
Section 9d Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps I - Part 1
GL 2007


O
2.5.4 A second means of reverse-flow protection is
to be fitted in the suction or delivery line of the sew-
age pump from sewage tanks or sewage treatment
plants.
2.5.5 Where at a heeling of the vessel of 5 at port
or starboard, the lowest inside opening of the sewage
system lies on the summer load line or below, the
discharge line of the sewage collecting tank is to be
fitted in addition to the required reverse-flow protec-
tion device according to 2.5.4 with a gate valve di-
rectly at the shell plating. In this case the reverse-flow
protection device needs not to be of screw-down type.
2.5.6 Bilge pumps may not be used for emptying
sewage tanks.
P. Hose Assemblies and Compensators
1. Hose assemblies and compensators made of
non-metallic and metallic materials may be used ac-
cording to their suitability in fuel-, lubricating oil-,
hydraulic oil-, bilge-, ballast-, fresh water cooling-,
sea water cooling-, compressed air-, auxiliary steam-,
and exhaust gas systems as well as in secondary pip-
ing systems.
2. Hoses and compensators used in the systems
mentioned in 1. are to be of approved type
6
.
3. Hose assemblies and compensators made of
non-metallic materials are not permitted in perma-
nently pressurized starting air lines. Furthermore it is
not permitted to use hose assemblies and compensa-
tors in fuel injection piping systems of combustion
engines.
4. Hose assemblies and compensators for the
use in fuel-, lubricating oil-, hydraulic oil-, bilge- and
sea water systems are to be flame-resistant.
5. Non-metallic hose assemblies and compensa-
tors are to be located at visible and accessible posi-
tions.
6. Where hose assemblies and compensators are
installed in the vicinity of hot components they shall
be provided with approved heat-resistant sleeves.
7. Manufacturers of hose assemblies and com-
pensators
7
are to be recognized by GL.

6
See GL Rules VI Additional Rules and Guidelines, Part 7
Guidelines for the Performance of Type Approvals, Chapter 8
Test Requirements for Mechanical Components and Equip-
ment.
7
See GL Rules VI Additional Rules and Guidelines, Part 3
Machinery Installations, Chapter 9 Guidelines for the Rec-
ognition of Manufacturers of Hose Assemblies and Compensa-
tors.
Q. Storage of Liquid Fuels, Lubricating and
Hydraulic Oils as well as Oil Residues
1. General
1.1 Scope
The following requirements apply to the storage of
liquid fuels, lubricating and hydraulic oils as well as
oily residues and to gas bottles for domestic purposes.
1.2 Definitions
Service tanks are settling tanks and daily service tanks
which supply consumers directly.
1.3 Tank plan
A tank plan is to be submitted for approval in tripli-
cate. It should include particulars regarding arrange-
ment, medium and volume of the tanks as well as
information about the maximum height of the over-
flow level.
2. Storage of liquid fuels
2.1 General safety precautions for liquid fuels
Tanks and pipes are to be so located and equipped that
fuel may not spread either inside the vessel or on deck
and may not be ignited by hot surfaces or electrical
equipment. The tanks are to be fitted with air and
overflow pipes as safeguards against overpressure, see
M.
2.2 Distribution, location and capacity of fuel
tanks
2.2.1 Distribution of fuel tanks
2.2.1.1 The fuel supply is to be stored in several
tanks so that, even in the event of damage to the bot-
tom of one of the tanks, the fuel supply will not be lost
entirely.
2.2.1.2 Fuel tanks are to be separated by cofferdams
from tanks containing lubricating or hydraulic oil as
well as from tanks containing drinking water. This
does not apply to used lubricating oil which will not
be used on board anymore.
2.2.1.3 On small vessels the arrangement of coffer-
dams according to 2.2.1.2 may, with the approval of
GL be dispensed with, provided that the common
boundaries between the tanks are arranged in accor-
dance with Chapter 1 Hull Structures, Section 12,
A.5.2.
2.2.2 Arrangements of fuel tanks
2.2.2.1 Fuel tanks may be located above engines,
boilers and other equipment with a high surface tem-
perature (above 220 C) only if adequate spill trays are
provided below such tanks and they are protected
against heat radiation.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 9d Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps Chapter 8
Page 9d27


Q
Surface temperature of the elements without insulation
and lagging shall be considered.
2.2.2.2 Fuel tanks shall be an integral part of the
vessel's structure. If this is not practicable, the tanks
shall be located adjacent to an engine room boundary
and the tank top of the double bottom. The arrange-
ment of free-standing fuel tanks inside engine rooms
is to be avoided. Tank arrangements which do not
conform to the preceding rules require the approval of
GL.
2.2.2.3 Tanks adjacent to refrigerated cargo holds are
subject to Section 10, M.
2.2.2.4 In case of fuel supply for prime movers of
emergency source of electrical power please refer to
Chapter 2 Machinery Installations, Section 10, B.
2.2.4 / 2.2.5
2.3 Fuel tank fittings and mountings
2.3.1 For filling and suction lines see E.; for air,
overflow and sounding pipes see M.
2.3.2 Service tanks are to be so arranged that water
and residues can deposit despite of ship movement.
Fuel tanks located above the double bottom are to be
fitted with water drains with self-closing shut-off
valves.
2.3.3 Tank gauges
2.3.3.1 The following tank gauges are permitted:
sounding pipes
oil-level indicating devices (type approved)
oil-level gauges with flat glasses and self-
closing shut-off valves at the connections to the
tank and protected against external damage
2.3.3.2 For fuel storage tanks the provision of sound-
ing pipes is sufficient. The sounding pipes may be
dispensed with, if the tanks are fitted with oil-level
indicating devices which have been type-tested by GL.
2.3.3.3 Fuel oil settling and daily service tanks are to
be fitted with oil-level indicating devices or oil-level
gauges according to 2.3.3.1. For vessels under German
flag only type approved oil-level gauges are allowed.
2.3.3.4 Sight glasses and oil gauges fitted directly on
the side of the tank and cylindrical glass oil gauges are
not permitted.
2.3.3.5 Sounding pipes of fuel tanks may not termi-
nate in accommodation spaces, nor shall they termi-
nate in spaces where the risk of ignition of spillage
from the sounding pipes consists.
2.3.3.6 Sounding pipes should terminate outside
machinery spaces. Where this is not possible, the
following requirements are to be met:
Oil-level gauges are to be provided in addition
to the sounding pipes.
Sounding pipes are either to terminate in loca-
tions remote from ignition hazards or they are to
be effectively screened to prevent that spillage
through the sounding pipes may come into con-
tact with a source of ignition.
The sounding pipes are to be fitted with self-
closing shut-off devices and self-closing test
cook.
2.4 Appliances and fittings on fuel tanks
2.4.1 Appliances, mountings and fittings not form-
ing part of the fuel tank equipment may be fitted to
tank walls only by means of intermediate supports. To
free-standing tanks only components forming part of
the tank equipment may be fitted.
2.4.2 Valves and pipe connections are to be at-
tached to doubler flanges welded to the tank wall.
Holes for attachment bolts shall not be drilled in the
tank wall.
Instead of doubler flanges, thick walled pipe stubs
with flange connections may be welded into the tank
walls.
2.5 Hydraulic pressure tests
Fuel tanks are to be tested for tightness in accordance
with Section 3.
2.6 Fuels with a flash point of 60 C
For the storage of liquid fuels with a flash point of
60 C, see Section 9a, D.12.
3. Storage of Lubricating and Hydraulic Oils
3.1 Tank arrangement
For the arrangement of the tanks 2.2.2.1 and analo-
gously Section 3 are to be applied.
3.2 Tank fittings and mountings
3.2.1 For filling and suction lines of lubricating oil
and hydraulic oil tanks, see F.2.2.
3.2.2 For tank sounding devices for oil tanks, see
2.3.3.1 and 2.3.3.4.
3.2.3 For the mounting of appliances and fittings
on the tanks 2.4 is to be applied.
3.3 Capacity and construction of tanks
3.3.1 Lubricating oil circulation tanks should be
sufficiently dimensioned to ensure that the dwell time
is long enough for settling out of air bubbles, residues,
etc. With a maximum permissible filling level of about
85 %, the tanks shall be large enough to hold at least
the lubricating oil contained in the entire circulation
system including the contents of gravity tanks.
Chapter 8
Page 9d28
Section 9d Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps I - Part 1
GL 2007


Q
3.3.2 Measures, such as the provision of baffles or
limber holes consistent with structural strength re-
quirements, particularly relating to the machinery bed
plate, are to be provided to ensure that the entire con-
tent of the tank remains in circulation.
Limber holes should be located as near the bottom of
the tank as possible. Suction pipe connections should
be placed as far as practicable away from the oil drain
pipe so that neither air nor sludge may be sucked in
irrespective of the heeling angle of the vessel likely to
be encountered during service.
3.3.3 Lubricating oil circulating tanks are to be
equipped with sufficiently dimensioned vents.
4. Storage of oil residues
4.1 Capacity of sludge tanks
The capacity of sludge tanks shall be such that they
are able to hold the residues arising from the operation
of the vessel having regard to the maximum duration
of a voyage. National requirements, if any, are to be
observed. Reference is made to MEPC circular 511.
4.2 Fittings and mountings of sludge tanks
4.2.1 For tank sounding devices 2.3.3.2 and 2.3.3.5
are to be applied.
4.2.2 For air pipes, see M.
5. Storage of gas bottles for domestic purpose
5.1 Storage of gas bottles shall be located on
open deck or in well ventilated spaces which only
open to open deck.
5.2 Gaseous fuel systems for domestic purposes
shall comply with an acceptable standard. National
requirement, if any, are to be observed.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 9d Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps Chapter 8
Page 9d29


Q



Section 9e

Boilers and Pressure Vessels
A. Steam Boilers and Thermal Oil Heaters
1. Scope
1.1 Steam boilers
For the purpose of these requirements, the term
"boiler" includes all closed vessels and piping systems
used for
generating steam at a pressure above atmos-
pheric pressure (steam generators)
raising the temperature of water above the boil-
ing point corresponding to atmospheric pressure
(hot water generators)
necessary for the operation of the vessel or for fish
processing.
The term "steam generator" also includes any equip-
ment directly connected to the aforementioned pres-
sure vessels or piping systems in which the steam is
superheated or cooled, external drums, the circulating
lines and the casings of circulating pumps serving
forced-circulation boilers.
1.2 Thermal oil heaters
The following requirements apply also to thermal oil
heaters in which organic liquids (thermal oils) are
heated by oil fired burners, exhaust gases or electricity
to temperatures below their initial boiling point at
atmospheric pressure.
1.3 Warm water generators
For warm water generators with a permissible dis-
charge temperature of not more than 120 C and all
systems incorporating steam or hot water generators
which are heated solely by steam or hot liquids B.
applies regarding materials, design calculations and
manufacturing principles. For equipment and testing
the requirements of 2. - 4. apply.
2. General principles
2.1 Steam and hot water generators and thermal
oil heaters as defined in 1. are to be manufactured,
equipped and tested in accordance with the GL Rules
according to Chapter 2 Machinery Installations,
Sections 7a and 7b.
3. Documents for approval
3.1 Steam boilers
Drawings of all boiler parts subject to pressure, such
as drums, headers, tubes, manholes and inspection
covers, etc., are to be submitted to GL in triplicate.
These drawings shall contain all the data necessary for
strength calculations and design assessment, such as
working pressures, superheated steam temperatures,
materials to be used and full details of welds including
filler materials.
Details and drawings are also to be submitted covering
the valves and fittings and their arrangement together
with a description of the boiler plant specifying the
arrangement of the boiler with reference to the vessel's
longitudinal axis, the essential boiler data and equip-
ment items, e.g. steam conditions, heating surfaces,
allowable steam output, feed, firing system, safety
valves, controllers and limiters.
3.2 Thermal oil heaters
For thermal oil heaters the following documents are to
be additionally submitted:
a description of the system stating the discharge
and return temperatures, the maximum allow-
able film temperature, the total volume of the
system and the physical and chemical character-
istics of the thermal oil
drawings of the heaters, the expansion and other
pressure vessels and the drainage and storage
tanks
circuit diagrams of the electrical control system,
respectively monitoring and supervision
a functional diagram with information about the
safety devices and valves provided (for informa-
tion)
If specially requested, mathematical proof of the
maximum film temperature in accordance with DIN
4754 is to be submitted.
4. Testing after installation on board
Following installation on board, a check is carried out
on the fitting of the pressure vessels, the equipment
and on the arrangement and setting of safety appli-
ances. Operating tests are to be performed wherever
necessary.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 9e Boilers and Pressure Vessels Chapter 8
Page 9e1

A
B. Pressure Vessels
1. Scope
The following requirements apply to pressure vessels
(gauge or vacuum pressure) for the operation of the
main propulsion plant and its auxiliary machinery.
They also apply to pressure vessels and equipment
necessary for the operation of the fishing vessel and
for fish processing if these are subjected to internal or
external pressure in service.
2. General principles
All pressure vessels mentioned under 1. are to be
manufactured, equipped and tested in accordance with
the GL Rules according to Chapter 2 Machinery
Installations, Section 8.
3. Documents for approval
For all pressure vessels necessary for the operation of
the fishing vessel and for fish processing for which
drawing approval is required according to 2., drawings
containing all the data necessary for their safety as-
sessment are to be submitted in triplicate. The follow-
ing details, in particular, are to be specified:
intended use, substances to be contained in the
pressure vessel
working pressures and temperatures; if necessary,
secondary loads, volume of individual spaces
materials to be used, welding details, heat treat-
ment
design details of the pressurized parts
4. Testing after installation on board
Following installation on board, a check is to be car-
ried out on the fitting of the pressure vessels, the
equipment and on the arrangement and setting of
safety appliances. Operating tests are to be performed
wherever necessary.
C. Oil Firing Equipment
1. General
1.1 Oil firing equipment for steam boilers or
thermal oil heaters is subject to the GL Rules accord-
ing to Chapter 2 Machinery Installations, Section 9,
B.
1.2 Where oil burners are to be used additionally
for burning waste oil and oil sludge, the necessary
measures are to be agreed with GL Head Office in
each case.
1.3 The oil burners of warm water generators,
oil-fired heaters and small heating appliances which
are located in the engine room or in spaces containing
equipment important to the operation of the machinery
space are subject to the requirements of the Rules
defined in Chapter 2 Machinery Installations, Sec-
tion 9, C.
2. Documents for approval
A sectional drawing of each type of burner together
with a description of its mode of operation and also
circuit diagrams and equipment lists of the electrical
control system are to be submitted to GL in triplicate
for approval.
3. Exemption
Burners manufactured and tested in accordance with
EN 267 or other internationally recognized regulations
may be accepted. In general, examination of drawings
of these burners may be dispensed with, if proof is
furnished of a prototype or equivalent test having been
carried out.
Chapter 8
Page 9e2
Section 9e Boilers and Pressure Vessels I - Part 1
GL 2007

C
Section 10

Refrigeration Installations
A. General
1. Scope
1.1 Class Notation RIC
The complete requirements of this Section apply to
refrigeration installations intended for use on board of
fishing vessels with Class Notation RIC, compare GL
Rules Part 0 Classification and Surveys, Section 2,
C.2.5.
1.2 Safety requirements
The safety requirements of this Section also apply to
fishing vessel cargo refrigerating installations for
which Class Notation RIC is not requested as well as
for refrigerating installations used for cooling of pro-
visions and air conditioning.
For these refrigerating installations the following
requirements have to be considered:
C. Refrigerants
D. Refrigerating Machinery Spaces
F. Pressure Vessels and Apparatus
J.1. Safety Equipment
M.1.5 Escape from refrigerated or air-cooler
spaces, etc.
2. Definitions
Within the scope of this Section refrigerating installa-
tions on board fishing vessels are:
cargo refrigerating installations for the refrigera-
tion of insulated cargo holds
cargo refrigerating installations for the refrigera-
tion of insulated brine/seawater tanks (RSW)
quick-freezing installations for fish and other
catch
The provisions assume that the refrigerating installa-
tions are permanently installed and belong to the ves-
sel.
3. Classification and survey of refrigeration
installations
3.1 For the Classification and Characters of Clas-
sification of refrigeration installations see GL Rules
Part 0 Classification and Surveys, Section 2.
3.2 For surveys of refrigeration installations see
GL Rules Part 0 Classification and Surveys, Sec-
tion 3.
4. Documents for approval
4.1 Cargo refrigeration installations
For refrigerating installations which are built under the
supervision and in accordance with the GL Rules,
each of the following documents is to be submitted to
GL in triplicate in due time:
a) A description of the refrigerating installations on
Form 139-2006 to provide the information nec-
essary for the Classification of refrigerating in-
stallations. These forms are available from GL.
b) A calculation of the cooling load as evidence of
the adequate capacity of the installation.
c) A general arrangement plan of the refrigerating
installation with details of the ventilation of the
refrigerating machinery spaces.
d) Drawings of the compressors, such as longitudi-
nal and transverse sections, and a workshop
drawing of the crankshaft or rotors.
e) Performance data of the compressors.
f) Drawings of all vessels and equipment under re-
frigerant pressure, e.g. condensers, evaporators,
oil separators, receivers as well as brine/RSW
coolers together with details of the materials
used.
g) Diagrams showing the layout of refrigerant,
brine / CO
2
, RSW and cooling water pipelines
with details of the wall thickness and materials.
h) Drawings showing the arrangement and equip-
ment of the refrigerated spaces with details of
air ventilation including airducts.
i) Drawings showing the type and design of the
defrosting system.
j) Drawings showing the type and execution of the
insulation used for the refrigerated spaces and
tanks, with details of the insulation of hatches,
doors, covers for scuppers and bilges, thermal
bridges and refrigerant and brine piping.
k) Drawings of the bilge pumping and drainage
facilities for refrigerated spaces and tanks.
l) Drawings and descriptions of electrical tempera-
ture-monitoring systems.
m) Description of automatic control systems.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 10 Refrigeration Installations Chapter 8
Page 101

A
5. Testing of materials and components
5.1 The selecting and testing of materials is sub-
ject to the GL Rules II Materials and Welding, Part
1 Metallic Materials, Chapters 1 4.
5.2 Components under refrigerant pressure are
required to undergo material testing as a matter of
principle. Specific requirements are stated individually
within this Section.
5.3 Material tests are to be performed on the
crankshafts of reciprocating compressors and the ro-
tors of screw compressors with a calculated journal
diameter of more than 50 mm. Works Certificates are
sufficient in case of journal diameters 50 mm.
5.4 GL reserve the right to extend material test-
ing to other important plant components.
B. Installation, Design and Rating
1. Design principles
1.1 Refrigeration systems shall be so designed,
constructed, tested and installed as to take account of
the safety of the system and also emission of chloro-
fluorocarbons (CFCs) or any other ozone-depleting
substances from the refrigerant held in quantities or
concentrations which are hazardous to human health
or to the environment and shall be also to the satisfac-
tion of the Administration of the country of registra-
tion.
1.2 Refrigeration systems shall be adequately
protected against vibration, shock, expansion, shrink-
age, etc. and shall be provided with an automatic
safety control device to prevent a dangerous rise in
temperature and pressure.
2. Electrical power supply
At least two generating sets have to be available for
supplying power to refrigerating installations. The
capacity of the generators is to be such that, in addi-
tion to other requirements:
when all generators are in operation the total
power requirements of the refrigerating installa-
tion can be satisfied, the "total power require-
ments" being the installed electrical load of the
refrigerating installation
in the event of the failure or shutdown of any
one generator, all refrigerating machinery, with
the exception of the stand-by sets can be oper-
ated at full load. For vessels with Class Notation
K this requirement may be dispensed with.
3. Number of refrigerating units
3.1 At least two complete refrigerating units
including compressors, condensers, receivers (if appli-
cable) and prime mover are to be provided.
3.2 Where several compressors operate in a
closed circuit with one condenser and, where installed,
one brine cooling evaporator, this also counts as one
refrigerating unit.
3.3 Where only two refrigerating units are in-
stalled, each compressor shall be capable of working
with each condenser and, where applicable, with each
brine cooling evaporator.
3.4 In case of vessels with Class Notation K and
with refrigerated spaces less than 400 m
3
, considera-
tion will be given to the installation of only one con-
densing unit.
4. Refrigerating capacity
4.1 The refrigerating capacity of the installation
is to be rated in such a way that the required tempera-
ture(s) in holds or tanks can be maintained when any
of the refrigerating units are out of operation. Fully
loaded condition is to be assumed.
The required temperature is the temperature on which
the refrigerating capacity calculation is based and
which is certified in the Refrigerating Installation
Certificate.
4.2 Where additional plants, such as quick freez-
ers, icemakers, etc. are connected to the refrigerating
installation, the reserve refrigerating unit may be taken
into account when the conditions are most unfavour-
able.
5. Factors affecting plant rating
5.1 The calculation of the required refrigerating
capacity is to be based on a seawater temperature of at
least 32 C and an ambient air temperature of at least
40 C with 55 % relative humidity unless other values
are agreed with GL in consideration of special opera-
tion.
5.2 The calculation shall likewise be based on the
area enveloping the refrigerated spaces/tanks on the
inside of the insulation, where such spaces are adja-
cent to non-cooled spaces, cooled spaces at higher
temperatures, the ambient air or seawater.
6. Automation, instrumentation and alarms
6.1 Automated refrigerating installations are to
be so equipped that they can also be operated with
manual control.
Chapter 8
Page 102
Section 10 Refrigeration Installations I - Part 1
GL 2007

B
6.2 Input units and actuating devices are to be
type-tested.
6.3 Measures shall be taken to prevent freezing
of refrigerated seawater.
6.4 Defrosting arrangements for air coolers are to
be controlled by a defrosting program.
6.5 Fault alarms
An alarm system is to be installed which actuates an
alarm at a position which is constantly manned. An
alarm shall be generated for the cases defined in Ta-
ble 10.1.
7. Plant of novel design
Refrigerating installations differing in design from
those which have already been proved suitable in
service on board fishing vessels are subject to special
GL approval. For such installations, GL may impose
special requirements as to the extent of the documen-
tation to be submitted for approval and the scope of
the testing, see also GL Rules Part 0 Classification
and Surveys, Section 2, D.3.5.4.
Table 10.1 Instrumentation and alarms
Item Display Alarm Reaction
Automatic stop Activated
Lubricating oil Pressure
1
Low Automatic stop
Driving motors Running Stop
Pressure
1
High Automatic stop
Discharge line: - pressure
- temperature
Temperature
1
High/low Automatic stop (high)
Pressure
1
Low Automatic stop
Suction line: - pressure
- temperature
Temperature
1
High
Compressor
Intermediate stage (if fitted) Pressure
1
High Automatic stop
Circulation pumps Running Stop
Available pumps Running Start For auto start
Brine/CO
2
cooler inlet/outlet Temperature
1
High (outlet)
Pressure line Pressure
1
Low
Secondary circuit
Brine/CO
2

Header tank Level
1
Low
Cooling water pumps Running Stop
Available cooling water pump Running Start
Cooling water inlet Temperature
1
--
Condenser
Cooling water outlet Temperature
1
High
Refrigerating
machinery space
Lock-in alarm Manually activated
Concentration in refrigerating
machinery space, pump rooms,
production areas

Leakage
NH
3
= 50 ppm
CO
2
= 5000 ppm
Automatic stop of re-
frigerating machinery
if NH
3
> 500 ppm
Concentration in refrigerated
spaces

Leakage
CO
2
= 10000 ppm

Refrigerant
leakage
Detection system Failure
Temperature measuring Temperature High
Left/right hand cooler delivery
air/return air
Temperature High
Lock-in alarm Manually activated
Refrigerated
spaces
Ventilation fan
(full/half speed)
Stop/running Failure
Defrost Time duration Disabled
1
these devices are to be provided at or in the proximity to the refrigeration machinery

I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 10 Refrigeration Installations Chapter 8
Page 103

B
C. Refrigerants
1. Classification
Refrigerants used in refrigeration systems shall be to
the satisfaction of the Administration of the country of
registration. Methylchloride or CFCs whose ozone-
depleting potential is higher than 5 % of CFC-11 shall
not be used as refrigerants. Refrigerants are classified
as follows:
1.1 Approved refrigerants, Group 1
Incombustible refrigerants without significant hazard
to human health, e.g.:
R22 Chlorodifluormethane CHCIF
2

R134a Tetrafluorethane CH
2
F-CF
3

R404A R125/143a/134a(44/52/4%)
R407A R32/125/134a(20/40/40%)
R407B R32/125/134a(10/70/20%)
R407C R32/125/134a(23/25/52%)
R410A R32/125(50/50%)
R507 R125/143a(50/50%)
R744 Carbon Dioxide CO
2

With these refrigerants the danger of asphyxiation is,
however, to be borne in mind.
1.2 Approved refrigerants, Group 2
Toxic or caustic refrigerants and those which, when
mixed with air, have a lower explosion limit of at least
3,5 % by volume.
R717 Ammonia NH
3

NH
3
may generally be used as refrigerant with indirect
systems only. In case of quick freezing installations
and in cooling coils fitted in brine / RSW tanks these
refrigerants may be directly expanded. In addition, the
regulations imposed by the competent authorities of
the country of registration are to be observed.
1.3 Refrigerants which are not approved,
Group 3
Refrigerants which, when mixed with air, have a lower
explosion limit of less than 3,5 % by volume, e.g. eth-
ane, ethylene.
2. Working pressures
2.1 For the common refrigerants, the allowable
working pressures PB (design pressures PR) are laid
down in Table 10.2.
For other refrigerants, the design pressures PR are
determined by the pressure at the bubble point at a
temperature of 55 C on the high pressure side and at a
temperature of 45 C on the low pressure side.
Table 10.2 Allowable working pressures for
refrigerants
Working pressures PB [bar]
Refrigerant
High-pressure side
(HP)
Low-pressure side
(LP)
R22
R134a

R404A
R407A

R407B
R407C

R410A
R507

R717 (NH
3
)
R744 (CO
2
)
22,5
13,9

25,0
25,2

26,5
23,9

33,6
25,6

24,0
1

17,0
10,6

19,7
19,8

20,9
18,8

26,4
20,2

17,5
1

1
Design pressure to be determined by the plant designer taking
into account the proposed operating pressure and the maxi-
mum pressure at rest condition. Where the maximum design
pressure at rest conditions is maintained by the fitting of a
supplementary refrigeration unit, condensing the vapour in a
holding vessel, supporting calculation require to be provided
to show that this can be undertaken with a local ambient tem-
perature of 45 C.
The holding vessel is to be thermally insulated to prevent the
operation of the relief devices within a 24 hour period after
de-energising the supplementary refrigeration unit at an ambi-
ent temperature of 45 C and an initial pressure equal to the
starting pressure of the refrigerating unit.

2.2 Within the meaning of these Rules, the low-
pressure side of the plant includes all parts exposed to
the evaporation pressure of the refrigerant. However,
these parts are also subject to the design pressure PR
for the high-pressure side if, e.g. for hot gas defrost-
ing, a switch-over of the system can subject them to
high pressure.
Medium-pressure vessels of two-stage plants form
part of the high pressure side.
3. Storage of reserve supplies of refrigerants
3.1 Reserve supplies of refrigerants may be
stored only in steel bottles approved for this purpose
by the competent authorities of the country of registra-
tion.
3.2 The filling level of these bottles shall be
suitable for tropical conditions, unless operating range
of the fishing vessel is restricted to cold climate zones.
3.3 Bottles containing refrigerant are to be se-
curely anchored in an upright position and protected
against overheating.
3.4 Bottles containing refrigerant may be stored
only in well ventilated spaces specially prepared for
this purpose or in refrigerating machinery spaces.
Chapter 8
Page 104
Section 10 Refrigeration Installations I - Part 1
GL 2007

C
3.5 On fishing vessels where, with due regard for
the provisions of D., there is no refrigerating machin-
ery space and the refrigerating machinery is installed
in the main or auxiliary engine room, GL may permit
exceptions to 3.4 in the case of refrigerants belonging
to Group 1. In this case storage bottles up to a maxi-
mum of 20 % of the total refrigerant charge for imme-
diate replenishing of the system may be kept in the
main or auxiliary engine room.
D. Refrigerating Machinery Spaces
1. Definition
Refrigerating machinery spaces are spaces separated
by bulkheads from other service spaces and housing
refrigerating machinery and associated equipment.
2. Installation of refrigerating machinery
2.1 Any space containing refrigerating machinery
including condensers and gas tanks utilizing toxic
refrigerants shall be separated from any adjacent space
by gastight bulkheads.
2.2 When the containment according to 2.1 is not
practicable, due to the size of the vessel, the refrigerat-
ing system may be installed in the machinery space
provided that the quantity of refrigerant used will not
cause danger to persons in the machinery space,
should all the gas escape and provided that an alarm is
fitted to give warning of dangerous concentration of
gas should any leakage occur in the compartment.
This arrangement may be considered for a total refrig-
erant charge of less than 25 kg.
2.3 Refrigerating machinery is to be installed in
such a way that sufficient space is left for operation,
servicing and repair.
3. Equipment and accessories
3.1 Refrigeration systems using ammonia in
charges exceeding 25 kg are to be installed in refriger-
ating machinery spaces separated by gas tight divi-
sions from other ship spaces and service rooms.
3.2 Regardless of the type of refrigerant used, the
doors of refrigerating machinery spaces shall not give
access to living quarters or corridors in the accommo-
dation area. The doors must open outwards and be
self-closing.
3.3 Where refrigeration systems operate with
ammonia spaces accommodating the refrigerating
machinery are to be equipped as follows:
a) Spaces shall be provided with at least two access
doors as far as possible from each other. The
doors are to open outwards and be of self-
closing type.
b) Equipment for producing water screens is to be
fitted above the access doors to refrigerating
machinery spaces. Provision shall be made for
actuating this equipment from outside the refrig-
erating machinery space. The actuating device
shall not be located in the immediate vicinity of
the entrances.
Where water sprinklers are additionally mounted in
the refrigerating machinery spaces themselves, these
are to be permanently installed and shall be capable of
being actuated from outside.
The spray nozzles of sprinkler systems are to be suita-
bly distributed in the refrigerating machinery space.
Due attention is to be paid to electrical machinery and
equipment. The spray nozzles shall be capable of
covering as large an area as possible with fine water
droplets.
c) The electrical consumers in the refrigerating
machinery spaces shall be capable of being
switched off, independently of the forced venti-
lation system, by a central switch located out-
side the room.
3.4 Provision shall be made for the bilge pump-
ing or drainage of refrigerating machinery spaces.
Where installations are operated with ammonia, the
refrigerating machinery spaces shall be provided with
drainage devices leading to a place where refrigerant
presents no danger to the vessel or to the persons on
board.
4. Leak detection and alarm
4.1 Refrigerant leak detectors need to be fitted in
case of NH
3
and/or CO
2
in any area where leakage
may occur, e.g. refrigerating machinery spaces, fish
processing area, valve stations, refrigerating cargo
holds. Welded pipelines passing through passageways
or access ducts are not considered possible leakage
areas.
4.2 Leak detection systems are to be type tested.
Set points for alarms shall be adjusted as given in
Table 10.1.
4.3 Leak detectors are to activate audible and
visual alarms located both inside and outside the af-
fected space. The alarm is to be linked to the general
machinery alarm system and is to trip an alarm on the
bridge as well as in the engine control room.
5. Ventilation
5.1 Refrigerating machinery spaces shall have a
suitably arranged, mechanical ventilation system. The
ventilation system shall be activated either manu-
ally or automatically by the detector system. Where
Group 1 refrigerants are used, at least the exhaust air
shall be conveyed into the open air separately from the
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 10 Refrigeration Installations Chapter 8
Page 105

D
ducts serving other spaces. The air intake duct shall
not be connected to the ventilation system serving the
accommodation.
5.2 Where ammonia is used, the ventilation sys-
tem shall not be connected to systems serving other
spaces of the vessel.
5.3 The rating of mechanical fans is subject to the
following criteria:
a) Refrigerating machinery spaces where Group 1
refrigerants are used are to be equipped with
mechanical means of ventilation enabling the air
to be changed at least 30 times/hour.
b) Where the refrigerant used is ammonia, the
minimum flow rate of the mechanical fans serv-
ing the refrigerating machinery spaces is to be
calculated by applying the formula:
V
(punkt)
= 60 G

[m
3
/h]
V
(punkt)
= flow rate [m
3
/h]
G = weight of the refrigerant charge [kg]
In any case, the number of air changes per hour may
not be less than 40.
Where installations operated on ammonia are
equipped with an effective water sprinkler system
arranged in the refrigerating machinery space, the
minimum flow rate of the fans specified above may be
reduced by 20 %.
5.4 Where the refrigerant used is CO
2
, the mini-
mum flow rate of the mechanical fans shall be de-
signed for 30 air changes/hour.
5.5 Fans serving refrigerating machinery spaces
shall also be capable of being switched on and off
from outside the space in question. The switches are to
be clearly marked.
5.6 Exhaust air ducts of fans serving refrigerating
machinery spaces are to be gastight inside the vessel.
The exhaust air has to be conveyed in such a way as to
prevent leakage of gas into other vessel's spaces.
E. Refrigerant Compressors
1. General
1.1 Where the compressors are electrically
driven, the motors and other items of electrical plant
shall comply with the Sections 11a 11 l.
1.2 Other compressor drives, like diesel engines,
turbines, etc. shall comply with Section 9b and the
relevant Sections of Chapter 2 Machinery Installa-
tions.
1.3 Air-cooled compressors are to be designed
for an air temperature of at least 45 C.
1.4 Seawater-cooled compressors are to be de-
signed for a minimum inlet temperature of 32 C. The
cooling water spaces of compressors are to be pro-
tected against excessive overpressure by safety valves
or rupture safety devices, unless provided with a free
outlet.
2. Design and construction of refrigerant
compressors
For the design and construction of refrigerant com-
pressors, see GL Rules defined in Chapter 10 Re-
frigerating Installations, Section 1, E.
3. Material testing
Refrigerant compressors and compressor parts are to
be subjected to material testing in accordance with the
GL Rules defined in A.5.
4. Equipment
4.1 Compressors are to be equipped with devices
such as pressure relief valves, rupture discs, etc.
which, if the maximum allowable working pressure is
exceeded, will equalize the pressures on the discharge
and suction sides. Semi-hermetic compressors in
automatic installations may be exempted from this
requirement, provided that they are protected by over-
pressure safety switches and can be operated with
permanently open shutoff valves in such a way that
the safety valves fitted to the installation remain effec-
tive.
4.2 Pressure gauges and thermometers are to be
fitted in accordance with J.2.1 and J.2.2.
4.3 A manufacturer's plate with the following
information is to be fixed to each refrigerant compres-
sor:
manufacturer
year of construction
refrigerant
maximum allowable working pressure PB [bar]
5. Testing
After completion, refrigerant compressors are to be
subjected to a trial run without refrigerant at the manu-
facturer's works and to the pressure and tightness tests
specified in K.
Chapter 8
Page 106
Section 10 Refrigeration Installations I - Part 1
GL 2007

E
F. Pressure Vessels and Apparatus
1. Pressure vessels and apparatus under re-
frigerant pressure
1.1 General
Pressure vessels and apparatus under refrigerant pres-
sure shall comply with the GL Rules in Chapter 2
Machinery Installations, Section 8.
1.2 Material testing
The materials of components under refrigerant pres-
sure must be tested in accordance with the GL Rules
defined in Chapter 2 Machinery Installations, Sec-
tion 8, B.
1.3 Safety devices
1.3.1 Pressure vessels and apparatus which contain
liquid refrigerant and which can be shut off are to be
fitted with a safety valve, see J.1.
1.3.2 Where more than one pressure vessel are
provided with one common safety valve, any closing
device fitted between the pressure vessels is to be
equipped as to secure in the open position. A warning
sign with the following wording is to be fitted in the
vicinity of each closing device:
"Valve is to be secured in open position and may be
closed for repairs only".
1.3.3 Filters and dryers need not be fitted with
safety valves.
1.4 Pressure and tightness tests
After completion, pressure vessels and apparatus un-
der refrigerant pressure are to be subjected to the pres-
sure and tightness tests specified in K.
2. Brine tanks
2.1 General
2.1.1 The term "brine" as a cooling medium means
a solution of industrial salts. The use of other media
with a low freezing point requires the special approval
of GL.
2.1.2 In this context, brine tanks do not include
brine cooling evaporators. The latter shall comply
with the requirements for pressure vessels and appara-
tus under refrigerant pressure, as set out in 1.
2.1.3 Brine tanks shall not be galvanized internally.
2.1.4 Brine systems have to be equipped with air
pipes which cannot be closed off and with brine com-
pensating tanks.
2.1.5 Brine tanks which can be shut off shall be
protected against excessive pressure rises due to the
thermal expansion of the brine by the provision of
safety valves or by mechanism for interlocking the
shutoff devices in the open position.
2.2 Testing
Brine tanks are to be subjected in the manufacturer's
works to the hydraulic pressure and tightness tests
specified in K. Material tests and pneumatic tightness
tests may in general be dispensed with.
3. Refrigerated seawater tanks (RSW)
3.1 Each RSW tank is to be provided with appro-
priate venting and sounding arrangements. The ar-
rangements to assess the liquid levels in the tanks may
be permanently installed or be a temporary arrange-
ment.
3.2 Where a RSW tank is intended to carry dry
fish in bulk, the following arrangements are to be
provided:
the tank is to be provided with a bilge well and a
permanent connection to the bilge system,
unless the tanks are provided with independent
bilge systems
arrangements are to be made for blanking off
sea water piping
4. Air coolers
4.1 General
4.1.1 Air coolers for direct evaporation
1
count as
apparatus under refrigerant pressure and are therefore
subject to the requirements in 1. Notwithstanding this,
safety devices are required only for flooded evapora-
tors.
4.1.2 Air coolers operated by indirect evaporation,
insofar as brine is used as the cooling medium, shall
not be galvanized internally.
4.1.3 Air coolers are to be provided with drip trays
and adequate drains.
4.1.4 Air coolers are to be provided with defrosting
equipment according to M.2.
4.1.5 Air coolers shall be made of corrosion resis-
tant material or be externally protected against corro-
sion by galvanizing.

1
Refrigerating installations with direct evaporation are those
where the refrigerant evaporator is located in the refrigerated
space itself. In such plants no brine or similar cooling medium
is used.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 10 Refrigeration Installations Chapter 8
Page 107

F
4.1.6 Where finned-tube or multi-plate type air
coolers are used, the distance between the fins or
plates shall be not less than 10 mm, at least on the air
inlet side. In this context, the air inlet side is taken to
mean of the length of the cooler measured in direc-
tion of air flow.
4.1.7 Depending on the type of air circulation sys-
tem employed, the air coolers are to be subdivided by
shut offs in such a way that, even after breakdown of
one air cooler section, the cooling of the refrigerated
space can be maintained.
This requirement need however, not be applied in case
of very small spaces.
4.2 Material testing
Materials for air coolers using direct evaporation are
to be subjected to the tests specified in the GL Rules II
Materials and Welding, Part 1 Metallic Materials,
Chapter 2 Steel and Iron Materials, Section 1, F. and
Section 2, D.
In the case of air coolers for indirect evaporation, the
testing of materials may be dispensed with if the cool-
ing medium employed is brine.
G. Pipes, Valves and Fittings
1. Refrigerant pipes, valves and fittings
1.1 General
1.1.1 Refrigerant pipes, valves and fittings are to be
designed in accordance with Section 9d.
Where ammonia is employed for refrigerant, copper,
bronze, brass and other copper alloys are not to be
used.
1.1.2 Refrigerant pipes shall be insulated in accor-
dance with L.1. Steel pipes shall be galvanized exter-
nally, unless other adequate corrosion protection has
been demonstrated to GL.
1.1.3 At points where pipes are supported or pass
through decks or bulkheads, a metallic contact with
steel members of the vessel's structure has to be
avoided.
1.1.4 Where necessary, refrigerant pipes between
compressors and condensers are to be protected
against being inadvertently touched.
1.1.5 Automatic control valves are to be arranged
or fitted with by-passes so that the installation can be
operated by hand.
1.1.6 Flexible refrigerant hoses of non-metallic
materials shall comply with the requirements of the
GL Rules defined in Chapter 2 Machinery Installa-
tions, Section 11, U. Approved hose assemblies and
bellows expansion joints are to be used only.
1.1.7 Shut-off valves are to be provided to allow
the replacement of hose assemblies without loss of
refrigerant.
1.1.8 Pipe sections of CO
2
piping systems which
can be isolated are to be protected by a pressure relief
valve. At least one pressure relief valve is to be fitted
at the CO
2
piping system which ensures safe blow-off
of CO
2
-vapour directly to a safe location above deck.
1.2 Material testing
1.2.1 Materials for refrigerant pipes are to be tested
in accordance with the GL Rules defined in Chapter 2
Machinery Installations, Section 11, B.
1.2.2 Refrigerant valves and fittings are subject to
material testing if their housings are made of cast steel
or nodular graphite cast iron and the product of the
maximum allowable working pressure PB [bar] multi-
plied by the nominal diameter DN [mm] is > 2500.
Valves and fittings with nominal diameter DN 50
are exempted from this requirement.
1.2.3 Where the housings of valves and fittings are
made of grey iron, GL reserve the right to check the
quality of the material. EN-GJL-200 grade material is
to be used as a minimum.
1.2.4 Where the housings of valves and fittings are
manufactured by die-forging or are made of copper
alloys, material testing is not required.
1.3 Pressure and tightness test
1.3.1 Refrigerant valves and fittings are to be sub-
jected in the manufacturers works to the pressure and
tightness tests specified in K.
1.3.2 Automatic control valves can be exempted
from this requirement where sensitive internal compo-
nents may be damaged by the pressure testing. Where
the design permits, the housings are to be tested with-
out internal components in these cases.
1.3.3 After installation, refrigerant pipes are to be
subjected to the tightness test specified in K.2.1.3.
2. Brine pipes, valves and fittings
2.1 General
2.1.1 Brine pipes, valves and fittings have to com-
ply with the requirements set out in Section 9d. They
are not to be galvanized internally, but shall be pro-
tected against corrosion externally.
2.1.2 In general thick-walled pipes in accordance
with Section 9d, group M are to be used.
Chapter 8
Page 108
Section 10 Refrigeration Installations I - Part 1
GL 2007

G
2.1.3 At points where brine pipes are supported or
pass through decks or bulkheads, a metallic contact
with steel members of the vessel's structure has to be
avoided.
2.2 Testing
After being installed but prior to the application of the
insulation, brine piping systems are to be subjected to
the hydraulic pressure tests specified in K. Material
tests may generally be dispensed with.
H. Fans and Pumps
1. Fans
After being installed, the fans are to be tested in ac-
cordance with Q.1.5.
Provision shall be made for replacing fan impellers
and fan motors even when the refrigerated holds are
fully loaded. On fishing vessels with Class Notation K
this requirement may be dispensed with.
2. Refrigerant circulating pumps
2.1 At least two mutually independent pumps are
to be installed, one of which is to act as a stand-by.
On fishing vessels with Class Notation K the stand-by
pump may be dispensed with.
2.2 Evidence of the quality of the materials used
is to be supplied in respect of all parts subject to re-
frigerant pressure. Where housings are made of grey
cast iron, EN-GJL-200 grade material is to be used as
a minimum requirement.
2.3 Refrigerant circulating pumps are to be sub-
jected in the manufacturer's works to a performance
test in presence of a GL Surveyor and to the pressure
and tightness tests specified in K.
3. Brine pumps
3.1 At least two mutually independent pumps are
to be installed, one of which is to act as a stand-by.
On fishing vessels with Class Notation K the stand-by
pump may be dispensed with.
3.2 Brine pumps are to be subjected in the manu-
facturer's works to a performance test in presence of a
GL Surveyor and to the hydraulic pressure and tight-
ness tests specified in K. A pneumatic tightness test is
not required.
4. Cooling water pumps
The requirements set out in 3. are applicable in analo-
gous manner. Regarding the stand-by pumps see I.2.
I. Cooling Water Supply
1. General
Pipes, valves and fittings have to comply with Sec-
tion 9d.
2. Reserve cooling water supply
Where the reserve cooling water supply system of the
refrigerating installation is connected to the cooling
water system of the main propulsion plant, the stand-
by cooling water pump specified in H.4. may be dis-
pensed with provided that the stand-by cooling water
pump of the main propulsion plant is capable of the
adequate supply of cooling water to the refrigerating
installation without adversely affecting the operation
of the main propulsion plant.
3. Suction lines
Each cooling water pump has to be equipped with its
own suction line and shall be able to draw from at
least two sea chests. Seawater filters are to be fitted
and so arranged that they can be cleaned without inter-
rupting the cooling water supply.
4. Dock operation
By suitable connection of the cooling water lines to
ballast water tanks or by hose connections to the deck-
washing line or fire main, measures shall be taken to
ensure that, where necessary, the refrigerating installa-
tion can also be operated while the vessel is docked.
This requirement is not applicable for fishing vessels
with Class Notation K.
5. Cooling water pipes in cargo holds
Where cooling water pipes have to be laid through
cargo holds or refrigerated cargo holds to the refriger-
ating machinery spaces, they are to be installed in pipe
tunnels. In exceptional cases, cooling water pipes may
be installed above deck or in the double bottom tank.
6. Testing
After being installed, cooling water pipes, valves and
fittings are to be subjected to a pressure test specified
in K.
J. Safety and Monitoring Equipment
1. Safety equipment
1.1 General
1.1.1 Provisions are to be made to ensure that the
compressor switches off automatically if the limits are
exceeded, see Table 10.1.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 10 Refrigeration Installations Chapter 8
Page 109

J
1.1.2 Pressure vessels and apparatus which can be
isolated and which contain liquefied refrigerants have
to be equipped with a safety valve, see also F.1.3.
1.1.3 Provision has to be made for the safe blow-
off of refrigerants directly into the open air.
1.2 Safety valves and rupture discs
1.2.1 Safety valves exposed to refrigerant pressure
are subject to the requirements set out in G.1. The
provisions of G.2. are applicable in analogous manner
to safety valves under brine pressure.
1.2.2 Safety valves are to be set to the maximum
allowable working pressure and secured to prevent the
setting being altered inadvertently.
1.2.3 Where a rupture disk is fitted upstream of a
safety valve, the space between the rupture disc and
the safety valve is to be monitored by an alarm pres-
sure gauge or an equivalent device.
A screen is to be fitted downstream the rupture disc to
ensure the function of the safety valve.
The bursting pressure of the rupture disc shall not
exceed the maximum allowable working pressure. A
margin of 10 % is permitted.
2. Monitoring equipment
An overview of the monitoring equipment is contained
in Table 10.1.
2.1 Pressure gauges
The suction and discharge pipes of refrigerant com-
pressors, intermediate stage pressure vessels and pres-
surized brine pipes are to be fitted with pressure
gauges. Refrigerant pressure gauges are required to
have pressure and temperature scales for the refriger-
ant concerned. The maximum allowable working
pressure is to be indicated by a red mark.
2.2 Thermometers
Brine delivery and return pipes, condenser cooling
water inlet and outlet pipes and pressure and suction
pipes of compressors are to be equipped with ther-
mometers.
For the number and disposition of thermometers in
refrigerated cargo holds see N.
2.3 Liquid level indicators
Direct indicators such as sight glasses for liquid re-
frigerants are to be fitted with shut off valves.
The use of tubular glasses is not permitted.
K. Pressure and Tightness Tests
1. General
1.1 All pressure and tightness tests are to be
performed in presence of a GL Surveyor. They are to
be carried out initially during supervision of construc-
tion at the manufacturers works or on board of the
vessel as specified in the relevant parts of this Section.
1.2 As a rule, pneumatic tightness tests are to be
performed after the hydraulic pressure tests.
1.3 Exceptionally, GL may, on application, waive
the hydraulic pressure test provided that a pneumatic
pressure test is performed at a test pressure approved
by GL. In addition regulations for accident prevention
of national authorities are to be observed.
1.4 In refrigerating installations which have al-
ready been charged with refrigerant, pneumatic pres-
sure tests may be performed only with nitrogen or
carbon dioxide if Group 1 refrigerants are used or only
with nitrogen if the refrigerant is ammonia.
The use of other gases requires the agreement of GL.
2. Test pressures
2.1 Components under refrigerant pressure
2.1.1 The hydraulic test pressure is to be 1,5 the
maximum allowable working pressure PB according
to Table 10.2.
2.1.2 Where the low-pressure side of the installa-
tion can be subjected by operational switching to the
pressure of the high pressure side, e.g. for defrosting
with hot gas, the vessels and equipment involved are
to be designed and tested at the pressures prescribed
for the high pressure side.
2.1.3 The pneumatic tightness test pressure is to be
equal to the maximum allowable working pressure PB.
2.2 Components under cooling water or brine
pressure.
The hydraulic test pressure is to be 1,5 the maximum
allowable working pressure PB, but not less than 4 bar.
L. Insulation of Pressure Vessels, Apparatus,
Pipes, Valves and Fittings
1. Cold insulation
1.1 Pressure vessels, apparatus, pipes, valves and
fittings whose operating temperatures may drop below
the ambient temperatures are to be provided with cold
insulation. Components of plants which are accom-
Chapter 8
Page 1010
Section 10 Refrigeration Installations I - Part 1
GL 2007

L
modated in specially insulated refrigerating machinery
spaces are exempted from this requirement.
1.2 Refrigerant and brine pipes which traverse
uncooled spaces are to be insulated with special care
and are to be installed so that they are protected from
damage.
1.3 Air-, sounding-, thermometer- and drain
pipes in refrigerated and air-cooler spaces are to be
adequately insulated.
1.4 Before being insulated, the items concerned
are to be protected against corrosion.
1.5 Cold insulation is to be designed as to pre-
vent the formation of condensation water on its sur-
face at a maximum relative humidity of 90 %.
1.6 The insulation is to be free from discontinui-
ties and its final layer shall be given a vapourtight
coating.
1.7 Insulation is to be protected at points where
there is a danger of damage.
2. Heat insulation
2.1 To avoid premature refrigerant condensation,
hot gas defrosting pipes are to be insulated over their
entire length.
2.2 If insulation is provided to prevent accidental
touching see also G.1.1.4.
2.3 Components requiring insulation are to be
protected against corrosion.
M. Equipment and Insulation of Refrigerated
Spaces
1. Equipment
1.1 The external boundary walls of refrigerated
spaces are to be watertight and made of steel. If the
use of other materials is envisaged, the agreement of
GL is required.
1.2 Manholes in the double bottom or in oil tank
tops are to be surrounded with an oiltight coaming
100 mm in height.
1.3 Brine or refrigerant pipe penetrations through
watertight bulkheads and decks shall be of approved
design. The pipes may not come into direct contact
with bulkheads, vessel's structure or other metal struc-
tural members. The fire resistance of the bulkheads
and decks shall not be impaired.
1.4 The clear openings of access trunkways and
companion hatches leading to cargo or air-cooler
spaces shall not be less than 600 600 mm. Hinged
hatch covers are to be protected against closing acci-
dentally and shall be capable of being reopened by
hand from inside.
1.5 Refrigerated or air-cooler spaces are to be
equipped with an escape leading out to the open deck.
For this purpose, each space is to be provided with at
least one door which can also be opened from inside.
In addition an alarm for operation from within the
space shall be connected to the bridge or permanently
manned machinery control centre (MCC) to prevent
persons being trapped.
1.6 The supporting structures of refrigerated
spaces and inspection passageways are to be designed
to withstand the load expected by the cargo.
1.7 Refrigerated spaces are to be provided with
drains and/or bilge pumping facilities. In this connec-
tion see Section 9d, K.
1.8 For scuppers in the bulkhead deck, see
Section 2.
1.9 Circulating fans and air-coolers installed in
refrigerated or air-cooler spaces have to be accessible
at all times. It shall be possible to change fan impellers
and drive motors even when the cargo spaces are fully
loaded, see also H.1.
If spaces are served by two or more fans having a
capacity that the minimum required temperature can
be maintained under most unfavourable conditions
with anyone fan out of action, this requirement need
not be applied.
2. Defrosting
2.1 Means are to be provided for defrosting air-
coolers. Efficient defrosting is to be ensured even
when refrigerated compartments are loaded to their
maximum.
2.2 Drip trays and drains are to be protected from
freezing by adequate heating arrangements.
2.3 Means are to be provided to protect air cool-
ers from overheating.
3. Insulation
3.1 The inside surfaces of refrigerated spaces are
to be adequately insulated. Thermal bridges are to be
avoided. Structural members of the vessel which may
act as thermal bridges, e.g. decks, partitions and pil-
lars, are to be fully insulated over a length of at least
1 m into the refrigerated space.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 10 Refrigeration Installations Chapter 8
Page 1011

M
3.2 Divisions, bulkheads and decks separating
refrigerated spaces at the same temperature need not
be insulated. However, the requirement in 3.1 is to be
complied with. Cladding is to be fitted to protect the
cargo.
3.3 Insulation materials shall be odourless and
non-hygroscopic as possible. Combined with their
cladding material, it shall be not readily ignitable.
3.4 If timber is used in refrigerated cargo spaces,
this is to be impregnated with, if possible, odourless
media to prevent rotting and fire.
3.5 Insulation is to be permanently secured.
Where insulation in the form of slabs is used, the
edges of the slabs are to abut tightly against each
other.
3.6 The insulation at manhole covers, bilge suc-
tions and wells shall be removable.
3.7 For the insulation of piping in refrigerated
spaces see L.
3.8 The edges of insulated hatches and hatch
covers, doors, bilge covers, etc. are to be protected
against damage.
3.9 At hatches and for about 500 mm beyond, the
deck insulation in lower holds is to be provided with a
special protective covering. The same applies also to
shaft tunnels.
3.10 Unless suitable deck material or aluminium
gratings are provided as top covering, the insulation of
the decks of refrigerated spaces is to be protected by
battens measuring at least 50 mm by 50 mm in cross
section. The battens may take the form of removable
gratings.
3.11 The insulation of the bulkheads of refriger-
ated spaces and of air ducts is to be suitably protected
against damage. This protection is to be so designed
that the cooling air is able to circulate freely.
3.12 Refrigerated spaces should not lie adjacent to
fuel or lubricating oil tanks. Where this cannot be
avoided, a sufficiently wide gap is to be left between
the vertical surfaces of such tanks and the insulation.
This gap is to be provided with a drain leading to the
bilge and with a vent pipe leading to the open air. The
back of the insulation is to be protected against the
penetration of moisture, e.g. by metal cladding.
3.13 The requirements set out in 3.12 apply in
analogous manner to the tops of lubricating oil and
fuel tanks. In the case of welded tank tops, the speci-
fied isolating gap may be dispensed with, provided
that the top is covered with a well established oilproof
coating without joints and of sufficient thickness.
N. Temperature Monitoring Equipment for
Refrigerated Spaces
1. General
1.1 Suitably distributed and easily accessible
thermometers are to be placed in each refrigerated
space. At least one thermometer each is required be-
fore and after each air-cooler.
1.2 Based on spaces of normal geometry and on
the useful volume shown, the following number of
thermometers is to be fitted as a minimum:
for spaces up to approximately 300 m
3
:
2 thermometers
for spaces up to approximately 800 m
3
:
3 thermometers
for spaces over 800 m
3
:
4 thermometers
In determining the number of thermometers required,
each individual refrigerated space is to be considered
separately, even where several spaces are served by a
single air-cooler and the tween decks are not insulated.
1.3 In case of RSW-tanks two thermometers shall
be installed as a minimum.
2. Electrical temperature monitoring equip-
ment
2.1 Where temperatures are not monitored lo-
cally, electrical devices are to be fitted which comply
both with the following requirements and with Sec-
tions 11a 11 l.
2.2 In design and degree of protection, all appli-
ances and other system components shall be compati-
ble with the mechanical and climatic conditions at-
taching to their particular operating environments. If
mobile temperature sensors are provided for refriger-
ated holds they are then to be fitted with connecting
leads of sufficient length and the sensors are to be
protected against mechanical damage.
2.3 Means are to be provided to enable tempera-
ture measuring of cargo holds in case of failure of the
temperature monitoring system. The number of meas-
uring points (sensors) in refrigerated spaces depends
on the configuration and size of each space. The re-
quirements set out in 1.1 and 1.2 are to be complied
with as a minimum.
2.4 The measuring range of the system has to
cover the entire anticipated temperature range plus an
additional 5 K. Temperatures above and below the
measuring range shall not have any harmful effect on
the systems.
Chapter 8
Page 1012
Section 10 Refrigeration Installations I - Part 1
GL 2007

N
2.5 For the accuracy of the temperature meas-
urements and reading the following values are to be
applied:
maximum total error: 0,5 K
scale calibration for analogous measurements:
2,5 mm/K
exceptions subject to GL approval
2.6 Wires and their installation has to comply
with Sections 11a 11 l. Waterproof distribution and
junction boxes shall be used.
2.7 Each temperature measuring system has to be
provided with its own power supply. The power sup-
ply system shall be duplicated.
2.8 Where temperature measuring systems are
supplied by their own power sources or via converters
from the vessels supply system provision shall be
made for easy switching to a stand-by power source.
2.9 Instruments and appliances shall be marked
with their type and number.
2.10 The system and its individual components are
to be subjected to a test in the manufacturer's works
under the supervision of GL.
O. Quick Freezing Installations
1. For pressurized parts of quick freezing instal-
lations, such as plate elements or freezing coils, the
requirements in F. shall be complied with.
2. Spaces for quick freezing installations shall
be in line with the requirements set out in D.3., D.4.
and D.2.1.
P. Spare Parts and Protective Equipment
1. Spare parts
1.1 The extent of spare parts to be carried on
board is indicated in Section 13. In the case of re-
cording instruments, the supply of spare parts is to be
agreed with GL.
1.2 For fishing vessels with Class Notation K the
availability of spare parts for refrigerating installations
should be specially considered and decided upon by
the owner.
2. Protective equipment
2.1 Breathing apparatus
Where any refrigerant harmful to persons is used in
the refrigerating system, at least two sets of breathing
apparatus shall be provided, one of which shall be
placed in a position not likely to become inaccessible
in the event of leakage of refrigerant. Breathing appa-
ratus provided as part of the vessels fire-fighting
equipment may be considered as meeting all part of
this provision provided its location meets both pur-
poses. Where self-contained breathing apparatus are
used, spare cylinders shall be provided.
2.2 The provision of gas masks, respirators, pro-
tective clothing, etc. is also subject to national acci-
dent prevention regulations.
2.3 Operating and emergency advice
Adequate guidance for the safe operation and emer-
gency procedures of the refrigeration system shall be
provided by suitable notices displayed on board of the
vessel.
Q. Shipboard Testing
1. Operational tests
The refrigerating installation is to be subjected to the
following tests.
1.1 All compressors, pumps, fans, etc. are to be
operated individually and simultaneously in all antici-
pated speed ranges.
The operation of the compressors has to be demon-
strated at different evaporating temperatures.
During the test, the compressors are to be connected to
the condensers and evaporators in all combinations
possible in service.
1.2 In case of automatic refrigerating installations
the proper working of the automatic and manual
modes of operation are to be demonstrated.
1.3 The condensers are to be operated with the
main cooling water pump and with the stand-by pump.
The operation of the cooling water supply when the
fishing vessel is in dock, is to be demonstrated in
accordance with I.4.
1.4 Brine pumps are to be tested.
1.5 It is to be demonstrated that the specified air
changes and a uniform air distribution in cargo holds
are achieved.
1.6 The efficient working of the defrosting sys-
tem is to be demonstrated.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 10 Refrigeration Installations Chapter 8
Page 1013

Q
2. Refrigeration test
2.1 A refrigeration test (balance test) is to be
performed to demonstrate to GL the degree of thermal
insulation of the refrigerated spaces/tanks and that the
available refrigerating capacity of the installation
complies with the requirements set out in B.3. and
B.5. The required proof of performance is deemed to
have been supplied if the evaluation of the test by GL
shows that the heat transfer coefficient, on which the
calculation is based, has not been exceeded.
2.2 The temperature in the refrigerating
holds/tanks is to be lowered to the level corresponding
to the refrigerated space/tank temperature specified for
the installation. For this purpose, the temperature
difference between the ambient air and the refrigerated
spaces/tanks shall not be less than 15 K.
Where the test is performed during cold season the test
conditions will be given special consideration by GL.
2.3 Before commencement of the balance test the
agreed refrigerated hold/tank temperature is to be kept
constant for at least 10 hours in order to achieve a
uniform cooling of all parts. At the end of this cooling
period, the refrigerating machinery must be in steady
operating condition.
2.4 The temperature measurements for the bal-
ance test are to be performed for a period of at least
six hours. During this time the outside temperature
shall be constant as possible. Periods of strong solar
radiation are to be avoided.
2.5 During the balance test all machinery and
equipment in use is to be maintained in a steady oper-
ating condition and to be operated manually.
2.6 The number of compressors needed to
achieve the condition of balance is to be fixed so as to
achieve continuous operation. If the capacity of even a
single compressor is too high, the plant has to be oper-
ated intermittently while recording the "on" time. The
switching off of individual cylinders or rows of cylin-
der is not allowed.
2.7 Measurements
The following measurements are to be carried out:
2.7.1 Refrigerated spaces/tanks
The temperatures in refrigerated spaces/tanks and at
the air-coolers are to be measured. In addition, the
temperature curve is to be plotted by means of a tem-
perature recorder.
2.7.2 Ambient conditions and adjacent spaces
The temperatures of the ambient air and of the water
are to be measured as are also the temperatures of
other vessel's spaces adjoining the refrigerated holds/
tanks.
2.7.3 Compressors
Pressure and temperature of the refrigerant on the
suction and pressure sides, speed of the compressors
and the power consumption of the drive motors are to
be measured. In case of semi-hermetic motor com-
pressors, measurement of the speed may be dispensed
with.
2.7.4 Condensers
Outlet temperatures of the refrigerant are to be meas-
ured.
2.7.5 Brine
The temperature of the brine before and after the brine
coolers, the pressure at the brine pump outlets and the
power consumption of the brine pumps are to be
measured.
2.7.6 Circulating fans for the refrigerated spaces
The power consumption of the fan motors is to be
measured.
2.7.7 Measuring intervals
During the balance time recordings are to be made
hourly, otherwise every two hours.
The ambient temperatures outside the refrigerated
holds/tanks, which are required for the evaluation,
shall be measured every hour over a period of 4 to 6
hours prior to the balancing time, depending on the
insulation.
2.8 Reports
After the balance test, the following documents are to
be submitted to GL Head Office:
2.8.1 A diagrammatic drawing of the vessel and the
refrigerated holds/tanks showing the temperature
measuring points.
2.8.2 A test report including all the measured data
and copies of the recorded temperatures as well as
those from the thermograph.
2.8.3 The vessel's draught, for and aft.
Chapter 8
Page 1014
Section 10 Refrigeration Installations I - Part 1
GL 2007

Q
Section 11a

General Requirements and Instructions for Electrical Installations
A. General
1. Scope
1.1 The requirements of the Sections 11a to 11 l
apply to electrical equipment of decked fishing vessels
with a length L 12,0 m. For fishing vessels with a
length L < 24 m reduced requirements may be defined
in different parts of the following Sections.
For other types of ships engaged in the fishery busi-
ness, like fish processing vessels, whale factory ships
or fish transport and flotilla mother ships as well as for
fishing vessels with a length L 45 m, the electrical
installations have to follow the requirements of Chap-
ter 3 Electrical Installations.
1.2 Versions deviating from the Construction
Rules may be approved if they have been tested for
suitability and accepted as equivalent by GL.
1.3 GL reserve the right to specify additional
requirements to the Construction Rules where these
are related to new systems or installations or where
they are necessary because of new knowledge or oper-
ating experience.
1.4 For DC or AC main installations with a volt-
age not exceeding 50 volts and/or a power not exceed-
ing 5 kW, the requirements of the Sections 11a to 11 l
are not wholly applicable. Such installations may be
given special consideration by GL Head Office.
2. Application
2.1 International Torremolinos Convention
Fishing vessels of flag states which have already rati-
fied the Torremolinos International Convention for
fishing vessels with a length L 45 m, see Section 1,
A.3.3, have to follow directly the requirements de-
fined therein.
2.2 European Communities
Fishing vessels with a length L 24 m flying the flag
of a state of the European Community or vessels fish-
ing in the waters of the European Community have to
follow the requirements of the Torremolinos Conven-
tion according to 2.1 overruled by the Commission
Directives defined in Section 1, A.3.3. A copy of the
consolidated text can be delivered by GL.
3. References to other rules and regulations
3.1 Where the requirements for electrical equip-
ment and facilities are not laid down in these Rules,
decision shall be made, wherever necessary, regarding
the use of other regulations and standards. These in-
clude e.g. IEC publications, especially all IEC 60092
publications.
3.2 If necessary, besides of the GL's Construction
Rules for fishing vessels national regulations are to be
observed as well.
4. Design
Electrical installations shall be designed so that:
the maintaining of normal operational and habit-
able conditions provided on board will be en-
sured without recourse to the emergency source
of electrical power
the operation of the equipment required for
safety will be ensured under various emergency
conditions
the safety of crew and vessel from electrical
hazards will be ensured
B. Definitions
1. Power supply installations
The power supply installations comprise all installa-
tions for the generating, conversion, storage and dis-
tribution of electrical energy.
2. Essential equipment
Essential equipment is required to ensure continuity of
the following functions (compare also Section 9a, H.):
the propulsion, manoeuvrability, navigation and
safety of the vessel
the safety of the crew
type-specific equipment on vessels with special
Class Notations, e.g. Certified Fishing Gear
CFG
the maintaining of perfect condition of the
cargo, e.g. on vessels with cargo refrigerating
installations with Class Notation RIC
Essential equipment is subdivided into:
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 11a General Requirements and Instructions for Electrical Installations Chapter 8
Page 11a1

B
primary essential equipment is that required to
be operative at all times to maintain the ma-
noeuvrability of the vessel as regards propulsion
and steering and that required directly for the
primary duty of the fishing vessel.
secondary essential equipment is that required
for the safety of the vessel and the crew and
such equipment which can briefly be taken out
of service without propulsion, steering of the
vessel and equipment needed for the primary
duty of the fishing vessel being unacceptably
impaired.
3. Non-essential equipment
Non-essential equipment is that which temporary
disconnection does not impair propulsion and
steerabiliy of the vessel and does not endanger the
safety of crew, cargo, vessel and machinery.
4. Emergency consumers
Emergency consumers are mandatory consumers
which, after breakdown of the main energy supply,
shall be fed by the emergency energy supply.
5. Electric network
An electric network comprises all equipment/ installa-
tions connected together at the same rated voltage.
5.1 Isolated electric network
This term refers to a system in which a conductor or
the neutral is not connected to the vessel's hull in nor-
mal operation. If it is earthed via measuring or protec-
tive devices with a very high impedance, the system is
likewise deemed to be isolated.
5.2 Electric network with earthed neutral
This is a system in which the neutral is connected to
the vessel's hull in normal operation.
6. Safety voltage
Safety voltage is a protection provision and consists of
a circuit with rated voltage not exceeding 50 V AC,
operated unearthed and isolated safely from supply
circuits exceeding 50 V.
7. Low-voltage systems
Low-voltage systems are systems operating with rated
voltages of more than 50 V up to 1000 V inclusive and
with rated frequencies of 50 Hz or 60 Hz, or direct-
current systems where the maximum instantaneous
value of the voltage under rated operating conditions
does not exceed 1500 V.
8. Machinery spaces
Machinery spaces are spaces in which machines and
equipment are installed and which are accessible only
to authorized persons, e.g. engine rooms.
8.1 Wet operating spaces
Wet operating spaces are spaces in which facilities
may be exposed to moisture, e.g. main engine rooms.
8.2 Dry operating spaces
Dry operating spaces are spaces in which no moisture
normally occurs, e.g. engine control rooms.
8.3 Locked electrical spaces
Locked electrical spaces are spaces which are pro-
vided with lockable doors and are intended solely for
the installation of electrical equipment such as switch-
gear, transformers, etc. They have to be constructed as
dry spaces.
9. Systems
Systems contain all equipment necessary for monitor-
ing, control and safety including the input and output
devices. Systems cover defined functions including
behaviour under varying operating conditions, cycles
and running.
10. Protection devices
Protective devices detect actual values, activate alarms
in the event of limit-value infringement and prevent
machinery and equipment being endangered. They
automatically initiate curative measures or calls for
appropriate ones.
11. Safety devices
Safety devices detect critical limit-value infringements
and prevent any immediate danger to persons, vessel
or machinery.
12. Safety systems
Safety systems are a combination of several safety
devices and/or protection devices into one functional
unit.
13. Alarms
An alarm gives optical and acoustical warning of
abnormal operating conditions.
14. Power electronics
Power electronics are all equipment and arrangements
for generation, transformation, switching and control
of electrical power by the use of semiconductor com-
ponents.
15. Equipment of power electronics
All equipment which directly affect the flow of elec-
trical energy; consist of the functional wired semicon-
ductor elements together with their protection and
cooling devices, the semiconductor transformers or
inductors and the switchgear in the main circuits.
Chapter 8
Page 11a2
Section 11a General Requirements and Instructions for Electrical Installations I - Part 1
GL 2007

B
16. Dead ship condition
"Dead ship" condition means that the complete ma-
chinery plant including the main source of electrical
power are out of operation and auxiliary energy as
compressed air, starting current from batteries, etc. are
not available for the restoration of the main power
supply, for the restart of the auxiliaries and for the
start-up of the propulsion plant. It is however assumed
that the equipment for start-up of the emergency die-
sel-generator is ready for use.
17. Main switchboard
Main switchboard is a switchboard directly supplied
by the main source of electrical power and intended to
distribute electrical energy to the vessel's main and
auxiliary systems.
18. Periodically unattended machinery spaces
Periodically unattended machinery spaces means those
spaces containing main propulsion and associated
machinery and all sources of main electrical supply
which are not at all times manned under all operating
conditions including manoeuvring.
19. Normal operational and habitable condi-
tions
These mean conditions under which the vessel as a
whole, its machinery services, means of main and
auxiliary propulsion, steering gear and associated
equipment, aids to safe navigation and to limit the
risks of fire and flooding, internal and external means
of communicating and signalling, means of escape and
winches for rescue boats are in proper working order
and the minimum comfortable conditions of habitabil-
ity are satisfactory.
C. Documents for Approval
1. Newbuildings
The drawings and documents listed in the following
are to be submitted to GL Head Office in triplicate for
examination at a sufficiently early date to ensure that
they are approved and available to the Surveyor at the
beginning of the manufacture or installation of the
electrical equipment.
The following drawings are to be submitted:
Form F141 (Details of the type and scope of the
electrical systems)
electrical one line diagram
electrical main switchboard and panel boards
electric load analysis
electrical power and lighting systems
emergency electrical systems
short-circuit calculation where total generator
output > 500 kVA
internal communication systems
alarm systems
main and emergency lighting arrangement
navigation lights
propulsion control system
steering gear power and control systems
1.1 The drawings of switchgear and control sys-
tems are to be accompanied by parts lists indicating
the manufacturers and characteristics of the electrical
components, circuit diagrams together with descrip-
tions, where these constitute a necessary aid to under-
standing.
The drawings and documents shall make it clear that
the requirements set out in this Chapter have been
complied with.
1.2 Any non-standard symbols used are to be
explained in a key.
1.3 All documents are to be indicated with the
hull number and the name of the shipyard.
1.4 All documentation shall be submitted in Eng-
lish or German language.
1.5 GL reserve the right to demand additional
documentation if that submitted is insufficient for an
assessment of the installation.
2. Modifications and extensions
Major modifications to the electrical installations of
vessels under construction or in service are subject to
approval. The relevant documents are to be submitted
in ample time prior to the execution of the work.
D. Fishing Vessel's Documentation
When the vessel is commissioned or following major
modifications and extensions of the electrical equip-
ment, at least the documents subject to approval,
specified in C. and showing the final arrangement of
the electrical equipment, are to be supplied on board.
The documents are to be marked with the name or the
yard number of the vessel, the name of the yard and
the date of preparation of the documents.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 11a General Requirements and Instructions for Electrical Installations Chapter 8
Page 11a3

D
E. Ambient Conditions
1. Environmental effects
1.1 The selection, layout and arrangement of all
shipboard machinery, equipment and appliances shall
be such as to ensure faultless continuous operation
under the ambient conditions defined in Section 1, C.
Therefore the manufacturer/supplier shall be informed
by the user about the expected environmental condi-
tions.
1.2 Products are classified according to their
applications into the environmental categories as
stated in Table 11a.1. In type approval Certificates
will be referred to the respective category.
For fishing vessels with L < 24 m GL may accept
deviations from Table 11a.1.
2. Vibrations
2.1 Electrical machinery and appliances are nor-
mally subjected to vibration stresses. Design, con-
struction and installation must in every case take ac-
count of these stresses.
The faultless long-term service of individual compo-
nents shall not be impaired by vibration stresses.
2.2 Assessment, proof and measurement of vibra-
tions shall follow the GL Rules defined in Chapter 3
Electrical Installations, Section 1, E.2.
Table 11a.1 Environmental conditions/ environmental categories
Environmental Conditions
Closed Area Open Deck Area


E
n
v
i
r
o
n
m
e
n
t
a
l

C
a
t
e
g
o
r
y



T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e



r
e
l
a
t
i
v
e



H
u
m
i
d
i
t
y



V
i
b
r
a
t
i
o
n
s



T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e



r
e
l
a
t
i
v
e



H
u
m
i
d
i
t
y



V
i
b
r
a
t
i
o
n
s

Comments
A
0 C
to
+ 45 C
to
100 %
0,7 g
For general applications, except
category B, C, D, F, G, H.
B
0 C
to
+ 45 C
to
100 %
4 g
For application at a higher level
of vibration strain.
C
0 C
to
+ 55 C
to
100 %
0,7 g
For application at a higher degree
of heat.
D
0 C
to
+ 55 C
to
100 %
4 g
For application at a higher degree
of heat and a higher level of vi-
brations strain.
E
0 C
to
+ 40 C
to
80 %
0,7 g
For use in air-conditioned areas.
With GLs special consent only.
F
25 C
to
+ 45 C
to
100 %
0,7 g
For application when additional
influences of salt mist and tempo-
rary inundation are to be ex-
pected.
G
25 C
to
+ 45 C
to
100 %
2,3 g
For use on masts, with the addi-
tional influence of salt mist.
H In accordance with manufacturers specifications
The provisions contained in the
Certificates shall be observed.


Chapter 8
Page 11a4
Section 11a General Requirements and Instructions for Electrical Installations I - Part 1
GL 2007

E
F. Operating Conditions
1. Voltage and frequency variations
1.1 All electrical equipment shall be so designed
that it works faultlessly during the voltage and fre-
quency variations occurring in the normal operation.
The variations indicated in Table 11a.2 are to be used
as a basis.
Table 11a.2 Voltage and frequency variations
Variations
Source of
power
Parameter
Continuous Transient
General
Frequency
Voltage
5 %
+ 6 % - 10 %
10 % (5 s)
20 % (1,5 s)
Storage
batteries
and static
converters
Voltage 20 %
1

1
see 1.2

1.2 If in direct-current systems supplied by stor-
age batteries and static converters the permissible
limits are exceeded, the faultless function of all elec-
trical devices shall be ensured.
1.3 Any larger voltage variations likely because
of the different conditions in distribution systems
supplied by storage batteries and static converters are
to be taken into account. Measures are to be taken to
stabilize the input voltage of specific systems, e.g.
electronic equipment, which cannot operate satisfacto-
rily within the stated limits.
2. Mains quality
2.1 In systems without substantial static converter
load and supplied by synchronous generators, the total
voltage harmonic distortion shall not exceed 5 %.
2.2 In systems fed by static converters and sys-
tems in which the static converter load predominates,
for single harmonics in permanence the limit values
indicated in Fig. 11a.1 apply. The total harmonic dis-
tortion shall not exceed 8 %.
G. Power Supply Systems
1. Low-voltage systems
The following systems are permitted in principle, for
restrictions see 2.:
1.1 For direct current and single-phase alternat-
ing current:
2 wires, with one wire liable to be earthed
single wire with hull return
2 wires insulated from the vessel's hull
1 3 5 7 10 15 25 100
10
5
2
1
0,5
0,2
0,1
n
U

n

/

U

[
%
]

Fig. 11a.1 Limit values for the single harmonics in
the supply voltage. U
v
is the RMS value of
the v-th order harmonic voltage
1.2 For three-phase current (alternating current):
4 wires with neutral earthed, but without hull
return
3 wires with neutral earthed, with hull return
3 wires insulated from the vessel's hull
2. Hull return conduction/system earthing
2.1 Systems with hull return are to be installed
only with special acceptance of GL Head Office.
The hull return system of distribution shall not be used
for power, heating or lighting in vessels for "unre-
stricted service".
2.2 This requirement does not preclude the use
of:
impressed current cathodic protective systems
limited and locally earthed system, such as starter
systems for internal combustion engines or
insulation level monitoring devices provided the
circulation current does not exceed 30 mA under
the most unfavourable conditions
2.3 The connection of the return conductor to the
hull shall be made somewhere easy to check and not
in compartments with isolated bulkheads, e.g. cold
rooms.
3. Systems with earthed neutral
If the selectivity is required in view of the shut-off of
earth faults and additional current-limiting devices are
mounted between the generator neutral point and the
vessel's hull, this shall not impair the selective shut-off
of faulty circuits.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 11a General Requirements and Instructions for Electrical Installations Chapter 8
Page 11a5

G
4. Systems with non-earthed neutral
4.1 In non-earthed systems, the generator neutral
points shall not be connected together.
4.2 The insulation resistance of a distribution
system without earthing of the system is to be moni-
tored and displayed.
H. Voltages and Frequencies
The use of standardized voltages and frequencies is
recommended. The maximum permitted rated main
voltages shall be as shown in Table 11a.3.
Table 11a.3 Maximum permitted rated mains
voltages
Voltage Electrical installations
500 V
For power equipment not removable during
service, emergency power supply, heating and
galley consumers and permanently installed con-
trol circuits.
250 V
For lighting equipment, sockets for general use,
portable appliances with double insulation and/
or protective isolating transformers, machine
control, monitoring and safety equipment
50 V
For portable appliances for working in confined
spaces, in wet rooms, on the open deck, in
stores, engine rooms and other service spaces if
equipment without double insulation and/or
safety isolating transformers is used.


I. Materials and Insulation
1. Electrical machines, cables and devices shall
be resistant to air containing moisture and salt, sea-
water and oil vapours.
They shall not be hygroscopic and shall be flame
retardant and self-extinguishing. The insulation of
windings need not be flame-retardant.
Units of standard industrial type may be used in areas
not liable to be affected by salty sea air.
2. The evidence of flame-retardation shall be
according to IEC Publication 60092-101 or other
equivalent standards, e.g. IEC publication 60695-11-
10 or UL94. Cables shall correspond to IEC publica-
tion 60332-1.
3. Materials with a high tracking resistance are
to be used as supports for life parts.
J. Protection and Protective Measures
1. Protection against foreign bodies and wa-
ter
The protection of electrical appliances against foreign
bodies and water must be appropriate to the particular
place of installation. The minimum degrees of protec-
tion are set out in Table 11a.4.
When the machines, appliances and control panels do
not have these types of protection, adequate protection
shall be carried out during installation. The degree of
protection of the appliance as installed shall also be
ensured during operation.
For carrying out the types of protection, see IEC Pub-
lication 60529.
2. Protection against electric shock
2.1 Protection against direct contact
Protection against direct contact comprises all the
measures taken to protect persons against the dangers
arising from contact with the live parts of electrical
facilities. Live parts are conductors and conductive
parts of facilities which in normal operating condition
are under voltage.
2.1.1 Electrical facilities have to be so designed
that, when they are used properly, persons cannot
touch or come dangerously close to live parts. For
exceptions see 2.1.2.
2.1.2 In locked electrical service spaces, protection
against direct contact is already maintained by the
mode of installation. Insulated handrails are to be
fitted near live parts.
2.2 Protection against indirect contact
Electrical facilities must be made in such a way that
persons are protected against dangerous contact volt-
ages in the event of an insulation failure.
For this purpose, the construction of the facilities shall
incorporate one of the following protective measures:
protective earthing, see 2.3, or
protection by extra-low voltage (max. rated
voltage AC 50 V and DC 120 V; in certain cases
the voltage shall be lower in accordance with
IEC publication 60364-4-41), or
protection by electrical separation for supplying
one consuming device only (voltage not exceed-
ing 250 V), or
protection by double insulation, or
In case where special precautions against elec-
tric shock will be necessary, the additional usage
of residual current protective devices 30 mA
(not for essential equipment).
Chapter 8
Page 11a6
Section 11a General Requirements and Instructions for Electrical Installations I - Part 1
GL 2007

J
Table 11a.4 Minimum degrees of protection against foreign bodies and water (in conformity with publica-
tion IEC 60529)
Equipment

Location



Generators,
motors,
transformers
1



Switchgear,
electronic
equipment
and recording
devices
1

Communication
equipment, dis-
play and input
units, signalling
equipment,
switches, power
sockets, junction
boxes and con-
trol elements
1



Heating
appliances
heaters and
cooking equip-
ment



Lighting fittings
Locked dry electrical
service rooms
IP 00 IP 00 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20
Dry spaces, service rooms
dry control rooms,
accommodation
IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20
Wheelhouse, radio room,
control stations
IP 22 IP 22 IP 22 IP 22 IP 22
Wet spaces (e.g. machinery
spaces, bow thruster room,
ventilation ducts (internal),
pantries, provision rooms,
store rooms
IP 22 IP 22 IP 44
2
IP 22 IP 22
Machinery spaces below
floor (bilge), separator and
pump rooms, refrigerated
rooms, galleys, laundries,
bathrooms and shower
rooms
IP 44 IP 44 IP 55
2, 3
IP 44
3
IP 34
3

Pipe tunnels, ventilation
trunks (to open deck),
cargo holds
IP 55 IP 55 IP 55
2
IP 55 IP 55
Open decks IP 56 IP 56 IP 56 IP 56 IP 55
Notes
1
For the degree of protection for the equipment of watertight doors, see Section 2, B.2.
Motors and associated control and monitoring equipment : IP X7
Door position indicators : IP X8
Door-closure warning devices : IP X6
2
For the degrees of protection for measuring chamber of smoke detectors : IP 42
3
For the degrees of protection for bathrooms and shower rooms, see Section 11i, C.2.

2.3 Protective earthing
Touchable conductive parts of equipment which are
normally not live, but which are liable under fault
conditions to become live part, are to be earthed.
Where such earthing is not effective by fastening or
mounting, protective earthing conductors are to be
used.
For the earthing of cable shielding, armouring and
braids see Section 11j, D.8.
2.4 Protective earthing conductors
The following points are to be noted with regard to the
use of earthing conductors:
2.4.1 An additional cable or an additional wire with
a green/yellow coded core shall be provided as an
earthing conductor, or the connection cable shall con-
tain a green/yellow coded core. Cable braids and ar-
mouring shall not be used as earthing conductors.
2.4.2 A conductor normally carrying current shall
not be used simultaneously as an earthing conductor,
nor may it be connected with the latter to the vessel's
hull. The green/yellow coded core shall not be used as
a current-carrying conductor.
2.4.3 The cross-section of the earthing conductor
shall at least conform to the values indicated in Table
11a.5.
2.4.4 Machines and devices which are insulated
mounted are to be earthed by flexible cables, wires or
stranded copper straps.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 11a General Requirements and Instructions for Electrical Installations Chapter 8
Page 11a7

J
Table 11a.5 Cross-sections for earthing conductors
Minimum cross-section of
earthing conductor
Cross-
section
of outer
conductor

[mm
2
]
in insulated
cables

[mm
2
]
separately
laid

[mm
2
]
flexible
cables
and wires
[mm
2
]
0,5
to
4
equal to
cross-section
of outer
conductor
equal to
cross-section
of outer
conductor
but not less
than 1,5 for
stranded and
4 for solid
earth
conductor
> 4
to
16
equal to
cross-section
of outer
conductor
equal to
cross-section
of outer
conductor
> 16
to
35
16
>35
to
< 120
equal to
half the
cross-section
of outer
conductor
equal to
half the
cross-section
of outer
conductor
but not less
than 4
120 70 70
equal to
cross-section
of outer
conductor
but not less
than 16


2.4.5 The connection of the earthing conductor to
the vessel's hull shall be located at a point where it can
easily be checked. Connections of earthing conductors
shall be protected against corrosion.
2.4.6 Insulated mounted structures and aluminium
structures have to be connected to the vessel's hull by
special conductors at several points. The connections
shall have a high electrical conductivity and shall be
corrosion-resistant. The minimum cross-section is 50
mm
2
per conductor.
3. Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
3.1 Electrical and electronic equipment shall not
be impaired in their function by electromagnetic en-
ergy. General measures are to extend with equal im-
portance over:
decoupling of the transmission path between
source of interference and equipment prone to
interference
reduction of the causes of interference sources
reduction of the susceptibility to interference
3.2 The IEC publications 60533 and 60945 for
the bridge and deck zone are to be observed.
3.3 The requirements for electrical and electronic
equipment subject for mandatory type approval re-
garding immunity and emissions of electromagnetic
influence can be taken from GL Rules VI Additional
Rules and Guidelines, Part 7 Guidelines for the
Performance of Type Approvals, Chapter 2 Test
Requirements for Electrical/Electronic Equipment and
Systems.
3.4 Electrical and electronic equipment on board
ships, required neither by Classification Rules nor by
international conventions, liable to cause electromag-
netic disturbance shall be of a type which fulfils the
test requirements of the GL Rules VI - Additional
Rules and Guidelines, Part 7 - Guidelines for the Per-
formance of Type Approvals, Chapter 2 - Test Re-
quirements for Electrical/Electronic Equipment and
Systems, Section 3, B.21. and B.22.
4. Lightning protection
Lightning protection shall be implemented in accor-
dance to IEC publication 60092-401.
K. Explosion Protection
Where a potential explosion risk exists in or near any
space, all electrical equipment and fittings installed in
those spaces should be either explosion-proof or in-
trinsically safe to the satisfaction of the competent
Authority. Furthermore the requirements in Chapter 3
Electrical Installation, Section 1, K.3. have to be ob-
served.
L. Spare Parts
1. In order to be able to restore machinery op-
eration and manoeuvring capability of the vessel in the
event of damage at sea spare parts for the main pro-
pulsion plant and the essential equipment shall be
available aboard of each vessel together with the nec-
essary tools.
2. The amount of spare parts for unrestricted
service and for Class Notations M, K and W have to
be agreed with GL.
3. The amount of spare parts shall be docu-
mented and a corresponding list shall be carried
aboard.
Chapter 8
Page 11a8
Section 11a General Requirements and Instructions for Electrical Installations I - Part 1
GL 2007

L
Section 11b

Installation of Electrical Equipment
A. General
1. Equipment location
1.1 Electrical equipment is to be so placed or
protected as to minimize the probability of mechanical
injury or damage from the accumulation of dust, oil
vapours, steam or dripping liquids. Skylights and ven-
tilators are to be so arranged as to avoid the probabil-
ity of flooding the apparatus.
1.2 In spaces where flammable mixtures are
liable to collect and in any compartment assigned
principally to the containment of an accumulator bat-
tery, no electrical equipment should be installed unless
GL is satisfied that it is:
essential for operational purposes
of a type which will not ignite the mixture con-
cerned
appropriate to the space concerned
appropriately certified for safe usage in the
dusts, vapours or gases likely to be encountered
2. Protection from bilge water
All generators and motors are to be so arranged that
they cannot be damaged by bilge water and, if neces-
sary, a watertight coaming is to be provided to form a
well around the base of such equipment with provision
for removing water from the well.
B. Generators, Electrical Sources
1. Main generators
The main generators are to be installed in the main
engine room or in a separate auxiliary engine room.
Generators shall not be installed forward of the colli-
sion bulkhead below the bulkhead deck.
2. Emergency generators, emergency sources
The emergency source of electrical power is to be
located outside the machinery spaces and is to be so
arranged as to ensure its functioning in the event of
fire or other causes of failure of the main electrical
installations.
As far as practicable, the room containing the emer-
gency source of power, the associated transformers, if
any, the transitional source of emergency power and
the emergency switchboard shall be located above the
uppermost continuous deck and may not adjoin the
boundary surfaces of the machinery space or of those
spaces containing the main power source, the associ-
ated transformers, if any, or the main switchboard.
C. Storage Batteries
1. Location
Storage batteries shall be installed in such a way that
persons cannot be endangered and equipment cannot
be damaged by exhausted gases or leaked-out electro-
lytes.
1.1 Storage batteries shall be so installed as to
ensure accessibility for changing of cells, inspection,
testing, topping-up and cleaning. Storage batteries
shall not be installed in the accommodation area or in
cargo holds. An exception may be granted for gastight
cells, such as those used in emergency lamps, where
charging does not result in the development of harm-
ful gases.
1.2 Storage batteries shall not be installed in
positions where they are exposed to excessively high
or low temperatures, water spray or other factors liable
to impair their serviceability or shorten their service
life. The minimum degree of protection required is
IP 12.
1.3 When installing storage batteries, attention is
to be paid to the capacity of the associated chargers.
The charging power is to be calculated as the product
of the maximum charger current and the rated voltage
of the storage battery.
Depending on the operating mode, application and
duty of the storage battery to be charged, and on the
mode of the charging (charger characteristic), and by
agreement with GL, the calculation of the charging
capacity need not be based on the maximum current.
For the typical automatic IU- charging the calculation
is stated under 3.
1.4 Storage batteries shall be prevented from
sliding. The constraints shall not hinder ventilation.
2. Battery-room equipment
2.1 Only explosion-protected lamps, switches,
fan motors and space-heating appliances shall be in-
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 11b Installation of Electrical Equipment Chapter 8
Page 11b1

C
stalled in battery rooms. The following minimum
requirements shall be observed:
explosion group II C
temperature class T 1
Other electrical equipment is permitted only with the
special approval of GL.
2.2 Where leakage is possible, the inner walls of
battery-rooms, boxes and cupboards, and all supports,
troughs, containers and racks, shall be protected
against the injurious effects of the electrolyte.
3. Ventilation of spaces containing batteries
3.1 General requirements
All battery-installations, except for gastight batteries,
in rooms, cabinets and containers shall be constructed
and ventilated in such a way as to prevent the accumu-
lation of ignitable gas mixtures. Gastight NiCd-,
NiMH- or Li-batteries need not be ventilated.
3.2 Batteries installed in switchboards with
charging power up to 0,2 kW
Lead batteries with a charging power up to 0,2 kW
may be installed in switchboards without separation to
switchgear and without any additional ventilation, if:
a) the batteries are valve regulated (VRLA), pro-
vided with solid electrolyte
b) the battery cases are not closed completely (IP
2X is suitable)
c) the charger is regulated automatically by an IU
controller with a maximum continuous charging
voltage of 2,3 V/cell and rated power of the
charger is limited to 0,2 kW
3.3 Ventilated spaces with battery charging
power up to 2 kW
Batteries may be installed in ventilated cabinets and
containers arranged in ventilated spaces (except rooms
mentioned in 1.1)
The unenclosed installation (IP 12) in well ventilated
positions in machinery spaces is permitted.
Otherwise batteries shall be installed in ventilated
battery cabinets or containers.
The charging power for automatic IU-charging shall
be calculated as follows:
P = U I
I = 8 K/100 for Pb- batteries
I = 16 K/100 for NiCd- batteries
P = charging power [W]
U = rated battery voltage [V]
I = charging current [A]
K = battery capacity [Ah]
The gassing voltage shall not be exceeded. If several
battery sets would be used, the sum of charging power
has to be calculated.
The room free air volume shall be calculated depend-
ing on battery size as follows:
V = 2,5 Q
Q = f 0,25 I n
V = room free air volume [m
3
]
Q = air quantity [m
3
/h]
n = number of battery- cells in series connection
f = 0,03 for lead batteries with solid electrolyte
f = 0,11 for batteries with fluid electrolyte
If several battery sets would be installed in one room,
the sum of air quantity shall be calculated.
Where the room volume or the ventilation is not suffi-
cient, enclosed battery cabinets or containers with
natural ventilation into suitable rooms or areas shall be
used.
The air ducts for natural ventilation shall have a cross-
section as follows, assuming an air speed of 0,5 m/s:
A = 5,6 Q
A = cross-section [cm
2
]
The required minimum cross-sections of ventilation
ducts are shown in Table 11b.1
Small air ducts and dimensions of air inlet and outlet
openings shall be calculated based on lower air speed.
Table 11b.1 Cross-section of ventilation ducts
Calculation based on battery charging power
(automatic IU- charging)
Cross-section [cm
2
] Battery
charging
power
[W]
Lead
battery
solid
electrolyte
VRLA
Lead
battery
fluid
electrolyte
Nickel-
Cadmium
battery
< 500
500 < 1000
1000 < 1500
1500 < 2000
2000 < 3000
40
60
80
80
80
60
80
120
160
240
80
120
180
240
forced-
ventilation
> 3000 forced ventilation

Chapter 8
Page 11b2
Section 11b Installation of Electrical Equipment I - Part 1
GL 2007

C
3.4 Ventilated rooms with battery charging
power more than 2 kW
Batteries exceeding charging power of 2 kW shall be
installed in closed cabinets, containers or battery
rooms forced ventilated to open deck area. Lead bat-
teries up to 3 kW may be ventilated by natural means.
Battery rooms shall be arranged according to 2.
3.5 Ventilation requirements
Ventilation inlet and outlet openings shall be so ar-
ranged to ensure that fresh air flows over the surface
of the storage battery.
The air inlet openings shall be arranged below and air
outlet openings shall be arranged above.
If batteries are installed in several floors, the free
distance between them shall be at least 50 mm.
Devices which obstruct the free passage of air, e.g.
fire dampers and safety screens, shall not be mounted
in the ventilation inlet and outlet ducts of battery
rooms. If necessary, weather tight closures shall be
carried out otherwise.
Air ducts for natural ventilation shall lead to the open
deck directly.
Openings shall be at least 0,9 m above the cupboard/
boxes. The inclination of air ducts shall not exceed
45 from vertical.
3.6 Forced ventilation
If natural ventilation is not sufficient or required
cross-sections of ducts according to Table 11b.1 are
too big, forced ventilation shall be provided.
The air quantity Q shall be calculated according to 3.3.
The air speed shall not exceed 4 m/s.
Where storage batteries are charged automatically,
with automatic start of the fan at the beginning of the
charging, arrangements shall be made for the ventila-
tion to continue for at least 1 h after completion of
charging.
Wherever possible, forced ventilation exhaust fans
shall be used.
The fan motors shall be either certified safe type with
a degree of protection IIC T1 and resistant to electro-
lyte or, preferably, located outside of the endangered
area.
Fans are to be of non-sparking construction.
The ventilation systems shall be independent of the
ventilation systems serving other rooms. Air ducts for
forced ventilation shall be resistant to electrolyte and
shall lead to the open deck.
4. Emergency power supply
The location in which storage batteries for the emer-
gency power supply are installed shall fulfil the same
conditions as required for the installation of the emer-
gency generator, see B.2.
5. Batteries for starting of internal combus-
tion engines
5.1 Batteries for starting of internal combustion
engines shall be installed near the engine.
5.2 For the rating of the batteries, see Section 9b,
H.3.
6. Caution labels
The doors or the covers of battery rooms, cupboards
or boxes shall be fitted with caution labels prohibiting
the exposure of open flames and smoking in, or close
to, these spaces.
7. Recording of the type, location and main-
tenance cycle of batteries
7.1 Where batteries are fitted for use for essential
and emergency services a schedule of such batteries is
to be compiled and maintained. The schedule, which
is to be approved by GL, is to include at least the fol-
lowing information regarding the battery(ies):
type and manufacturer's type designation
voltage and ampere-hour rating
location
equipment and/or system(s) served
maintenance/replacement cycle dates
date(s) of last maintenance and/or replacement
for replacement batteries in storage, the date of
manufacture and shelf life
1

7.2 Procedures are to be put in place to ensure
that where batteries are replaced that they are of an
equivalent performance type.
D. Power Transformers
1. Transformers shall be installed at readily
accessible and adequately ventilated rooms.
2. Open transformers with IP 00 degree of pro-
tection may be installed in dry and locked electrical
service rooms.

1
Shelf life is the duration of storage under specified conditions
at the end of which a battery retains the ability to give a speci-
fied performance.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 11b Installation of Electrical Equipment Chapter 8
Page 11b3

D
3. The location of transformers for the main
electrical power supply shall fulfil the same conditions
as those applying to the installation of the main gen-
erator, see B.1.
4. The location of transformers for the emer-
gency power supply shall fulfil the same condition as
those applying to the installation of the emergency
source of electrical power, see B.2.
E. Electronics
1. Power electronic equipment and central units
for information processing shall be installed in readily
accessible and adequately ventilated spaces.
2. The heat generated in the unit shall be re-
moved in a suitable manner. Where electronic equip-
ment is installed in engine rooms or other spaces with
enhanced danger of pollution and corrosion, air filters
shall be provided if necessary.
F. Switchboard
1. Main switchboards
1.1 Normally main switchboards shall be in-
stalled relative to the main generators in such a way
that the normal electricity supply can only be impaired
if a fire or other damage occur in the same room. In-
stallation in a separate control room is permissible.
1.2 If installed on the floor above the bilge, the
main switchboard must be completely sealed from
below.
Pipework with flanges or fittings and air ducts are to
be run in such a way that the switchgear is not endan-
gered in the event of leaks.
1.3 The control passage in front of the main
switchboard shall be wide enough to afford an ade-
quate view for the operation of the board.
A sufficiently wide passageway is to be provided
behind the free-standing panels where these have to be
accessible from behind for operation and maintenance.
1.4 The floor in front of main switchboards with
an operating voltage of more than 50 V has to be pro-
vided with insulating gratings or mats and where nec-
essary behind.
The insulation shall be done by a suitable insulating
mat (e.g. according to IEC publication 61111).
2. Emergency switchboards
The emergency switchboard shall be installed close to
the emergency generator and/or the emergency bat-
tery, though not in the same room of the emergency
battery for reasons of explosion protection.
The place of installation shall satisfy the same condi-
tions as apply to the installation of the emergency
generator, see B.2.
The installation of the emergency switchboard is sub-
ject to the same conditions as in 1.2, 1.3 and 1.4.
Chapter 8
Page 11b4
Section 11b Installation of Electrical Equipment I - Part 1
GL 2007

F
Section 11c

Power Supply Installations
A. Electrical Power Demand
1. A power balance of the electrical equipment
has to be submitted to proof the sufficient ratings of
units for the generating, storage and transformation of
electrical energy.
1.1 The power demand has to be determined for
the following operating conditions:
navigation at sea
fishing
emergency power supply
1.2 Extreme environmental conditions, e.g. arctic
or tropical conditions, appropriate to the vessel's area
of operation are also to be taken into account.
2. In the case of fishing vessels with Class No-
tation RIC for classified refrigeration installations
according to Section 10 account is also to be taken of
the power required for refrigeration systems and pres-
ervation of the catch.
B. Main Electrical Power Supply
1. Design
1.1 Where electrical power constitutes the only
means of maintaining auxiliary services essential for
propulsion, manoeuvring and the safety of the vessel,
a main source of electrical power shall be provided
which shall include at least two generating sets, one of
which may be driven by the main engine (shaft gen-
erator). GL Head Office may accept other arrange-
ments having equivalent electrical capability.
1.2 The power of these sets shall be such as to
ensure the functioning of the services referred to in
Section 11a, A.4. and in case of Class Notation RIC,
including the power required in preservation of the
catch, in event of any one of these generating sets
being stopped.
1.3 However, in fishing vessels with the Class
Notation K, in the event of any one of the generating
sets being stopped, it shall only be necessary to ensure
the functioning of services essential for propulsion,
manoeuvring and the safety of the vessel. One of the
required generating sets may consist of a generator in
combination with a battery of sufficient capacity.
1.4 The arrangement of the vessel's main source
of electrical power shall be such that the services re-
ferred to in Section 11a, A.4. can be maintained in all
seas and under all navigating and manoeuvring condi-
tions, even when the vessel is stopped.
1.5 Where transformers constitute an essential
part of the supply system required herein, the system
shall be so arranged as to ensure continuity of the
supply.
1.6 Dead ship condition
The fishing vessel machinery installations shall be so
designed, that they can be brought to operation from
"dead ship" condition as defined in Section 11a, B.16.
2. Rating and control of generator sets
2.1 Supply voltage
Vessel's service generator sets are to have voltage
regulation characteristics so that the vessel's supply
voltage may be maintained within 3 %.
2.2 Steady short circuit current
2.2.1 With a terminal short circuit on three phases
of a generator, the steady short circuit current shall not
be less than three times or greater than six times the
rated current. The alternator and its exciter shall be
capable of withstanding the steady short circuit current
for two seconds without damage.
2.2.2 Exemptions from these requirements may be
allowed where it is demonstrated in particular in-
stances that provision has been made for short circuits
in the vessel's mains to be selectively disconnected at
lower steady short circuit currents.
2.3 Voltage drop
The apparent power of three-phase alternators shall be
such that no admissible voltage drops occur in the
vessels mains due to normal starting currents. Start-
ing of the motor with the highest starting current may
on no account cause a voltage drop capable of stalling
consumers already in service.
2.4 Parallel operation
In general when the vessel's service installation is such
that two or more generators are to be operated in par-
allel, the load on any generator is not to differ more
than plus or minus 15 % of its rated Kilowatt load
from its proportionate share, based on the generator
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 11c Power Supply Installations Chapter 8
Page 11c1

B
ratings, of the combined load for any steady-state con-
dition in the combined load between 20 % and 100 %
of the sum of the rated loads of all generators.
2.5 Prime movers
The regulators of the driving machines of 3-phase and
single phase alternator groups have to permit an ad-
justment to obtain, at normal frequency, a regulation
of the load of the driving machines between 5 % and
+ 5 % of the total load.
3. Shaft driven generator systems
3.1 On vessels with remote control from the
wheelhouse it is necessary to ensure that when ma-
noeuvres, preventing the continued operation of the
shaft driven generator plant are initiated, the supply to
consumers and controls essential for propulsion, ma-
noeuvring and steering is automatically restored as
quick as possible.
3.2 Approval may be given for the use of standby
sets which are started up by remote control from the
bridge and are able to assume the supply automatically.
4. Availability of the main electrical source
4.1 In vessels for unrestricted service and pro-
vided with periodically unattended machinery space
the main source of electrical power shall be supplied
as follows:
4.1.1 Where the electrical power can normally be
supplied by one generator, there shall be provided
suitable load shedding arrangements to ensure the
integrity of supplies to services required for propul-
sion and steering. To cover the case of loss of the
generator in operation, there shall be adequate provi-
sions for automatic starting and connecting to the
main switchboard of a stand-by generator of sufficient
capacity to permit propulsion and steering and with
automatic restarting of the essential auxiliaries includ-
ing, where necessary, sequential operations.
Means may be approved in the wheelhouse for remote
(manual) starting and connection of the stand-by gen-
erator to the main switchboard as well as means of
repeated remote starting of essential auxiliaries.
4.1.2 If the electrical power is normally supplied
by more than one generating set simultaneously, there
shall, be provisions, e.g. by load shedding, to ensure
that in case of loss of one of these generating sets, the
remaining ones are kept in operation without overload
to permit propulsion and steering.
4.2 Where required to be duplicated, other auxil-
iary machinery essential to propulsion shall be fitted
with automatic change-over devices allowing transfer
to a stand-by machine. An alarm shall be given on
automatic change-over. Stand-by circuits are to be
provided to enable sets of the same type to operate
alternatively.
C. Emergency Electrical Power Supply
1. Serving time
A self contained emergency source of electrical power
is to be provided capable of serving the consumers
defined under 3. on all vessels for 18 hours, on fishing
vessels with Class Notation K for 3 hours.
2. Class Notation K
On fishing vessels with Class Notation K and with
electrical main source backed up by a battery, the
emergency consumers may be supplied by this system.
The capacity of the battery shall be capable of serving
the main and emergency consumers for the required
time.
3. Consumers
The emergency source of electrical power shall be
capable, having regard to starting current and transi-
tory nature of certain loads, of serving simultaneously
the following consumers:
3.1 The VHF radio station and if applicable:
MF radio
ship earth station
MF/HF radio
3.2 Internal communication equipment, fire de-
tecting systems and signals which may be required in
an emergency.
3.3 The navigation lights if solely electrical.
3.4 The following emergency lights:
a) of lifeboat/liferaft launching stations and over
the side of the vessel
b) in all alleyways, stairways and exits
c) in spaces containing machinery or the emer-
gency source of power
d) in control stations and wheelhouse
e) in fish handling and fish processing spaces
3.5 The operation of the emergency fire pump, if
any.
4. Type of source
The emergency source of electrical power may be
either a generator or an accumulator battery.
4.1 Where the emergency source of electrical
power is a generator, it shall be provided with an in-
dependent fuel supply and with an automatic starting
and switch-over system.
Chapter 8
Page 11c2
Section 11c Power Supply Installations I - Part 1
GL 2007

C
Unless a second independent means of starting the
emergency generator is provided, the single source of
stored energy shall be protected to preclude its com-
plete depletion by the automatic starting system.
4.2 Where the emergency source of electrical
power is an accumulator battery it shall be capable of
carrying the emergency load without recharging whilst
maintaining the voltage of the battery throughout the
discharge period within plus or minus 12 % of its
nominal voltage. In the event of failure of the main
power supply this accumulator battery shall be auto-
matically connected to the emergency switchboard
and shall immediately supply at least those services
specified in 3.1 to 3.4.
The emergency switchboard shall be provided with an
auxiliary switch allowing the battery to be connected
manually in case of failure of the automatic connec-
tion system.
4.3 An indication of inadmissible battery dis-
charge (emergency source of electrical power) shall be
provided at the main switchboard or in the machinery
control room.
5. The emergency source of electrical power
and automatic starting equipment shall be so con-
structed and arranged as to enable adequate testing to
be carried out by the crew while the vessel is in oper-
ating condition.
6. The emergency source of electrical power
may be used for starting up the main propulsion plant
from the dead ship condition provided that its capacity
is sufficient to supply the emergency services at the
same time.
7. Provided that suitable measures are taken for
safeguarding independent emergency operation under
all circumstances, the emergency generator may be
used exceptionally and for short periods to supply
non-emergency circuits.
D. Operation of Emergency Generator in Port
The emergency generator may be used during lay time
in the harbour for the main power supply considering
the requirements of Chapter 3 Electrical Installa-
tions, Section 3, D.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 11c Power Supply Installations Chapter 8
Page 11c3

D


Section 11d

Installation Protection and Power Distribution
A. General
1. Generator protection
1.1 Generators shall be protected against short
circuits and overloads.
1.2 Generators of less than 50 kVA not arranged
for parallel operation may be protected by fuses. All
generators of 50 kVA or above are to be protected by
a circuit breaker providing long-time overcurrent
protection not exceeding 15 % above either full-load
rating on continuous-rated machines or the overload
rating of special-rated machines.
The shutting down of the prime mover is to cause the
tripping of the vessel service generator circuit breaker.
1.3 Alternating-current generator circuit breakers
are to be provided with short-time delay short-circuit
trips. The time delay should be up to about 500 milli-
seconds.
1.4 Direct-current generator circuit breakers are
to be provided with short-circuit trips set below the
maximum generator short-circuit current with a time
delay up to about 200 milliseconds. This trip is to be
set at the lowest value of current which will coordinate
with the trip settings of feeder circuit breakers sup-
plied by the generator.
1.5 Selective tripping is to be provided between
generator and feeder protective devices to ensure the
proper coordination indicated in 1.3 and 1.4. In cir-
cuits supplying essential services, selective tripping is
also to be provided between feeder and branch-circuit
protective devices and each protective device associ-
ated with essential services is to have an interrupting
rating not less than the maximum short-circuit current
possible at the point of installation.
1.6 Direct-current generators arranged for paral-
lel operation are to be provided with reverse-current
circuit breaker trips, see C.2.
1.7 Generator protection devices are subject to
mandatory type approvals.
2. Reverse-power protection
Alternating-current generators arranged for parallel
operation are to be provided with reverse-power relay.
3. Switchgear
3.1 General
3.1.1 Each non-earthed conductor shall be switched
and protected against short circuit and overload.
3.1.2 When tripped due to overcurrent, generator
circuit breakers have to be ready for immediate recon-
nection. The use of thermal bi-metallic release for
generators used to supply essential consumers is not
permitted.
3.1.3 Generator circuit breakers shall be provided
with a reclosing inhibitor which prevents automatic
reclosure after tripping due to a short circuit.
3.2 Single operation
The following devices are to be provided:
A three pole circuit breaker with time-delayed
overcurrent trip and short-time delayed short
circuit trip. For alternators with output ratings of
less than 50 kVA fuses and on-load switches are
also permitted.
Any alternator contactors are to have tripping
time (up to about 500 ms) and are to be designed
to carry at least twice the rated alternator cur-
rent.
3.3 Parallel operation
The following devices are to be provided:
a three-pole circuit breaker with delayed over-
current trip and short-time delay short circuit
trip, and
short-time-delay undervoltage protection and,
with an output per unit of 50 kVA and over, de-
layed reverse power tripping
4. Sychronizing equipment
If an automatic synchronizer is fitted, provision
shall also be made for manual synchronization,
and
protection against parallel connection in oppo-
site phase, e.g. a synchronizer interlock for gen-
erators with an output per unit of 50 kVA and
above has to be provided.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 11d Installation Protection and Power Distribution Chapter 8
Page 11d1

A
B. Emergency Three-Phase Generators
Emergency generators supply the emergency switch-
boards and the connected emergency consumers.
1. Protective equipment and switchgear
Generator protection shall consist of at least:
short circuit protection
overload protection
under voltage protection
However it is permissible for the overload protection
not to disconnect the generator automatically but in-
stead to trigger an optical and acoustical warning
signal at the emergency switchboard and at the main
switchboard.
2. Overload shedding
If the emergency generator is overloaded, consumers
temporarily supplied from the emergency switch-
board, which are not emergency consumers, shall be
automatically disconnected so as to safeguard the
supply to the emergency circuits.
C. Direct Current Generators
1. Single operation
The following devices are to be provided:
A power circuit breaker operating simultane-
ously on all non-earthed poles, with delayed
overcurrent trip and short-time-delay short cir-
cuit trip, or a fuse in each non-earthed pole and
a quick-break on-load switch of sufficient
make/break capacity for the simultaneous dis-
connection of all non-earthed poles.
For generators with an output of 50 kVA and
above circuit breakers are to be provided in
every case.
2. Parallel operation
The following devices are to be provided:
A power circuit breaker with delayed overcur-
rent trip and short-time-delay short circuit trip, a
reverse current trip and short-time-delay under-
voltage protection.
Polarity-reversing facilities.
D. Transformers
1. Transformers shall be protected against short
circuits on the primary side and against overloads on
the secondary side.
2. Overcurrent protection may be dispensed
with in transformers with a rated current of less than
2 A on the secondary side.
E. Storage Batteries
Storage batteries are to be provided with overload and
short circuit protection nearby where they are in-
stalled. Exceptions are made for batteries for preheat-
ing and starting of internal combustion engines, but
their cabling shall be made short circuit proof.
F. Power Electronics
1. Power electronics facilities are to be pro-
tected against overload and short circuit.
2. Inverters intended for supply of emergency
consumers from the emergency battery shall be de-
signed for continuous operation.
G. Shore Connection
1. The shore connection box shall be linked to
the power supply system by permanently laid cables.
2. A device for connection of a protective con-
ductor or a potential equalizer has to provided, if re-
quired.
3. Switching-on of the shore supply shall only
be possible if the switches of the main generators have
been shut-off. Short-term parallel operation of the
vessel's mains and the shore mains for load transfer is
permissible.
4. The shore connection shall be switchable and
it shall be protected against short circuit and overload.
The shore connection box shall be provided at least
with short circuit protection.
5. A voltage indicator shall be provided in the
main switchboard.
6. Facilities shall be provided to compare the
polarity (in the case of direct current) and the phase se-
quence (in the case of three-phase alternating current)
of the shore connection with those of the vessel's mains.
7. The following details shall be indicated on a
plate fitted to the shore connection box:
voltage system
rated voltage
frequency, in case of AC
Chapter 8
Page 11d2
Section 11d Installation Protection and Power Distribution I - Part 1
GL 2007

G
H. Consumer Protective Equipment
1. General
1.1 Protective equipment shall be so selected and
co-ordinated with the generator protection that in the
event of a short circuit the selectivity is safeguarded.
If necessary the evidence is to be proved.
1.2 Every non-earthed conductor in a distribution
circuit shall be protected against overload and short
circuit.
1.3 Where the three phase system is isolated from
the hull the overcurrent protection can be realised in
only 2 conductors, if the disconnection of all phases is
safeguarded.
2. Final supply circuits
2.1 Circuit breakers and motor protection
switches
For a final circuit supplying one consumer with its
own overload protection, it is permissible to provide
short-circuit protection only at the input point. In this
case, fuses two ratings higher than those permissible
for rated operation of the consumer may be used for
continuous duty.
In the case of short-time and intermittent operation,
the rated current of the fuses shall not be greater than
160 % of the rated current of the consumer. The asso-
ciated switches are to be selected in accordance with
the fuse current ratings.
2.2 Where circuit breakers are used, the shortcir-
cuit cutout may be adjusted to a maximum of 15 times
the rated current of the consumer, though not higher
than the anticipated minimum value of the initial
short-circuit alternating current in the circuit con-
cerned. For steering gear equipment circuits, see Sec-
tion 11g, A.
2.3 Circuit breakers and motor protection
switches with insufficient switching capacity shall be
fitted with back-up fuses specified by the manufac-
turer. Automatic circuit breakers without a selectively
graded breaking delay may not be connected in series
in a single line.
2.4 Final supply circuits for lighting shall not be
fused above 16 A. Regarding the number of lighting
fixtures connected to a circuit see I.4.
I. Power Distribution
1. Electrical supply systems
1.1 Regarding permissible supply systems see
Section 11a, G.
1.2 Supply systems with hull return
1.2.1 All final supply circuits shall have all-pole
insulation. The return conductors are to be connected
in the associated distribution switchboard to an insu-
lated busbar, which is connected to the hull.
1.2.2 The connections to the hull shall have at least
the same cross-section as the supply cable.
Bare wires shall not be used. Casings or their mount-
ing bolts shall not be used as return conductors or to
make their connection.
1.3 Up to 3 distribution switchboards may be sup-
plied by a common supply cable.
2. Essential supply cables
2.1 Essential systems shall be supplied directly
from the main switchboard, the emergency switch-
board or the transitional emergency power supply, as
the Rules require.
2.2 Essential consumers performing the same
function, e.g. main and standby lubricating oil pumps,
are to be supplied by separate cables direct from the
main switchboard or from two independent sub-
distribution panels.
3. Emergency supply cables
3.1 The emergency switchboard is to be supplied
in normal operation from the main switchboard by an
inter-connector feeder which is to be protected at the
main switchboard against overload and short circuit.
The arrangement at the emergency switchboard shall
be such that the inter-connector feeder is disconnected
automatically at the emergency switchboard upon
failure of the main power supply and is to provide for
automatic connection of the emergency supply in the
event of such failure.
3.2 When the system is arranged for feedback
operation, the inter-connector feeder shall also be
protected at the emergency switchboard at least
against short circuit.
4. Supply to lighting installations
4.1 Main lighting installations are to be supplied
from the main switchboard, emergency lighting from
the emergency switchboard.
4.2 Final sub-circuits for lighting shall not be
fitted with fuses rated higher than 16 A. The number
of lighting points (lamps) connected to one sub-circuit
shall not exceed:
10 lamps for voltages up to 55 V
14 lamps for voltages over 55 V
24 lamps for voltages over 125 V
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 11d Installation Protection and Power Distribution Chapter 8
Page 11d3

I
4.3 In the important rooms listed below, the
lighting has to be supplied by at least two different
circuits:
main engine rooms and other important service
spaces and control stations
fish handling and processing deck
passageways and stairways leading to the boat
deck
4.4 Sockets outside the accommodation area shall
be connected to separate circuits. When calculating
the permissible connected load, one socket is equiva-
lent to two lighting points.
5. Navigation and signalling lights
5.1 Navigation and signal lights panels shall be
supplied from the main- and emergency electrical
power source.
5.2 The masthead, the side and stern lights are
each to be supplied by separate lines, each line being
protected by a fuse or automatic circuit breaker.
5.3 The navigation lights panel is to be provided
with a device for each masthead, side and stern light
which indicates or gives a warning if the correspond-
ing light fails.
6. Control-, monitoring- and vessel's safety
systems
The supply of control-, monitoring- and vessel's safety
systems shall comply with the following requirements
(see additionally Section 11h):
6.1 These systems shall be supplied by their own
circuits.
Provision shall be made for the selective disconnec-
tion of the separate circuits in case of a short circuit.
6.2 A common distribution network with back-up
batteries may be used to supply systems which are
required to remain operative even if the main source
of electrical power fails. Such a network shall have
one of two supply units comprising either:
6.2.1 a power supply unit with a capacity sufficient
for all the connected consumers together with a
charger which, acting in buffer operation with the
back-up battery, is capable of supplying continuously
all the connected consumers and maintain the battery
in the charged condition, or
6.2.2 two chargers, which meet the conditions
stated in 6.2.1.
6.3 With regard to residual ripple, the supply
facilities specified in 6.2.1 and 6.2.2 shall be designed
to ensure trouble-free operation of the connected sys-
tems even when the battery is temporarily discon-
nected.
6.4 One of the power supply units or chargers
shall be supplied directly from the main switchboard.
6.5 Failure of the power supply units and charg-
ers shall be signalled visually and audibly.
6.6 Battery chargers with a charging capacity of
P 2 kW shall be tested at the maker's works in the
presence of a GL Surveyor.
7. Emergency shut down
Oil burner equipment, fuel pumps, boiler fans, separa-
tors, machinery space ventilators shall be provided
with an individual emergency switch located at a cen-
tral position outside the machinery space unless other
means are available for rapidly interrupting the fuel
and air supply outside the room in which the equip-
ment is installed. The consumers may be arranged in
groups, provided that redundant consumers are allo-
cated to at least two electrically independent groups.
Chapter 8
Page 11d4
Section 11d Installation Protection and Power Distribution I - Part 1
GL 2007

I
Section 11e

Switchgear Assemblies
A. General
1. These Rules apply to low-voltage switchgear
with operating voltages up to 1000V AC or 1500V DC.
2. Electrical installations are to be protected
against damage due to overload and short circuit.
3. The thermal- and electro-dynamic stresses
due to overcurrents shall not cause damage to parts of
the installation during the response time of protective
devices or during the total operating time of switches.
4. Overcurrent protective devices are to be se-
lected on the basis of following criteria:
overload current
short circuit
reclosing capability
5. Regarding design, construction and testing of
low-voltage switchgear assemblies attention is drawn
to IEC Publication 60092-302.
6. For further notes see Section 11d.
B. Construction
1. General
1.1 All devices, instruments and operating de-
vices shall be permanently identified by name plates.
Wherever possible, clear text shall be used. Fuse cur-
rent ratings are to be stated. The setpoints of adjust-
able protective devices are to be marked. The rated
operating parameters of all measuring instruments
shall be marked in red either on the scales or on plates
fixed nearby.
1.2 All screwed joints and connections shall be
secured against self-acting loosening.
1.3 All conductors shall be secured jig-proof and
are to be kept away from sharp edges. Conductors
leading to equipment mounted in doors are to be laid
tension-free.
1.4 Main and emergency switchboards shall be
fitted with insulation hand rails or handles.
1.5 All components including their connections
have to be accessible for the purposes of maintenance,
repair and replacement.
1.6 Large doors in switchboards shall be fitted
with arresting devices.
1.7 Electrical components mounted in the doors of
switchboards, e.g. switchgear, measuring devices and
fuses for voltages over 50 V, shall be safeguarded
against accidental contact. Such doors are to be
earthed.
1.8 Where fuses are fitted above switchgear or
bare connecting wires or leads, measures are to be
taken to ensure that falling parts (e.g. fuse cartridges)
cannot come into contact with live components.
1.9 Operating devices and fuses shall be safely
accessible.
1.10 For circuit breakers and load-switches, the
minimum distances above the arc chutes specified by
the manufacturers are to be maintained.
1.11 Knife-type fuses for supply-circuits are only
permitted if they can be safely withdrawn and in-
serted.
2. Main switchboards
2.1 Observation of the measuring and indicating
devices and operation of the switchgear shall be pos-
sible from the front side of the switchboard with the
doors closed.
2.2 Main switchboards are to be designed with
regard to the connection of generators and outgoing
circuits in such a way that, as far as possible, impor-
tant equipment remains operative in the event of dam-
age to one section of the switchboard.
2.3 Measuring and monitoring devices for
generators
2.3.1 Where circuit breakers are used, the follow-
ing is required:
1 green indicator lamp (power circuit breaker
connected)
1 red indicator lamp (power circuit breaker
tripped)
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 11e Switchgear Assemblies Chapter 8
Page 11e1

B
2.3.2 The following is required for each three-
phase alternator:
1 voltmeter, which can, if necessary, be switch-
ed to the other alternators
1 ammeter, switchable to all phases
1 active power meter for alternators of 50 kVA
and over
1 frequency meter, which can, if necessary, be
switched to the other alternators
2.3.3 The following is required for each direct
current generator:
1 voltmeter
1 ammeter
2.4 Switchgear and fuses for equipment
2.4.1 Each supply line run from the main switch-
board shall be provided with a circuit breaker with
overcurrent and short-circuit protection, or with a fuse
for each non-earthed conductor and an all-pole switch,
or with a contactor with control switch. Where fuses
and switches are used, the sequence bus-bar-fuse-
switch is to be used.
2.4.2 For steering gear, see also Section 11g, A.
2.5 Measuring instruments
The main switchboard and the main distribution panel
have to be fitted with ammeters for major consumers,
unless these are already mounted on the consumers
themselves. It is permissible for one ammeter to be
switched-over to a number of circuits.
3. Emergency switchboard
The requirements for main switchboards apply in
analogous to emergency switchboards.
4. Distribution panels
Distribution panels are to be equipped with the neces-
sary devices for the protection of the connected circuits
and for the supply of consumers (see Section 11d).
5. Motor starters
The starting of motors in a greater number should not
take place simultaneously, if that is necessary to avoid
a too great voltage drop or too high current flow.
C. Selection of Switchgear
1. General
1.1 All electrical equipment has to be protected
against damage due to overloads and short circuits.
The protective devices are to be co-ordinated with
each other in such a way that, in event of a fault, the
faulty circuit is disconnected and the power supply to
essential consumers is maintained.
1.2 Switchgear has to conform to IEC publica-
tions, or to another standard approved by GL.
2. Circuit breakers
Circuit breakers are to be capable of opening circuits
carrying maximum rated current at rated potential and
are to be capable of interrupting short circuits within
their rating. Circuit breakers are to be trip free and
thermal units are to be calibrated for an ambient tem-
perature in accordance with Section 11a, E.
3. Load switches
3.1 The current rating of load switches shall be at
least equal to that of the fuse protecting the circuit and
they shall have a making/breaking capacity in accor-
dance with AC-22 A or DC-22 A (IEC publication
60947-3).
3.2 Where fuses and switches are employed, the
sequence bus bar-fuse-switch is to be used generally.
4. Fuses
4.1 Fuse links shall have an enclosed fusion
space. They shall be made of ceramic or other material
recognized by GL as equivalent.
4.2 Fuses may be used for overload protection
only up to a rating of 315 A. Exceptions to this Rule
are subject to approval by GL.
D. Choice of Electrical Protection Equipment
1. General
Protective devices shall be co-ordinated with each
other in such a way that, in the event of a fault, the
defective circuit is disconnected and the power supply
to essential equipment is maintained.
2. Short-circuit protection equipment
2.1 The rated short-circuit breaking capacity I
cn

of a switching device shall not be less than the maxi-
mum current to be broken in the event of a short cir-
cuit at the place where the protective device is fitted.
2.2 The rated short-circuit making capacity I
cm
of
a circuit breaker shall not be less than the maximum
instantaneous asymmetric short-circuit current at the
place where it is fitted.
Chapter 8
Page 11e2
Section 11e Switchgear Assemblies I - Part 1
GL 2007

D
2.3 The peak short circuit strength of a switching
unit and its components shall correspond to the maxi-
mum short-circuit current which can arise at the place
where it is fitted.
2.4 Circuit breakers whose making/breaking
capacities are less than the anticipated maximum
short-circuit currents are to be protected by back-up
fuses of sufficient breaking capacity.
3. Selective arrangement
The short-circuit protection of essential equipment has
to be selective and shall ensure that only the switching
device nearest to the fault initiates disconnection of
the defective circuit. For this purpose:
the tripping time of protective devices connected
in series has to be carefully coordinated
the switching devices being capable of carrying
the short-circuit current during the total break
time of the device plus the time lag required for
selectivity
Exceptions may be permitted in the case of
circuits feeding redundant plants or nonessential
equipment if selectivity relative to the generator
switch is maintained.
4. Overcurrent protection devices
The current-time characteristics of overcurrent protec-
tion devices shall be compatible with the system com-
ponents to be protected, and with the requirements of
selectivity.
5. Allocation of short-circuit and overcurrent
protection devices
5.1 Short circuit protection is required for every
non-earthed conductor.
5.2 Overcurrent protection is required for at least
one conductor in insulated direct current and single-
phase alternating current circuits.
Overcurrent protection is required for at least two
phases in insulated, load-balanced three-phase circuits.
5.3 Overcurrent protection is required for each
non-earthed conductor in earthed systems. The conti-
nuity of earthed conductors shall not be interrupted by
short-circuit or overcurrent protection devices, except
in the case of multipole disconnection devices which
simultaneously interrupt all the conductors, whether
earthed or not.
5.4 Determined for the overcurrent protection of
the entire circuit (switchgear, switchboard wiring,
supply cables and equipment) according to regulations
is the rated current I
n
of the connected equipment or in
the case of grouped supply cables the evaluated total
rated current.
6. Motor protection
6.1 Motors with a power rating of more than
1 kW shall be individually protected against overloads
and short-circuit. For steering gear motors see Section
11g, A.
The protective devices shall be compatible with the
mode of operation of the motors and have to provide
reliable protection against thermal overload.
6.2 The switchgear of motors, whose simultane-
ous restarting on restoration of the supply voltage
might endanger operation, shall be provided with
undervoltage protection which causes disconnection of
the circuit if the voltage drops or fails and which pre-
vents automatic reconnection.
The undervoltage protection shall operate reliably in
the event of the voltage dropping to between 70 % and
35 % of the rated voltage.
6.3 Where necessary, the start-up of motors
which are required to restart automatically following
restoration of the voltage is to be staggered in such a
way that the starting currents do not overload the
vessel's mains.
7. Measuring and signalling circuits
Indicator lamps with working voltages exceeding 24 V
shall be fused separately from control circuit if they
are not connected via short-circuit-proof transformers.
8. Monitoring of insulation resistance
Each non-earthed primary or secondary system serv-
ing power, heating or lighting installations shall be
fitted with an equipment which monitors the insulation
resistance relative to the vessel's hull and gives a vis-
ual and audible alarm if the insulation resistance value
is abnormally low, see also Section 11k, D.3.10.
Insulation monitoring devices may be dispensed with
in the case of secondary systems such as control cir-
cuits. The audible alarm signal may be dispensed with
on fishing vessels with Class Notation K.
E. Conductors, Bus Bars, Wiring
1. Bus bars
1.1 Materials
Bus bars must be made of copper or copper-sheathed
aluminium.
1.2 Temperature
The temperature rise of bus bars may not exceed 45 K
under the most unfavourable conditions and shall not
have any harmful effect on adjacent components.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 11e Switchgear Assemblies Chapter 8
Page 11e3

E
1.3 Bus bar carriers
Bus bars are to be mounted and insulated in such a
way that they withstand the stresses caused by short
circuit currents and standing alternating voltages in
accordance with G.2.3.3.
The minimum clearances specified in Table 11e.1
shall be maintained between bus bars and other volt-
age carrying or earthed components.
Table 11e.1 Clearance and creepage distances
Rated service
voltage
[V] (AC/DC)
Minimum
clearance
[mm]
Minimum
creepage distance
[mm]
125
> 125 250
> 250 690
> 690
10
15
20
25
12
20
25
35


2. Switchboard wiring
2.1 Instrument and control wiring is to be of the
stranded type and is to have heat resisting and flame
retarding insulation.
2.2 The nominal cross-section of the conductors
shall be sufficient for the rated current of the con-
nected facility and are selected in accordance with
Table 11e.2.
F. Measuring Instrument's Characteristics
1. Measuring instruments have to be insensitive
to vibrations or mounted so as to be protected from
their effects. Instruments used for the primary ma-
chines shall not have an error greater than 1,5 % in
relation to full scale value.
Table 11e.2 Current rating of wires in switchgear
Bunched, exposed or in conduits Nominal cross-section
of conductor - total
cross-section in the case
of conductors connected
in parallel


[mm
2
]
Several power circuits
together



Current
[A]
One power circuit
together with its
associated measuring
and control wires

Current
[A]
Wires run singly,
at least one conductor
diameter apart

Circuits of all kinds

Current
[A]
1
1,5
2,5
4
6
10
16
25
35
50
70
95
120
9
12
16
20
26
36
48
66
82
104
130
157
186
12
15
20
27
35
48
65
86
107
133
164
198
231
15
19
25
34
42
58
78
102
125
157
194
231
272
Note
The current ratings shown apply to conductors with a maximum permissible operating temperature T on the conductor of 70C
and an ambient temperature of 45C. For conductors with a maximum permissible operating temperature T deviating from 70C,
the current rating is to be determined by applying the correction factor F.

T 60 C 65 C 70 C 75 C 80 C 85 C
F 0,77 0,89 1,00 1,10 1,18 1,26



Chapter 8
Page 11e4
Section 11e Switchgear Assemblies I - Part 1
GL 2007

F
2. The upper limit of the graduation of each
voltmeter shall not be less than 120 % of the normal
voltage of the circuit. The graduation must include a
red mark corresponding to the normal voltage.
3. The upper limit of the scale of every ammeter
or wattmeter shall not be less than 130 % of the nor-
mal value in the circuit where it is inserted. The
graduation must be provided with a red mark corre-
sponding to the normal value at full load. The amme-
ter for direct current generators and the wattmeters of
alternators able to work in parallel must be capable of
showing the return current or the return power respec-
tively.
G. Testing of Switchboards and Switchgear
1. Type-approvals
The following devices and components are subject to
mandatory type approval:
circuit breakers, load-switches, disconnect
switches and fuses for direct connection to the
main busbars and to non-fused, multi-terminal
busbars of main-, emergency- and control
switchboards
generator protection devices
standardized switchgear in series manufacture
2. Tests in manufacturer's works
2.1 All switchboards are to be tested in the manu-
facturer's works.
2.2 The following are subject to testing in the
presence of a GL Surveyor:
main switchboards
emergency switchboards
switchboards for electrical propulsion plants
GL reserve the right to stipulate a factory test for other
switchboards.
2.3 Scope of tests
2.3.1 Visual inspection
Devices and components shall be checked in compli-
ance with the approved drawings. The components
and materials used shall conform to the Rules.
2.3.2 Function test
During the tests the function shall be demonstrated on
the equipment under test in accordance with the ap-
proved drawings, as far as is feasible.
2.3.3 High-voltage test
The test voltage specified in Tables 11e.3 and 11e.4 is
to be applied between the conductors, and between the
conductors and the switchboard frame. The duration
of the test is one minute in each case. Measuring in-
struments and other auxiliary apparatus may be dis-
connected during test.
Test voltage for main circuits
For main circuits the test has to be carried out
with the values according to Table 11e.3.
Test voltage for auxiliary circuits
For auxiliary circuits the test has to be carried
out with the values according to Table 11e.4.
Test voltage for type-approved switchgear
For the verification of dielectric property of type
approved switchgear the test voltage for routine
tests may be reduced to 85% of the values ac-
cording to Table 11e.3. and 11e.4.
2.3.4 Insulation resistance measurement
The voltage test is to be followed by measurement of
the resistance of insulation. The insulation resistance
measurement is to be performed at a DC voltage of at
least 500 V.
Table 11e.3 Test voltage for main circuits
Rated insulation voltage
U
i

DC and AC
[V]
Test voltage
(AC)
(rms)
[V]
U
i
60 1000
60 < U
i
300 2000
300 < U
i
690 2500
690 < U
i
800 3000
800 < U
i
1000 3500
1000 < U
i
1500
1
3500
1
Only for DC voltage

Table 11e.4 Test voltage for auxiliary circuits
Rated insulation voltage
U
i

DC and AC
[V]
Test voltage
(AC)
(rms)
[V]
U
i
12
12 < U
i
60
U
i
> 60
250
500
2 U
i
+ 1000,
but at least 1500

I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 11e Switchgear Assemblies Chapter 8
Page 11e5

G


Section 11f

Power Electronics
A. General
For power electronics in electrical propulsion plants
the GL Rules Chapter 3 Electrical Installations ap-
ply.
B. Construction
1. The rules set out in Section 11e are to be
observed, wherever applicable.
2. Each power-electronics system shall be pro-
vided with separate means for disconnection from the
mains. In the case of consumers up to a nominal cur-
rent of 315 A the combination fuse-contactor may be
used. In all other cases a circuit breaker shall be pro-
vided on the mains side.
3. Equipment shall be readily accessible for
purposes of measurement and repair. Devices such as
simulator circuits, test sockets, indicating lights, etc.
are to be provided for functional supervision and fault
location.
4. Control- and alarm electronics shall be gal-
vanically separated from power circuits.
5. External pulse cables are to be laid twisted in
pairs and screened, and kept as short as possible.
C. Rating and Design
1. Mains reactions of power electronics facili-
ties shall be taken into consideration in the planning of
the overall installation, see Section 11a, F. and J.
2. Rectifier systems have to guarantee secure
operation even under the maximum permissible volt-
age and frequency fluctuations, see Section 11a, F. In
the event of unacceptably large frequency and/or volt-
age variations in the supply voltage, the system has to
shut-off or remain in a safe operating condition.
3. For the supply of mains, number and rating of
electronic facilities is to be so scaled that in the event
of failure of any one power-electronics facility the
remainder of the installation is sufficient to:
feed all essential equipment which may be in
simultaneous operation with the propulsion
plant at full power
start the biggest consumer without exceeding the
maximum permissible voltage and frequency
variations
To maintain the required availability, bypass switch-
ing may be resorted to.
4. The semiconductor rectifiers and the associ-
ated fuses shall be so selected that their load current is
at least 10 % less than the limit current determined in
accordance with the coolant temperature, the load and
the mode of operation.
5. The permissible periodic peak blocking volt-
age of the individual component shall be greater by a
factor of at least 1,8 than the peak value of the undis-
torted supply voltage. This value may be reduced for
static converter circuits with separate power supplies.
6. Electrical charges in power electronic mod-
ules shall drop to a voltage of less than 50 V in a pe-
riod of less than 5 s after disconnection from the
mains supply. Should longer periods be required for
discharge, a warning label is to be affixed to the appli-
ance.
7. If the replacement of plug-in printed circuit
boards while the unit is in operation can cause the
destruction of components or the uncontrolled behav-
iour of drives, a caution label shall be notifying to this
effect.
8. The absence of external control signals, e.g.
due to a circuit break, shall not cause a dangerous
situation.
9. Control-circuit supplies are to be safeguarded
against unintended disconnection, if this could endan-
ger or damage the plant.
10. It is necessary to ensure that, as far as possi-
ble, faults do not cause damage in the rest of the sys-
tem, or in other static converters.
10.1 Special attention shall be paid to the follow-
ing points:
mutual interference of static converters con-
nected to the same busbar system
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 11f Power Electronics Chapter 8
Page 11f1

C
calculation of commutating impedances reacting
to voltage distortion and reacting to other con-
sumers
the selection of the ratio between the subtran-
sient reactance of the system and the commutat-
ing reactance of the static converter
consideration of reactions from rectifier installa-
tions on the commutation of DC machines
consideration of voltage drops in the fishing
vessel's mains due to inverter operation
influence by harmonics and high-frequency
interference
influence on the vessel's mains by energy feed-
ing back
10.2 Where filter circuits and capacitors are used
for reactive current compensation, attention is to be
paid to the following:
reaction on the mean and peak value of the sys-
tem voltage in case of frequency fluctuations
inadmissible effects on the voltage regulation of
generators
D. Cooling
1. Natural cooling is preferred.
2. The safety in operation shall be proved for
liquid cooling and forced cooling.
3. An impairment of cooling shall not result in
unacceptable overtemperatures, an overtemperature
alarm shall be provided.
E. Control and Monitoring
1. Control, adjustment and monitoring shall
ensure that the permissible operating values of the
facilities are not exceeded.
2. The power supply to all control circuits shall
be monitored for voltage failure.
3. For the monitoring of individual modules and
assemblies of essential equipment, components shall
be provided which, in the event of a fault, facilitate its
recognition.
4. The control shall be so engineered that the
installation is protected from damage during the
switching-on and switching-off sequence, dedication
alterations and faulty operation.
F. Protection Equipment
1. Power electronic equipment shall be pro-
tected against exceeding of their current and voltage
limits. For protective devices, it must be ensured that
upon actuating
the output will be reduced or defective part
systems will be selectively disconnected
drives will be stopped under control
the energy stored in components and in the load
circuit cannot have a damaging effect, when
switching off.
2. In equipment with a current rating of more
than 100 A, each bridge arm or parallel-connected
valve shall have a special semiconductor fuse. Excep-
tions are quenching circuits in self-regulating systems
and converters operated with a load-independent cur-
rent. For all other equipment, fuses on the input/output
side may also be used.
3. Special semiconductor fuses shall be moni-
tored. After tripping the equipment has to be switched
off, if this is necessary for the prevention of damage.
Activating of a safety device shall trigger an alarm.
4. Equipment without fuses is permissible if a
short circuit will not lead to the destruction of the
semiconductor components.
G. Tests
1. General
Power electronics assemblies shall be individually
tested at the maker's works. A Works Test Report
shall be rendered on the tests carried out. Essential
equipment from 50 kW/kVA upwards shall be tested
in the presence of a GL Surveyor.
2. Extent of routine tests
2.1 Voltage test
Prior to the start of the functional tests a high-voltage
test shall be carried out. The RMS value of the alter-
nating test voltage is:
U = 2 U
n
+ 1000 V, duration 1 minute
but at least 2000 V, where U
n
is the maximum
nominal voltage between any two points on the
power electronics device.
For this purpose, switchgear in power circuits shall be
bridged, and the input and output terminals of the
power electronics devices and the electrodes of the
rectifiers shall be electrically connected with each
other. The test voltage shall be applied between the
input/output terminals or between the electrodes and:
Chapter 8
Page 11f2
Section 11f Power Electronics I - Part 1
GL 2007

G
the cabinet
the mains connection side, if the power electron-
ics device is electrically isolated from the mains
2.2 Test of insulation resistance
Following the voltage test, the insulation resistance
shall be measured at the same connections as for the
voltage test. The measurement shall be performed at a
voltage of at least 500 V DC.
2.3 Function test
The function shall be demonstrated as far as possible.
2.4 Testing of protection and monitoring de-
vices
The response thresholds and the coordinated operation
of the protective and monitoring devices shall be
demonstrated.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 11f Power Electronics Chapter 8
Page 11f3

G


Section 11g

Power Equipment
A. Steering Gear
1. General
1.1 Two, with regard to their construction as far
as possible independent, steering gear systems are
required as follows:
1 main and 1 auxiliary steering gear or
1 main steering gear with two or more identical
power units or
2 main steering gear systems
1.2 The electrical systems of the main and auxil-
iary steering gear shall be so arranged that as far as
reasonable and practicable a failure in one of them
will not render the other one inoperative. This also
applies when the main steering gear comprises two or
more identical power units and therefore an auxiliary
steering gear need not be fitted.
1.3 For increased vibration loads in the steering
gear compartment see Section 11a, E.2.
2. Power supply
2.1 The power supply to steering gears is also
required to comply with the provisions of Section 11d,
I.
2.2 For every steering gear power unit a separate
power supply circuit from the main switchboard is to
be incorporated. However, one of these circuits may be
supplied through the emergency switchboard, if pro-
vided and if the emergency generator capacity is ade-
quate to supply the steering gear in addition to the
emergency consumers for a period of at least 10 min-
utes.
2.3 After an electrical power failure, the steering
gear power units shall restart automatically when the
power is restored.
2.4 The motors for the power units shall be capa-
ble of being started or stopped individually or together
from the steering gear compartment and at the wheel-
house, by electrically and mechanically separate
switches.
The supply for the remote start and for the remote
control of the power units shall come from the starter
box in the steering compartment to which the remote
control belongs and shall be able to be de-energized
from there.
3. Rating of electrical machines
3.1 If the steering gear is hydraulically operated,
the rated output of the steering gear motors is to be
determined at the maximum load of the pump against
the maximum pressure produced by the steering gear
(adjusting of safety valves), under consideration of the
efficiency of the pump.
3.2 The following requirements apply to the
modes of operation:
3.2.1 Steering gear with intermittent power de-
mand:
S6 25 % for converters and motors of electro-
hydraulic drives
S3 40 % for motors of electromechanical
steering gears
The ratio of pull-out torque to rated torque is to be at
least 1,6 in all cases.
3.2.2 Steering gear with constant power demand:
S1 100 % continuous service
4. Switchgear
Each steering gear motor must have its own separate
switchgear.
5. Protective equipment
5.1 The circuits and motors of steering gears
shall be protected against short circuit only.
5.2 Where fuses are provided, their current rat-
ings are to be of two steps higher than the rated cur-
rent of the motor or circuit control circuit; however, in
the case of intermittent service motors, the fuse rating
is not to exceed 160 % of the rated motor current.
5.3 Protection against excess current, if provided,
shall be for not less than twice the full load current of
the motor or circuit so protected and shall be arranged
to permit the passage of the appropriate starting cur-
rents.
6. Steering gear control systems
6.1 Vessels with electrical operated steering gear
controls shall have two independent steering gear
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 11g Power Equipment Chapter 8
Page 11g1

A
control systems. Separated cables and wires are to be
provided for these control systems.
6.2 It must be possible to control the main and
auxiliary steering gear from the wheelhouse.
6.3 For the steering control positions on the open
deck, e.g. bridge wings, there should be provision to
isolate these control positions completely from the
wheelhouse control circuits.
7. Alarms and indicators
The following equipment is required for monitoring in
the wheelhouse:
7.1 A green indicator light each indicating that
the motors of the power units are in operation is to be
provided.
7.2 A red indicator light indicating failure of the
steering gear, e.g. in the event of failure of the main
power supply or remote steering control is to be pro-
vided.
7.3 A yellow indicator light indicating overload
of the electric motor and/or loss of anyone of the sup-
ply phases in case of a three phase system is to be
provided.
7.4 A system giving an audible warning of the
occurrence of the faults mentioned in 7.2 and 7.3 in
the wheelhouse is to be provided. The audible alarm is
to be cancellable. The stopping of an audible alarm is
not to prevent the alarming of a fault in the other steer-
ing gear drive units in operation.
8. Rudder angle indicator
See Section 11h, C.
9. Tests
9.1 Electrical machinery, switchgear cabinets and
control systems for steering gears are to be tested and
certified at the manufacturers works in the presence
of a GL Surveyor.
9.2 The works tests comprise:
examination for conformity with the drawings
approved by GL
inspection of the components used, construction
and wiring
functional testing
insulation measurements and voltage tests in
accordance with requirements for switchboards,
see Section 11e, G.
B. Lateral Thrust Propellers
1. Power supply
The power supply has to be run direct from the main
switchboard.
2. Rating of electrical machines
The equipment is to be designed in accordance with
the operating conditions of the vessel. Drives used
only for lateral thrust shall be designed at least for
short-term duty S2 30 minutes at all speeds.
3. Protective equipment
The equipment is to be protected in such a way that in
the event of an overload an optical and acoustical
alarm is to be given in the wheelhouse.
4. Controls, monitors and indicators
For lateral thrusters the following indicators are to be
provided:
an indicator light showing that the system is
activated
a yellow indicator light signalling an overload
depending on the type of equipment, displays
showing the power steps and the desired direc-
tion of motion of the vessel
C. Variable Pitch Propeller Systems for Main
Propulsion System
1. Facilities shall be provided for the system
control from the wheelhouse and from the engine
room.
2. The failure of any control system shall be
signalled visually and audibly in the wheelhouse.
D. Auxiliary Machinery and Systems
1. Fire pumps
The power supply to the fire pump motors, with re-
gard both to the assignment of power source and to
routing of power lines, is to be so arranged that as far
as possible a fire in any fire zone does not render all
the fire pumps unserviceable.
2. Fans, fuel pumps, separators
The power ventilation of accommodation spaces,
service spaces, cargo spaces, control spaces and ma-
chinery spaces and fuel oil pumps and separators shall
be capable of being stopped from an easily accessible
Chapter 8
Page 11g2
Section 11g Power Equipment I - Part 1
GL 2007

D
position outside the spaces concerned. This position
should not be cut off in the event of a fire in such
spaces.
E. Deck Machinery, Winches
1. General
1.1 Motors and switchgear located on deck shall
be protected against temporary flooding (IP 56 enclo-
sure), see also Section 11a, J.
1.2 Levers and handwheels for the control of
winches and lifting equipment has to return automati-
cally to the zero position when released. Exceptions
may be allowed in the case of fishing net winches and
special purpose drives. The control consoles are to be
equipped with push buttons for emergency stops.
1.3 Brakes shall apply automatically if the elec-
trical power supply fails.
2. Anchor windlasses, fishnet winches
2.1 Motors are to be rated for short-term opera-
tion of 30 minutes (S2 30 min) unless the type of
service for which the vessel is intended requires more
stringent demand.
In addition, the motors for anchor windlasses shall be
able to deliver twice the rated torque for 2 minutes
without dangerous overheating.
2.2 At vessels with stern fishing system, compare
Section 6, periodically overloads of the drives of the
fishnet winches are to be considered and should be
able to deliver 1,6 the rated torque for 2 minutes with-
out overheating.
2.3 To prevent excessive overload of motors and,
as far as possible, gears, electrical overload protection
is to be provided in an appropriate manner.
F. Electrical Heating Equipment and Heaters
1. Space heating
1.1 Only watertight heaters may be used in wash-
rooms, bathrooms, other damp rooms and machinery
spaces (IP 44 class enclosure).
1.2 Where heaters are installed inside the bulk-
head lining, a tray made of incombustible material is
to be fitted behind the heater to prevent the accumula-
tion of heat behind the lining.
1.3 In the case of ceiling-mounted heaters, it is
essential to ensure that the heat is radiated downwards.
An insulation layer of incombustible material is to be
fitted above the heater. The heating elements are to be
protected against accidental touch.
2. Oil and water heaters
Oil and water heaters are subject to the provisions of
Section 9e.
G. Plug and Socket Connections for Movable
Power Consumers
1. Plug and socket connections for power cir-
cuits are to be fused.
2. The specified class of protection against
touch and water shall be ensured for the entire appli-
ance with the plug inserted and for the socket even
when the plug is withdrawn. The socket is to be fitted
in accordance with its specified position for use.
H. Refrigeration Installations for Preserva-
tion of the Catch
All refrigeration installations for preservation of the
catch on fishing vessels with Class Notation RIC have
to comply with Section 10.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 11g Power Equipment Chapter 8
Page 11g3

H


Section 11h

Control, Monitoring and Vessel's Safety Systems
A. General
1. Systems
Control, monitoring and alarm systems generally con-
sist of electrical facilities and devices which are re-
ferred to in the following as "systems". The term in-
cludes the control, monitoring and measuring systems
necessary to the operation of the machinery and the
safety of the vessel.
2. Programmable electronic circuits and
computers
Where programmable electronic circuits or computers
are used Chapter 3 Electrical Installations, Sec-
tion 10 is to be observed.
2.1 Safety systems, alarm systems and control
systems shall be made in general functionally and
physically independent of each other.
2.2 Where it is appropriate to the application,
systems shall as far as possible be self-monitoring.
Failure of the supply has to be indicated. It shall be
possible to check the operation of the indicator lights.
B. Machinery Control and Monitoring
Installation
1. Safety devices
1.1 The design of safety devices shall be as sim-
ple as possible and has to be reliable and inevitable in
operation. Proven safety devices which are not de-
pending on a power source are to be preferred.
1.2 The suitability and function of safety devices
shall be demonstrated in the given application.
1.3 Safety devices shall be designed so that po-
tential faults such as, for example, loss of voltage or a
broken wire shall not create a hazard to human life,
vessel or machinery. These faults and also the tripping
of safety devices shall be signalled by an alarm.
1.4 For preference, safety devices shall be de-
signed in conventional technology (hard wired). Al-
ternative technical solutions shall be agreed with GL.
1.5 The adjustment facilities for safety devices
shall be designed so that the last setting can be de-
tected.
1.6 Where auxiliary energy is needed for the
function of safety devices, this has to be monitored
and a failure has to be alarmed.
1.7 Security equipment like short circuit monitor-
ing of generators as well as overspeed monitoring of
diesel engines shall run independently from automatic
power control system, to ensure that the equipment
can continue operating manually in case of a break-
down.
1.8 Safety devices are subject to mandatory type
approval.
2. Safety system
2.1 A safety system is to be provided so that
serious malfunctioning machinery or boiler opera-
tions, which present an immediate danger, shall initi-
ate the automatic shutdown of that part of the plant
and an alarm shall be given. Shutdown of the propul-
sion system shall not be automatically activated except
in cases which could lead to serious damage, complete
breakdowns, or explosion.
2.2 Where arrangements for overriding the shut-
down of the main propelling machinery are fitted,
these shall be such as to preclude inadvertent activa-
tion. Visual means shall be provided to show whether
or not it has been activated.
2.3 Advance alarms shall be given before auto-
matic shutdown.
2.4 The monitoring circuits of safety systems
shall be electrically isolated from those of the alarm
system (separate sensors) and have to be decoupled to
prevent reciprocal effects in the event of faults.
In exceptional cases and with special approval, safety
systems may share monitoring circuits with the alarm
system provided that indicators with a separate power
supply additional to those of the alarm system are
mounted in the wheelhouse and in the engine room to
signal the need for a shutdown (instead of automatic
shutdown) or slow down.
2.5 Safety systems are subject to mandatory type
approval.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 11h Control, Monitoring and Vessel's Safety Systems Chapter 8
Page 11h1

B
3. Alarm systems
3.1 A machinery alarm system is required to give
a visual and audible warning of any unacceptable
deviations of the operating parameters requiring atten-
tion.
The alarms shall be perceptible throughout the whole
machinery space, on vessels equipped for operation
with unattended machinery space also in the wheel-
house and living quarters of the engineers or the crew
responsible for the machinery.
In vessels with the Class Notation K an alarm system
to be capable of sounding and indicating visually each
separate alarm function in the wheelhouse only, may
be permitted.
3.2 Indication is to be provided that the system is
operative.
3.3 Visual signals are to be individually dis-
played. The meaning of each signal has to be made
clear by inscription or symbol.
Where a fault is indicated, the visual indication is to
remain visible until the fault has been eliminated.
Means shall be provided to distinguish an alarm which
has been acknowledged to one which has not been
acknowledged, e.g. steady/flashing signal, light/dark
signal, etc.
3.4 Provision shall be made for acknowledging
audible alarms. The acknowledgement of any alarm
shall not inhibit another alarm.
3.5 Alarm systems shall generally be designed on
the closed-circuit principle or the monitored open-
circuit principle, as appropriate.
Short-term faults which are self-correcting without
intervention are to be indicated by memory signals.
The audible alarm needs not go into the self-hold
mode.
3.6 Exceptions may be admitted for small instal-
lations confined to individual auxiliary machines or on
fishing vessels with Class Notation K.
3.7 The alarm system is to be supplied by a net-
work with battery back-up.
3.8 The amount of the alarm points is to be de-
termined in accordance with Section 9b, J.
3.9 For machinery alarm systems for vessels with
periodically unattended machinery space reference is
made to Section 12, D.
C. Vessel Control Systems
1. Remote control of the main engine
Where the remote control of the main engine from the
wheelhouse is envisaged, the requirements according
to Section 12 shall be observed.
2. Engine telegraph systems
Two separate means of communication between the
wheelhouse and the machinery space control platform
shall be provided. One of the means shall be an engine
room telegraph. Vessels with remote control system
from the bridge are to be equipped according to Sec-
tion 12.
3. Indicators on the bridge and on bridge
wings
3.1 All instruments and indicators important to
the control of the vessel shall be legible at all times.
3.2 All indicators and illuminations for instru-
ments shall be provided with dimmers either individu-
ally or in groups.
4. Rudder angle indicator
The position of the rudder, if power operated, shall be
indicated in the wheelhouse. The rudder angle indica-
tion for power operated steering gear is to be inde-
pendent of the steering gear control system.
5. Indicators for speed and direction of rota-
tion
Indicators showing the speed and direction of rotation
of the propeller shafts are to be installed in the wheel-
house. See also Section 9b, I. and 12, E.
6. Variable pitch propellers indicators
Where variable-pitch propellers are used, indicators
are to be installed in the wheelhouse showing the pitch
of the propeller blades and speed of the rotation of the
propeller shafts. See also Section 9b, I. and 12, E.
7. Voice communication and signalling
systems
7.1 Important voice communication
7.1.1 The following voice communications are
required:
a) Bridge-radio room (if any)
Required is a two-way voice link between the
bridge and the operators position in the radio
room.
Chapter 8
Page 11h2
Section 11h Control, Monitoring and Vessel's Safety Systems I - Part 1
GL 2007

C
b) Bridge-engine room
Required is a two-way voice link between the
bridge and the engine room from which the
main propulsion plant can be controlled.
7.1.2 Communication links, if electrical, provided
for in 7.1.1 a) and 7.1.1 b) are to be independent of the
vessel's mains, unless they are backed-up by battery.
7.2 Additional intercommunication system on
vessels for unrestricted service
A two-way intercommunication is to be provided be-
tween the bridge and the engineers' accommodation
rooms.
This system may consist of portable or permanently
installed equipment and shall be capable of operation
even if the main power supply fails.
D. Vessel's Safety Systems
1. Engineers' alarms
On vessels for unrestricted service an engineers' alarm
shall be provided to be operated from the engine con-
trol room or at the manoeuvring platform as appropri-
ate and shall be clearly audible in the engineers ac-
commodation. The system is to be supplied by the
emergency source of electrical power.
2. General alarm
2.1 Vessels for unrestricted service are to be
provided with an alarm system enabling the crew to be
alerted or called to the boat stations in case of danger.
It shall be possible to initiate the alarm from the
wheelhouse.
2.2 A sufficient number of alarm facilities is to
be provided to ensure that all persons on board can be
alerted without fail. Additional flashing lights may be
used where necessary (with high ambient noise). See
also IMO Resolution A.830(19)/1995.
2.3 The general emergency alarm shall be pow-
ered from the vessel's main supply and the emergency
source of electrical power.
2.4 A loudspeaker system may be accepted as
alarm facility.
3. Fire extinguishing
For the general design, construction and detection of
Fire Extinguishing Systems, see Section 8.
4. Fire detection system
Section 7 requires a fire detection system only for
fishing vessels with a length L 45 m. According to
Section 11a, electrical installations for such vessels
are defined in Chapter 3 Electrical Installations.
Fishing vessels with Class Notation TORRE-EC and
a length L 24 m have to meet the requirements of
the Torremolinos Convention, Chapter V.
5. Fire detection and alarm systems for unat-
tended machinery spaces
5.1 Unattended machinery spaces shall be pro-
vided with an approved automatic fire detection and
alarm system.
5.2 The design and arrangement are to comply
with Section 12, D.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 11h Control, Monitoring and Vessel's Safety Systems Chapter 8
Page 11h3

D


Section 11i

Lighting and Socket-Outlets
A. Construction and Extent
1. There is to be a lighting system supplied by
the main source of electrical power and illuminating
all parts of the vessel normally accessible to the crew
and an emergency lighting system supplied by the
emergency source of electrical power, if any.
2. Lights in machinery spaces, other important
service and control stations, fish handling and process-
ing decks, passage ways and stairways leading to the
boat deck are to be so arranged that the failure of any
one branch circuit will not leave these spaces in dark-
ness, see Section 11d, I.4.
3. Lights on open decks which are to be in use
while the vessel is under way are to be located in such
a way that they do not interfere with navigation. If
necessary, they are to be fitted with shields.
B. Lighting Installations
1. Design and construction of the lighting
installation
1.1 A sufficient number of lighting fixtures shall
be provided to achieve a good level of illumination.
1.2 The arrangement of the main- and emergency
lighting systems (sources of electrical power, associ-
ated transformer) shall be such that a fire or other
incident does not cause the failure of both systems.
1.3 Following a failure of the main power supply,
the emergency lighting system shall cut in automati-
cally. Local switches may be provided only where the
ability to switch off the emergency lighting is re-
quired.
2. Mounting of lighting fixtures
2.1 Within arm's reach of showers and bathtubs
up to 1,2 m from the shower head and/or 0,6 m from
the tubrim vertical surface and up to a height of 2,25 m,
lighting fixtures shall only be installed if their degree of
protection is at least IP 55.
Switches shall not be installed within arm's reach.
2.2 All lighting fixtures shall be so mounted that
combustible parts are not ignited by the generated
heat, and they themselves are not exposed to damage.
The minimum distances indicated on the lighting fix-
tures shall be respected.
Where no minimum distances are specified, the mini-
mum distances in the direction of radiation indicated
in Table 11i.1 shall be applied for lighting fixtures in
accordance with IEC publication 60598-1 Luminaires,
Part 1 - General Requirements and Tests.
Table 11i.1 Minimum distances for the mounting
of lighting fixtures
Rated power

[W]
Minimum
distance
[m]
up to and incl. 100
over 100 up to and incl. 300
over 300 up to and incl. 500
0,5
0,8
1,0


C. Socket-Outlets
1. General
1.1 The supply for socket-outlets in the accom-
modation, day rooms and service rooms (250 V) are to
be run from lighting distribution panels. The maxi-
mum fuse rating for a circuit is 16 A.
1.2 Sockets outside the accommodation area shall
be connected to separate circuits. When calculating
the permissible connected load, one socket is equiva-
lent to two lighting points.
1.3 For the sockets of distribution systems with
different voltage and/or frequencies, non-
interchangeable plugs and socket outlets shall be used.
1.4 Plug-in connections shall not be installed
below the floor in engine rooms or boiler rooms.
1.5 Socket outlets for power circuits over 16 A
AC or 10 A DC shall be interlocked in such a way that
the plug can be neither inserted nor withdrawn when
the socket contacts are live.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 11i Lighting and Socket-Outlets Chapter 8
Page 11i1

C
2. Shower rooms and bathing rooms
2.1 In locations containing a bath or shower the
electrical equipment shall be installed in accordance
with IEC publication 60364-7-701.
2.2 The minimum degree of protection against
foreign bodies and water shall be appropriate to Table
11i.2.
Table 11i.2 Minimum degree of protection
against foreign bodies and water
Zone
Degree of protection of the installed
electrical equipment
0 IP X7
1 IP 55
2 IP 34


Chapter 8
Page 11i2
Section 11i Lighting and Socket-Outlets I - Part 1
GL 2007

C
Section 11j

Cable Network
A. Choice of Cables and Wires
1. General instructions
Cables and wires shall conform to the requirements
stated in Section 11k, E.
2. Rated voltage
The rated voltage of a cable shall be not less than the
operating voltage of the relevant circuit.
In insulated distribution systems, the outer conductor
voltage of the system shall be deemed to be the rated
voltage of the cable between a conductor and the ves-
sel's hull.
3. Temperatures
At places where higher ambient temperatures are
expected, cables shall be used whose permissible
temperature is at least 10 K above the maximum an-
ticipated ambient temperature.
A correction of the permissible current rating shall be
made in accordance with Table 12.1 of the GL Rules,
Chapter 3 Electrical Installations, Section 12, B.
Cables on diesel engines, turbines, boilers, etc., where
there is danger of excessive heating, shall be so routed
that they are protected against inadmissible external
heating stress, or cables are to be used which are ap-
proved for the maximum arising ambient temperature.
4. Mechanical protection
4.1 Cables installed in locations liable to damage
during normal operation of the vessel, e.g. engine
rooms, fish handling rooms, open deck are to be pro-
vided with braided metallic armour or otherwise be
suitably protected from mechanical injury.
For further requirements see D.
4.2 Except for final sub-circuits of room lighting
and space heating systems, as a rule cables of stranded
core are to be used.
4.3 For single-phase and three-phase AC systems
multi-core cables are to be used wherever possible.
5. Mobility
5.1 Machines or equipment mounted on rubber or
spring vibration absorbers are to be connected via
cables or wires of sufficient flexibility and installed
with compensating bends.
5.2 Mobile equipment shall in every case be
supplied via heavy, flame-retardant and oil-resistant
rubber-sheathed flexible cables.
For rated voltages above 50 V, the movable connect-
ing cables or wires of equipment without double insu-
lation shall also include an earth conductor.
B. Determination of Conductor Cross-
Sections
1. General
1.1 Cables are to be rated according to the ex-
pected service load based on the connected load and
type of duty of the consumers supplied.
1.2 If all the connected consumers in a part of the
system are certain not to be in operation simultane-
ously, a diversity factor may be used for determining
the cross-section of the group supply lines.
1.3 For cables and wiring in switchboards and
distribution equipment see Section 11e, E.2.
2. Minimum cross-sectional areas and their
current-carrying capacity
2.1 The conductor cross-sections indicated in
Table 11j.1 are the minimum cross-sections for exter-
nal cabling respective for internal wiring, e.g. of
switchgear and consoles.
2.2 The maximum current-carrying capacity of
conductor cross-sections for external cabling shall be
taken from GL Rules, Chapter 3 Electrical Installa-
tions, Section 12, B.4.2.
2.3 In accommodation and day rooms, flexible
cables with a conductor cross-section of not less than
0,75 mm
2
(AWG 18) may also be used for the connec-
tion of movable equipment with a current consump-
tion of up to 6 A.
2.4 For vessel's hull return, see Section 11d,
I.1.2.
2.5 For earthing conductors, see Section 11a,
J.2.4.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 11j Cable Network Chapter 8
Page 11j1

B
Table 11j.1 Minimum cross-sectional areas
Nominal cross-section
external wiring internal wiring Type of installation
international AWG international AWG
Power, heating and lighting systems 1,0 mm
2
17 1,0 mm
2
17
Control circuits for power plants 1,0 mm
2
17 1,0 mm
2
17
Control circuits in general, safety systems in
accordance with Section 11h
0,75 mm
2
18 0,5 mm
2
20
Telecommunications equipment in general,
automation equipment
0,5 mm
2
20 0,1 mm
2
28
Telephone and bell installations, not relevant for
the safety of the ship or crew call installations
0,2 mm
2
24 0,1 mm
2
28
Data bus and data cables 0,2 mm
2
24 0,1 mm
2
28
AWG = American Wire Gauge

3. Voltage drop
3.1 The section of the cables shall be calculated
not only according to the admissible intensity, but also
to the voltage drop allowable.
Under normal service conditions the voltage drop
between the busbars and the most unfavourable point
in the system concerned may not generally exceed
6 %, or 10 % in battery-powered circuits of 50 V and
less. For navigation lights the voltage drop may not
exceed 5 %.
3.2 Where short-term peak loads occur due, e.g.
to the starting of machines, it is essential to ensure that
the voltage drop in the cable does not cause faults in
the system.
C. Protection and Installation of Circuits
1. Mechanical protection
All cables liable to damage, such as in locations in
way of cargo ports, hatches, tank tops, open decks
subject to seas and where passing through decks, are
to be protected by substantial metal shields, structural
shapes, pipe or other equivalent means.
All such coverings are to be of sufficient strength to
provide effective protection to the cables and if metal-
lic are to be electrically continuous and grounded to
the metal hull. Horizontal pipes or the equivalent used
for cable protection are to be provided with drainage
holes and where they are carried out through decks or
bulkheads, arrangements are to be made to ensure the
integrity of the water or gas tightness of the structure.
2. Cables overload protection
2.1 Cables shall be protected against short circuit
and overcurrent.
2.2 Rating and setting of the protection devices
shall be in compliance with the requirements in Sec-
tion 11d.
2.3 Cables protected against overcurrent at the
consumers side require only short-circuit protection at
the supply side. For steering gear, see Section 11g, A.
2.4 Exciter cables for DC motors and DC genera-
tors operating in parallel shall not be fused. Exciter
cables for individually connected DC generators and
synchronous three-phase alternators shall be fused
only if there are special reasons for it, e.g. where the
cables are passing through various compartments of
the vessel.
3. Separation of circuits
3.1 A separate cable shall normally be provided
for each circuit having its own overcurrent and short
circuit protection. Deviating from this requirement the
following may be combined in a common cable:
a main circuit and its control circuits which have
their tapping off after the main switch
various control circuits laid separately from the
main circuits
various main circuits and their control circuits
belonging to a common system, e.g. for several
drives of an air-conditioning system, if all the
cores of the cable can be centrally disconnected
from the supply
Chapter 8
Page 11j2
Section 11j Cable Network I - Part 1
GL 2007

C
3.2 Separate cables shall be provided for safety
voltage circuits.
3.3 Separate cables shall be provided for intrinsi-
cally safe circuits.
4. Cable laying for circuits
4.1 For single-phase and three-phase AC systems,
multi-core cables are to be used wherever possible.
4.2 Should it be necessary to lay single-core
cables for the carriage of more than 10 A in single-
phase or three-phase AC circuits, the special require-
ments of Chapter 3 Electrical Installations, Section
12, D.7. shall be fulfilled.
4.3 In three-phase systems without hull return,
three-core cables shall be used for three-phase connec-
tions; four-core cables are required for circuits with
loaded neutral point.
4.4 In three-phase systems with hull return the
asymmetry of the currents in the three conductors of
three-core cables shall not exceed 20 A (see Section
11d, I.).
4.5 In DC systems without hull return multi-core
cables shall be provided in all cases of smaller cross-
sections.
Where single-core cables are used for large cross-
sections, the outgoing- and return-cables are to be laid
as close as possible to each other over their entire
length to avoid magnetic stray fields.
4.6 The generator cables, all cables run from the
main or emergency switchboard or an auxiliary
switchboard, and all interconnecting cables for essen-
tial equipment, shall be laid as far as possible uninter-
rupted in length to the distribution panels or to the
equipment.
4.7 The cables of intrinsically safe circuits shall
be laid at a distance of at least 50 mm separated from
the cables of non-intrinsically safe circuits. The laying
of intrinsically safe circuits together with non-intrin-
sically safe circuits in a pipe is not permitted. Cables
of intrinsically safe circuits shall be marked.
D. Installation
1. Routing of cables
1.1 The routes of cables shall be such that cables
are laid as straight as possible and are not exposed to
mechanical damage.
1.2 For bends, the minimum internal radius of
curvature permitted by the maker has to be observed.
In any case the radius shall not be smaller than 6 times
the outside diameter of the cable.
1.3 Heat sources such as boilers, hot pipes, etc.
shall be bypassed so that the cables are not subjected
to additional heating. If this is not possible, the cables
are to be shielded from thermal radiation.
1.4 Cables are to be installed in such a manner
that stresses on the cables are not transmitted to the
conductors. They are not to be fastened directly to the
shell plating.
1.5 Cables may be installed behind sheathing, but
they are not to be imbedded in structural heat insula-
tion. They are to pass through such insulation at right
angles and are to be protected by a continuous pipe
with a stuffing tube at one end.
For deck penetrations stuffing tubes are to be at the
upper end of the pipe and for bulkhead penetrations
they are to be on the uninsulated side of the bulkhead.
1.6 Cables may be installed behind panelling,
provided all connections are accessible and the loca-
tion of concealed connection boxes is indicated. Dome
fixtures are to be installed so that they are vented or
they are to be fitted with fire-resistant material in such
a manner as to protect the insulated wiring leading to
the lamps and any exposed woodwork from excessive
temperature.
1.7 Cables for supply of essential equipment and
emergency consumers, e.g. lighting and essential
communications and signalling systems shall, wher-
ever possible, bypass galleys, laundries, Category A
engine rooms and their casings and areas with a high
fire risk and laundries, fish handling and fish process-
ing spaces and other spaces where there is a high
moisture content.
1.8 Cables which feed the fire pumps and the
emergency switchboard shall be of a fire-resistant type
where they pass through high fire risk areas.
1.9 Where practicable, all such cables (1.7; 1.8)
should be run in such manner as to preclude their
being rendered unserviceable by heating of the bulk-
heads that may be caused by a fire in an adjacent
space.
1.10 Cables installed in refrigerating compart-
ments shall be suitable for low temperatures and high
humidity.
1.11 Cables in hazardous areas zone 0 and 1 shall
be armoured or screened, or run inside a metal tube.
2. Fasting of cables and wires
2.1 Cables are to be supported in cable trays or
hangers. The distance between the supports in cable
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 11j Cable Network Chapter 8
Page 11j3

D
racks and the fastenings used are to be selected with
due regard for the type and number of cables and the
possibility of vibration.
Cables grouped in a single support are to be limited to
two banks except for turnouts. Cables running trans-
versely to the underside of beams are to be supported
in cable racks or the equivalent.
2.2 Except for flexible cords for the connection
of mobile consumers and for cables laid in pipes,
conduits, trunking or special casings, all cables and
wires shall be fixed by metal clips or bindings treated
against corrosion or by fastenings made of some other
flame-resistant material.
2.3 Plastic fastenings shall have been approved
by GL.
2.4 Suitable materials are to be placed together
when fastening cables to aluminium walls, e.g. cad-
mium-plated or galvanized steel screws and galva-
nized clips may be used.
3. Deck and bulkhead penetrations
3.1 Where cables pass through watertight, fire-
tight or gastight bulkheads or decks, the penetrations
are to be made through the use of approved stuffing
tubes, transit devices or pourable materials which will
maintain the watertight, fire-tight or gastight integrity
of the bulkheads or decks.
3.2 The penetration shall not impair the mechani-
cal strength of the bulkhead.
3.3 Additionally, each stuffing tube, transit de-
vice or pourable material is to be of a character so as
not to damage the cable physically or through chemi-
cal action or through heat build-up.
3.4 Cables passing through decks are to be pro-
tected from damage by protection pipes or casings up
to a height of at least 300 mm.
3.5 Deck and bulkhead penetration systems must
be approved by GL.
4. Measures to limit the propagation of fire
along cable and wire bundles
All cables shall be so installed that the original flame-
retardant properties of the individual cables are not
impaired.
5. Cables in the vicinity of radio and radio-
navigation equipment
5.1 Except where laid in metal conduits or ducts,
cables and wires with metal sheaths or metal braiding
are to be used above the uppermost metal deck and in
positions where the cables and wires are not separated
by metal bulkheads or decks from aerials, aerial
downleads, the radio room, direction finder or other
radio-navigation or receiving equipment. The metal
sheaths and shields are to be effectively earthed.
5.2 Single-core cables are not permitted in the
radio room.
5.3 Cables liable to carry interference pulses
because of the nature of the equipment connected to
them, e.g. echo sounders, are to be shielded, for ex-
ample, by thick-walled iron conduits in addition to the
cable shield.
6. Magnetic compass zone
All electric cables and lines, machines, apparatus and
accessories shall be laid or installed at a sufficient
distance from the magnetic compass or have to be
shielded so as to prevent any undue interference with
the compass (deviation < 0,5 degree).
7. Earthing of cables and accessories
7.1 Metallic cable sheaths, armouring and shields
in power installations shall be electrically connected to
the vessel's hull at each end; single-core cables shall
be earthed at one end only. For cables and wires for
electronic equipment, the manufacturer's recommen-
dations shall be observed, earthing at one end only is
recommended.
7.2 Electrical continuity of all metallic cable
coverings shall also be maintained inside of cable
junction and connection boxes.
7.3 Metallic cable sheaths, armouring and shields
shall be earthed, preferably by the use of standard
cable gland fittings designed for that purpose, or by
suitable equivalent clips or joints.
7.4 Metallic cable sheaths, armouring and shields
shall in no case be deemed to constitute earthing con-
ductors for the protective earthing of the connected
electrical equipment.
8. Cable joints and branches
8.1 Cables shall be extended only with the ap-
proval of GL. The used material shall have been type
tested by GL and shall maintain the flame-retardant
and, where required, the fire-resistant properties of the
cables.
8.2 Junction and distribution boxes shall be ac-
cessible and marked for identification.
8.3 Cables for safety extra-low voltage shall not
pass a junction or distribution box together with cables
for higher voltage systems.
Chapter 8
Page 11j4
Section 11j Cable Network I - Part 1
GL 2007

D
8.4 The terminals for different types of systems,
especially such of differently operating voltages, shall
be separated.
9. Measures for limitation of the propagation
of fire along cable and wire bundles
9.1 All cables shall be so installed that the origi-
nal flame-retardant properties of the individual cables
are not impaired. This requirement can be considered
to be fulfilled if:
the bundled cables are individually flame-
retardant and have been successfully passed the
bundle fire test in accordance with IEC publica-
tion 60332-3 category A/F
suitable measures have been taken during the
installation, e.g. by providing of fire stops or
application of flameproof coatings
9.2 For cable bundles consisting of cables which
have not been subjected to a bundle fire test, the pre-
cautions shall be taken to limit the fire propagation in
accordance with Chapter 3 Electrical Installations,
Section 12, D.
10. Application of fire-resistant cables
Cables for services required to be operable under fire
conditions including those for their power supplies are
to be of a fire-resistant type, complying with Section
11k, E. where they pass through high fire risk areas,
fire zones or decks, other than those which they serve.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 11j Cable Network Chapter 8
Page 11j5

D


Section 11k

Electrical Equipment
A. Electrical Machinery
1. General
1.1 Except as regards the particular points men-
tioned in the following, the generators and motors are
to be constructed and installed according to recom-
mendations of IEC Publication 60034 and the require-
ments of Section 11a, H.
For generators and motors intended for electrical pro-
pulsion special requirements are to be observed, see
Section 11a, A.
1.2 The permissible limits of temperature rise,
particularly for windings, sliprings and commutators
for motors under continuous running and for genera-
tors, are given in Table 11k.1 with regard to 45 C
conventional ambient temperature
1.3 The permissible temperature rise limits for
motors supplying an intermittent service will be spe-
cially considered by GL Head Office.
2. Ventilation and cooling
2.1 Draught ventilation
The air supply to draught-ventilated machines shall be
free of moisture, oil vapours and dust as far as possi-
ble.
Where re-coolers are used in the air circuit, they shall
be designed and mounted in such a way that condensa-
tion or water leaking from the re-cooling system is
kept away from the machine windings. Dual-tube
coolers are to be used where appropriate.
2.2 Surface cooling
Surface cooled machines on exposed decks may have
external fans only if they are fully protected against
icing.
3. Bearings and bearing lubrications
3.1 Plain bearings
Provision shall be made for checking the bearing lu-
brication. Even in the case of the inclined positions
specified in Section 11a, E. no oil shall flow out and
penetrate into the machine.
In the case of bearings with force lubrication, failure
of the oil supply and the occurrence of excessive bear-
ing temperatures shall trigger an alarm.
Two-part bearings are to be fitted with thermometers
indicating, wherever possible, the temperature of the
lower bearing shell.
3.2 Antifriction bearings
Antifriction bearings should be of the preloaded type.
4. Windings
4.1 In conjunction with the specified protective
devices, machines shall be able to withstand the dy-
namic and thermal stresses likely to result from a short
circuit.
4.2 Where insulating materials are laminated, the
maximum temperature permitted for each individual
insulating material shall not be exceeded, see Table
11k.1.
4.3 All windings have to be effectively protected
against the effects of oil vapours and air laden with
moisture or salt.
5. Terminal boxes
The class of enclosure of terminal boxes shall corre-
spond to that of the machine, but shall in any case not
be less than IP 44, see Section 11a, J.
6. Operation in network with semiconductor
converters
Electric machines operating in networks containing
semiconductor converters shall be designed for the ex-
pected harmonics of the system. A sufficient reserve
shall be considered for the temperature rise, compared
with a sinusoidal load.
7. Testing of electrical machinery
7.1 Machines supplying an essential service
together with their gear are to be submitted to tests to
verify that the requirements defined herein are com-
plied with. For this purpose and without prejudice to
tests and inspections deemed necessary during con-
struction and after completion, a Certificate of the
builder has to give the machine specifications and the
results of the required tests.
7.2 The machines listed in the following are
subject to testing in the manufacturer's works in the
presence of a GL Surveyor:
generators with outputs of 50 kW or kVA or
over
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 11k Electrical Equipment Chapter 8
Page 11k1

A
motors of 50 kW or over for steering gear
drives, anchor windlasses, for fishing winches
and refrigeration equipment for vessels with
Class Notation RIC
all other drive motors for essential auxiliary ma-
chines rated at 100 kW or over.
7.3 Heat test
7.3.1 Heat run until the final temperature corre-
sponding to the required mode of operation is reached,
followed by determination of the temperature rise.
The results shall be within the limits given in Table
11k.1.
7.3.2 Machines with separate cooling fans and/or
air filters are to be tested together with this equip-
ment.
7.3.3 Heat runs on machines of identical construc-
tion which occurred not more than 3 years previously
can be recognized.
Table 11k.1 Permitted temperature-rises of air cooled machines at an ambient temperature of 45C
(difference values in K)
Insulation class
No. Machinery component
Method of
measurement
3

A E B F
1
H
1

1 AC windings of machines R 55 70 75 100 120
2 Commutator windings R 55 70 75 100 120
3 Field windings of AC and DC machines with DC exci-
tation, other than those specified under 4
R 55 70 75 100 120
a) Field windings of synchronous machines with cy-
lindrical rotors having DC excitation winding, em-
bedded in slots except synchronous induction mo-
tors
R 85 105 125
b) Stationary field windings of DC machines having
more than on layer
R 55 70 75 100 120
c) Low-resistance field windings of AC and DC ma-
chines and compensation windings of DC machines
having more than one layer
R
Th
55 70 75 95 115
4
d) Single-layer field windings of AC and DC machines
with exposed bare or varnished metal surfaces and
single-layer compensation windings of DC ma-
chines
R
Th
60 75 85 105 125
5 Permanently short-circuited, insulated windings Th 55 70 75 95 115
6 Permanently short-circuited, uninsulated windings
7 Iron cores and other parts not in contact with
windings
The temperature rises of these parts shall in no case
reach such values that there is a risk of injury to any
insulation or other material on adjacent parts or to
the item itself
8 Iron cores and other parts in contact with windings Th 55 70 75 95 115
9 Commutators and slip rings, open or enclosed Th 55 65 75 85 105
10 Plain bearings measured in the lower
bearing shell or in the oil
sump after shutdown
45
Roller bearings 45 11
Roller bearings with
special grease
measured in the lubrica-
tion nipple bore or near
the outer bearing seat

75
12 Surface temperature Reference 35
2

1
These values may need correction in the case of high-voltage AC windings.
2
Higher temperature rises may be expected on electrical machines with insulation material for high temperatures. Where parts of such
machinery may be accidentally touched and there is a risk of burns (>80C), GL reserve the right to request means of protection such as a
handrail to prevent accidental contacts.
3
R = resistance method, Th = thermometer method.


Chapter 8
Page 11k2
Section 11k Electrical Equipment I - Part 1
GL 2007

A
7.4 Load characteristic
For generators the voltage and for motors the speed
shall be checked as a function of the load.
7.5 Overload test
The overload test shall be performed:
for generators for 1,5 times to rated current for
two minutes
for standard motors at 1,6 times the rated torque
for 15 seconds. Motors may not depart substan-
tially from their rated speed during the test.
Proof is required that windlass motors are capa-
ble of delivering twice the rated torque for two
minutes and motors for travel winches 1,6 the
rated torque for two minutes. Earlier overload
test on motors of identical construction can be
recognized.
Steering gear motors are to be tested in accor-
dance with the provisions of Section 11g, A.3.
7.6 Short-circuit test
7.6.1 On all synchronous generators, the steady
short circuit current shall be determined with the ex-
citer unit in operation.
With a three-phase short circuit between terminals, the
steady short-circuit current shall not be less than three
times the rated current, and shall not be greater than
six times the rated current. The generator and its ex-
citer unit shall be capable of withstanding the steady
short-circuit current for a period of two seconds with-
out suffering damage.
7.6.2 A short-circuit withstand test may be de-
manded:
to determine the reactances
if there is any concern regarding mechanical and
electrical strength; synchronous generators
which have undergone a short-circuit withstand
test shall be thoroughly examined after the test
for any damage
7.7 Overspeed test
As proof of mechanical strength, a two-minute over-
speed test shall be carried out as follows:
for generators with their own drive, at 1,2 times
the rated speed
for generators coupled to the main propulsion
plant and not arranged in the main shafting, at
1,25 times the rated speed
for shaft generators arranged in the main shaft-
ing and whose construction makes testing im-
practicable, proof by computation of mechanical
strength is required
for motors with one nominal speed, at 1,2 times
the no-load speed
for variable-speed motors, at 1,2 times the max-
imum no-load speed
for motors with series characteristics, at 1,2
times the maximum speed shown on the rating
plate, but at least at 1,5 times the rated speed
The overspeed test may be dispensed with in the case
of squirrel-cage machines.
7.8 Winding test
7.8.1 The following requirements have to be con-
sidered:
a) The test voltage shall be as shown in Table
11k.2. It shall be applied for 1 minute for each
single test.
The voltage test shall be carried out between the
windings and the machine housing, the machine
housing being connected to the windings not in-
volved in the test. This test shall be performed
only on new, fully assembled machines fitted
with all their working parts.
The test voltage shall be a practically sinusoidal
AC voltage at system frequency.
The maximum anticipated no-load voltage or the
maximum system voltage is to be used as refer-
ence in determining the test voltage.
b) Any repetition of the voltage test which may be
necessary shall be performed at only 80 % of the
nominal test voltage specified in Table 11k.2.
7.8.2 In the case of machines supplied by inverters
or operated in series with other machines, the maxi-
mum anticipated no-voltage is to be used as reference
in determining the test voltage.
7.9 Determination of insulation resistance
(test)
The insulation resistance measurement shall be carried
out, if possible with the machine at operating tempera-
ture, on completion of the tests and with the applica-
tion of a DC voltage of at least 500 V.
The minimum insulation resistance shall be:

3 rated voltage [V]
[M ]
rated output [kVA] 1000

+

but not less than 1 M.
In the case of machines supplied by inverters or oper-
ated in series with other machines, the maximum
anticipated no-load voltage or the maximum system
voltage is to be taken as the rated voltage.
7.10 Test of degree of protection
See Section 11a, J.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 11k Electrical Equipment Chapter 8
Page 11k3

A
Table 11k.2 Test voltages for the winding test
No. Machine or machinery component
Test voltage (rms) dependent on rated
voltage U of the subject winding
1 Insulated windings of rotating machines of output less
than 1 kW (kVA), and of rated voltages less than 100 V
with the exception of those in items 4 to 8
2 U + 500 V
2 Insulated windings of rotating machines of size less than
10000 kW (kVA), with the exception of those in item 1
and items 4 to 8
2 U + 1000 V, with a minimum of 1500 V
3 Insulated windings of rotating machines of size 10000 kW
(kVA) or more with the exception of those in items 4 to 8
rated voltage
up to 11000 V 2 U + 1000 V
4 Separately excited field windings of DC machines 1000 V + twice the maximum excitation voltage but
not less than 1500 V
5 Field windings of synchronous generators, synchronous
motors and rotary phase converters:
a) rated field voltage
up to 500 V
b) over 500 V
When a machine is intended to be started with the field
winding short-circuited or connected across a resistance of
value less than ten times the resistance of the winding
When the machine is intended to be started either with the
field winding connected across a resistance of value equal
to, or more than, ten times the resistance of the winding,
or with the field windings on open-circuit with or without
a field dividing switch
10 times rated field voltage,
with a minimum of 1500 V
4000 V + twice rated field voltage
10 times the rated field voltage,
minimum 1500 V, maximum 3500 V
1000 V + twice the maximum value of the rms volt-
age, which can occur under the specified starting
conditions, between the terminals of the field wind-
ing, or in the case of a sectionalized field winding
between the terminals of any section, with a minimum
of 1500 V
6 Secondary (usually rotor) windings of induction motors or
synchronous induction motors if not permanently short-
circuited (e.g. if intended for rheostatic starting)
a) for non-reversing motors or motors reversible from
standstill only
b) for motors to be reversed or braked by reversing the
primary supply while the motor is running

1000 V + twice the open-circuit standstill voltage as
measured between slip rings or secondary terminals
with rated voltage applied to the primary windings
1000 V + four times the open-circuit secondary volt-
age as defined in item 6a)
7 Exciters (exception below)
Exception 1:
Exciters of synchronous motors (including synchronous
induction motors) if connected to earth or disconnected
from the field windings during starting
Exception 2:
Separately excited field windings of exciters
as for the windings to which they are connected
twice rated exciter voltage + 1000 V,
with a minimum of 1500 V
as under item 4
8 Assembled group of machines and apparatus A repetition of the tests in items 1 to 7 above should
be avoided if possible, but if a test on an assembled
group of several pieces of new machines, each one of
which has previously passed its high-voltage test, is
made, the test voltage to be applied to such assembled
group shall be 80 % of the lowest test voltage appro-
priate for any part of the group.
1

1
Where a number of windings belonging to one or more machines are connected together, the test voltage is dictated by the maximum
voltage to earth which can occur.

Chapter 8
Page 11k4
Section 11k Electrical Equipment I - Part 1
GL 2007

A
B. Transformers and Reactance Coils
1. General
Transformers and reactance coils shall conform to IEC
publication 60076, Power Transformers or an equiva-
lent standard.
1.1 Coolant
Only dry type transformers may be used on board of
the vessel.
1.2 Windings
All transformers are to have separate windings for
primary and secondary coils, except for starting and
ignition transformers which may be of the auto-
transformer type.
2. Rating
2.1 Voltage variation during loading
Under resistive load, the voltage variation between no
load and full-load shall not exceed 5 %.
This requirement does not apply to short-circuit-proof
transformers.
2.2 Temperature rise
The limit temperature rise of windings may not exceed
the values shown in Table11k.3.
Parts of casings with surface temperatures exceeding
80 C are to be protected against accidental contact.
Table 11k.3 Permissible temperature rise of trans-
former- and reactance coil windings
with an ambient temperature of 45 C
Insulation class A E B F H
Temperature rise [K] 55 70 75 95 120


2.3 Short-circuit resistance
Transformers in conjunction with their protective
devices shall be able to withstand the effect to external
short circuits without damage.
3. Tests
3.1 General
Transformers shall be tested in the manufacturer's
works. Transformers rated with 100 kVA and above
shall be tested in the presence of a GL Surveyor. A
works test report covering the tests carried out shall be
prepared.
The works test reports shall be presented on request.
The tests mentioned under 3.2 till 3.5 shall be per-
formed at approximately operating temperature. The
scope of the tests is defined in 3.2 to 3.6:
3.2 Heat test
The test shall be performed to determine the tempera-
ture rise, which shall not exceed the maximum per-
missible values shown in Table 11k.3.
Temperature-rise tests on transformers of identical
construction and carried out not more than 3 years
previously may be recognized. The referenced tem-
perature rise shall be 10 % below the values shown in
Table 11k.3.
3.3 Induced overvoltage test
The windings shall be tested at twice the rated voltage
and at increased frequency to verify that the insulation
between turns is sufficient and satisfactory.
The duration of the test shall be

test frequency
120 s
rated frequency

but not less than 15 s.
3.4 Short-circuit test
On request, the short-circuit proof property in accor-
dance with 2.3 shall be verified.
3.5 Winding test
The test voltage shown in Table 11k.4 shall be applied
between the winding parts to be tested and all other
windings, which are to be connected to the core and
the frame during the test.
The test voltage shall be applied for one minute.
Table 11k.4 Test voltage for transformers and reac-
tance coil windings
Maximum operating
voltage
[V]
Alternating withstand
voltage
[V]
50
250
600
1000
1000
1500
2500
3000

3.6 Determination of insulation resistance
The measurement of insulation resistance shall be
carried out at the end of the test sequence with a DC
voltage of at least 500 V.
The insulation resistance shall be at least:
5 M between primary and secondary winding
2 M for the remaining insulation
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 11k Electrical Equipment Chapter 8
Page 11k5

B
C. Storage Batteries and Chargers
1. General
1.1 These requirements apply to permanently
installed storage batteries and their chargers for sup-
plying power systems and automation equipment, for
use as emergency source of electrical power and for
starting internal combustion engines.
1.2 Rating of batteries
Batteries are to be so rated that they can supply the
consumers for the required period, in accordance with
the energy balance, when charged to 80 % of their
rated capacity.
2. Storage batteries
2.1 Lead-acid storage batteries with dilute sul-
phuric acid as electrolyte and steel batteries with
nickel-cadmium cells and dilute potassium hydroxide
as electrolyte are generally permitted.
2.2 Other types of storage batteries of non-
standard design, such as silver/zinc batteries may be
allowed if their suitability for shipboard use has been
demonstrated.
2.3 The cells of batteries of accumulators shall be
grouped in cases or on platforms fitted with handles to
facilitate handling; the total weight of a set may not
exceed 100 kg.
Each case or platform shall be fitted with a name plate
including information concerning the designation of
the type, the name of the maker and the nominal ca-
pacity at a particular discharge rate (for preference
that which corresponds to the particular application,
discharge in 5, 10 or 20 hours).
The boxes of cells shall not be manufactured from
a material sensitive to shocks such as glass, nor
from celluloid, nor any other material easily inflam-
mable.
They shall be carried out in such a way as to prevent
any spillage of the electrolyte by reason of an inclina-
tion of 40 from the vertical.
3. Chargers
3.1 Chargers are to be so rated that discharged
storage batteries can be charged to 80 % of their rated
capacity within at least 15 hours without exceeding
the maximum permissible charging currents.
If consumers are simultaneously supplied during
charging, the maximum charging voltage may not
exceed 20 % of the rated voltage. The power require-
ments of the consumers are to be taken into account
when selecting the charger.
D. Switchgear and Protection Device
1. General
1.1 Switchgear and protective devices have to
comply with the relevant IEC Publications and shall
be suitable for the application concerned.
1.2 For materials and insulation, see Section
11a, I.
1.3 For equipment and components subject to
mandatory type-approval, see Section 11e, G.
2. Low-Voltage switchgear
2.1 Circuit breakers
2.1.1 Drives
Power-driven power circuit breakers shall be equipped
with an additional emergency drive operated by hand.
2.1.2 Making and breaking capacity
The making and breaking capacity is to be in accor-
dance with IEC Publication 60947-2. Other standards
may be recognized.
3. Protection devices
3.1 General
Protective and tripping devices are installed together
with circuit breakers and other appliances in switch-
boards and consoles.
3.2 Short-circuit protection
Short-circuit protection devices shall be independent
of energy supplied from circuits other than that to be
protected. In the event of a short circuit, provision is
to be made for the total loss of the supply voltage.
Short-circuit protection devices for generators shall be
delayed for selective disconnection.
3.3 Overcurrent protection
The operation of overcurrent relays shall not be ef-
fected by the ambient temperature.
Bimetal devices are to be compensated and, for motor
protection, are to be fitted with a re-closing inhibitor.
Overcurrent relays for motor protection shall be ad-
justable.
3.4 Undervoltage protection
3.4.1 Undervoltage trips shall cause the power
circuit breaker to break if the voltage drops to 70 % -
35 % of the rated value. Undervoltage trips for genera-
tor circuit breakers shall be delayable by up to 500 ms.
Chapter 8
Page 11k6
Section 11k Electrical Equipment I - Part 1
GL 2007

D
3.4.2 Short-circuit trips shall be delayed where the
selective disconnection of short circuits is necessary.
The reset ratio is also to be determined by reference to
the conditions after disconnection of a short circuit
and should be as far as possible approximate to unity.
3.5 Shunt trips
Shunt trips shall ensure the disconnection of the cir-
cuit- breakers even if the voltage drops to 85 % of the
rated voltage.
3.6 Electronic protection devices
Electronic protection devices shall remain operative at
their maximum permissible load at an ambient tem-
perature of 55 C.
3.7 Reverse power protection
The reverse power protection device shall respond to
the active power regardless of the power factor and
may operate only in the event of power return.
3.8 Phase failure protection
Protection devices for detection of a single-phase
failure in three-phase circuits have to operate instanta-
neously. Bimetallic relays with differential release do
not constitute phase failure protection devices in the
opinion of these Rules.
3.9 Check synchronizers
Check synchronizers for protection of alternators
against parallel connection at an unacceptable phase
angle may allow connection only up to an angular
deviation of 45 (electrical) and up to a frequency
difference of 1 Hz.
3.10 Insulation monitoring equipment
Insulation monitoring devices shall continuously dis-
play the insulation resistance for the distribution sys-
tem and have to trigger an alarm should the insulation
resistance of the system fall below 50 Ohms per Volt
of mains voltage.
The measuring current may not exceed 30 mA in the
event of a dead short circuit to earth.
E. Cables and Insulated Wires
1.1 Cables and wires shall be flame-retardant and
self-extinguishing.
For cable bundles, see Section 11j, D.9.
1.2 Cables manufactured in accordance with the
relevant recommendations of IEC publications 60092-
350, 60092-351, 60092-352, 60092-353, 60092-354,
60092-359, 60092-373, 60092-374, 60092-375 and
60092-376 will be accepted by GL provided that they
are tested to its satisfaction.
Cables manufactured and tested to standards other
than those specified above will be accepted provided
they are in accordance with an acceptable and relevant
international or national standard.
2. Conductor material and structure
2.1 Electrolytic copper with a resistivity not
exceeding 17,241 Ohm mm
2
/km at 20C shall be used
as the material for the conductors of cables and wires.
2.2 If the insulation consists of natural or syn-
thetic rubber vulcanized with sulphur, the individual
conductor wires shall be tinned.
2.3 The conductors of movable wires shall be
finely stranded.
The conductors of permanently laid cables and wires
shall be made of stranded copper conductors (class 2)
or flexible stranded copper conductors (class 5).
Solid conductors up to 4 mm
2
in cross-section are
permitted for final circuits of room lighting and space
heating systems in the accommodation.
3. Materials and wall thickness of insulating
covers
The materials used for insulation shall be of standard-
ized types for which the maximum permissible tem-
peratures at the conductors during undisturbed opera-
tion are specified.
4. Protective coverings, sheaths and braids
4.1 Single-core cables shall have a suitable sepa-
rating layer of filler material or foil over the core insu-
lation.
4.2 Multi-core cables shall have a common core
covering made of filler material or shall have a wrap-
ping and sheath.
4.3 Only materials of a standardized type shall be
used for non-metallic sheaths. In all cases the thermal
stability of the compounds used shall correspond to
that of the insulating material.
4.4 Braids shall be made of corrosion-resistant
material such as copper or copper alloy or of material
treated to prevent corrosion, e.g. galvanized steel.
4.5 Outer metallic wire braids shall have a coat-
ing of protective paint, which have to be lead-free and
flame-retardant. The paint shall be of sufficiently low
viscosity when applied to enable it to penetrate readily
into the wire braid. When dry, it shall not flake off
when the cable is bent around a mandrel with a diame-
ter of 15 times that of the cable.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 11k Electrical Equipment Chapter 8
Page 11k7

E
5. Identification
5.1 Each cable shall be marked for type and for
name of the manufacturer.
5.2 The cores of multi-core cables and wires shall
have a permanent marking. In multi-core cables and
wires where the cores are arranged in a number of
concentric layers, two adjacent cores in each layer
shall be coloured differently from each other and from
all other cores, unless the individual cores are other-
wise unambiguously identified, e.g. by printed num-
bers.
5.3 Protective earth conductors shall have
green/yellow colour coding.
6. Approvals
6.1 Cables and wires are subject to mandatory
type approval by GL.
6.2 Proof is required by the manufacturer by
issue of workshop test reports stating that the continu-
ous production is made in conformity to relevant stan-
dards and is verified by individual and sample tests for
each production length of cables. These reports shall
record any deviations from the standards.
6.3 The application of cables and wires without
type-test is subject to an agreement with GL in every
case. Individual and sample tests performed at the
manufacturer's works on each lengths delivered are
required for these cables, see 7.3.
7. Tests
7.1 Type tests shall be carried out in accordance
with the relevant standards in the manufacturer's
works and in the presence of a staff member of the
Head Office. The scope of the tests shall be agreed
with GL.
7.2 If not specified in the standards, the following
tests shall be performed as an additional requirement:
Ozone tests on cable sheaths whose basic material
consists of natural or synthetic rubber. Test conditions
shall be:
Ozone concentration: 250 - 300 ppm
Temperature: (25 2) C
Duration: 24 h
The test shall be carried out in accordance with IEC
publication 60811-2-1.
Other equivalent test methods may be agreed with GL.
The test is passed satisfactory if no cracks will be
discovered visible to the naked eye.
7.3 Individual tests on non-type-tested cables and
wires shall be performed in the manufacturer's works
in the presence of a GL Surveyor.
The scope of the tests shall be agreed with GL in ad-
vance.
The following tests shall be carried out at least:
conductor resistance
dielectric strength
insulation resistance
dimensions and construction of samples
mechanical strength characteristics of samples
F. Installation Material
1. General
1.1 The installation material shall conform to IEC
publications. Other standards may be recognized by
GL.
1.2 It is necessary to ensure that terminals are
suitable for the connection of stranded conductors.
Exceptions are permitted for systems with solid con-
ductors (e.g. lighting, socket-outlets and heating appli-
ances in the accommodation area).
The method of connection shall be compatible with
the terminals used.
1.3 For materials, see Section 11a, I.
2. Plug-and-socket connections
2.1 Depending on their application, the design of
plug-and-socket connections shall conform to the
following regulations:
a) in the accommodation area, day rooms and ser-
vice rooms (up to 16 A, 250 V AC) IEC publi-
cation 60083 or 60320
b) power circuits (up to 250 A, 690 V AC) IEC
publication 60309-1 and 60309-2
c) electronic switchgear - IEC publications, e.g.
60130 and 60603
G. Lighting Fittings
1. General
Luminaries, floodlights and searchlights shall conform
to IEC publications 60598 and 60092-306. Other stan-
dards may be recognized by GL. The requirements
stated in F.1. shall be observed.
Chapter 8
Page 11k8
Section 11k Electrical Equipment I - Part 1
GL 2007

G
2. Design
2.1 The surface temperature of easily touchable
parts of lighting fixtures shall not exceed 60C.
2.2 High-power lights with higher surface tem-
peratures shall be protected against unintentional con-
tact by additional means.
2.3 The terminals and spaces for the connection
of cables shall not reach a higher temperature as per-
missible for the insulation of the wires or cables used,
see also Section 11j, A.3. The temperature rise in the
terminal box shall not exceed 40 K.
2.4 All metal parts of a lighting fixture shall be
bounded together.
2.5 Wiring inside lighting fixtures shall have a
minimum cross-section of 0,75 mm
2
. A cross-section
of at least 1,5 mm
2
shall be used for through wiring.
Heat-resistant wires shall be used for internal wiring.
2.6 Each lighting fixture shall be durably marked
with the following details:
maximum permitted lamp wattage
minimum mounting distance
H. Electrical Heating Equipment
1. General
1.1 Electrical heating equipment and boilers shall
conform to IEC publications, e.g. 60335, with particu-
lar attention to IEC publication 60092-307. In addition
the general assignments in F.1. have to be observed.
1.2 The connections of power supply cables shall
be so arranged that temperatures higher than permitted
for the terminals and supply cables do not arise.
1.3 Controls in operation such as switch knobs
and handles shall not attain temperatures higher than:
55 C for metal parts or
65 C for parts made of porcelain, glass,
moulded plastics or wood
A temperature of 5 C higher is permissible for parts
operated by finger tipping only.
1.4 Only heating elements with shrouding or
ceramic-embedded heating coils shall be used. Infra-
red radiators are permitted.
2. Design
2.1 Space heaters
2.1.1 The casing or enclosure of each heater shall
be so designed that no objects can be placed on it, and
the air can circulate freely around the heating ele-
ments.
2.1.2 Electrical space heaters shall be so designed
that, based at an ambient temperature of 20 C, the
temperature of the casing or enclosure and of the air
flow from the heater does not exceed 95 C under
defined test conditions.
2.1.3 To prevent unacceptable temperature rises
due to heat accumulation, each heater shall be fitted
with a safety temperature limiter. Automatic reconnec-
tion is not permitted.
The safety temperature limiter may be dispensed with
for watertight heaters in spaces without a substantial
fire risk, e.g. in bathrooms and washing rooms.
2.1.4 The operating switches have to disconnect all
live conductors. The switch positions shall be clearly
marked at the switches.
3. Oil and water calorifiers
Continuous-flow electric calorifiers and water accu-
mulators are to be equipped with two mutually inde-
pendent temperature protection devices, one of which
shall be a permanently set safety temperature limiter
while the other may take the form of a thermostatic
controller.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 11k Electrical Equipment Chapter 8
Page 11k9

H


Section 11l

Tests
A. General
1. The following Rules apply to the testing of
electrical and electronic installations, equipment and
components.
2. Within the framework of their general quality
assurance programme, manufacturers shall ensure that
the products they manufacture conform to the speci-
fied requirements. Records shall be made, containing
quality assurance measures and tests and shall be
handed over to GL on request.
3. For certain installations, equipment and com-
ponents, testing is required in the presence of a GL
Surveyor according to these Rules, see C., D. and E.
The tests and items for testing specified below consti-
tute minimum requirements.
GL reserve the right to demand that tests also be per-
formed on other items, either on board or in the manu-
facturer's works.
4. For appliances of a new type or for equip-
ment which is being used for the first time on vessels
with GL Class, additional tests and trials are to be
agreed between the manufacturer and GL, if the cir-
cumstances this require.
5. It is the aim of the tests to verify conformity
with the requirements covered by the Rules for Con-
struction, and to prove the suitability of equipment for
its particular application.
6. Tests are divided into:
examinations of the technical documentation,
see B.
tests in the manufacturer's works, see C.
tests on board, see D.
tests for type approvals, see E.
B. Examinations of Technical Documentation
1. The list of documents subject to approval is
specified in Section 11a, C.
2. The documents which have been examined
and approved by GL Head Office shall be presented to
the GL Surveyor on request.
C. Tests in the Manufacturer's Works
1. Tests in the presence of a GL Surveyor
1.1 The tests shall be carried out on the basis of
the Rules for Construction and the approved docu-
ments. They shall be performed in accordance with a
recognized standard.
1.2 Machines, appliances and installations sub-
ject to testing in accordance with 2. are to be tested in
the presence of a GL Surveyor unless the precondi-
tions for one's own responsibility tests by the manu-
facturer are fulfilled, see 3.
2. Machines, appliances and installations
subject to testing
2.1 Electrical machines
For scope of tests see Section 11k, A.
2.2 Transformers
For scope of tests see Section 11k, B.
2.3 Power electronics
For scope of tests see Section 11f, G.
2.4 Switchboards
For scope of tests see Section 11e, G. and check list
form F 217.
Main switchboards
Emergency switchboards
Switchboards for electrical propulsion plants
Starters for motors in accordance with 2.1
2.5 Electrical propulsion plant
For scope of tests, see Chapter 3 Electrical Installa-
tions, Section 13.
2.6 Computer System
See Section 11h, A.2.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 11l Tests Chapter 8
Page 11l1

C
3. One's own responsibility tests made by the
manufacturers
3.1 A part of the products under 2.1, 2.3 and 2.4
may be tested on the manufacturer's own responsibil-
ity if the following preconditions are fulfilled:
A Quality Management System recognized by
GL is available.
GL has carried out type tests of the products.
The one's own responsibility tests have been
agreed with GL.
3.2 Reference is made to the GL Rules VI Ad-
ditional Rules and Guidelines, Part 3 Machinery In-
stallations, Chapter 8 Guidelines for the Inspection
of Mechanical and Electrotechnical Products.
D. Tests on Board
1. General
The tests are divided into:
tests during construction/installation
tests during dock trials
tests during sea trials
2. Tests during construction
2.1 During the period of construction of the ves-
sel, the installations shall be checked for conformity
with the documents approved by GL and with the
Rules for Construction.
2.2 Test Certificates for tests which have already
been performed shall be presented to the Surveyor on
request.
2.3 Protective measures shall be checked:
protection against foreign bodies and water
protection against electric shock, such as protec-
tive earthing, protective separation or other
measures as listed in Section 11a.
2.4 Testing of the cable network
Inspection and testing of cable installation and cable
routing with regard to:
acceptability of cable routing with regard to:
- separation of cable routes
- fire safety
- the reliable supply of emergency consumers
selection and fastening of cables
construction of watertight and fireproof bulk-
head and deck penetrations
insulation resistance measurement
3. Tests during dock trials
3.1 General
Proofs are required of the satisfactory condition and
proper operation of the main and emergency power
supply systems, the steering gear and the aids of ma-
noeuvring, as well as of all the other installations
specified in the Rules for Construction.
Unless already required in the Rules for Construction,
the tests to be performed shall be agreed with the GL
Surveyor in accordance with the specific characteris-
tics of the subject equipment.
3.2 Generators
A test run of the generator sets and as far as possible
of the shaft generators shall be conducted under nor-
mal operating conditions, and shall be reported on
form F 218.
3.3 Storage batteries
The following shall be tested:
installation of storage batteries
ventilation of battery rooms and boxes, and
cross-sections of ventilation ducts
storage-battery charging equipment
the required caution labels and information
plates
3.4 Switchgear
The following items shall be tested under observance
of forms F 217 and F 218:
accessibility for operation and maintenance
protection against the ingress of water and oil
from ducts and pipes in the vicinity of the
switchboards, and sufficient ventilation
equipment of main and emergency switchboards
with insulated handrails, gratings and insulating
floor coverings
correct settings and operation of protection de-
vices and interlocks
independent manual operation of generating sets
from common external voltage and automation
systems (manual operation means local
start/stop and speed setting as well as voltage
control, protection devices and synchronizing
from switchboard)
GL reserve the right to demand the proof of selective
arrangement of the vessel's supply system.
Chapter 8
Page 11l2
Section 11l Tests I - Part 1
GL 2007

D
3.5 Power electronics
The following items shall be tested:
ventilation of the place of installation
function of the equipment and protection de-
vices
3.6 Power plants
The following items shall be tested:
Motor drives together with the driven machines,
which shall, wherever possible, be subjected to
the most severe anticipated operating conditions.
This test shall include a check of the settings of
the motors' short-circuit and overcurrent protec-
tion devices.
emergency remote stops (compare also Section
11d, I.7.) of equipment such as:
- engine room fans
- fuel pumps
closed loop controls, open loop controls and all
electric safety devices.
3.7 Control, monitoring and vessel's safety
systems
For these systems operational tests shall be performed.
3.8 Electrical propulsion plants
Regarding scope of tests see Chapter 3 Electrical
Installations, Section 13.
4. Tests during the sea trial
4.1 Rating of the main- and emergency electri-
cal power supplies
During the sea trial it shall be proved that the main
and emergency electrical power supplies are ade-
quately rated and conform to Section 11c and all con-
trol and monitoring devices are functioning according
to their assignments.
4.2 Operating reliability during navigation
4.2.1 Tests shall be carried out to determine
whether all the machines, equipment, etc. constituting
the electrical installation operate satisfactorily at all
revolutions of the main engine, particularly during
engine and steering gear manoeuvres.
4.2.2 Tests shall be carried out on the restoration of
the main and emergency electrical power supplies
following a black-out during navigation.
E. Type Approvals
1. The installations, equipment and assemblies
mentioned in 5. are subject to mandatory type ap-
proval.
2. Type tests shall be carried out in the presence
of a staff member of the Head Office either in the
manufacturer's works or, by agreement, in suitable
institutions.
3. Type tests are carried out according to GL
Rules VI Additional Rules and Guidelines, Part 7
Guidelines for the Performance of Type Approvals
and standards defined therein.
4. Type tested installations, apparatuses and
assemblies shall be used within the scope of valid
Construction Rules only. The suitability for the sub-
ject application shall be ensured.
5. Installations, apparatuses and assemblies
subject to type testing
5.1 Generator protection devices, see Section
11d, A. and Section 11e, G.
5.2 Switchgear, see Section 11e, G.
circuit breakers, load-switches, disconnect
switches and fuses for direct connection to the
main busbars and to non-fused, multi-terminal
busbars of main, emergency and control switch-
boards
generator protection devices
standardized switchgear in series manufacture
5.3 Steering gear and lateral thrust propeller
system, see Section 11g, A. and B.
5.4 Machinery control system, see Section 11h, B.
safety devices
safety system
5.5 Vessel

s control and safety system, see Sec-

tion 11h, C. and D.
fire detection and alarm system
5.6 Cables and accessories, see Section 11k, E.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 11l Tests Chapter 8
Page 11l3

E


Section 12

Special Requirements for Automation
A. General
1. Alarm systems and remote control
Fishing vessels having machinery plants built,
equipped, surveyed and tested in compliance with the
requirements of this Section may be assigned the
Class Notation RC Remote Control.
This is only possible for vessels with L < 45 m. For
control and monitoring compare also Section 11h.
2. Full automation
Fishing vessels having machinery plants built,
equipped, surveyed and tested in compliance with the
requirements of the GL Rules in Chapter 4 Automa-
tion may be assigned the Class Notation AUT -
Automation.
This is only possible for vessels with L 24 m.
B. Documents for Approval
The following documents are to be submitted for ap-
proval in German or English language, in triplicate
and in good time so that they can be approved and
made available to the GL Surveyor at the start of
manufacture respectively at the installation of the
systems.
1. Newbuildings
1.1 For each of the systems described in the fol-
lowing:
general plan
wiring diagrams
power supply plan
description of functional relationships
general arrangement
functional description
1.2 The list of measuring points is to be submit-
ted for the monitoring system.
1.3 List of indications located on the navigating
bridge for the supervision of the machinery.
1.4 Safety programmes giving details of limit
values which result in shutdown or reduction are to be
submitted for the main propulsion plant and also for
other equipment where necessary.
1.5 GL reserve the right to demand for other
documents where those submitted are not adequate to
provide an evaluation of the system.
2. Modifications and additions
Major modifications which may affect the automation
system on a vessel which is under construction or at
sea are subject to approval. Documents are to be sub-
mitted in time before conversion.
C. Extent, Design and Construction of the
Equipment
1. Extent of automation
The extent of automation of the propulsion plant to-
gether with the auxiliary equipment necessary for
operation and the safety of the vessel is to be suffi-
cient for an unattended engine room operation during
normal sea service and normal manoeuvring.
The supervision of the machinery plant is done from
the navigating bridge.
2. Automatic restart or manual start possibility
from the bridge after a blackout is to be arranged for
all components which are necessary for restoring of
propulsion.
Exemptions may be granted for multi unit installations
where stop of one unit does not cause loss of propul-
sion.
3. Manual operation
Each important automatic and/or remote controlled
system shall also be capable of being operated manu-
ally.
Where auxiliary machinery is started up automatically
or by remote control, means shall be provided to se-
cure them against remote controlled or automatic start-
up, e.g. during repairs.
4. Pneumatic and hydraulic systems
Pneumatic and hydraulic systems for supplying non-
redundant units or more than one consumer have to be
redundant in design.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 12 Special Requirements for Automation Chapter 8
Page 121

C
D. Monitoring Equipment
1. Machinery alarm system
1.1 The machinery alarm system shall provide an
optical and an audible signal of unacceptable devia-
tions from operating figures.
1.2 The alarms shall be presented on the navigat-
ing bridge.
1.3 Collective alarms are allowed for stand-alone
systems except main propulsion machinery.
The individual alarms shall be recognisable at the
concerned system.
1.4 Alarm delays shall be kept within time limits
to prevent any risk to the monitored system in the
event of exceeding the limit value.
1.5 Optical signals shall be individually indicated
at a central position. The meaning of the individual
indications has to be clearly identifiable by text or
symbols.
1.6 If a fault is indicated, the optical signal shall
remain visible until the fault has been eliminated.
1.7 It shall be possible to distinguish between an
optical signal which has been acknowledged and one
that has not been acknowledged.
1.8 It shall be possible to acknowledge audible
signals.
1.9 The acknowledgement of an alarm shall not
inhibit an alarm which has been generated by new
causes.
1.10 Acknowledgement of optical alarms shall
only be possible where the fault has been indicated as
an individual signal and a sufficient overview of the
concerned process is been given.
1.11 Alarms have to be discernible under all oper-
ating conditions. Where this cannot be guaranteed, for
example due to the noise level, additional optical sig-
nals, e.g. flashing lights must be installed.
1.12 Transient faults which are self-correcting
without intervention shall be memorized and indicated
by optical signals which shall only disappear when the
alarm has been acknowledged.
1.13 Where an alarm has not been acknowledged
within a preset time, an alarm shall be released in the
accommodation and mess areas of the engineer offi-
cers.
1.14 Alarm systems shall be designed on the
closed-circuit or the monitored open-circuit principle.
Equivalent monitoring principles are permitted.
1.15 The alarm system is to be supplied from the
main power source with battery backup for at least 15
minutes.
The failure of the supply from the main power source
is to be alarmed.
1.16 The automatic suppression of alarm signals is
to be monitored for correct function or shall be of
redundant type.
1.17 The failure of the machinery alarm system
shall be alarmed.
1.18 Machinery alarm systems are subject to man-
datory type approval.
2. Fire detection and alarm systems for ma-
chinery spaces
2.1 An automatic fire detection and alarm system
with means of testing is to be provided which indi-
cates the initial stage of fire in machinery spaces.
The fire detection system has to be based on a self-
monitoring principle. Only ionisation or smoke detec-
tors are permitted.
2.2 The fire alarm shall be given visually and
audibly on the navigation bridge, in the machinery
spaces, and in the accommodation.
The alarm shall be clearly distinguishable from other
alarms.
2.3 Location and number of the detectors shall be
such as to provide ample cover for all the endangered
areas.
2.4 The fire detection system is to be fed auto-
matically from an emergency source of power if the
main source of power fails.
2.5 Fire detection and alarm systems are subject
to mandatory type approval.
3. Safety system
3.1 A safety system which is for all important
parameters independent of the alarm system, is to be
provided.
3.2 When abnormal operating conditions are
reached or serious malfunction occur which cannot be
dealt with in time by the crew members responsible
for the machinery, the safety system has to safeguard
machinery against critical conditions (automatic shut-
down).
Chapter 8
Page 122
Section 12 Special Requirements for Automation I - Part 1
GL 2007

D
3.3 Where safety systems are provided with over-
riding arrangements, these shall be safeguarded
against accidental operation. The actuation of overrid-
ing arrangements is to be indicated.
3.4 The monitored open-circuit principle is to be
applied to safety systems. Alternatively, the closed
circuit principle may be applied where it is demanded
by the provisions of national regulations (e.g. boiler
and oil-fired systems).
Equivalent monitoring principles are permitted.
3.5 The suitability and function of safety systems
shall be demonstrated in the given application.
3.6 Safety systems shall be so designed that po-
tential faults such as, for example, loss of voltage or a
broken wire shall not create a hazard to human life,
vessel or machinery.
3.7 Faults and also the tripping of the safety
system shall be signalled by an alarm.
3.8 Where faults which affect the operation of the
safety system cannot be identified, appropriate test
facilities shall be provided which shall be actuated
periodically.
3.9 The adjustment facilities for safety systems
shall be so designed that the last setting can be de-
tected.
3.10 Safety systems shall be designed preferably
using conventional technology (hard wired). Alterna-
tive technical solutions shall be agreed with GL.
3.11 On failure of the vessel's main power supply,
the power supply to a safety system has to be guaran-
teed as long as the supervised machinery is in opera-
tion.
3.12 Safety systems are subject to mandatory type
approval.
4. Call systems for crew members responsible
for the machinery
The officer of the watch on the bridge shall be able to
call the crew members.
This equipment may take the form of a two-way inter-
communication system. The system may consist of
portable or permanently installed equipment and shall
be capable of operation even if the main power supply
fails.
E. Remote Control from the Navigating
Bridge
1. Type of remote control
Single lever control is to be preferred for remote con-
trol systems. Lever movement shall be in accordance
to the desired course of the vessel. Commands entered
into the remote control system from the bridge shall be
recognizable at all control stations.
2. Control positions
It shall be ensured that control is only possible from
one control station at any time.
3. Transfer of control positions
Transfer of command from one control station to an-
other shall only be possible when the respective con-
trol levers are in the same position and when a signal
to accept the transfer is given from the selected control
station. A display at each control station shall indicate
which control station is in operation.
Change-over of control within the bridge area is not
required where the control levers at the control sta-
tions are mechanically or electrically connected to-
gether and with the control unit of the remote control
system so that they automatically adopt the same posi-
tion.
4. Equipment on the bridge
The following equipment is to be provided on the
bridge:
4.1 An indicator showing which control position
is in use.
4.2 Emergency shut-down:
Should the remote control fail, it must be possible to
shut-down the main engine from the navigating bridge
using a system independent of the remote control
system and its power supply. Alternatively, where the
installation is fitted with clutch couplings, means can
be provided for disengaging the shaft from the bridge.
The emergency shut-down systems are to be backed-
up by sufficient storage of control power and shall
work on the open-circuit principle, if electrical.
Measures are to be taken to ensure that the emergency
shut-down system cannot be operated inadvertently.
4.3 For direct propulsion (fixed propeller):
An indicator showing the rotation speed and direction
of rotation of the propeller shaft.
4.4 For controllable pitch propellers:
An indicator showing the rotation speed of the propel-
ler shaft and the pitch of the blades.
4.5 For installations equipped with reversing
gears:
Indicator showing the speed and direction of rotation
of the propeller shaft and the rpm of the main engine.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 12 Special Requirements for Automation Chapter 8
Page 123

E
4.6 For installations equipped with clutch cou-
plings:
An arrangement is to be provided for remote-con-
trolled engagement/disengagement of the couplings.
The engaged/disengaged position is to be indicated.
4.7 Additional necessary indications for the su-
pervision of the machinery plant may be decided case
by case.
5. Shaft-driven generators
On vessels with shaft-driven generators, the remote
control from the bridge shall be so designed that, with
the shaft-driven generators in operation, manoeuvres
can be performed without disturbing the main electri-
cal power supply system (e.g. by the use of constant
speed equipment with controllable pitch propellers or
by arranging for the power supply system to be auto-
matically transferred to an independent diesel genera-
tor).
F. Fire Protection / Fire Extinguishing
1. Fire protection
1.1 Fuel injection high pressure lines of diesel
engines are to be shielded or installed in such a way
that, should leakage occur, the leaking fuel can be
safely collected in a suitable drain tank.
1.2 Where tanks with flammable liquids are re-
plenished automatically or remote-controlled, means
are to be provided to prevent overflow spillage.
2. Fire extinguishing
2.1 A fixed fire extinguishing system according
to Section 8 is to be provided in the machinery spaces.
2.2 One main fire pump is to be provided with a
remote start arrangement from the navigating bridge.
G. Prevention against Engine Room Flooding
1. Valves in the vessel's shell plating which are
open during operation of the engines have to be acces-
sible and capable of operation from a safe height
above the floor plates.
2. Engine room bilges and drain wells are to be
large enough to accommodate normal drainage with-
out tripping a level alarm during the unattended pe-
riod.
3. In each machinery space bilge at least 2 high
level sensors are to be provided. In vessels with the
Class Notation K (Coastal Service) one level sensor
may be accepted.
H. Miscellaneous
1. Auxiliary boilers and thermal oil plants
The automatic controls of auxiliary boilers or thermal
oil plants shall be capable of maintaining the desired
values within the permissible limits of all possible
load variations, independent of the kind of heating.
Should the permissible operating values be exceeded,
individual alarm shall be given and the safety system
has to act automatically. The intervention of the safety
system is to be monitored.
2. Tests
After installation on board all automatic and remote
controls are to be tested during trials at the shipyard
and sea trials to the satisfaction of GL.
I. Alarm and Recording Points
The following Tables 12.1 12.3 summarize the mo-
nitored parameters and define the limits for an alarm.
For special installations, like two stroke engines or the
use of heavy fuels reference is made to GL Rules in
Chapter 4 Automation, Section 8.
Chapter 8
Page 124
Section 12 Special Requirements for Automation I - Part 1
GL 2007

I
Table 12.1 Alarms for propulsion machinery Main engines, gear and shafting
Monitored parameters:
L = low limit
H = high limit


L
i
m
i
t

Comments
Main engine

Engine overspeed H Stop by safety system
Lubricating oil pressure at engine inlet L Stop by safety system
Lubricating oil temperature at engine inlet H

Differential pressure across lubricating oil pres-
sure filter
H
Fault in automatic lubricating oil filter
Fuel oil pressure at engine inlet L
Fuel oil leakage from high pressure pipes
Differential pressure across fuel oil filters H
Fault in automatic fuel oil filter
Fuel level in closed stand pipe L Does not apply when automatic gas venting
Cylinder cooling water pressure or flow at engine L

Cylinder cooling water temperature at cylinder
outlet
H
Oil contamination of engine cooling water H
Where cooling water is used for heat exchangers
with fuel or thermal oil
Sea cooling water pressure L
Secondary fresh cooling water pressure L
Secondary fresh cooling water temperature H
Charge air temperature at charge air cooler inlet L
Charge air temperature at charge air cooler outlet L + H Or "water in charge air duct" instead of low limit
Start air pressure L
Control air pressure L
Exhaust gas temperature H
Oil mist concentration in crankcase H Approved alternative methods may be used
Gear
Lubricating oil temperature H 1500 kW and above
Lubricating oil pressure inlet L
Shafting
Temperature of stern tube bearing aft H For shaft diameter < 400 mm sensor may be lo-
cated in the vicinity of the aft bearing.
Temperature of line shaft bearings H 1500 kW and above
Thrust block lubricating oil temperature or thrust
block temperature
H
Controllable pitch propeller system, if applicable
Hydraulic oil pressure L May be displayed on bridge jointly with
"Failure of remote control system".
Hydraulic oil level in gravity tank or backing
pump pressure
L Stop by safety system
Couplings
Control power of couplings L If failure results in loss of manoeuvrability

I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 12 Special Requirements for Automation Chapter 8
Page 125

I
Table 12.2 Alarms for propulsion machinery Auxiliary machinery, tanks and miscellaneous items
Monitored parameters:
L = low limit
H = high limit


L
i
m
i
t

Comments
Diesel generators
Engine overspeed H Stop by safety system
Lubricating oil pressure at engine inlet L Stop by safety system
Lubricating oil temperature at engine inlet H
Fuel oil pressure at engine inlet L
Fuel oil leakage from high pressure pipes

Cylinder cooling water pressure or flow at engine
inlet
L

Cylinder cooling water temperature at cylinder
outlet
H
Oil mist concentration in crankcase H
Voltage L + H
Frequency L
Tripping of non-essential consumers
Failure of main source of electrical power
Applies only to propulsion plants with non-
electrically driven essential auxiliaries.
Purifying installations
Temperature of medium for separation L + H

Unintentional discharge of bowl/loss of water seal/
water in medium to be separated or equivalent

If local individual indication is provided, one
common alarm is sufficient in the central alarm
panel.
Steering gear
Failure of steering gear
Phase failure/overload
Failure of control system
Tank levels
Fuel service tanks L
Expansion tanks L
Sludge, leak oil and fuel oil overflow tanks H
Gravity oil tanks for stern tube L
Main engine lubricating oil sump trunks/tanks L
Steering gear hydraulic oil tank L
All tanks with automatic or remote controlled
filling are to be provided with additionally high
level alarms

Fire detection system
Fire alarm
Fault
Miscellaneous
Failure of remote control system
Failure of alarm systems
Failure of safety systems
Tripping of safety system
Automatic change-over of auxiliary machinery
Level of machinery space bilges/drain wells H
At least 2 sensors and detecting loops per ma-
chinery space
Fault in fire extinguishing system
Release of automatic fire extinguishing system

Chapter 8
Page 126
Section 12 Special Requirements for Automation I - Part 1
GL 2007

I
Table 12.3 Alarms for propulsion machinery of 750 kW and above Auxiliary steam boilers and thermal
oil plants
Monitored parameters:
L = low limit
H = high limit


L
i
m
i
t

Comments
Steam boilers
Tripping of safety system
Steam pressure L + H
Water level L + H
Failure of circulating pump H
Salinity of condensate H
Oily contamination of condensate H
Thermal oil systems
Tripping of safety system
Flow of thermal oil L
Temperature of thermal oil H At heater outlet
Level in expansion tank L + H
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 12 Special Requirements for Automation Chapter 8
Page 127

I


Section 13

Spare Parts
A. General
1. In order to be able to restore engine operation
and manoeuvring capacity to the vessel in the event of
damage at sea, spare parts for the main drive and the
essential equipment as defined herein and in the basic
Rules are to be carried on board every fishing vessel,
together with the necessary tools.
These requirements are considered to be complied
with if the range of spare parts corresponds to the
following Tables allowing for the extent of the in-
stalled systems and components in question at the time
of commissioning.
2. Depending on the design and arrangement of
the engine plant, the intended service and operation of
the fishing vessel, and also the manufacturers rec-
ommendations, a different volume of spare parts may
be agreed between the owner/operator and GL.
Where the volume of spare parts is based on special
arrangements between the vessel owner and GL, tech-
nical documentation is to be provided.
A list of the relevant spare parts is to be carried on
board.
3. In case of propulsion systems and operation-
ally essential machinery which are not included in the
following Tables, the requisite range of spare parts is
to be established in each individual case between
shipyard, vessel owner and GL.
4. Spare parts shall be properly stored and pro-
tected against vibration, humidity and damages.
Heavy spare parts should be kept near the point of
installation and means to remove them have to be
provided.
B. Volume of Spare Parts
The scope of spare parts has to be in accordance with
the following Tables and is classified according to
different ranges of service:
A = unlimited range of service and M
B = all other ranges of service
1. Main internal combustion engines
For internal combustion engines see Section 9b. The
volume of spare parts is defined in Table 13.1.
2. Auxiliary internal combustion engines
The range of spare parts required for auxiliary internal
combustion engines for essential equipment according
to Section 9a, H. is to be specified in accordance with
Table 13.2.
Note
Where an additional unit is provided for the same
purpose no spare parts are required.
3. Gears, thrust bearings
For gears and thrust bearings see Section 9c. The
volume of spare parts is defined in Table 13.3.
4. Starting equipment and air compressors
For starting equipment air compressors see Section 9b.
The volume of spare parts is defined in Table 13.4.
5. Spare parts for pumps
For pumps see Section 9d. The volume of spare parts
is defined in Table 13.5.
6. Spare parts for hydraulic systems
For hydraulic systems see especially Section 5 (wind-
lass, mooring winches, etc.), Section 6 (winches,
power blocks, stern gallows, etc.),. The volume of
spare parts is defined in Table 13.6.
7. Spare parts for refrigerating installations
For refrigerating systems see especially Section 10.
The volume of spare parts is defined in Table 13.7.
8. Other spare parts
Other spare parts for main and auxiliary engines and
essential equipment according to Section 9a, H. are
defined in Table 13.8.
9. Spare parts for electrical installations
For the spare parts of electrical installations see Sec-
tion 11a, L.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 13 Spare Parts Chapter 8
Page 131

B
Table 13.1 Spare parts for main internal combustion engines
1,

4,

5

Range of spare parts A B
Main bearings
Main bearings or shells for one bearing of each size and type fitted,
complete with shims, bolts and nuts
1
Bottom end bearings or shells of each size and type fitted, complete
with shims, bolts and nuts, for one cylinder
1 set
Connecting
rod bearings
Trunk piston type:
Piston pin complete with bush/bearing shells and securing rings for
one cylinder
1 set
Cylinder liner Cylinder liner, complete, with joint rings and gaskets 1
Cylinder cover with full equipment and ready for installation, in-
cluding gaskets
1
Cylinder cover
Cylinder cover bolts and nuts, for one cylinder set
Exhaust valves, with full equipment and ready for installation, for one
cylinder
1 set 1 set
Inlet valves, with full equipment and ready for installation, for one
cylinder
1 set 1 set
Starting air valve, with full equipment and ready for installation 1 1
Overpressure control valve, complete 1 1
Valves
Fuel injection valves of each type, ready for installation, for one en-
gine
2

1 set set
Hydraulic valve drive High-pressure pipe/hose of each type 1
Piston:
Trunk piston type
Piston of each type, ready for fitting, with piston rings, gudgeon pin,
connecting rod, bolts and nuts
1
Piston rings Piston rings for one cylinder 1 set
Cylinder lubricator Complete lubricator, largest type, with drive 1
Fuel injection pumps
Fuel injection pump complete or, when replacement of individual
components at sea is practicable, complete pump element with asso-
ciated valves, seals, springs, etc.
1
Fuel injection pipes
High pressure fuel pipe of each size and shape fitted, complete with
couplings
1
Exhaust-gas turbocharger: rotor complete with bearings, nozzle
rings and attached lube oil pump
1 set
Charge air system
3

Inlet and exhaust valves of each type for one cylinder 1 set
Gaskets and packings
Special gaskets and packings of each type for cylinder covers and
cylinder liners, for one cylinder
1 set
Exhaust gas system
(engine related)
Compensator of each type 1
1
In the case of multi-engine installations, the minimum required spares are only necessary for one engine.
2
a) Engines with one or two fuel-injection valve per cylinder: one set of fuel valves, complete
b) Engines with more than two fuel injection valves per cylinder: two valves complete per cylinder plus a corresponding number of
valve parts (excluding the valve bodies) which make it possible to form a complete spare set by re-using the operational parts of the
dismantled valves.
3
Spare parts for exhaust-gas turbocharger and auxiliary blower may be omitted if emergency operation of the main engine after failure is
demonstrably possible.
The requisite blanking and blocking arrangements for the emergency operation of the main engine are to be available on board.
4
The necessary tools and equipment for fitting the required spare parts have to be available on board.
5
Spare parts are to be replaced immediately as soon as they are "used up"


Chapter 8
Page 132
Section 13 Spare Parts I - Part 1
GL 2007

B
Table 13.2 Spare parts for auxiliary internal combustion engines driving electric generators for essential
equipment
Range of spare parts A
Main bearings
Bearings or shells for one bearing of each size and type fitted, complete with
shims, bolts and nuts
1
Exhaust valves, complete with casings, seats, springs and other fittings for one
cylinder
2 sets
Inlet valves, complete with casings, seats, springs and other fittings for one cylinder 1 set
Starting air valve, complete with casing, seat, springs and other fittings 1
Overpressure control valve, complete 1
Valves
Fuel valves of each size and type fitted, complete, with all fittings, for one engine set
Bottom end bearings or shells of each type, complete with all fittings 1
Connecting rod
bearings
Piston pin with bushing for one cylinder 1
Piston rings Piston rings, for one cylinder 1 set
Fuel injection pumps
Fuel injection pump complete or, when replacement of individual components at sea
is practicable, complete pump element with associated valves, seals, springs, etc.
1
Fuel injection pipes High pressure fuel pipe of each size and shape fitted, complete with couplings 1
Gaskets and packings
Special gaskets and packings of each size and type fitted, for cylinder covers and
cylinder liners for one cylinder
1 set
Notes
1. Where the number of generating sets (including stand-by units) is greater than required, no spares are required for the
auxiliary engines.
2. Where several internal combustion engines of the same type are installed for generator drive spare parts are required for
one engine only.
3. No spares are required for the engine driving emergency generator sets.

Table 13.3 Spare parts for gears and thrust bearings in propulsion plants
Range of spare parts A B
1 set
Wearing parts of main-engine driven pump supplying lubricating oil to gears or
one complete lubricating oil pump if no stand-by pump is available
1

Thrust pads for ahead side of thrust bearings 1 set 1 set

Table 13.4 Spare parts for air compressors
Range of spare parts A B
Piston rings of each type and size fitted for one piston 1 set 1 set
Suction and delivery valves complete of each size fitted in one unit set set
Note
Spare parts for refrigerant compressors have to be specially agreed.


Table 13.5 Spare parts for pumps
Range of spare parts A B
Valve with seats springs each size fitted 1 set 1 set
Piston rings each type and size for one piston 1 set 1 set
Piston pumps

Bearing of each type and size 1 1
Centrifugal pumps Rotor sealings of each type and size 1 1
Bearings of each type and size 1 1
Gear and screw type
pumps
Rotor sealings of each type and size 1 1
Note
Where, for a system served by a pump, a stand-by pump of sufficient capacity is available, the spare parts may be dispensed.

I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 13 Spare Parts Chapter 8
Page 133

B
Table 13.6 Spare parts for hydraulic systems
Range of spare parts A B
Pressure hoses and flexible pipes, at least one of each size 20 % 20 %
Seals, gaskets 1 set 1 set
Note
For seals, this requirement is applicable only to the extent that these parts can be changed with the means available on board.
Where the hydraulic system comprises two mutually independent sub-systems, spare parts need to be supplied for one sub-
system only.

Table 13.7 Spare parts for refrigerating installations
Range of spare parts A
Compressor piston with piston rod and crank bearing of each type, ready for fitting 1
Set of piston rings of each type for one piston 1
Set of suction and delivery valves of each type for one cylinder 1
Shaft seal of each type ready for fitting 1
Expansion valve of each type for the refrigerant circuit 1
Suction and delivery valve stem of each type, with cone and seat, for the main shutoff valves of the
compressors
1
Pressure switch of each type for suction and pressure lines 1
Pressure gauge of each type 1
Thermometers for the refrigerating machinery and the refrigerated spaces/tanks including at least two of
each type
5 %
Set of V-belts of each length, for one compressor 1
Oil sight glass of each type with gaskets 1
Fan impeller of each type 1
Complete set of all rupture discs 1
Detector for tracing leaks in the refrigerant system 1
Sensors for electrical remotely-operated thermometers, including at least one of each type 5 %
Note
According to the size of the refrigerating installation, a sufficient number of suitable packing, jointing and sealing materials;
a few length of the most commonly used pipes, screw couplings, flanges nuts and bolts and a device for topping up refrigerant
charge are to be carried on board.

Table 13.8 Other spare parts for main and auxiliary engines and also for essential equipment
Range of spare parts A B
Safety valve or one valve cone and spring of each type for pressure vessels 1 1
Hoses and compensators 20 % 20 %
Testing device for fuel injection valves 1 1


Chapter 8
Page 134
Section 13 Spare Parts I - Part 1
GL 2007

B